Operation & Service Manual: Trailer & Rail Refrigeration

Trailer & Rail Refrigeration
FUSIBLE CONDENSER
PLUG
RECEIVER
SV1 N/O
BYPASS
CHECK
VALVE
FILTER-DRIER
SV4
N/C
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

For The
X4 7300 & X4 7500

Trailer and Rail Refrigeration Units
62-11637 Rev B
OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL
For The
X4 7300 & X4 7500

Trailer and Rail Refrigeration Units
© Carrier Corporation, 2014 Printed in U. S. A. September 2014

TABLE OF CONTENTS
PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
1.2 SPECIFIC WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTICE STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3 SAFETY DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–6
UNIT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 CONDENSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.3.1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.3.2 Engine Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.3.3 Engine Controls: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
a. Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
b. Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
c. Rack Position Sensor (RPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
d. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
e. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.3.4 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
a. Alternator Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
b. Voltage Regulator Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.3.5 Power Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.3.6 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.3.7 Unloaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
a. Major Working Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
b. Unloaded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
c. Loaded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2.3.8 Compressor Switches, Transducers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
a. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer (CDP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
b. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
c. High Pressure Switch (HPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
d. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
e. Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2.3.9 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.10 Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.11 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.12 Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.13 Filter-Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.14 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.15 AutoFresh Air Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.4 EVAPORATOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.4.1 Evaporator Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.4.2 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.4.3 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
i 62-11637
2.4.4 Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
a. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
b. Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
c. Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
d. Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
e. Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.1 Multiple Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.2 Automatic Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.3 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.4 Component Description And Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
a. Power Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
b. Main Microprocessor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
c. SVM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
d. Microprocessor Status LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
e. Engine Control Unit (ENCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
f. Display Module (DM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–12
k. Display Module Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.6 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.6.1 Light Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.6.2 Remote Switch(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.6.3 Remote Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.6.4 Fuel Level Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.6.5 Fuel Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.6.6 Electric Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.6.7 Remote Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.7 ENGINE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.8 COMPRESSOR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–15
2.9 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA ............................................. 2–16
2.10 COMPONENT RESISTANCE & CURRENT DRAW ................................. 2–16
2.11 SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.12 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT DURING COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.13 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT - HEATING AND DEFROSTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.1 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1
3.2 DISPLAY SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.3 STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.4 INTELLISET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.5 PRETRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.6 CHANGING SETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.7 START-STOP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–9
3.8 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.9 DATA RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.9.1 Control System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.9.2 Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.9.3 Data Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.9.4 DataLink Data Recorder Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.10 MANUAL DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.11 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
62-11637 ii
3.12 ADVANCED USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
3.13 UNIT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.14 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3.15 VIEW HOUR METERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.16 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.17 SLEEP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3.18 STOPPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3.19 OPTION - DATATRAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3.20 REMOTE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
ENGINE AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION - ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.3 ENGINE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.3.1 Engine Start-Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.3.2 Transition To High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.4 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.1 Pull Down/Pull-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.2 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.3 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.4 UltraFresh Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
a. Cool Pulsed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
b. Null Pulsed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
c. Heat Pulsed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
d. UltraFresh 3 CSMV/EVXV control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.4.5 UltraFreeze Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.4.6 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.4.7 Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.5.1 Temperature Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.5.2 Perishable And Frozen Setpoint Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.6.1 Start-Stop Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.6.2 Stop Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.6.3 Re-Start Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.6.4 Start-Stop Operating Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.7 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.8 AUTOFRESH AIR EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.9 DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.1 Defrost Initiation And Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.2 Normal Defrost Operation (Ambient Air Temperature less than 80°F (26.7°C) . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.3 Normal Defrost Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.4 Normal Defrost Termination Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.5 High Ambient Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.9.6 High Ambient Defrost Termination Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.10 USER SELECTED OVERRIDE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.10.1 FreshProtectTM Supply Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.10.2 Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.10.3 ProductShield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.10.4 Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
iii 62-11637
4.11 PREPROGRAMMED SOFTWARE OVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.11.1 Cargo Protect Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.11.2 Engine Speed Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.11.3 Unloader Control Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.11.4 CSMV Control Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.1 INTERFACE METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2 TECHNICIAN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Technician Hour Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2.2 Inactive Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.3 Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.2.4 Component Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.2.5 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.3 USB MEMORY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.3.1 Data Transfer USB Memory Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.3.2 PC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.3.3 Downloading Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.3.4 Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.3.5 Transferring Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.4 TRU-TECH & TRU-VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.1 TRU-Tech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.2 TRU–View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.3 Connecting Computer and Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.5 MAIN MICROPROCESSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.5.1 Pre-Replacement Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.2 Main Microprocessor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.3 Main Microprocessor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.4 Configurations Via Display Mounted Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.5 Functional Parameters Via Display Mounted Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.6 DataLink Data recorder Via TRU-Tech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.7 System Final Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
6.1 MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6–1
ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1
7.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
00011 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
00015 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
00016 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
00017 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
00019 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
00020 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
00021 TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
62-11637 iv
00022 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
00027 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
00028 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
00029 CHECK HEAT CYCLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
00030 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
00034 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
00035 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
00036 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
00037 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
00038 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
00039 CHECK ENGINE RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
00040 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
00041 ENGINE STALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
00051 ALTERNATOR NOT CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
00054 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
00055 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
00056 CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
00057 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 1 (REMS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
00059 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) NOT RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
00060 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) TIME WRONG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
00061 DOOR OPEN (DS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
00067 SENSOR 1 INPUT VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
00072 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
00080 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
00081 CHECK FHR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
00082 CHECK STARTER SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
00084 CHECK REMOTE ALARM LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
00090 CHK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
00093 CHECK STARTUP BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
00097 CHECK SV2 CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
00127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
00132 CHECK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
00133 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
00134 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
v 62-11637
P00141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
P00143 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
P00144 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
P00148 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
P00151 CHECK GLOW CIRCUIT (This applies to the engine preheater = EPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
P00152 CHECK FUEL SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
P00157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
P00158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
P00160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
P00161 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
P00162 CHECK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54
P00165 CANNOT PUMP DOWN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
P00174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
P00175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56
P00177 CHECK EXV (EVXV) SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56
P00178 CHECK UL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–57
P00180 CHECK SUCTION MOD VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–58
P00181 CHECK SV4 VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–59
P00182 CHECK SV1 VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–59
P00186 CHECK EVAP OUTLET TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–59
P00191 CHECK UL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60
P00194 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61
P00196 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62
P00198 LOW DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–63
P00200 CHECK UL1 CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–64
P00202 HIGH SIDE LEAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65
P00203 CHK DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65
P00204 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66
P00205 CHK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67
00223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67
00225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68
00226 SERVICE SOON-PM #1 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68
00232 SETPOINT ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71
00233 MODEL # ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71
00237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72
00238 CONFIGURATIONS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–73
00245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–74
62-11637 vi
00246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–74
00248 CONFIG MODE / HP2 ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
00250 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH ALL MODULES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
00251 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH INPUT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
00252 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH OUTPUT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
00253 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH SUCTION MODULATION VALVE MODULE (SVM) 7–75
00254 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH DISPLAY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
00255 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
02000 UPDATE SOFTWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
03001 ENGINE LOAD CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–77
05016 CHECK REMOTE AMBER LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–80
05017 CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–81
20100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–82
21100 NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83
22100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO INPBD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83
22101 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE LOW INP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–84
22102 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE HIGH INP1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–85
23100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO OUTPBD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–85
25100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO STP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–86
26100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–87
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.3 PRE-TRIP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8.4 EXTERNAL SURFACE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
8.4.1 AutoFresh Fresh Air Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
8.4.2 Grille Insert Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
8.4.3 Surround Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
8.4.4 Door Latch Maintenance and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
8.4.5 Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–5
8.5 ENGINE AND ENGINE RELATED SYSTEMS SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
8.5.1 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
8.5.2 Priming the Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
8.5.3 Mechanical Fuel Pump Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–7
8.5.4 Electric Fuel Pump Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
8.5.5 Spin–On Fuel Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
8.5.6 Suction Side Fuel Filter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–8
8.5.7 Fuel Level Sensor (FLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–9
8.5.8 Fuel Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10
8.5.9 Engine Oil And Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–10
8.5.10 Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–11
8.5.11 Engine Preheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–11
8.5.12 Engine Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12
8.5.13 Rack Position Sensor (RPS) Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12
8.5.14 Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–12
vii 62-11637
8.5.15 Water Pump/Alternator Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–13
8.5.16 Crankcase Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
8.6 POWER TRAIN SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
8.6.1 Lower Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–16
8.6.2 Upper Belt Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18
8.6.3 Condenser Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18
8.6.4 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–19
8.6.5 Evaporator Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–19
8.6.6 Fanshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–20
8.6.7 Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–20
8.7 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
8.7.1 Refrigerant System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
8.7.2 Servicing the Refrigerant Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
8.7.3 Leak Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–24
8.7.4 Evacuation and Dehydration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–26
8.8 COMPRESSOR AND UNLOADER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–28
8.8.1 Repair or Replacement Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–28
8.8.2 Removal and Replacement of Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–28
8.8.3 Cylinder Head and Valve Plate Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–29
8.8.4 Oil Pump and Bearing Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–31
8.8.5 Compressor Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–32
8.8.6 Unloaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–33
8.9 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM COMPONENT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–34
8.9.1 Evaporator Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–34
8.9.2 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–35
8.9.3 Filter-Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–36
8.9.4 Replacing Receiver Sight Glass Or Fusible Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–36
8.9.5 Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–37
8.9.6 Liquid Line (SV2)/Hot Gas (SV4) Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–38
8.9.7 Stepper Test Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–39
8.9.8 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–39
8.9.9 Evaporator Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–40
8.9.10 Replacing Check Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
8.9.11 High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
8.9.12 Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–43
8.9.13 Defrost Air Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–43
8.10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–44
8.10.1 Main Microprocessor Module (MM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–44
8.10.2 Power Control Module (PCM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–44
8.10.3 Stepper Valve Module (SVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–45
8.10.4 Display Module (DM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–45
8.10.5 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–45
8.10.6 Light Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–46
8.10.7 Sensor Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–46
62-11637 viii
UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
9.1 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
9.1.1 Engine Will Not Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
9.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.5 Malfunction in the Engine Starting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
9.2 ALTERNATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
9.3 REFRIGERATION / TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.1 Unit Will Not Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.2 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.3 System Will Not Pump Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.4 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.6 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.7 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.8 Defrost Cycle Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.9 Abnormal Pressure Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
9.3.10 Abnormal Pressure Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
9.3.11 Abnormal Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.12 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.13 Expansion Valve (EVXV) Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.14 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.15 Solenoid Valve Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
WIRING ............................................................................ 10–1
10.1 HARNESS CONNECTOR WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–1
10.2 SPLICE POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
10.3 WIRING SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–5
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1
ix 62-11637
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 2.1 Front View - Refrigeration System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2

Figure 2.2 Front View - Engine, Control System & AutoFresh Components ......................... 2–3
Figure 2.3 Evaporator Section - Grille Removed .............................................. 2–4
Figure 2.4 Power Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
Figure 2.5 Compressor Cylinder Head Unloaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–7
Figure 2.6 Compressor Cylinder Head Loaded ............................................... 2–8
Figure 2.7 Power Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–11
Figure 2.8 Display Module .............................................................. 2–12
Figure 2.9 Light Bar ................................................................... 2–13
Figure 2.10 Refrigeration Circuit Cooling .................................................. 2–18
Figure 2.11 Refrigeration Circuit - Heat and Defrost .......................................... 2–19
Figure 4.1 Auto Start Sequence ........................................................... 4–2
Figure 4.2 Start-Stop Default Operating Sequence ............................................ 4–7
Figure 4.3 Continuous Default Operating Sequence ........................................... 4–8
Figure 4.4 Range Lock Settings - Non Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
Figure 4.5 Range Lock Settings - Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–11
Figure 5.1 Technician Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
Figure 5.2 Technician Hour Meters ........................................................ 5–2
Figure 5.3 Inactive Alarms ............................................................... 5–3
Figure 5.4 Setting Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
Figure 5.5 Component Test Mode ......................................................... 5–6
Figure 5.6 Creating a Data Transfer USB Memory Device ...................................... 5–8
Figure 5.7 PC Mode .................................................................... 5–9
Figure 5.8 Downloading Data Files ....................................................... 5–10
Figure 5.9 Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
Figure 5.10 Transferring Configuration Files ................................................ 5–12
Figure 5.11 TRU-Tech/TRU-View Connection ............................................... 5–14
Figure 8.1 Automatic Fresh Air Exchange ................................................... 8–4
Figure 8.2 Grille Insert Removal and Door Latch Maintenance ................................... 8–4
Figure 8.3 Surround Removal ............................................................ 8–5
Figure 8.4 Door Latch Cable Removal ...................................................... 8–5
Figure 8.5 Fuel System Diagram .......................................................... 8–6
Figure 8.6 Fuel Bleed Components ........................................................ 8–7
Figure 8.7 Mechanical Fuel Pump ......................................................... 8–7
Figure 8.8 Electric Fuel Pump ............................................................ 8–8
Figure 8.9 Suction Side Fuel Filter ......................................................... 8–8
Figure 8.10 Fuel Level Sensor ............................................................ 8–9
Figure 8.11 Engine Oil Level ............................................................ 8–10
Figure 8.12 Oil Drain Tool .............................................................. 8–10
Figure 8.13 Engine Preheater ........................................................... 8–11
Figure 8.14 Engine Control System Components ............................................ 8–12
Figure 8.15 Radiator Assembly .......................................................... 8–14
xi 62-11637
Figure 8.16 Water Pump/Alternator Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–14
Figure 8.17 Engine Crankcase Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
Figure 8.18 Lower Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
Figure 8.19 Upper Power Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–17
Figure 8.20 Surround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18
Figure 8.21 Upper Frame Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–18
Figure 8.22 Refrigerant System Service Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
Figure 8.23 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–29
Figure 8.24 Cylinder Head & Valve Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–30
Figure 8.25 Checking Suction Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–31
Figure 8.26 Oil Pump & Bearing Head Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–31
Figure 8.27 Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–31
Figure 8.28 Oil Level in Sight Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–32
Figure 8.29 Unloader Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–33
Figure 8.30 Condenser/Radiator Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–36
Figure 8.31 Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–37
Figure 8.32 SV-2 and SV-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–38
Figure 8.33 Stepper Test Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–39
Figure 8.34 Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–39
Figure 8.35 CSMV Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–39
Figure 8.36 Evaporator Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–40
Figure 8.37 Evaporator Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–41
Figure 8.38 Check Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
Figure 8.39 Typical Setup for Testing Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–42
Figure 8.40 Defrost Air Switch Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–43
Figure 8.41 Power Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–44
Figure 8.42 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–46
Figure 8.43 Light Bar Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–46
62-11637 xii
LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page
Table 2–1 Model Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Table 2–2 Additional Support Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
Table 3–1 Unit Data ................................................................... 3–17
Table 3–2 Functional Parameters ........................................................ 3–20
Table 4–1 Engine Preheat Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
Table 4–2 Continuous Operation Modes .................................................... 4–8
Table 5–1 Configuration Settings ......................................................... 5–17
Table 6–1 MessageCenter Messages ...................................................... 6–1
Table 8–1 Maintenance Schedule ......................................................... 8–2
Table 8–2 EVXV Connections ........................................................... 8–41
Table 8–3 Sensor Resistance ........................................................... 8–47
Table 8–4 Sensor Resistance (CDT) ...................................................... 8–48
Table 8–5 Temperature Pressure Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–49
xiii 62-11637
SECTION 1 - SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 1–1

1.2 SPECIFIC WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTICE STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–2
1.3 SAFETY DECALS ............................................................ 1–6
62-11637
SECTION 1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
NOTICE
! WARNING Under no circumstances should a techni-
cian electrically probe the modules at any
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS: Installation
point, other than the connector terminals
and servicing of refrigeration equipment
where the harness attaches. Module com-
can be hazardous due to system pres-
ponents operate at different voltage lev-
sures, rotating elements and electrical
els and at extremely low current levels.
components. Only trained and qualified
Improper use of voltmeters, jumper
service personnel should install, repair or
wires, continuity testers, etc. could per-
service refrigeration equipment. When
manently damage the module.
working on refrigeration equipment,
observe precautions in all literature Automatic Start-Stop
including this manual, the equipment
Your refrigeration unit is equipped with auto-start in
tags and labels attached to the unit, and
both Start-Stop and Continuous Operation. The unit
other safety precautions that may apply.
may start at any time the START/RUN-OFF switch
Follow safe work practices and utilize the
(SROS) is in the START/RUN position. A buzzer will
appropriate protective equipment at all
sound for 5 seconds before the unit is started. When
times.
performing any check of the refrigeration unit (e.g.,
Your Carrier Transicold refrigeration unit has been checking the belt, checking the oil, checking the electri-
designed with the safety of the operator in mind. During cal connections), make certain that the START/RUN-
normal operation, all moving parts are fully enclosed to OFF switch is in the OFF position.
help prevent injury. During all pre-trip inspections, daily Engine Coolant
inspections, and problem troubleshooting, you may be
The engine is equipped with a pressurized cooling sys-
exposed to moving parts. Please stay clear of all mov-
tem including a pressurized coolant bottle. Under nor-
ing parts when the unit is in operation and when the
mal operating conditions, the coolant in the engine and
START/RUN-OFF switch (SROS) is in the START/
radiator is under high pressure and is very hot. Contact
RUN position.
with hot coolant can cause severe burns. Do not
remove the cap from a hot coolant system. If the cap
NOTICE must be removed, cover it with a rag and remove very
slowly in order to release the pressure without spray.
Electronic modules MUST be handled Refrigerants
with care to prevent accidental damage
or degradation from electrical static dis- The refrigerant contained in the refrigeration system of
charge (ESD), contamination or abuse. this unit can cause frostbite, severe burns, or blindness
Before touching a module, touch your when in direct contact with the skin or eyes. For this
body and/or conductive tool being used reason (and because of legislation regarding the han-
to the frame to discharge ESD safely. All dling of refrigerants) we recommend that you contact
electronics should be handled carefully your nearest Carrier Transicold authorized repair facil-
and only held by edges of any exposed ity whenever service of the refrigerant system is
board. Care should be taken when insert- required.
ing/extracting connectors and compo- Battery
nents to avoid exerting excessive stress This unit may be equipped with a lead-acid type bat-
on the board which could fracture small tery. The battery normally vents small amounts of flam-
components nearby, resulting in future mable hydrogen gas. Do not smoke when checking the
failure of circuit. battery. A battery explosion can cause serious physical
harm and/or blindness.
1–1 62-11637
1.2 SPECIFIC WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTICE
STATEMENTS
! WARNING
To help identify the label hazards on the unit and
explain the level of awareness each one carries, an Under no circumstances should ether or
explanation is given with the appropriate conse- any other starting aids be used to start
the engine.
quences:
! DANGER ! WARNING
DANGER − warns against an immediate hazard which Do not toggle the START/RUN - OFF
WILL result in severe personal injury or death. switch out of the OFF position when in
PC Mode or the unit will start.
! WARNING ! WARNING
WARNING − warns against hazards or unsafe condi- Do not remove the cap from a hot coolant
tions which COULD result in severe personal injury or system; if the cap must be removed, do
death. so very slowly in order to release the
pressure without spray.
! CAUTION
CAUTION - warns against potential hazard or unsafe
! WARNING
practices which could result in minor personal injury. When performing service or maintenance
procedures: ensure any two way commu-
nication is disabled in accordance with
NOTICE the manufacturer’s instruction, ensure
the START/RUN-OFF switch is in OFF
NOTICE − warns against potential product or property position and, whenever practical, discon-
damage. nect the negative battery connection.
The following statements are specifically applicable to

this refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this ! WARNING
manual. These recommended precautions must be
Beware of moving belt and belt driven
understood and applied during operation and mainte-
components.
nance of the equipment covered herein.
! WARNING ! WARNING
When working with belts, beware of
APX control system equipped units may
pinch points.
start automatically at any time the
START/ RUN-OFF switch (SROS) is in the
START/ RUN position. Also, the unit may
be fitted with two way communication
! WARNING
equipment that will allow starting of the Never use air or gases containing oxygen
unit from a remote location even though for leak testing or operating refrigerant
the switch is in the OFF position. compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air
or gases containing oxygen can lead to
explosion.
! WARNING
When performing service or maintenance ! WARNING
procedures: ensure any two way commu-
Inspect battery cables for signs of wear,
nication is disabled in accordance with abrasion or damage at every pre-trip
the manufacturer’s instruction, ensure inspection and replace if necessary. Also
the START/RUN-OFF switch is in OFF check battery cable routing to ensure
position and, whenever practical, discon- that clamps are secure and that cables
nect the negative battery connection. are not pinched or chafing against any
components.
62-11637 1–2
! WARNING ! WARNING
Use the required protective eye wear and Only a refrigerant cylinder containing
clothing when working with solvents. R404A should be connected to this refrig-
eration unit in order to pressurize the
system. However, dry nitrogen may be
! WARNING used to increase pressure. Any other gas
or vapor will contaminate the system and
Never use air or gases containing oxygen
require additional removal and evacua-
for leak testing or operating refrigerant
tion.
compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air
or gases containing oxygen can lead to
explosion.
! CAUTION
! WARNING Observe proper polarity when installing
battery. Negative battery terminal must
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a be grounded. Reverse polarity will
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is destroy the rectifier diodes in alternator.
approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do As a precautionary measure, disconnect
not use oxygen in or near a refrigerant the negative and then the positive battery
system as an explosion may occur. (Fig- terminal when charging battery in unit.
ure 8.39).
! CAUTION
! WARNING
Service Mode MUST be used whenever
Do not unscrew service valve mounting removing refrigerant charge, refrigerant
capscrews all the way before breaking leak checking or evacuating.
seal. Entrapped pressure could result in
injury.
! CAUTION
! WARNING Disconnect batteries before doing any
electrical welding on unit or chassis to
Do not unscrew replacement compressor
lifting eyelet/blankoff plate mounting cap- which unit is attached (trailer, container,
screws all the way before breaking seal. rail car, metal building, etc).
Entrapped pressure could result in injury.
NOTICE
! WARNING Under no circumstances should anyone
Do not unscrew cylinder head mounting attempt to repair sealed module internal
capscrews all the way before breaking components. Should a problem develop
seal. Entrapped pressure could result in with these components, contact your
injury. nearest Carrier Transicold dealer for
replacement.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew enclosing tube nut all the NOTICE
way before breaking seal. Entrapped Use Texaco Havoline extended life cool-
pressure could result in injury. ant or any other extended life coolant
which is Dexcool approved and has 5/150
(5 years / 150,000 miles) on the label.
! WARNING
Do not unscrew unloader valve body
mounting bolts all the way before break-
ing seal. Entrapped pressure could result
in injury.
1–3 62-11637
NOTICE NOTICE
Technician Mode should be canceled Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of
when work is complete. If Technician inert gas brazing procedures is manda-
Mode is not canceled, Technician Mode tory for all Carrier Transicold refrigera-
will be available for 60 minutes after the tion units; otherwise compressor failure
last key press without requiring a code, will occur. For more information Refer to
even after placing the SROS in the OFF Technical Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert
and then back in the RUN/STOP position. Gas Brazing.
NOTICE NOTICE
Under no circumstances should a techni- Running the engine for an extended
cian electrically probe the modules at any period of time with the manual plunger up
point, other than the connector terminals can cause a priming pump failure.
ponents operate at different voltage lev-
els and at extremely low current levels. NOTICE
Improper use of voltmeters, jumper
wires, continuity testers, etc. could per- Torque fuel level sensor mounting
manently damage the module. screws to 15 to 18 inch/lbs (1.7 to 2.0
Nm). DO NOT over tighten, as little as 20
inch/pounds (2.3 Nm) will damage the
NOTICE sensor.
Electronic modules MUST be handled

with care to prevent accidental damage
or degradation from electrical static dis-
NOTICE
charge (ESD), contamination or abuse. When changing oil filter, the new filter
Before touching a module, touch your should be primed (partially filled) with
body and/or conductive tool being used clean oil if possible. If the filter is not
to the frame to discharge ESD safely. All primed, the engine may operate for a
electronics should be handled carefully period with no oil supplied to the bear-
and only held by edges of any exposed ings.
board. Care should be taken when insert-
ing/extracting connectors and compo-
nents to avoid exerting excessive stress
on the board which could fracture small NOTICE
components nearby, resulting in future Use only ethylene glycol anti-freeze (with
failure of circuit. inhibitors) in system as glycol by itself
will damage the cooling system. Always
add pre-mixed 50/50 anti-freeze and water
NOTICE to radiator / engine. Never exceed more
than a 60% concentration of anti-freeze.
Ensure that the clock you are using is
Use a low silicate anti-freeze meeting GM
accurate. Also, some customers are
located in different time zones from the specifications GM 6038M for standard life
repair location. If you know the owners coolant or use Texaco Havoline extended
desired location time, enter that time. If life coolant or any other extended life
you don’t, enter the current time at your coolant which is Dexcool approved and
location. has 5/150 (5 years / 150,000 miles) on the
label.
NOTICE
NOTICE
DO NOT leave the air intake circuit ener-
gized for the full 5 minutes if full amper- NEVER POUR COLD WATER INTO A HOT
age is shown, as the intake air heater ENGINE, however hot water can always
element life will be greatly shortened. be added to a cold engine.
62-11637 1–4
NOTICE NOTICE
Do not vapor charge R404A. Only liquid Extreme care must be taken to ensure the
charging through the liquid line service hose is immersed in the oil at all times.
valve is acceptable. Otherwise air and moisture will be drawn
into the compressor.
NOTICE
Ensure that thrust washer does not fall
NOTICE
off dowel pins while installing oil pump. Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of
inert gas brazing procedures is manda-
tory for all Carrier Transicold refrigera-
NOTICE tion units; otherwise compressor failure
will occur. For more information Refer to
An overcharge of oil will reduce system Technical Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert
capacity and possibly cause internal Gas Brazing.
compressor damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE When a module is replaced, software
should be upgraded before switching the
Use only Carrier Transicold approved unit on. This will ensure software com-
Polyol Ester Oil (POE). Buy quantities of patibility of all modules.
one gallon or less. When using this
hygroscopic oil, immediately reseal. Do
not leave container of oil open or contam- NOTICE
ination will occur.
Do not bend the copper tubing on the
condenser coil when installing the new
condenser. Bend the unit tubing if tubes
do not align correctly.
1–5 62-11637
1.3 SAFETY DECALS
62-11637 1–6
62-03958
1–7 62-11637
62-11637 1–8
1–9 62-11637
SECTION 2 - UNIT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1
2.3 CONDENSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.3.1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.3.2 Engine Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.3.3 Engine Controls: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–5
2.3.4 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.3.5 Power Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.3.6 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.3.7 Unloaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–6
2.3.8 Compressor Switches, Transducers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–8
2.3.9 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.10 Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.11 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.12 Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.13 Filter-Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.14 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.3.15 AutoFresh Air Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.4 EVAPORATOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.4.1 Evaporator Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.4.2 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–9
2.4.3 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.4.4 Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.1 Multiple Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.2 Automatic Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.3 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.5.4 Component Description And Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–10
2.6 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.6.1 Light Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.6.2 Remote Switch(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–13
2.6.3 Remote Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.6.4 Fuel Level Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.6.5 Fuel Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.6.6 Electric Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.6.7 Remote Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–14
2.7 ENGINE DATA ............................................................. 2–15
2.8 COMPRESSOR DATA ....................................................... 2–15
2.9 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA ............................................. 2–16
2.10 COMPONENT RESISTANCE & CURRENT DRAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.11 SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–16
2.12 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT DURING COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–17
2.13 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT - HEATING AND DEFROSTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–19
62-11637
SECTION 2
UNIT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION The control system includes a manual switch, control
modules, fuses, and associated wiring. The unit may
be equipped with an optional remote light bar which
! WARNING mounts separately on the front outside corner of the
compartment.
start automatically at any time the Temperature control is provided by the Carrier Transi-
START/ RUN-OFF switch (SROS) is in the cold APX TM control system (Refer to Section 2.5).
START/ RUN position. Also, the unit may Once the system is set at the desired temperature, the
be fitted with two way communication unit will operate automatically to maintain the desired
equipment that will allow starting of the temperature within very close limits. The control sys-
unit from a remote location even though tem automatically selects high and low speed cooling
the switch is in the OFF position. or high and low speed heating as necessary to main-
tain the desired temperature within the refrigerated
compartment.
! WARNING Standard equipment includes an auto start-stop fea-
ture. This feature provides automatic cycling of the die-
When performing service or maintenance sel engine, which in turn offers an energy efficient
procedures: ensure any two way commu- alternative to continuous operation of the engine with
nication is disabled in accordance with control of temperature by alternate cooling and heating
the manufacturer’s instruction, ensure of the supply air (evaporator outlet air).
the START/RUN-OFF switch is in OFF
position and, whenever practical, discon- The unit may be equipped with the AutoFresh TM Air
nect the negative battery connection. Exchange which controls air quality and humidity for
fresh produce.
This manual contains operating data, electrical data The unit can be described as having three major sec-
and service instructions for the refrigeration units listed tions:
in Table 2–1.
• the condensing section (Figure 2.1 & Figure
Additional support manuals are listed in Table 2–2. 2.2), which includes the unidrive and power train
The unit model/serial number plate is located inside the (Figure 2.2).
unit on the frame as shown in Figure 2.1.
• the evaporator section (Figure 2.3).
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION • the control system (Items 10, 11, 15, 27 & 28;
Figure 2.2 & Figure 2.7).
The units described in this manual are one piece, self
contained, fully charged, pre-wired, refrigeration/heat-
ing “nosemount” diesel powered units. The units are
used on insulated refrigerated compartments to main-
tain cargo temperatures within very close limits.
Table 2–1 Model Chart
Model R-404A Compressor Engine Engine Speed
X4 7300 NDW136 15 lb; 6.80 kg High 1800
05G 41cfm V2203L-DI-EF01e
X4 7500 NDW236 16 lb; 7.26 kg Low 1350
Table 2–2 Additional Support Manuals

Manual Number Type of Manual
62-11369 Parts Look Up System (PLUS)
62-11644 Operator’s Manual
62-11643 Easy To Run
62-11052 05G Compressor Workshop Manual
2–1 62-11637
Figure 2.1 Front View - Refrigeration System Components
4 3 2 1
7
8
MOUNT ATT
AS SHOWN
9
PARTITION
10
11
12
13
14
15
16,17
18,19
20
21 22 23 24 25
1. Condenser Coil & Subcooler 14. Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST)
2. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) 15. Discharge Service Valve & Strainer
3. Condenser Fan 16. High Pressure Switch (HPS - Located in the tee)
4. Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve 17. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer
(SV1) (CDP - Located in the elbow)
5. Defrost Air Switch (DAS) 18. Front Unloader Valve (UL1 - on front head)
6. Radiator 19. Rear Unloader Valve (UL2 - on back head)
7. Receiver 20. Compressor
8. Receiver Sight Glasses 21. Compressor Sight Glass
9. Filter-Drier 22. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
10. Liquid Line Service Valve (CDT)
11. Hot Gas Solenoid Valve (SV4) 23. Suction Service Valve & Strainer
12. Liquid Line Solenoid Valve (SV2) 24. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP)
13. Heat Exchanger 25. Model/Serial Number Nameplate
-----
62-11637 2–2
Figure 2.2 Front View - Engine, Control System & AutoFresh Components
2
33
32
3
4
31 5
30 6
7
29
28 8
9
27 10
11
12
24 22 20 18 16 14
26 25 23 21 19 17 15 13
1. Coolant Bottle 19. Engine Oil Fill & Dipstick

2. Clutch (CLH) 20. Rack Position Sensor (RPS)
3. Fuel Filter/Heater (FH) or Fuel Head Assembly 21. Engine Oil Drain
4. Exhaust 22. Starter (SS,SSC,SM)
5. Manual Plunger 23. Engine Preheater (EPH)
6. Bleed Valve 24. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)
7. Alternator (ALT) (Behind Engine Preheater)
8. Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA) 25. Intake Air Temperature Sensor
9. Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN) (IAT − If Equipped)
10. Stepper Valve Module (SVM) 26. Battery (BTY)
11. Display Module (DM) 27. Power Control Module (PCM - See Figure 2−7)
12. START/RUN-OFF Switch (SROS) 28. Main Microprocessor Module (MM)
13. USB Interface Port 29. Air Cleaner, Air Cleaner Service Indicator &
Manifold Absolute Pressure Transducer
14. Suction Side Filter/Heater (If Equipped) (MAP − If Equipped)
15. Engine Control Unit (ENCU) 30. Lower Belt and Idler
16. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS) 31. Gearbox & Upper Belt
17. Engine Oil Filter 32. AutoFresh Air Exchange
18. Mechanical Fuel Pump 33. AutoFresh Air Exchange Solenoid (AFAS)
-----
2–3 62-11637
Figure 2.3 Evaporator Section - Grille Removed
1 2 3 5
4
15
14 13 12 11 6
10 9 8 7
MOUNT DTT AS SHOWN
TUBE SHEET
1. Evaporator Air Nozzle 9. Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)

2. Evaporator Fan 10. Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT)
3. Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) 11. Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT)
4. Low Pressure Defrost Air Switch Tubing (Clear) 12. EVXV Inlet Strainer Location
5. High Pressure Defrost Air Switch Tubing (Red) 13. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)
6. Evaporator Coil and Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor
7. High Pressure Air Switch Fitting (EVOT)
8. Low Pressure Air Switch Fitting (Location) 14. Hot Gas Line
15. Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV)
-----
62-11637 2–4
2.3 CONDENSING SECTION The system may be fitted with an intake air tempera-
ture sensor (IAT) and a manifold absolute pressure
The condensing section (see Figure 2.1 & Figure 2.2)
transducer (MAP). These sensors are installed when
consists of an engine-compressor drive (unidrive
Carrier Transicold factory monitoring of the air system
assembly), power train (which drives the fans), AutoF-
is required.
resh Air Exchange, condenser fan, condenser, radiator,
heat exchanger, solenoid valves, defrost air switch, 2.3.3 Engine Controls:
piping, wiring, and associated components.
The unidrive assembly (see Figure 2.2) includes the a. Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA)
engine, compressor, alternator, air cleaner, coolant The FSA combines the fuel shutoff solenoid and speed
system, fuel system, engine oil filter system and engine control solenoid into one component. Fuel supply to the
sensors. injectors and engine speed is controlled by varying rod
The power train includes the drive belts, gear box, fan- position in accordance with the signal from the control
shaft and clutch. system. In order to ease the load on the system, speed
transition (high to low and low to high) is ramped up or
2.3.1 Engine down over a 10 second period. The FSA is located on
The engine is a four cylinder diesel which gives excel- the front of the injection pump.
lent fuel economy. It drives the compressor directly
b. Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)
through a nylon dive gear and adapter. The adapter
also includes a V-belt sheave which drives the power The ENSSN provides the control system with informa-
train. The engine cooling system consists of the radia- tion on the speed at which the engine is running. The
tor (which is mounted with the condenser coil) and ENSSN is located in the gear case cover above the
coolant overflow bottle. The engine is equipped with: engine oil filter.
• an engine preheater (EPH), which provides easy c. Rack Position Sensor (RPS)
starting characteristics.
The RPS provides the control system with engine fuel
• spin-on engine oil filter and a spin−on or suction rack (throttle) position information to be used to control
side fuel filters for easier filter changes. The fuel the engine and refrigeration system. The sensor is
filter may also be equipped with a thermostati- located on the injection pump.
cally controlled fuel heater.
d. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS)
• an alternator which supplies electrical power for
the control system and for battery charging. The ENOPS is normally open and closes on pressure
rise to signal to the control system the engine has suffi-
Refer to Section 2.7 for engine data. cient oil pressure for operation. There is a 15 second
delay after the engine starts to allow the oil pressure to
2.3.2 Engine Air System
build up before the control system looks at the input
The air cleaner prolongs the life and performance of from this switch. The switch is located in the oil filter
the engine by preventing dirt and grit from getting into mounting assembly.
the engine and causing excessive wear on all operat-
ing parts. It is the responsibility of the operator to give e. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)
the air cleaner equipment regular and constant atten- The ENCT is a thermistor type sensor that provides the
tion in accordance with the instructions. An air cleaner control system with engine coolant temperature infor-
service indicator is connected at the outlet. Its function mation to be displayed, recorded in the DataLink data
is to indicate when the air cleaner filter element recorder and used to control the engine and refrigera-
requires replacement. (Refer to Section 8.5.10.) tion system. The sensor is located on the flywheel end
of the cylinder head near the #4 Injector.
2–5 62-11637
2.3.4 Alternator sensor and the suction and discharge pressure trans-
Electrical power for the control system and for charging ducers. The compressor draws refrigerant gas from the
the battery is provided by the 12 VDC alternator. evaporator and delivers it to the condenser at an
increased temperature and pressure. The pressure is
a. Alternator Operation such that refrigerant heat can be absorbed by the sur-
rounding air at ambient temperatures.
! CAUTION Figure 2.4 Power Train

Observe proper polarity when installing
Condenser Fan
battery. Negative battery terminal must
Evaporator Blower
be grounded. Reverse polarity will
destroy the rectifier diodes in alternator. Fanshaft
Clutch
As a precautionary measure, disconnect Assembly
the negative and then the positive battery
terminal when charging battery in unit.
The alternator converts mechanical and magnetic Upper Belt

energy to alternating current (AC) and voltage, by the
rotation of an electromagnetic field (rotor) inside a
Upper Idler
three-phase stator assembly. The alternating current
and voltage is changed to direct current and voltage by Gear Box Lower Belt
passing AC energy through a three-phase, full-wave
rectifier system. Six silicon rectifier diodes are used.
The regulator is an electronic switching device. It
Lower Idler
senses the system voltage level and switches the volt-
age applied to the field in order to maintain proper sys-
tem voltage.
b. Voltage Regulator Operation Unidrive
The Integral regulator is an all-electronic, transistorized

device. No mechanical contacts or relays are used to
perform the voltage regulation of the alternator system.
The electronic circuitry should never require adjust-
ment and the solid state active elements used have 2.3.7 Unloaders
proved reliable enough to warrant a sealed unit. The
The compressor is equipped with unloaders as standard
system is temperature compensated to permit the ideal
equipment. Unloaders are used as a compressor capac-
charging rate at all temperatures.
ity control to unload the cylinder banks during periods of
2.3.5 Power Train reduced cooling loads. This provides closer temperature
control and reduces the power required to operate the
The power train (see Figure 2.4) is a belt drive system compressor; thus reducing fuel consumption.
that transfers power from the engine to the condenser
and evaporator fans. The system consists an upper a. Major Working Parts
and lower belt, gear box, fan shaft and clutch.
• Solenoid and valve system.
2.3.6 Compressor • Spring loaded piston type bypass valve.
The compressor assembly includes the refrigerant • Spring loaded discharge check valve (located on
compressor, suction and discharge service valves, high the valve plate).
pressure switch, compressor discharge temperature
62-11637 2–6
Figure 2.5 Compressor Cylinder Head Unloaded
Solenoid Valve Stem

Valve Gas Bypass Port
Spring Guide
Spring Bypass Valve
Piston
Bleed Orifice
Cylinder Discharge Valve
Strainer
Discharge Manifold
Suction
Discharge Check Manifold
Valve Assembly
Valve Plate
Cylinder Suction Valve
b. Unloaded Operation When the pressure behind the piston has been
Pressure from the discharge manifold (Figure 2.5) reduced sufficiently, the valve spring will force the pis-
passes through the strainer and bleed orifice to the ton back, opening the gas bypass from the discharge
back of the bypass valve piston. Unless bled away, this manifold to the suction manifold.
pressure would tend to close the piston against the Discharge pressure in the discharge manifold will close
spring pressure and load the cylinders in that head. the discharge piston check valve assembly isolating
With the solenoid valve energized the solenoid valve the compressor discharge manifold from the individual
stem will open the gas bypass port. cylinder bank manifold.
Discharge pressure will be bled to the suction manifold The unloaded cylinder bank will continue to operate
through the opened gas bypass port. A reduction in fully unloaded until the solenoid valve is de-energized
pressure on the bypass piston valve will take place and the gas bypass port is closed.
because the rate of bleed through the gas bypass port is
greater than the rate of bleed through the bleed orifice.
2–7 62-11637
Figure 2.6 Compressor Cylinder Head Loaded
Valve Stem
Solenoid
Gas Bypass Port
Valve
Spring Guide
Spring Bypass Valve
Piston
Bleed Orifice
Strainer Cylinder Discharge Valve
Discharge Manifold
Suction
Manifold
Discharge Check
Valve Assembly
Valve Plate
Cylinder Suction Valve
c. Loaded Operation b. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP)

With the solenoid valve (Figure 2.6) de-energized the The CSP provides a signal to the control system equiv-
solenoid valve stem will close the gas bypass port. alent to pressure entering the compressor cylinders.
The reading is displayed, recorded in the DataLink data
Pressure from the discharge manifold through the
recorder and used to control the refrigeration system. It
strainer and bleed orifice will build behind the piston.
is located in the suction line, just above the suction ser-
This increased pressure will overcome the bypass vice valve.
valve spring tension and force the piston forward clos-
ing the gas bypass from the discharge manifold to the c. High Pressure Switch (HPS)
suction manifold. The HPS is normally closed and opens on pressure
Cylinder discharge pressure will force the discharge rise to signal to the control system to shutdown the
check valve assembly open. Refrigerant gas will then engine if the discharge pressure rises above the switch
flow into the compressor discharge manifold. setting. It is located on the compressor center head.
The loaded cylinder bank will continue to operate fully d. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
loaded until the solenoid valve is energized and the (CDT)
gas bypass port is opened.
The CDT is a thermistor type sensor that provides a
2.3.8 Compressor Switches, Transducers and signal to the control system equivalent to the tempera-
Sensors ture of the gas leaving the compressor. The reading is
displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder and
a. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer used to control the refrigeration system. It is located on
(CDP) the compressor center head.
The CDP provides a signal to the control system equiv- e. Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST)
alent to pressure leaving the compressor. The reading
The CST is a thermistor type sensor that provides a
is displayed, recorded in the DataLink data recorder
signal to the control system equivalent to the tempera-
and used to control the refrigeration system. It is ture of the gas leaving the heat exchanger and entering
located on the compressor center head. the compressor. The reading is displayed, recorded in
the DataLink data recorder and used to control the
refrigeration system. It is located on the heat
exchanger outlet to suction vibrasorber line.
62-11637 2–8
2.3.9 Condenser Coil sensitive perishable products. When transporting these
The condenser coil is a microchannel type and acts as products, it may be desirable to maintain normal atmo-
a heat exchanger in which the compressed refrigerant spheric conditions (prevent the build up of CO2 and the
gas is lowered in temperature and condensed into a depletion of O2) by using fresh air exchange, in addi-
liquid. A portion of the condenser coil is occupied by tion to accurate temperature control. The AutoFresh Air
the subcooler, which removes heat from the refrigerant Exchange (item 32, Figure 2.2) controls the amount of
liquid leaving the receiver. Air movement over the con- fresh air entering the refrigerated compartment without
denser/ subcooler/radiator is provided by a belt driven the need for manual intervention while in transit. AutoF-
fan mounted in the condensing section. resh Air Exchange can also be used to lower the
humidity level within a refrigerated compartment if the
2.3.10 Heat Exchanger ambient air has a lower humidity level.
The heat exchanger is the compact braze plate type AutoFresh Air Exchange is a factory-installed option,
and is installed in the main suction line and liquid line. as it requires a modified evaporator pod. It is located at
The suction gas is used to cool the warm liquid refriger- the upper curb side door. When air is being exchanged,
ant within the heat exchanger. This results in greater two air ports open. The upper port allows fresh ambient
system efficiency. The heat exchanger is locates below air to enter while stale air exits through the lower port.
the condenser coil on the curb side.
2.4 EVAPORATOR SECTION
2.3.11 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) The evaporator (See Figure 2.3) fits into a rectangular
The AAT is a thermistor type sensor that provides con- opening in the upper portion of the front wall of the
trol system with condenser entering air temperature refrigerated compartment. When installed, the evapo-
information to be displayed, recorded in the DataLink rator section is located inside the compartment, and
data recorder and used to control the refrigeration sys- the condensing section is outside.
tem. The sensor is located behind the front grill. The evaporator assembly consists of an evaporator
coil, evaporator fan, evaporator expansion valve, evap-
2.3.12 Solenoid Valves
orator outlet pressure transducer, evaporator outlet
Flow of refrigerant though the refrigeration system (refer temperature sensor, defrost termination temperature
to Section 2.12 and Section 2.13) is controlled by sole- sensor, supply temperature sensor and return air tem-
noid valves. Solenoid valves are electronic valves that perature sensor.
may be opened and closed (energized and de-ener-
gized) by the control system as required by the operat- 2.4.1 Evaporator Coil
ing conditions. The solenoid valves include the The evaporator is a tube in fin type. The operation of
Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1, item the compressor maintains a reduced pressure within
4 Figure 2.1), Liquid Line solenoid Valve (SV2, item 12) the coil. At this reduced pressure, the liquid refrigerant
and the Hot Gas Solenoid Valve (SV4 item 11). evaporates at a temperature sufficiently low enough to
absorb heat from the air.
2.3.13 Filter-Drier
Heating is accomplished by circulating hot gas directly
The filter-drier is a cylindrical shell containing a drying
from the compressor discharge to the evaporator coil.
agent and filter screen. It is installed in the liquid line
Solenoid valves control the refrigerant flow to operate
and functions to keep the system clean and remove
the heating/cooling system.
moisture from the refrigerant.
Automatic evaporator coil defrosting is initiated by
2.3.14 Receiver either a defrost air switch (DAS − which senses the
Liquid refrigerant from the condenser flows into the pressure drop across the coil) or by the control system
receiver. The receiver serves as a liquid reservoir when defrost timer. During defrost the system is in the Heat
there are surges due to load changes in the system; as Mode, and the clutch is de-energized to stop the evap-
a storage space when pumping down the system and orator fan.
as a liquid seal against the entrance of refrigerant gas
2.4.2 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV)
into the liquid line.
The EVXV is an automatic device which controls the
The receiver is provided with two bull’s-eye sight
flow of liquid to the evaporator according to changes in
glasses, for the observation of liquid level & moisture
superheat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator. The
content, and a fusible plug.
expansion valve maintains a relatively constant degree
2.3.15 AutoFresh Air Exchange of superheat in the gas leaving the evaporator regard-
less of suction pressure. The valve has a dual function
As perishable products respire, they consume oxygen - automatic expansion control and prevention of liquid
(O2) and give off carbon dioxide (CO2). This will even- return to the compressor. The valve is located in the liq-
tually cause the atmosphere within a refrigerated com- uid line at the entrance to the distributor.
partment to have higher levels of CO2 and lower levels
of O2. This may adversely affect the shelf life of some
2–9 62-11637
2.4.3 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve 2.5.1 Multiple Languages
(CSMV) Messages in the MessageCenter can be displayed in
The CSMV opens and closes as required for capacity English or Spanish. Refer to Section 3.11 for more
control of the refrigeration system cooling cycle. It is information on language selection.
located in the suction line within the evaporator assem-
bly. 2.5.2 Automatic Start-Stop
Standard equipment includes an auto start-stop fea-
2.4.4 Evaporator Switches, Transducers and ture. This feature provides automatic cycling of the die-
Sensors sel engine, which in turn offers an energy efficient
alternative to continuous operation of the engine with
a. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)
control of temperature accomplished by alternate cool-
The EVOP is located in the suction line near the evapo- ing and heating of the supply air (evaporator outlet air).
rator expansion valve. It provides the control system
with evaporator outlet pressure information to be dis- 2.5.3 Special Features
played, recorded in the DataLink data recorder and The following additional special features are incorpo-
used to determine the required position of the evapora- rated into the Carrier Transicold APX control system:
tor expansion valve.
• An easy to read LCD display MessageCenter
b. Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT) which clearly displays all required information.
The EVOT is a thermistor type sensor located on the • Unit Data and Advanced User selectable Func-
suction line near the evaporator expansion valve. It tional Parameters.
provides the control system with evaporator outlet tem- • Programmable Maintenance Hour Meters
perature information to be displayed, recorded in the
• Bright LED Alarm Light.
DataLink data recorder and used to determine the
required position of the evaporator expansion valve. • Fully Automated Pretrip.
• Automated control system Self-test.
c. Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT)
The DTT is a thermistor type sensor located on the • DataLink data recorder (uses System date and
time).
center tube sheet of the evaporator coil. It provides the
control system with evaporator temperature informa- • Trip Start to record date/time of trip in DataLink
tion to be displayed, recorded in the DataLink data data recorder memory.
recorder and used to determine termination of defrost. • USB communication for downloading data,
upgrading operational software, and Configura-
d. Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT) tion set up.
The RAT is a thermistor type temperature control probe • Automatic Engine Starting.
which provides the control system with information on
the temperature of the air entering the evaporator sec- • Functional Parameter locks.
tion. The reading is displayed, recorded in the DataLink • Alarms are stored in control system memory for
data recorder and used to control the refrigeration sys- future reference.
tem. It is located on a bracket behind the center of the
return air grille. 2.5.4 Component Description And Location
The APX control systems is an automotive style,
e. Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) decentralized, modular system with CAN bus (Con-
The SAT is a thermistor type temperature control probe trolled Area Network) connectivity. Hardware associ-
which provides the control system with information on ated with the system includes the power control
the temperature of the air leaving the evaporator sec- module (PCM - item 27, Figure 2.2), main micropro-
tion. The reading is displayed, recorded in the DataLink cessor module (MM - item 28), stepper valve module
data recorder and used to control the refrigeration sys- (SVM - item 10). engine control unit (ENCU − Item 15)
tem. It is located in the supply air outlet housing. and display module (DM - item 11).
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND COM-

PONENTS NOTICE
Temperature control is provided by the Carrier Transi- Under no circumstances should anyone
cold APXTM control system. Once the system is set at attempt to repair sealed module internal
the desired temperature, the unit will operate automati- components. Should a problem develop
cally to maintain the desired temperature within very with these components, contact your
close limits. nearest Carrier Transicold dealer for
replacement.
62-11637 2–10
Figure 2.7 Power Control Module
1
18
2
F8 17
F1 K1
16
3 F10 15
F3 F5 F11
K2 F12 14
4
5 F14
6 K3
7
8
F7
13
9
10 12
11
F6 (10 amp) located at the AutoFresh Exchange solenoid harness connector.
1. Fuse (F5=30 amp), Power Enable Relay 9. Battery Positive Connection (T1)
2. Fuse (F1=5 amp), Main Microprocessor/Buzzer 10. Battery Negative Connection (T2)
Power 11. Fuse (F6), AutoFresh Air Exchange
3. Fuse (F3=5 amp), Stepper Valve/Engine Con- 12. Alternator Output Connection (T3)
trol Unit Power 13. Engine Preheater Power Connection (T4)
4. Relay, Power Enable 14. Fuse (F14 = 15 amp), Fuel Heater
5. Relay, Fuel Heater 15. Fuse (F12 = 5 amp), Satellite Comm. Power
6. Buzzer (B) 16. Fuse (F11 = 5 amp), Light Bar
7. Relay, AutoFresh Air Exchanger 17. Fuse (F10 = 20 amp), Relay Power
8. Fuse (F7 = 80 amp) Main Power 18. Fuse (F8 = 5 amp), Fuel Level Sensor
-----
a. Power Control Module cates with the control system through the CAN network
The power control module (PCM - see Figure 2.7) is and also sends information on the position of the door
responsible for distribution of power from the battery to switch and remote switch be displayed as required and
the system components, when starting, and then from recorded in the DataLink data recorder. The module is
the alternator to the system components and to the totally self contained and does not contain any service-
able components.
battery (for charging) once the unit has started.
The module houses the system relays, fuses and the d. Microprocessor Status LED
current transformer (CT). The current transformer is Microprocessor activity within the main microprocessor
located within the PCM and provides a reading of the or SVM Module can be determined by observing the
total 12 VDC system current draw (amps) to the main status LED, located just to the right of the module bar
microprocessor at terminal 2MM12 (see schematic dia- code. The LED will:
gram, Section 10) • blink, green in color, once per second to indicate
b. Main Microprocessor Module that the microprocessor is operating correctly
• be off indicating no power to the module
The main microprocessor module (MM) houses the
main system microprocessor, is totally self contained, • be on steadily, green in color, to indicate that the
and does not contain any serviceable components. microprocessor is not communicating (check
CAN bus)
c. SVM Module
• be on steadily, red in color, to indicate an internal
The stepper valve module (SVM) houses the CSMV & failure or loss of software.
EVXV operating microprocessor. The SVM communi-
2–11 62-11637
Figure 2.8 Display Module
START/STOP -
Status Bar Alarm LED ALARM Key = (Select) Key
CONTINUOUS Key
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Key
Arrow
36 .2
DEFROST
Keys
36
MENU
MENU Key BOX TEMPERATURE F SETPOINT F
STATUS OK
LCD Display
I START/RUN
O OFF
USB Interface Port Soft Keys MessageCenter START/RUN-OFF Switch
e. Engine Control Unit (ENCU) Message Center

The ENCU (Figure 2.2) is a microprocessor based unit Messages generated by the control system are dis-
which controls the operation of the engine. The ENCU played in the MessageCenter. Details of the messages
communicates with the control system through the are described in Section 6.
CAN network and sends information on engine speed, START/RUN-OFF Switch (SROS)
oil pressure and coolant temperature to the control sys-
tem to be displayed in the Advanced User Unit Data
and recorded in the DataLink data recorder. The ENCU I START/RUN When placed in the START/
also communicates with the main microprocessor to RUN position, this switch pro-
control overall system balance. The ENCU is mounted vides power to start the unit.
on the frame near the front of the engine. O OFF The main microprocessor per-
forms a self-test. Then set-
f. Display Module (DM) point and compartment
See Figure 2.8. temperatures are displayed.
To stop the unit, place the
LCD Display SROS in the OFF position.
The control system will display the refrigerated com-
partment temperature the left and compartment set-
point to the right. The control system may be
configured to display the setpoint in either whole num-
bers or with tenths of a degree. The temperature
description will be followed by a letter indicating the
information is in degrees Fahrenheit (F) or degrees
Centigrade (C).
62-11637 2–12
k. Display Module Keys Figure 2.9 Light Bar
ALARM Key
ALARM
The ALARM key allows viewing of the
alarms stored in the system.
UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW AMBER
START‐STOP
Keys
These keys allow scrolling through the
selections presented.
GREEN
DEFROST
EQUAL Key (ENTER)
The EQUAL key is used to confirm a
selection and lock it into the memory. 2.6.2 Remote Switch(es)
The unit is provisioned to connect a door switch (DS)
START-STOP/CONTINUOUS Key
START/STOP
START‐STOP and/or a remote switch (REMS1) directly to the control
Pressing this key toggles between system at the SVM.
CONTINUOUS Start-Stop and Continuous Operation.
• Two types of switches may be used:
DEFROST
DEFROST
DEFROST Key 1. A switch with contacts that are open when the
The MANUAL DEFROST key may be door is open or the remote switch is activated.
used to initiate a defrost cycle when 2. A switch with contacts that are closed when the
the required conditions are met. when the door is open or the remote switch is
START‐STOP
MENU
MENU Key activated.
Pressing the MENU key displays the • Four Configurations are available:
various soft keys in the MessageCen-
ter. The selections offered are depen- 1. Activate an alarm only while the switch is acti-
dent on the operator’s status: Driver, vated.
Advanced User or Technician. Refer to 2. Activate an alarm and shut the unit down while the
Section 3 for Driver & Advance User switch is activated. The unit will remain shut down
mode and Section 5 for Technician for a minimum of 3 minutes under this setting.
mode menu selection descriptions.
USB Interface Port 3. Activate the alarm and bring the engine into low
speed while the switch is activated.
The USB Interface Port is used for
installing software updates, options, 4. Record the switch activation in the DataLink
configurations, functional parameters data recorder.
and downloading of data from the Data • If configured to shut the unit down or bring the
Link data recorder. engine to low speed an additional choice will be
available. The additional choice allows the unit to
2.6 OPTIONS be set so that the configured action will always
take place OR the configured action will only take
2.6.1 Light Bar
place when the ambient temperature is below a
The Light Bar is an external indicator light which can be certain temperature. For example, if the shut-
seen in the driver’s rear view mirror from the cab of the down/low speed temperature choice is set to 77°F
tractor. The green LED indicates “STATUS OK”. The (25°C) the unit will only shutdown/ go to low speed
amber LED indicates “CHECK UNIT”. The amber light if the ambient temperature is below 77°F (25°C).
is illuminated when the control system illuminates the
alarm light. Alarms can be read on the display. • Additionally a Functional Parameter “override”
setting will be available when the switch is con-
figured to shut the unit down. The Functional
Parameter may be set to “YES” or “NO”. If the
Parameter is set to “NO” the configured action
will not be overridden. If the Parameter is set to
“YES”, the alarm will be activated but the unit will
not shutdown.
2–13 62-11637
2.6.3 Remote Temperature Sensors When the ambient air sensor is reading 68°F (20°C) or
The unit is provisioned to connect one or two remote lower, the control system will enable this circuit. The
temperature sensor directly to the control system. circuit is disabled when the ambient air sensor reading
rises to 77°F (25°C) Also, the heater is fitted with an
The system may be configured to display the sensor internal temperature switch which will close, on a tem-
reading in the Unit Data and to record the sensor read- perature fall, to energize the heater element at tem-
ing in the DataLink data recorder. A user specified peratures below 45°F (7.2°C) and opens, on a
name may be configured for each sensor. This name temperature rise, to de-energize the heater element at
will be displayed, rather than the default Remote Sen- 75°F (23.9°C).
sor #1 or Remote Sensor #2, name in the unit data list.
2.6.6 Electric Fuel Pump
2.6.4 Fuel Level Sensor
The optional electric fuel pump (Figure 8.8) is mounted
An optional fuel level sensor (item1, Figure 8.10) sup- at the fuel tank location and assist the engine mounted
plies an input signal to the control system as to the % mechanical pump in transferring fuel from the tank to
of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The control system the engine. The pump is activated by the control sys-
will activate the A1 - “LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING” tem whenever the engine is operating.
alarm when the level reaches 15%, and (if configured
to do so) shuts the engine down when the level 2.6.7 Remote Panel
reaches 10%. The alarm is automatically cleared when
The unit may be fitted with an optional remote control
the level is brought above 25%. The fuel tank level is
panel. The remote panel, which is very similar to the
displayed in Unit Data.
main control panel, displays compartment setpoints,
2.6.5 Fuel Heater compartment temperatures and operating modes
(heat, cool or defrost).
The optional fuel heater (item 3, Figure 2.2) applies
heat to fuel in the fuel filter. Heating the fuel dissolves/ The setpoint may be modified and the unit may be
prevents paraffin wax crystals (and ice) that form when started and stopped using the remote panel.
diesel fuel is chilled thus enabling the water separator This compact remote panel can be mounted to suit the
to work more efficiently and to prevent the filter from individual operator’s preferences − on the front bulk-
plugging with wax and/or ice crystals. head, or in the compartment (including in the wall
itself). Remote Panel keys, softkeys and alarm indica-
tors are in the same locations as the main APX display
module.
62-11637 2–14
2.7 ENGINE DATA
Unit Specification
Engine Model V2203L−DI−EB4−CTD−2 (Base Part Number 26−00132)
Rated Power 24.7 hp (18.5 KW) @1800 rpm
Displacement 135 in3 (2.2 liters)
No. Cylinders 4
NOTE: Refer to Table 2–1 for engine speed settings
Weight 439 lbs (199 kg)
Coolant Capacity 2.9 U.S. gallons (11 liters) - 50/50 mix - never to exceed 60/40.
NOTICE
Use Texaco Havoline extended life coolant or any other extended
life coolant which is Dexcool approved and has 5/150 (5 years /
150,000 miles) on the label.
Thermostat Starts to open 177 to 182°F (81 to 83°C). Fully open at 203°F (95°C).
Fuel System
Fuel Winter: Diesel No. 1 Summer: Diesel No. 2 (Maximum 5% Bio-Diesel is also al-
lowed)
Fuel Heater Temperature Close on a temperature fall @ 45°F (7.2°C)
Switch Open on a temperature rise @ 75°F (24°C)
Firing Order 1-3-4-2
Engine Preheater (EPH) 42 amps at 12 VDC, resistance approximately 0.3 Ohms
Lubrication System
Engine Oil Pressure 40 to 62 psig (2.8 To 4.2 Bar) - Engine in high speed
Engine Oil Pressure Safety Closes, on pressure rise, at 18 psig (1.22 Bar)
Switch (ENOPS) Opens, on pressure fall, at 12 psig (0.82 Bar)
Oil Capacity with Filter 15 quarts (14.2 liters)
Engine Oil Viscosity: API CG or If Outdoor Temp below 32°F (0°C), use 10W30 or Mobil Delvac 1 (5W 40)
better OR Mobil Delvac 1 If Outdoor Temp above 32°F (0°C), use 10W30 or Mobil Delvac 1 (5W 40) or 15W 40.
Engine Oil Change Intervals Refer to Section 8.2 for information on service intervals.
Battery 12 volt nominal - 90 amp hour capacity Cold cranking amps = 425 DIN, 500 IEC,
725 BCI
2.8 COMPRESSOR DATA
Unit Specification
Compressor Model 05G
Type Semi-hermetic Reciprocating
Number of Cylinders 6
Number of Unloaders 2
Weight 137 lbs (62 kg)
Compressor Oil Capacity 5.5 pints (2.8 liters)
Approved Compressor Oil Mobil Arctic EAL 68
2–15 62-11637
2.9 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA
Unit Specification
Defrost Air Switch (DAS) Initiates Defrost: 1.40 ± .07 inch (35 ± 1.8 mm) WG
Defrost Timer 1.5h, 3h, 6h, or 12 hours
Fusible Plug Melting Point 430°F (221°C)
High Pressure Switch (HPS) Opens, on pressure rise, at: 465 ± 10 psig (32 ± 0.7 bar)
Closes, on pressure fall, at: 350 ± 10 psig (24 ± 0.7 bar)
Unit Dry Weight, Less Battery X4 7300 = 1610 (730 KG) X4 7500 = 1620 pounds (735 KG)
Battery 50 pounds (23 KG.)
Fan Clutch Air Gap 0.011 to 0.085 inch (0.28 to 2.2 mm)
Refrigerant Charge Refer to Table 2–1
Gearbox Oil Mobil Delvac 75-90W: 15oz (0.44 liters)
Fanshaft Oil Mobil SHC 630: 2.8oz (0.08 liters)
2.10 COMPONENT RESISTANCE & CURRENT DRAW
Component Ohms Amps

AutoFresh Air Exchange Relay (AFAR) 97 Ohms between pins 1 & 2
AutoFresh Air Exchange (AFAS) Pull in - 0.36 Ohms ± 10% Pull in - 29 Amps
Hold - 14.4 Ohms ± 10% Hold - 0.83 Amps
Clutch (CLH) 2.5 ± 0.2 Ohms 3.0 to 5.0 Amps
Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1) 7.8 ± 0.3 Ohms 0.7 to 2.0 Amps
Engine Preheater (EPH) 0.3 to 0.5 Ohms 38 - 46 Amps
Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN) 22 mAmps Max
Fuel Heater (FH)
Standard 0.96 Ohms ± 10% 12.5 amps ± 10%
Suction Side 1.3 Ohms ± 10% 10.7 amps ± 10%
Fuel Heater Relay (FHR) and Power Enable Relay 90 Ohms between pins 85 & 86
(PER)
Fuel Pump (FP) 11.5 Ohms ± 10% 1.4 Amps @ 16 VDC
Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA) 2.8 Ohms ± 10% @68°F (20°C) 4 Amps Max
Liquid Line (SV2) and Hot Gas (SV4) Solenoid 10.6 ± 0.3 Ohms 0.75 to 2.0 Amps
Valve
Starter Motor (SM) Less than 1 Ohm but more than 0 270 - 380 amps
Unloader Solenoid Valve (UL1 & UL2) 9.6 ± 0.8 Ohms 1.0 to 2.0 Amps
2.11 SAFETY DEVICES

The system is protected from high pressure conditions which may occur when exposed to very high temperatures
(such as a fire) by a fusible plug mounted in the receiver. Under very high temperature conditions (refer to Section
2.9) the plug will melt, releasing the refrigerant pressure.
System components are protected from damage caused by unsafe operating conditions by automatic shut-down of
the unit when such conditions occur. This is accomplished by the safety device listed in the following table and the
fuses shown in Figure 2.7.
Unsafe Conditions Safety Device Device Setting

Excessive operating pressure High Pressure Switch (HPS) Section 2.9
62-11637 2–16
2.12 REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT DURING COOL- The refrigerant then flows through the liquid line sole-
ING noid valve (SV2) to the suction line heat exchanger.
Here the liquid is further reduced in temperature by giv-
When cooling, (See Figure 2.10) the unit operates as a
ing off some of its heat to the suction gas.
vapor compression refrigeration system. The main
components of the system are: the (1) reciprocating The liquid then flows to the evaporator expansion valve
compressor, (2) air-cooled condenser, (3) evaporator which reduces the pressure of the liquid and meters
expansion valve and (4) direct expansion evaporator. the flow of liquid refrigerant to the evaporator to obtain
maximum use of the evaporator heat transfer surface.
The compressor raises the pressure and the tempera-
ture of the refrigerant and forces it through the dis- The refrigerant pressure drop caused by the expansion
charge check valve into the condenser channels. The valve is accompanied by a drop in temperature so the
condenser fan circulate surrounding air over the out- low pressure, low temperature fluid that flows into the
side of the channels. The channels have fins designed evaporator tubes is colder than the air that is circulated
to improve the transfer of heat from the refrigerant gas over the tubes by the evaporator fan. The evaporator
to the air. This removal of heat causes the refrigerant to tubes have aluminum fins to increase heat transfer;
condense. Liquid refrigerant leaves the condenser and therefore heat is removed from the air circulated over
flows through the condenser pressure control solenoid the evaporator. This cold air is circulated throughout
(SV1) to the receiver. the refrigerated compartment to maintain the cargo at
the desired temperature.
The receiver stores the additional charge necessary for
low ambient operation. The receiver is equipped with a The transfer of heat from the air to the low temperature
fusible plug which melts on occurrence of very high liquid refrigerant causes the liquid to vaporize.
temperature to relieve the refrigerant pressure. This low temperature, low pressure vapor passes
The refrigerant leaves the receiver and flows through through the compressor suction modulation valve
the liquid line service valve to the subcooler. The sub- (CSMV) and heat exchanger and then returns to the
cooler occupies a portion of the main condensing coil compressor. In the heat exchanger the refrigerant
surface and gives off further heat to the passing air. absorbs more heat from the high pressure/high tem-
perature liquid.
The refrigerant then flows through a filter-drier where a
screen and absorbent keep the refrigerant clean and The CSMV controls the compressor suction pressure
dry. thereby matching the compressor capacity to the load.
2–17 62-11637
Figure 2.10 Refrigeration Circuit Cooling
CONDENSER
FUSIBLE PLUG
RECEIVER
SV1 N/O
BYPASS
CHECK
VALVE SUBCOOLER
EVXV
CSMV EVOT EVOP
LIQUID LINE MM
SERVICE VALVE
HEAT
FILTER-DRIER EXCHANGER EVAPORATOR
SV4
SV2 N/C
N/C CSP CST DRAIN PAN

DISTRIBUTOR
VIBRASORBER VIBRASORBER
DISCHARGE
CHECK VALVE
HPS CDT
CDP
',6&+$5*()/2:
/,48,')/2:
68&7,21)/2:
COMPRESSOR
62-11637 2–18
2.13 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT - HEATING AND The refrigerant is warmer than the air that is circulated
DEFROSTING over the tubes by the evaporator fan. The evaporator
tubes have aluminum fins to increase heat transfer;
When vapor refrigerant is compressed to a high pres-
therefore heat is transferred to the air circulated over
sure and temperature in a reciprocating compressor,
the evaporator. This warm air is circulated throughout
the mechanical energy necessary to operate the com-
the refrigerated compartment to maintain the cargo at
pressor is transferred to the gas as it is being com-
the desired temperature.
pressed. This energy is referred to as the “heat of
compression” and is used as the source of heat during When additional heating capacity is required the nor-
the heating cycle. mally closed Liquid Line Solenoid valve (SV2) is ener-
gized (opened) to allow additional refrigerant to be
When the system calls for heating (see Figure 2.11):
metered into the hot gas cycle (through the evaporator
• the normally closed hot gas solenoid valve (SV4) expansion valve). Refrigerant will be forced from the
is energized (opened). receiver (even though SV1 is closed) by the hot gas
• the normally open condenser pressure control bypass line which functions to raise the receiver pres-
solenoid valve (SV1) is energized (closed). sure above evaporator pressure.
If the discharge pressure rises to 350 psig (23.8 bar)
• the normally closed liquid line solenoid valve
when in defrost or 390 psig (26.5 bar) when in heating,
(SV2) is de-energized (closed)
SV1 will be de-energized momentarily to lower the dis-
Flow of hot discharge gas from the compressor enters charge pressure.
the evaporator.
Figure 2.11 Refrigeration Circuit - Heat and Defrost
CONDENSER
FUSIBLE PLUG
RECEIVER
SV1 N/O
BYPASS
CHECK
VALVE SUBCOOLER
EVXV
CSMV EVOT EVOP

LIQUID LINE MM
SERVICE VALVE
HEAT
FILTER-DRIER EXCHANGER EVAPORATOR
POSITION
SV4 VARIES
SV2 N/C
N/C CSP CST DRAIN PAN

DISTRIBUTOR
VIBRASORBER VIBRASORBER
DISCHARGE
CHECK VALVE
HPS CDT
CDP
',6&+$5*()/2:
68&7,21)/2:
$'',7,21$/ 5()5,*(5$17
COMPRESSOR 3$7+ :+(169,623(1('
2–19 62-11637
SECTION 3 - OPERATION
3.1 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

3.2 DISPLAY SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–2
3.3 STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.4 INTELLISET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–3
3.5 PRETRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–5
3.6 CHANGING SETPOINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–8
3.8 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.9 DATA RECORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–10
3.9.1 Control System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.9.2 Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.9.3 Data Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.9.4 DataLink Data Recorder Power-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–11
3.10 MANUAL DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–13
3.11 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–14
3.12 ADVANCED USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–15
3.13 UNIT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–16
3.14 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–18
3.15 VIEW HOUR METERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.16 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–19
3.17 SLEEP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–23
3.18 STOPPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3.19 OPTION - DATATRAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–25
3.20 REMOTE PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–26
62-11637
SECTION 3
OPERATION
3.1 DISPLAY
! WARNING
APX control system equipped units may start automatically at any time the START/RUN - OFF
switch (SROS) is in the START/RUN position. Also, the unit may be fitted with two way commu-
nication equipment that will allow starting of the unit from a remote location even though the
switch is in the OFF position.
! WARNING
When performing service or maintenance procedures: ensure any two way communication is
disabled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, ensure the START/RUN-OFF
switch is in the OFF position and, whenever practical, disconnect the negative battery connec-
tion.
START/STOP -
Status Bar Alarm LED ALARM Key = (Select) Key
CONTINUOUS Key
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Key
Arrow
36 .2
DEFROST
Keys
36
MENU
MENU Key BOX TEMPERATURE F SETPOINT F
STATUS OK
LCD Display
I START/RUN
O OFF
USB Interface Port Soft Keys MessageCenter START/RUN-OFF Switch
3–1 62-11637
3.2 DISPLAY SCREENS
LCD DISPLAY SCREENS

START/STOP DIESEL
1
2 36.2
BOX TEMPERATURE F
36
SETPOINT F
3
4
STATUS OK
DEFAULT SCREEN
START/STOP DIESEL
5 Viewing Menu Soft Key

Selections
Press Menu Key to Scroll
6 INTELLISET HOUR UNIT
METERS DATA
TYPICAL MENU SCREEN

7 SAMPLE SCREEN (1 OF 3)
DISPLAYED ITEM #1 10
DISPLAYED ITEM #2
DISPLAYED ITEM #3
8 END OF LIST
BACK EXIT
1. Status Bar
2. Box Temperature
3. Setpoint
4. Message Center
5. Operator Message Panel
6. Soft Key Descriptions
7. Highlight - White letters on black background
8. BACK key - Used to return to previous screen
9. EXIT key - Used to return to the default screen
10.The position of the highlighted item and total number of items in the list is displayed in the status bar. Up to 5
items may be displayed at one time. Press the ▼ key to view additional items, or the ▲ key to scroll back up
the list. “END OF LIST” will be displayed after the last item in the list.
62-11637 3–2
3.3 STARTING
! WARNING
Under no circumstances should ether or any other starting aids be used to start the engine.
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL COOL

CONTINUOUS
36 .2
DEFROST
36
MENU
BOX TEMPERATURE F SETPOINT F

STATUS OK
I START/RUN
O OFF
1. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the 5. If the LCD Display does not illuminate:
START/RUN position.
• Check the battery voltage. A booster battery
2. The system will display the Carrier Transicold may be needed.
logo, display the default screen, present lan- • Check for blown fuse(s).
guage selection and the hour meter readings (if
configured to do so) along with a test flash of the • Verify the harness connector at the back of
alarm light and light bar amber LED’s. The sys- the display module and all other module con-
tem will then perform a start sequence, energize nectors are securely attached.
the buzzer, and then start the unit automatically. 3.4 INTELLISET
3. If there is an alarm present, the alarm message Products carried or stored in a refrigerated compart-
will be displayed in the MessageCenter and the ment require a multitude of refrigeration unit settings
alarm LED will flash for 5 seconds. If one or that must be checked and, if required, reset each time
more shutdown alarms are present, the alarm(s) a new product is loaded. The APX control system
must be cleared before the unit will start. offers the settings necessary to meet these require-
ments. IntelliSet is a feature that allows pre-selection
4. Observe the MessageCenter. If the word
and naming of the necessary settings for over 40 differ-
“ACTIVE” or “MODIFIED” is displayed at the
ent products. The operator may then call up the set-
right, the unit is equipped with IntelliSet settings.
tings by simply selecting the assigned IntelliSet name.
Proceed to page 4. If “ACTIVE” or “MODIFIED”
is not displayed, proceed to page 6.
For example: A load of apples may require setting the control system for continuous operation at 35°F (1.7°C) with
a defrost every 3 hours while a load of cheese may require the same operation with setpoints ranging from 35°F to
42°F (1.7°C to 5.6°C) and a load of ice cream requires Start-Stop operation at -22°F (-30°C) with defrost at 12 hour
intervals. The settings required for each product may be entered into the control system and then locked so they
cannot be changed. In the case of the load of cheese, the range of setpoints may be locked, leaving the operator
the ability to change the setpoint within the locked range.
3–3 62-11637
When a load of apples is going to be picked up, the operator simply selects “APPLES” from the IntelliSet menu; for
cheese, “CHEESE” is selected; for ice cream, “ICE CREAM” is selected. With each selection, the control system
automatically re-programs the settings to provide the best temperature control, fuel economy, and performance for
that particular product.
NOTES
• The above settings are examples of possible settings. Factory IntelliSets are available from your authorized
Carrier Transicold Truck/Trailer dealer.
• An IntelliSet may be pre-programmed as “IntelliSleep” which allows Sleep Mode to be entered by simply
changing to that IntelliSet.
• Range Protect may be applied to as many IntelliSets as desired. Range Protect is designed to prevent freez-
ing or overheating of non-sensitive cargo by locking the unit in Start-Stop Operation when the compartment
temperature is in the preset range (default range is 35 to 70°F, 1.6 to 21.1°C). Range Protect offers
increased fuel savings over normal Start-Stop Operation.
ALARM
3
START/STOP
IntelliSets (2 of 7)
CONTINUOUS
1&4 IntelliSet Off
DEFROST Viewing Menu Soft Key Banana Active
Selections Flowers
3 Lettuce
MENU Cheese
INTELLISET PRETRIP HOUR UNIT
BACK EXIT
METERS DATA
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC Mode and the
default screen displayed, press the “=” key. If the screen shown just above step 3 below is displayed, pro-
ceed to step 3. Otherwise, proceed to step 2.
2. Press the MENU key until INTELLISET is displayed. Then, press the INTELLISET soft key to display the
IntelliSet screen.
3. The IntelliSet screen will display with a 10 second timeout and five of the available IntelliSets listed. There
may be more than five IntelliSets available. This information is provided, in parenthesis, on the first line. For
example, in the preceding illustration there are seven IntelliSets available and the second IntelliSet is high-
lighted. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list of available IntelliSets. The IntelliSet that is currently
selected will have the word “ACTIVE” or “MODIFIED” to the right.
4. To change to another IntelliSet, press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list and highlight the IntelliSet
desired. Press the “=” Key. The highlighted IntelliSet will become active and an “INTELLISET CHANGED”
message will display.
5. Press the EXIT soft key to return to the default display.

NOTES
• If setpoint change is allowed, refer to Section 3.6 for setpoint change instruction.
• If it is desirable to have this machine go directly to the IntelliSet screen on a press of the “=” key, set the
“ENABLE INTELLISET AT = KEY” Configuration to “YES”. Refer to Section 5.2.3.
62-11637 3–4
3.5 PRETRIP
Pretrip is a set of tests run by the control system to check unit operation. It is recommended that a Pretrip is run
prior to loading the refrigerated compartment. It will indicate a failure if one is detected.
TIP
A Pretrip can be started at any box temperature. If Pretrip is started while the unit is in a Start-Stop off
cycle the unit will start during the course of the test. If the unit is running when Pretrip is started, it will
shutdown for the first three tests.
TIP
If “CAN NOT START PRETRIP” is displayed in the MessageCenter, check to see if the unit is in PC
Mode (Refer to Section 5.3.2) or Defrost mode, or check the alarm list (Section 3.14) for active shut-
down alarms.
NOTE
Pretrip will run until completed, unless an alarm occurs that causes Pretrip to be aborted. Only alarms
that will result in other erroneous alarms or will affect future Pretrip tests will abort Pretrip.
Once Pretrip is started: If the unit is running, the control system will shut the unit down for the initial tests, then start
it again as it proceeds through the tests.
NOTE
Before completing Pretrip, the control system looks at the status of alarms and if certain alarms are
active (for example: Low Fuel Warning, Check Engine Oil Level, Check Coolant Temperature), Pretrip
will display “FAILED”, indicating that the unit is not ready to be sent out for a load, but that the alarm
list should be checked and all present alarm situations corrected.
ALARM
START/STOP
3
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Viewing Menu Soft Key

Selections PRETRIP MENU
Press Menu Key to Scroll Start Pretrip
MENU
View Results of Last Pretrip
METERS DATA
1
BACK EXIT
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position), press the MENU key
until PRETRIP is displayed.
2. Press the PRETRIP soft key to display the Pretrip Menu screen.
3. The Pretrip Menu screen will display with a 15 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the
available selections. With the desired selection highlighted, press the “=” Key.
4. If “Start Pretrip” is selected, Pretrip will begin and the Pretrip Status screen will be displayed. Immediately fol-
lowing Pretrip OR if “View Results of Last Pretrip” is selected the Pretrip Summary Screen will be displayed.
NOTE
At any time during Pretrip, the UNIT DATA soft key may be pressed to allow the user to view the Unit
Data screen (refer to Section 3.13). To return to Pretrip from the Unit Data screen, press the BACK soft
key.
NOTE
During Pretrip the ALARM light will illuminate to indicate there is no temperature control.
3–5 62-11637
PRETRIP STATUS
Pretrip Type: Cool - Ambient 75 F
Test 2 of 10 - Current Test
LIV
Current Draw - 2 Amps
23%
UNIT TEST STOP
DATA RESULTS PRETRIP
5. During Pretrip Test 1, verify that the buzzer is energized, the amber light on the light bar is illuminated (if
equipped) and the AutoFresh air port opens and closes (if equipped).
6. The remainder of the Pretrip tests will run automatically and take 7 to 15 minutes. The percent of Pretrip that
has been completed is displayed in the status bar under the test description information.
7. “PRETRIP PASS”, “PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST ##” or “PRETRIP FAILED AND COMPLETE” will be displayed
at the end of the testing. The “PASS” message will display until a key is pressed. The Pretrip test “FAIL”
results message will display until the alarms are cleared.
TIP
To end Pretrip at any time, press the STOP PRETRIP soft key.
8. Press the VIEW ALARMS key to move to the Alarm Screen (refer to Section 3.14) and review any alarms
activated during the test.
9. The TEST RESULTS soft key may be pressed
at any time during Pretrip to view results of any
test that has been completed. Press the ▲ or ▼ PRETRIP TEST RESULTS (1 OF 16)
key to scroll through the results. Test 1: Display Passed
Test 2: Electrical Current Passed
Test 3: Sensors Failed
Test 4: Speed Passed
Test 1 - Display Test:

The control system activates the buzzer. Also, the amber light on the light bar is illuminated (if equipped) and the
AutoFresh air port opens and closes (if equipped). This test will last 5 seconds. This portion of the Pretrip requires
that the operator determines PASS or FAIL. Anything that fails during this test should be repaired at the conclusion
of the Pretrip cycle. Pretrip will continue regardless of the outcome of this test.
Test 2 - 12VDC Electrical Component Amperage Check - Test 2 will check the amperage (current) draw of the
following components:
• Battery Amp Draw (All Components Turned Off). • SV1
• AutoFresh Air Exchange Relay • SV2
(AFAR - if equipped) • SV4
• Clutch (CLH) • Preheat Circuit (EPH)
• Font Unloader Solenoid (UL1) • Fuel Solenoid (FSA)
• Rear Unloader Solenoid (UL2)
Each component will be individually checked for proper current draw. An alarm will be activated for any component
not drawing amperage in the expected range.
Test 3 - Temperature Sensor Check - Check the condition of all of the system temperature sensors.
Test 3 will last approximately 5 seconds. If a problem is detected with any of the sensors, the corresponding alarm
will be activated.
Test 4 - Warm Up - The engine is started automatically and the ambient air sensor is read.
If the ambient temperature is above +32°F (0°C), the unit will operate in the “Cool Pretrip” Mode. If the ambient
temperature is at or below +32°F (0°C), the unit will operate in the “Heat Pretrip” Mode.
In the Cool Pretrip Mode, the unit will operate in two cylinder Low Speed Cool. The compressor suction and dis-
charge pressures will be tested. Appropriate alarms will be displayed if any problem is detected. Test 4 in Cool Pre-
trip will last approximately 60 seconds.
62-11637 3–6
In the Heat Pretrip Mode, the unit will operate in four cylinder Low Speed Heat. The System will check for a rise in
compressor discharge pressure, fan clutch operation and SV1 operation. Appropriate alarms will be displayed if
any problem is detected. Test 4 in Heat Pretrip may last up to 12 minutes depending on ambient and compartment
temperature and unit condition. During periods when discharge pressure is being read, SV2 may pulse.
Test 5 - UL2 (Rear) Unloader - With the unit still running the same as it was in Test 4, the operation of unloader
UL2 is tested. If suction and discharge pressures do not change as expected when UL2 is energized and de-ener-
gized, the P00191 - “CHECK UL2” alarm will be displayed. Test 5 will last about 20 seconds.
Test 6 - UL1 (Front) Unloader - With the unit still running the same as it was in Test 5, the operation of UL1 is
tested. If suction and discharge pressures do not change as expected when UL1 is energized and de-energized,
the P00178 - “CHECK UL1” alarm will be displayed. Test 6 will last about 20 seconds.
Test 7 - Engine Low Speed - The control system verifies that engine is in the low speed range. If the engine is not
operating in the low speed range, the P00174 - “CHECK LOW SPEED RPM” alarm will be activated.
Test 8 - Engine High Speed - The engine switches to high speed. The control system verifies that engine is in the
high speed range. If the engine is not operating in the high speed range, the P00175 - “CHECK HIGH SPEED
RPM” alarm will be activated.
Test 9 - Engine Low Speed 2 - The engine switches back to low speed. The control system verifies that engine
returns to the low speed range within 10 seconds. If not, the P00174 - “CHECK LOW SPEED RPM” alarm will be
activated.
Test 10 - Check Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) - This test is run to ensure that the CSMV is opening and
closing properly. If suction pressure doesn’t change as expected with CSMV closed, then the P00180 - “CHECK
SUCTION MOD VALVE” alarm will be displayed.
Test 11 - EVXV - This test is an operational check of the EVXV. If evaporator outlet pressure doesn’t change as
expected with the EVXV closed then the P00177 − “CHECK EVAP SUPERHEAT” alarm will be displayed.
Test 12 - SV1 - The test continues with the unit running in two cylinder low speed cool, SV1 is energized and de-
energized. If the valve does not operate correctly, the P00182 - “CHECK SV1 VALVE” alarm will be displayed. This
test may last up to three minutes.
Test 13 - Check SV4
NOTE
If ambient temperature is above 100°F (37.8°C) this test will not be performed.
With the unit running in two cylinder, low speed heat, SV4 will be energized and de-energized. If the valve does not
operate correctly, the P00181 - “CHECK SV4” VALVE alarm will be displayed. This test may last up to eight min-
utes.
Test 14 - Low Side Pump Down - With the unit running in two cylinder low speed, SV2 and SV4 will be closed to
pump the low side of the unit down. If the system cannot obtain the required suction pressure, the P00165 - “CAN-
NOT PUMP DOWN” alarm will be displayed.
Test 15 - Pressure Hold Check - The unit will shutdown, and check for pressure equalization between the high
and low sides. If any leakage is detected, the P00202 - “HIGH SIDE LEAK” alarm will be displayed. This test will
last one minute.
Test 16 - Check Discharge Check Valve - With the unit off, the discharge check valve is checked for leakage. If
any leakage is detected, the P00203 - “CHK DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE” alarm will be displayed. This test will
last 40 seconds.
Test 17 - Check for Other Alarms - The alarm list is checked for any non-pretrip alarms that may have occurred
during the Pretrip test. If any operational alarms occurred, Pretrip will show FAIL, and the technician will need to
review the alarm list and take necessary and appropriate action to clear them. This test will last about five seconds.
Pretrip Termination:
When the Pretrip cycle is completed, the unit will return to normal temperature control operation. “PRETRIP PASS”
will be displayed until the operator presses the EXIT key. In the event that the Pretrip test activates an alarm(s),
either “PRETRIP FAIL & COMPLETE” (if the entire Pretrip cycle was completed), or “PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST XX”,
(if the Pretrip cycle was aborted by an alarm before it was completed) will be displayed.
3–7 62-11637
3.6 CHANGING SETPOINT
ALARM
START/STOP
IntelliSets
START/STOP
START/STOP (2 of 7)COOL
DIESEL
CONTINUOUS PRETRIP MENU COOL
IntelliSet Off
Start PretripMenu Soft Key
Viewing 2
36
DEFROST
Banana Active
Selections
Flowers .2 36
Lettuce
MENU 3
Cheese
BOX TEMPERATURE
INTELLISET PRETRIP FHOUR
SETPOINT
UNIT F
METERS
STATUS BACK
OK DATA
EXIT
2
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC Mode and the
default screen displayed (press the Back soft key if required):
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to bring the displayed setpoint to the desired value.
TIP
The setpoint will change one degree with each press and release of an arrow key or the setpoint will
scroll if the key is pressed and held.
3. Press the “=” key to save the new setpoint. The MessageCenter will display “SETPOINT CHANGED” for 5
seconds.
4. If the “=” key is not pressed the setpoint screen will flash, the MessageCenter will display “SETPOINT NOT
CHANGED” and then return to original setpoint.
-----
By default, setpoints of -22°F to +90°F (-30°C to +32°C) may be entered using the display mounted keys. The con-
trol system always retains the last entered setpoint in memory. The setpoint will change 1° (one full degree) OR
0.1° (one tenth of a degree - if configured to do so) for each press and release of the UP ARROW or DOWN
ARROW key.
NOTE
The control system may be configured with a minimum and/or maximum setpoint other than the
default values listed above. “MAX SETPOINT HAS BEEN REACHED” or “MIN SETPOINT HAS BEEN
REACHED” will display in the MessageCenter when either of these conditions is reached.
Setpoint may be changed any time the START/RUN - OFF switch is in the START/RUN position, or when the unit
is in PC Mode EXCEPT when:
• Viewing the Alarm List, Data List or Functional Parameters OR
• When the unit is in Pretrip OR
• When the unit is in Sleep Mode.
Pressing the = key will cause the new displayed setpoint value to become active and “SETPOINT CHANGED” will
be displayed. If the new value is not entered, after 5 seconds of no display mounted key activity, the entire display
and Light Bar will flash and the buzzer will be energized for 15 seconds (with “SETPOINT NOT CHANGED” dis-
played) and then revert back to the last entered setpoint. All other keys are active at this time and if pressed while
the display is flashing, will stop the flashing, and perform the requested function.
TIP
The setpoint may be changed quickly by pressing and holding the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
key until the desired setpoint is reached. The longer the key is held, the faster the setting will change.
62-11637 3–8
3.7 START-STOP OPERATION
1&3
ALARM
START/STOP
IntelliSets
START/STOP
START/STOP (2 of 7)
DIESEL
DIESEL COOL
COOL
CONTINUOUS PRETRIP MENU
IntelliSet Off
1 DEFROST Start PretripMenu Soft Key
Viewing
36.2
Banana Active
Flowers Selections
MENU
Lettuce
Cheese
BOX TEMPERATURE
36
F SETPOINT F
METERS DATA
BACK EXIT
START/STOP MODE SELECTED
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC Mode press
the START-STOP/CONTINUOUS key until “START/STOP” is highlighted.
2. The message “START/STOP MODE SELECTED” will be displayed in the MessageCenter for 10 seconds.
3. The operation indication in the status bar will no longer be highlighted. The unit is now in Start-Stop Operation.
Start-Stop is provided to reduce fuel consumption. This feature allows full automatic control of the engine by moni-
toring refrigerated compartment temperature, battery charging amps and engine coolant temperature. The main
function of Start-Stop Operation is to turn off the engine near setpoint to provide an efficient temperature control
system and to initiate a restart sequence after certain conditions are met.
The control system may be configured with Start-Stop operation tied to setpoint ranges for either frozen or perish-
able loads. The Start-Stop/Continuous key is locked out if “START-STOP LOCKED” displays in the MessageCen-
ter when the key is pressed and the unit is in Start-Stop Operation or “CONTINUOUS LOCKED” displays in the
MessageCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in Continuous Run Operation. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for
Configuration information.
If the unit fails to start after three start attempts the A000 31 - “FAILED TO START-AUTO” alarm will be activated.
While running, if the unit shuts down, an internal counter keeps track of the shutdowns. Should the unit shutdown
three consecutive times without running a minimum of 15 minutes between shutdowns the A00030 - “FAILED TO
RUN MINIMUM TIME” alarm will be activated. The shutdown counter is cleared when the unit has run for 15 min-
utes.
Refer to Section 4.6 for more detailed information on Start-Stop Operation.
3–9 62-11637
3.8 CONTINUOUS OPERATION
1&3
ALARM
START/STOP
IntelliSets
CONTINUOUS
START/STOP
START/STOP (2 of 7)
DIESEL
DIESEL
DIESEL COOL
COOL
COOL
CONTINUOUS PRETRIP MENU
IntelliSet Off
1 Start PretripMenu Soft Key
36Viewing
36.2
DEFROST
Banana Active
Selections
Flowers .2 36
MENU
Cheese
BOX
BOXTEMPERATURE
36
Lettuce
PRETRIP FHOUR
TEMPERATURE
INTELLISET F SETPOINT
UNIT FF
SETPOINT
CONTINUOUSSTATUS METERS
BACK DATA
EXIT
OK SELECTED
RUN MODE
the START-STOP/CONTINUOUS key until “Continuous” is displayed & highlighted.
2. The message “CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED” will be displayed in the MessageCenter for 10 sec-
onds.
3. The operation indication in the status bar will no longer be highlighted. The unit is now in Continuous Oper-
ation.
In Continuous Operation, the unit will not shutdown except in response to a shutdown alarm. Refer to Section 4.7
for more detailed information on Continuous Operation.
The control system may be configured with continuous operation tied to setpoint ranges for either frozen or perish-
able loads. The START-STOP/CONTINUOUS key is locked out if “CONTINUOUS LOCKED” displays in the Mes-
sageCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in Continuous Operation or “START-STOP LOCKED” displays in
the MessageCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in Start-Stop Operation. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for more
information on Configurations.
If the unit fails to start after three start attempts the A00031 - “FAILED TO START-AUTO” alarm will be activated.
While running, if the unit shuts down, an internal counter keeps track of the shutdowns. Should the unit shutdown
three consecutive times without running a minimum of 15 minutes between shutdowns the A00030 - “FAILED TO
RUN MINIMUM TIME” alarm will be activated. The shutdown counter is cleared when the unit has run for 15 min-
utes.
3.9 DATA RECORDER

The APX control system contains a built-in DataLink data recorder with 3 megabytes of memory. The recorded
data can be downloaded from the DataLink data recorder using either the TRU-Tech/TRU-View program or a Data
Transfer USB memory device.
The DataLink data recorder reads the same input information as the control system (Functional Parameters, Con-
figurations, and Unit Data) at all times. The DataLink data recorder records events as they occur, such as setpoint
changes and defrost initiation and termination, and also records all data values including temperature sensors and
pressure transducers in either averaged or snapshot format at selected intervals
The following intervals are available for sensor recording:
• 2 Minutes • 30 Minutes
• 5 Minutes • 1 Hour
• 10 Minutes • 2 Hours
• 15 Minutes • 4 Hours
62-11637 3–10
3.9.1 Control System Information
The control system information that may be recorded is as follows:
• DataLink data recorder time clock date / time • Controller (main microprocessor) Serial Number
• Setpoint • Controller (main microprocessor) Software Rev
• DataLink data recorder settings • Pretrip Start/End
(Logging Intervals, Events and Sensors) • Functional Parameters
• Trailer (asset or car) ID • Control System Configurations
• Unit Serial Number • Current System Operating Mode
• Unit Model Number
3.9.2 Data Recording
The DataLink data recorder data comes from four general categories of information:
a. Control system Information as described in the preceding Section 3.9.1.
b. Sensor Data
This information is recorded at pre-determined intervals as a snapshot of the sensor at the time of the recording, or
an averaged reading of the sensor readings since the last recording based on 1 minute increments. The user can
determine which sensor(s) will be recorded, whether snapshot or averaged readings are preferred and at what time
intervals. (Snapshot readings are also taken at the beginning and end of defrost and at the time of a shutdown
alarm.)
All of the sensors and transducers that may be read under Unit Data (refer to Table 3–1) may be included or
excluded from the recordings.
c. Event Occurrences
This information is any additional data that is recorded on a “when it occurs” basis. Events are recorded by the
recorder as they occur. An Event is defined as something that happens and may include:
• Setpoint change • Control Mode
• Defrost cycle start/Defrost Cycle End • Door and Remote switch activations.
• START/RUN − OFF switch on (START/RUN • Hour Meter readings (Hour meters are recorded
position) at midnight or the first time of day the START/
• Pretrip start RUN− OFF switch is toggled from the OFF posi-
tion. There will be no hour meter readings when
• Pretrip end the switch in the OFF position.
• Unit Mode
d. User Area Data

The User or service technician may enter a Comment into the DataLink data recorder using the TRU-Tech pro-
gram.
3.9.3 Data Downloading

The data within the DataLink data recorder can be downloaded using either the TRU-Tech/TRU-View program with
a PC–USB service cable connected to the USB interface port or with a Data Transfer USB memory device (refer to
Section 5.3.1).
3.9.4 DataLink Data Recorder Power-Up

The DataLink data recorder records data the entire time the START/RUN - OFF switch is in the START/RUN posi-
tion. A Configuration exists which allows the user to select weather an additional 8 hours of sensor data be
recorded after the switch is placed in the OFF position, or to stop recording at the same time the switch is placed in
the OFF position. The factory setting is to record the additional 8 hour so the temperatures will be recorded during
the unloading, fueling or other times when it may be necessary to turn the unit off. (Refer to Section 5.2.3.)
3–11 62-11637
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL
DIESEL COOL
COOL
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Viewing
Viewing Menu SoftKey
Menu Soft Key
Selections
Selections
Press
Press Menu Keyto
Menu Key toScroll
Scroll
MENU
INTELLISET DATA
PRETRIP HOUR UNIT
1 LANGUAGE EXIT
RECORDER METERS DATA
the MENU key until DATA RECORDER is displayed.
2. Press the DATA RECORDER soft key to display the sub menus.
DATA RECORDER
MARK TRIP START
PRINT TO SCREEN
PRINT TO PRINTER NOTE: Choices vary based on
SCREEN SETUP software revision and model
PRINTER SETUP type.
BACK EXIT
3. The Data Recorder screen will display with a 15 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the
available sub menus. With the desired sub-menu highlighted, press the “=” Key to enter the menu.
MARK TRIP START
Trip Start places the present time and date as a stamp in the data recorder memory to allow easy
review of the data from the last trip, and to allow downloading data from a specific trip. A trip begins at a
Trip Start and ends at the next Trip Start. To enter a Trip Start: with MARK TRIP START highlighted,
press the “=” Key. If trip start is acknowledged by the data recorder, “TRIP START ENTERED“ will be
displayed for 5 seconds and then the display will revert back to the normal display. In the unlikely situa-
tion that the data recorder is not functioning properly “CANNOT ENTER TRIP START” will flash and
then the display will revert back to the Data Recorder menu.
PRINT TO SCREEN
PRINT TO SCREEN displays a graphical representation of the recorded data. To display the data: with PRINT TO
SCREEN highlighted, press the “=” Key. NOTE: If configured to do so, the system will prompt for entry of the data
protect PIN code (refer to “PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1)
75 SETPOINT
RAT
60
Collecting Data, Please Wait
SP
45
Up Key = Next Day 30 SAT
Down Key = Previous Day
Equal Key = Event Toggle 15
EXIT Time & Date EXIT
Once the graphical display is presented, press the ▲ or ▼ keys to move through the recorded data, day by day.
The data is presented with the left horizontal axis as 00:00 (midnight) with 24 dividing lines representing the hours
of the day. Press the “=” key to toggle the event codes on or off. When viewing events with the event codes ON, the
following acronyms will be displayed:
c = Door Close o = Door Open
d = Defrost start p = Power up
e = Defrost end r = Real time clock change
f = Power down t = Trip Start
62-11637 3–12
3.10 MANUAL DEFROST
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL
DIESEL DEFROST
COOL
1 CONTINUOUS

Selections
MENU
DEFROST 25
SETPOINT
INTELLISET PRETRIP HOUR UNIT F
METERS DATA
DEFROST CYCLE STARTED
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) press the MANUAL
DEFROST key.
NOTE
This procedure may be demonstrated in PC Mode but the unit will not actually enter defrost
2. If the conditions for defrost are met, the status bar and the Box Temperature display will change to the word
“DEFROST”. The MessageCenter will display “DEFROST CYCLE STARTED” for 10 seconds. At the com-
pletion of any defrost cycle, the MessageCenter will return to the default display.
3. If the conditions for defrost are not met, the MessageCenter will display “CANNOT START DEFROST
CYCLE” for 5 seconds. This message will be activated when:
• The box temperature is too warm. Defrost may be entered when the defrost termination temperature sen-
sor (DTT) is below 40°F (4.4°C) or the supply air temperature sensor (SAT) is below 45°F (7.2°C) OR
• The engine has not run at least 15 seconds after starting OR
• The unit is in PC Mode OR
• The unit is in Pretrip OR
• There is an active shutdown Alarm.
Defrost may also be initiated automatically at preset intervals by the system defrost timer or by the defrost air
switch.
The Defrost Mode terminates when both the defrost termination temperature (DTT) and supply air temperature
(SAT) rise higher than 55°F (12.8°C). Should the defrost cycle not end after a maximum of 45 minutes the defrost
cycle is terminated automatically. The A00054 – DEFROST NOT COMPLETE alarm will be activated.
If the alarm is activated, the system will wait 1.5 hours of unit running time before attempting an automatic defrost
cycle. Pressing the manual defrost key will override this mode and start a defrost cycle.
TIP
The Manual Defrost Key can be used at any time to start a Defrost Cycle as long as the preceding
conditions are met.
NOTE
Refer to Section 4.9 for more detailed information on DEFROST.
3–13 62-11637
3.11 LANGUAGE SELECTION
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL
DIESEL COOL
COOL
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Viewing
Menu Soft Key
Selections
Selections
Press
Press Menu Keyto
Menu Key toScroll
Scroll
MENU
INTELLISET DATA
PRETRIP HOUR UNIT
1 LANGUAGE EXIT
RECORDER METERS DATA
NOTE
Language Selection may not be available on early software revisions.
the MENU key until LANGUAGE is displayed.
2. Press the LANGUAGE soft key to display the language screen.
LANGUAGE
English English
Españo Spanish
BACK EXIT
3. The language screen will display with a 10 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the avail-
able selections.
4. With the desired language highlighted, press the “=” key. The highlighted language will become active and
“LANGUAGE CHANGED” will be displayed.
62-11637 3–14
3.12 ADVANCED USER
ALARM
START/STOP
IntelliSets
START/STOP
START/STOP (2 of 7)COOL
DIESEL
CONTINUOUS PRETRIP MENU COOL
IntelliSet Off
Start PretripMenu Soft Key
Viewing
36
DEFROST
Banana Active
Selections
Flowers .2 36
MENU
Lettuce 2
Cheese
BOX TEMPERATURE
INTELLISET PRETRIP FHOUR
SETPOINT
UNIT F
METERS
STATUS BACK
OK DATA
EXIT
1 1
NOTES:
• As shipped from the factory, the system will operate in the Driver Mode. In the Driver Mode, some data
and menu items covered in this publication will not be available.
• The system may be configured to operate in the Advanced User Mode. If configured to operate in the
Advanced User Mode, that additional data and those menu items will be available at all times.
If the System is not configured to operate in the Advanced User Mode, the mode may be
entered as follows:
and then release the two outside soft keys simultaneously. (NOTE: The system will not respond.)
2. Then, press the “=” Key within 5 seconds. The operator message panel will display the acknowledgment
message.
36.2
Advanced User Mode
Enabled
BOX TEMPERATURE F
36
SETPOINT F
STATUS OK
3. The Advanced User menus will be available for 60 minutes or until the START/RUN-OFF switch is placed in
the OFF position.
4. The system can be toggled between Driver Mode and Advanced User Mode by pressing and then releasing
the two outside soft keys simultaneously, and then pressing the “=” key.
When toggling from Advance User Mode to Driver Mode, “DRIVERS MODE ENABLED” will display for
5 seconds.
When toggling from Driver Mode to Advance User Mode, “ADVANCE USER MODE ENABLED” will dis-
play for 5 seconds.
3–15 62-11637
3.13 UNIT DATA
ALARM
START/STOP

CONTINUOUS

Selections
MENU

METERS DATA
1
2
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC Mode, press
the MENU key until UNIT DATA is displayed.
2. Press the UNIT DATA soft key to display the unit data screen.
UNIT DATA ENGINE
REFRIGERATION SENSORS
Unit Data Listing
REMOTE SENSORS
END OF LIST REFRIGERATION SYSTEM MENU
SYSTEM INFORMATION*
BACK EXIT
INSTALLED OPTIONS*
3. The Unit Data screen will display with a 15 second timeout. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the avail-
able unit data sub menus. With the desired sub-menu highlighted, press the “=” Key to view the data.
4. The selected sub-menu data will be displayed. For example, the Refrigeration Sensor display may include:
REFRIGERATION SENSORS (1 of 5)
Ambient Air Temp: 75.0 F
Return Air Temp: 38.0 F
Supply Air Temp: 37.0 F
Delta T: -1.0 F
Defrost Term Temp: 39.0 F
LOCK BACK EXIT
SCREEN
5. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the sub-menu data list.

6. To lock the present LCD display press the LOCK SCREEN soft key. The screen will highlight (white lettering
on a black background) to indicate it is locked and the soft key will change to UNLOCK SCREEN.
7. Press the UNLOCK SCREEN soft key to unlock the screen or press the ▲ or ▼ key to unlock the screen
and scroll through the sub-menu data selections. Press the BACK key to return to the sub-menu selection
screen or the EXIT key to return to the default screen.
UNIT DATA LIST
ENGINE REMOTE SENSORS SYSTEM INFORMATION*
Fuel level (Optional) Date*
Battery: O.K. Remote Sensor 1
Amp Draw (DC) Remote Sensor 2 Time*
Engine Coolant Temperature Trailer/Asset/Car ID*
Engine Speed* REFRIGERATION SYSTEM Unit Serial #*
Engine Load* Discharge Pressure* Unit Model #*
Compressor Discharge Temp* Micro Software Revision*
Suction Pressure Display Software revision*
REFRIGERATION SENSORS Suction Line Temp* Remote Display Rev*
Ambient Air Temp Evaporator Pressure* Main Micro Serial #*
Return Air Temp Evaporator Outlet Temp*
Supply Air Temp Suction Mod Valve Position* INSTALLED OPTIONS*
Delta–t Expansion Valve Position* Datatrack Installed*
Defrost Term Temp IntelliSet Installed*
* Data marked with asterisk will display in the Advanced User Mode only.
Refer to Table 3-1, for additional information on Unit Data readings.
62-11637 3–16
Table 3–1 Unit Data
DATA DEFINITION
ENGINE
This is only displayed when the optional sensor is installed and config-
FUEL LEVEL
ured YES. Displays % of fuel in tank.
BATTERY Battery voltage
AMP DRAW Battery charging or discharging amps
ENGINE COOLANT TEMP Engine coolant temperature
ENGINE SPEED Engine revolutions per minute
ENGINE LOAD Engine Rack (Throttle) Position (% open)
REFRIGERATION SENSORS
AMBIENT AIR TEMP Ambient (air entering condenser) air temperature
RETURN AIR TEMP Return (air entering evaporator) temperature
SUPPLY AIR TEMP Supply (air leaving evaporator) temperature
Supply air temperature minus return air temperature (A negative value
DELTA-T
indicates cooling and a positive value indicates heating.)
DEFROST TERM TEMP Defrost termination temperature
REMOTE SENSORS
This is the temperature at remote Temperature Sensor 1 or 2. (These
REMOTE SENSOR (1-2)
sensors are optional, and may not be applicable to this unit.)
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
DISCHARGE PRESSURE Refrigerant pressure leaving the compressor
COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE TEMP Refrigerant temperature leaving the compressor
SUCTION PRESSURE Refrigerant pressure entering the compressor
SUCTION LINE TEMP Refrigerant temperature entering the compressor
EVAPORATOR PRESSURE Refrigerant pressure leaving the evaporator
EVAPORATOR OUTLET TEMP Refrigerant temperature leaving the evaporator
SUCTION MOD VALVE % open of CSMV
EXPANSION VALVE % open of EVXV
SYSTEM INFORMATION
This is the current Date and Time that the system is using. This may be
DATE different than your actual time, depending on the time zone and day-
light-saving time selections made by the owner of the unit.
NOTE: The system uses a 24 hour clock. Hours 00 to 11 are AM and
TIME
hours 12 to 23 are PM.
TRAILER ID # Trailer ID (as entered by the user)
UNIT SERIAL # Unit serial number
UNIT MODEL # Unit model number (number entered in Configuration)
MICRO SOFTWARE REVISION Revision of software that is operating the main microprocessor module
DISPLAY SOFTWARE REVISION Revision of software that is operating the display module
REMOTE SOFTWARE REVISION Revision of software that is operating the Remote display (If installed)
MAIN MICROPROCESSOR SERIAL Serial Number of the main microprocessor module
NUMBER
INSTALLED OPTIONS (Will display if one or more options are installed)
INTELLISET If displayed, the IntelliSet option is installed.
DATATRAK If displayed, the DataTrak option is installed.
3–17 62-11637
3.14 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS
2 1
ALARM
3
START/STOP
ACTIVE ALARMS (2 of 5)
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST A13 High Discharge Pressure

A97 Check SV2 Circuit 3
MENU A86 Check UL2 Circuit
CLEAR BACK
ALARMS
the ALARM key.
2. If there are active alarms, the alarm number will be displayed preceded by the letter “A” (active alarm).
• If the alarm list is viewed when in the Driver Mode, the alarm descriptions will only display if the System is
configured to do so.
• When viewing the alarm list in the Advanced User Mode or Technician Mode the alarm description will
display, following the alarm number.
• Next to the ACTIVE ALARMS screen name in the status bar, information on the total number of alarms
and the position in the list of the highlighted alarm is provided. (In the preceding illustration there are 5
alarms and the second alarm is highlighted.)
The last alarm that occurred will be the first alarm displayed and so on.
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list of alarms.
4. To clear the alarms, press the CLEAR ALARMS soft key. The LCD Display will provide an “ACTIVE
ALARMS CLEARED” message to confirm the alarms have cleared.
5. If there are no active alarms, the LCD Display will provide a “NO ACTIVE ALARMS” message and then
return to the default display after 5 seconds.
-----
Alarms are stored in the Alarm List in the main microprocessor. Stored alarms may be viewed in the MessageCenter.
For a complete list of alarms, their meanings, and troubleshooting refer to Section 7.3.
TIP
Another way to clear active alarms is to turn the control system OFF and then back on using the
START/RUN - OFF switch
TIP
The inactive alarm list may only be viewed while in Technician Mode, refer to Section 5.2.2. Only
qualified refrigeration technicians should access the inactive alarm list. It is not intended for the use of
Drivers or Advanced Users.
62-11637 3–18
3.15 VIEW HOUR METERS
ALARM
START/STOP

CONTINUOUS

Selections
MENU

METERS DATA
1
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC Mode, press
the MENU key until HOUR METERS is displayed.
2. Press the HOUR METER soft key to display the hour meters screen.
3. The hour meter screen will display with a 15 second timeout.

STANDARD HOUR METERS (2 of 3)
Engine Hours 1050 Hours
Switch On Hours 1400 Hours
Total Run Hours 1050 Hours
END OF LIST
BACK EXIT
3.16 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL
DIESEL COOL
COOL
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Viewing
Menu Soft Key
Selections
Selections
Press
Press Menu Keyto
Menu Key toScroll
Scroll
MENU
INTELLISET DATA
LANGUAGE PRETRIP FUNCTIONS
HOUR UNIT
1 RECORDER METERS DATA
EXIT
1. With the system powered up (START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN position) or in PC Mode, and in
the Advanced User Mode, press the MENU key until FUNCTIONS is displayed.
2. Press the FUNCTIONS soft key to display the sub-menus as in Sample Screen A. Press the DOWN
ARROW key until the desired sub-menu is highlighted, as in Sample Screen B. Then press the “=” key to
enter the sub-menu. The highlight will move to the present setting, as in Sample Screen C.
3–19 62-11637
FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS (1 OF 5) FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (1 OF 3) FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (1 OF 3)
ECONOMY SETTINGS FUNCTION 1 SELECTION FUNCTION 1 SELECTION
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS FUNCTION 2 SELECTION FUNCTION 2 SELECTION
START-STOP SETTINGS FUNCTION 3 SELECTION FUNCTION 3 SELECTION
SAMPLE SCREEN A
OVERRIDES SAMPLE SCREEN B SAMPLE SCREEN C
VIEWING PREFERENCES
END OF LIST END OF LIST END OF LIST
BACK EXIT BACK EXIT BACK EXIT
3. Press either the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll through the selections until the desired setting is high-
lighted. Press the “=” key to save the setting to memory.
4. Continue as above to set additional Functions as required. Refer to Table 3-2 for additional information on
Functional Parameters.
Table 3–2 Functional Parameters
FUNCTION PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
SELECTIONS
NOTES:
1. Selections in BOLD are the default settings.
2. Any Function displayed with an asterisk (*) has been locked using the TRU-Tech program and cannot be
changed using the display mounted keys.
ECONOMY SETTINGS
LOW SPEED 0 MINS TO 255MINS (in Select the length of time the unit is to remain in low speed af-
DELAY S/S: 1 minute increments) ter starting, before transitioning to high speed, when in Start-
10 MIN Stop Operation.
LOW SPEED 0 MINS TO 255MINS (in Select the length of time the unit is to remain in low speed af-
DELAY CONT: 1 minute increments) ter starting, before transitioning to high speed, when in Con-
0 MIN tinuous Operation.
AIR FLOW NORMAL NORMAL = allows the unit to cycle from High Speed to Low
HIGH Speed, based on compartment temperature.
HIGH = Some products generate a considerable amount of
heat (heat of respiration) during transportation. This frequent-
ly occurs with produce. The HIGH selection is used for these
loads, if continuous high air flow is required to keep the entire
load at a constant temperature. The engine will remain in High
Speed when High is selected.
NOTE: HIGH AIR FLOW is not active with setpoints below
+10.4°F (-12.0°C).
DEFROST TIMER 1.5 HRS The defrost timer will automatically put the unit into the defrost
SET FOR 3 HRS cycle at the interval selected if DTT is below 40°F (4.4°C) or
the SAT is below 45°F (7.2°C).
6 HRS
Shorter times are generally used for warm, humid products
12 HRS like produce.
Longer times can be used for dry and frozen products.
NOTE: The timer increments time toward the next defrost
only when DTT is below 40°F and the unit is running.
FRESH PROTECT OFF OFF = FreshProtect is turned off.
A, B, C, D, E A through E each place an individual flexible limit on how far
below setpoint the supply air temperature can drop when in
Continuous Operation with a setpoint above 32°F (0°C).
Refer to Section Section 4.10.1 for more information on
FreshProtect.
62-11637 3–20
SELECTIONS
TEMP CONTROL RETURN AIR The evaporator has both a Return Air Sensor and a Supply Air
SUPPLY AIR Sensor.
RETURN AIR = With this setting the unit will operate so that
the return air (air entering the evaporator) will be controlled to
setpoint. Return air temperature is generally considered to be
a good sampling of the actual product temperature.
SUPPLY AIR = The unit will operate so that the supply air (air
leaving the evaporator) will be controlled to setpoint whenev-
er the setpoint is in the perishable range (greater than 10.4°F
(-12°C). When the setpoint is in the frozen range the unit will
control the return air as described in the preceding Return Air
choice.
OUT OF RANGE Metric English The value entered here is the number of degrees away from
ALARM OFF OFF setpoint the temperature may drift before it is considered
“Out-Of-Range” and the configured alarm or alarm and shut-
2°C 4°F down action will be activated.
3°C 5°F Refer to Alarm 00053 for more information.
4°C 7°F
AUTOFRESH AIR CLOSED Closed = AutoFresh Air Exchange assembly will be closed.
Open = Assembly will be open if the engine is running and the
OPEN setpoint is greater than 28.0°F (-2.22°C).
CFM CONTROL CFM Control = Assembly will be cycled open and closed over
a 20 minute time period. The length of time the assembly is
opened or closed is based on the Auto Fresh Air Control
Functional Parameter.
The CFM CONTROL will only be active if the engine is run-
ning and the setpoint is greater than 28.0°F (-2.22°C).
AUTOFRESH AIR 5 To 50 CFM (in 5 CFM When CFM Control is selected, this setting is used to set the
CONTROL increments) amount of air to be exchanged during each 20 minute cycle.
25 CFM
START-STOP SETTINGS
Time and Temperature values that control Start-Stop Operation are set in this section.
The system may be configured so that:
1. the same settings apply to any setpoint = “Together” or
2. the settings are different, depending on whether the setpoint is in the perishable range or in the frozen
range = “Separate”.
• If “together” is configured, there will be six settings with only the sixth applicable to just frozen range.
• If “Separate” is configured there will be eleven settings five labeled perishable and six labeled frozen.
MINIMUM RUN 4MINS This determines the minimum run time for perishable/frozen
TIME: TO setpoints in Start-Stop Operation.
60MINS (in 1 minute

increments)
MINIMUM OFF 10 to 90MINS (in 1 This determines the minimum off time for perishable/frozen
TIME: minute increments) setpoints in Start-Stop Operation.
30 MINS
3–21 62-11637
SELECTIONS
RESTART 5 to 18°F (0.28 to Following the Minimum Off Time, should a compartment tem-
TEMPERATURE 10°C) (in 0.5° incre- perature drift this far above or below setpoint in the Perishable
ments) Range or above setpoint in the Frozen Range, the unit will re-
5.4°F (3°C) start.
OVERRIDE 3.6 to 18°F (2 to1 0°C) This selects the override temperature for the Minimum Off
TEMPERATURE: (in 0.5 degree incre- Time portion of the Auto Start-Stop Off Cycle. During the Min-
ments) imum Off Time, should the refrigerated compartment tem-
3.6°F (2.0°C) perature drift this far above or below setpoint in the Perishable
Range, or above setpoint in the Frozen Range, the unit will
override the Minimum Off Time, and restart.
MAXIMUM OFF TIME: OFF OFF - There is no maximum off time.
10MINS When a minute value is selected, this is the longest amount
TO of time the unit will remain off during a (Perishable or Frozen
or both) Auto Start/Stop Off Cycle. When this time expires, the
255MINS (in 1 minute unit will restart and run for the Minimum Run Time, regardless
increments) of any temperature change inside the compartment.
FROZEN SHUTDOWN 0°F to 1.1°F This only applies to Frozen Setpoints in Start-Stop operation.
OFFSET: (0°C to 0.6°C) (in 0.1°F This offset is the number of degrees below setpoint that the
or C increments) unit will run before cycling off. This will allow for a lower aver-
age compartment temperature when considering temperature
rises during off cycles.
SLEEP MODE For complete instructions on entering and setting parameters for Sleep Mode refer to
Section 3.17.
OVERRIDES
OVERRIDE NO If the switches are all configured “Switch Not Installed”, this
REMOTE SWITCH YES parameter will not display.
1 SHUTDOWN NO = the system will respond to the switch as configured.
(REMS1)
YES = the configured action on activation of the switch will be
AND overridden and the action will be alarm only. The purpose of
this setting to temporarily override the Configuration setting in
OVERRIDE DOOR situations where shutdown or speed change is not desired.
SWITCH
SHUTDOWN (DS)
VIEWING PREFERENCES
DISPLAY °F Temperatures will display in either Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius
TEMPERATURE IN °C (°C). (for North American Units, this function may be locked)
DISPLAY PSIG Pressure will display in either psig or (bar).

PRESSURE IN BAR (for North American Units, this function may be locked)
DATE FORMAT MM/DD/YYYY Date will display in either US (MM/DD/YYYY) or European

DD/MM/YYYY (DD/MM/YYYY) format.
ALARM YES YES = In the Driver Mode, the alarm code and alarm descrip-
DESCRIPTIONS NO tion will be displayed.
NO = In the Driver Mode, only the alarm code will be dis-
played.
CONTRAST 0 TO 63 (In single Higher numbers increase the contrast of the display screen.
digit increments)
35
62-11637 3–22
3.17 SLEEP MODE
Sleep Mode is generally used in cold ambients when the unit will be off for an extended period of time with no product
inside the refrigerated compartment. Many times units are difficult to start due to a discharged battery, thickened
engine oil, etc. after time in cold ambient.
There is NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL in Sleep Mode and it should never be used if the compartment contains
perishable or frozen products.
In Sleep Mode the unit will “Wake Up” periodically and start the engine to keep the battery charged and the engine
warm.
ADDITIONAL SUB MENUS
1. “WAKE UP TIME” may be set to ON or OFF, the default setting is OFF.
a. When “WAKE UP TIME” is set to OFF the unit will remain in Sleep Mode until it is taken out manually (refer
to the preceding “TO EXIT SLEEP MODE” instruction).
b. When “WAKE UP TIME” is set to ON the “SET WAKEUP TIME” menu will become available.
Pressing the = key will allow the user to select the date and time the unit is to automatically wake up. The wake up
time must be at least 1 hour and no more than 8 days from the time the clock is set. The following information can
be entered:
• Month (1 to 12).
• Day (1 to 31).
• Year (2009 to 2099).
• Hour (0 to 23).
• Minute (0 to 59).
NOTE
The system uses a 24 hour clock. Hours 00 to 11 are AM and hours 12 to 23 are PM.
2. “RUN PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” may be set to YES or NO, the default setting is NO.
a. When “PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” is set to NO the unit will wake up at the designated time and control to
setpoint.
b. When “PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” is set to YES. the unit will wake up at the designated time, automatically
run Pretrip and then control to setpoint. “PRETRIP PASS/FAIL” will remain in the MessageCenter until it is
manually cleared by pressing any key.
If Sleep Mode is selected, when the unit is not running during a Start-Stop Off Cycle, any remaining Minimum Off
Time will be ignored, and the engine will start. It will run for 4 minutes (minimum), until the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 95°F (35°C), the battery is charged (“OK” is displayed in the battery unit data reading) and charging
amps are less than the configured setting.
When the unit is running while in Sleep Mode, “SLEEP WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL” will flash in the Mes-
sageCenter.
If the unit is already running when Sleep Mode is selected, it will continue to run until the conditions described
above are met.
While the unit is cycled off in Sleep Mode, “SLEEP MODE, OFF/ON TO WAKE” will be displayed in the Mes-
sageCenter. The display backlight will turn off after 5 minutes.
While in Sleep Mode, Unit Data and Alarm Lists may be viewed, and Functional Parameters may be viewed and
changed as necessary. However, Start-Stop/Continuous Run selections and setpoint can not be changed. Manual
Defrost and Pretrip can be initiated.
The unit will restart when engine coolant temperature drops below the configured restart temperature value or if the
battery voltage drops below the configured battery restart value.
NOTE
In the event that the Engine Coolant Temperature sensor fails, Sleep Mode will operate as follows:
3–23 62-11637
In ambients above 32°F (0°C), the unit will run as above, and will monitor battery voltage and charging amps only
(according to the Configuration setting).
In ambients below 32°F (0°C), the unit will run for 20 minutes minimum run time, then restart every 60 minutes
(maximum off time). Battery voltage and amperage will be monitored normally.
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL
DIESEL COOL
COOL
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Viewing
Menu Soft Key
Selections
Selections
Press
Press Menu Keyto
Menu Key toScroll
Scroll
MENU
INTELLISET DATA
LANGUAGE PRETRIP FUNCTIONS
HOUR UNIT
1 RECORDER METERS DATA
EXIT
1. To place the unit in Sleep Mode, enter the Advanced User Functional parameter screen as described in
Section 3.16.
2. 2. Press the DOWN ARROW key until the START-STOP SETTINGS sub-menu is highlighted and then
press the “=” key to enter the menu.
FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS (3 OF 4)
ECONOMY SETTINGS
TEMPERATURE SETTINGS
START-STOP SETTINGS
VIEWING PREFERENCES
END OF LIST
BACK EXIT
3. Press the DOWN ARROW key until the Functional Parameter “SLEEP MODE SETTINGS” is highlighted.
Press the “=” key.
4. Press either the UP or DOWN ARROW key until “ON” is highlighted. Press the “=” key to save the setting to
memory, the unit is now in Sleep Mode.
5. Additional Functional Parameter sub menu selections for “wake up time” and “run pretrip at wake” will now
be available and may be saved to memory following the key stroke sequence in the preceding step. Refer to
the following for information on these settings.
TO EXIT SLEEP MODE
Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position, then back to the START/RUN position.
62-11637 3–24
3.18 STOPPING UNIT
ALARM
START/STOP

CONTINUOUS
36 .2
DEFROST
36 To stop the unit, place the

MENU START/RUN-OFF switch in
BOX TEMPERATURE F SETPOINT F
the OFF position. The unit
STATUS OK
will shutdown immediately
while the system completes
a shutdown sequence and
then the LCD display will go
blank.
I START/RUN
The engine will stop and the
display will turn off.
O OFF
NOTES:
• The system will close the compressor suction modulation valve (CSMV) and evaporator expansion valve
(EVXV) to 0% open before turning off.
• Due to internal processing, turning the START/RUN - OFF switch OFF then back to the START/RUN posi-
tion will result in a 4 to 50 second delay between the display going off and coming back on again.
3.19 OPTION - DataTrak
DataTrak allows remote communication with the APX control system (cellular, satellite, etc).
One Way Communication providers can request data from the System and transmit it via their equipment to
another location. This is typically done via the Internet to any destination in the world.
! WARNING
APX control system equipped units may start automatically at any time the START/ RUN - OFF
switch is not in the OFF position. Also, the unit may be fitted with two way communication
equipment that will allow starting of the unit from a remote location even though the switch is
in the OFF position.
Two Way Communication providers can also send commands via their equipment to the control system to start or
stop the unit, change settings and the way the System is operating the unit.
DataTrak is an optional feature. The DataTrak option is generally factory installed, however it can be installed in
the field by inserting a DataTrak option USB memory device into the USB interface port and following the on-
screen instructions.
The DataTrak Option installation can be confirmed by scrolling through the Advanced User Unit Data (refer to Sec-
tion 3.13). DataTrak will be listed under the Installed Options heading if it is installed.
Once DataTrak is installed, the control system must be configured for the provider that will be connecting to it (refer
to Section 5.2.3). The Satellite Com Configuration can be set for “Qualcomm” or “Other”. If the provider is “Qual-
comm” and the original Qualcomm TrailerTracs system is being used then the “Qualcomm” selection must be
made. If the provider is Qualcomm and the newer TrailerTracs T2 system is being used or another communica-
tions provider is used, the “Other” selection.
Carrier Transicold has worked with approved communication providers with recommended installation locations,
and wiring connections to Carrier units. Instructions for installing this equipment is supplied by each individual pro-
vider, and not by Carrier Transicold. Communications electrical harnesses are available from Carrier Transicold
Performance Parts Group (PPG).
3–25 62-11637
3.20 REMOTE PANEL
The unit may be fitted with an optional remote control panel. The remote panel, which is very similar to the main
control panel, displays compartment setpoints, compartment temperatures and operating modes (heat, cool or
defrost). The setpoint may be modified and the unit may be started and stopped using the remote panel.
This compact remote panel can be mounted to suit the individual operator’s preferences − on the front bulkhead, or
in the compartment (including in the wall itself). Remote Panel keys, softkeys and alarm indicators are in the same
locations as the main APX display module.
START/STOP -
Alarm LED ALARM Key = (Select) Key
CONTINUOUS Key
ALARM
START/STOP
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Key DEFROST Arrow
Keys
MENU
MENU Key
LCD Display
Soft Keys
The Remote Panel can be used to:

Turn the unit On/Off
Check compartment temperatures
Check and change setpoints
Initiate manual defrost
Check mode of operation
Initiate Pre−trip
The Remote Panel cannot be used to:
Enter Advance User and Technician modes
Access any USB Functions; USB menus, PC Mode, Print
The Remote Panel does not have the following features:
There is no USB port on the remote panel
There is no SROS (Start/Run/Off) switch at the remote panel. Remote Panel unit ON/Off is controlled by
the “UNIT ON/OFF” softkey (replaces the Engine Hours softkey in the main display)
The following unit functions are controlled the same as the main display:
Display compartment temperatures − Section 3.2
Display the current mode of operation for each compartment − Section 3.2
Intelliset selection − Section 3.4
Initiate Pretrip − Section 3.5
Initiate Manual Defrost / Defrost Indication − Section 3.10
Control display indication lock − Section 3.13
62-11637 3–26
Turning the Unit ON/OFF Using the Remote Panel:
NOTES
The unit can be shutdown using either the remote panel or the SROS switch on the Main Panel. The remote panel
cannot operate if the SROS switch is in the OFF position.
In order to prevent a constant drain on the battery, the remote panel illuminates when the SROS switch is turned on,
but the remote panel will turn off after 30 minutes of inactivity. To turn the remote panel back on, simply press any but-
ton on the remote panel. The remote panel will turn off again after 30 minutes of inactivity.
1. On the remote panel press and release the “MENU” key until the “UNIT ON/OFF” soft key is displayed.
NOTE
The “UNIT ON/OFF” soft key on the remote panel takes the place of the “ENGINE HOURS” softkey in the main dis-
play.
2. To turn the unit ON, press the “UNIT ON/OFF” softkey. The remote display will read “UNIT ON”
3. To turn the unit OFF, press the “UNIT ON/OFF” softkey. The remote display will read “UNIT SHUT DOWN
BY REMOTE PANEL”
3–27 62-11637
SECTION 4 - ENGINE AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL
4.14.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1

4.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION - ELECTRICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.3 ENGINE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.3.1 Engine Start-Up Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
4.3.2 Transition To High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–2
4.4 MODES OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.1 Pull Down/Pull-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.2 Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.3 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–3
4.4.4 UltraFresh Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
a. Cool Pulsed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
b. Null Pulsed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
c. Heat Pulsed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
d. UltraFresh 3 CSMV/EVXV control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.4.5 UltraFreeze Temperature Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.4.6 Defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.4.7 Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–4
4.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.5.1 Temperature Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.5.2 Perishable And Frozen Setpoint Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.6.1 Start-Stop Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.6.2 Stop Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–5
4.6.3 Re-Start Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–6
4.6.4 Start-Stop Operating Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.7 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–7
4.8 AUTOFRESH AIR EXCHANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–8
4.9 DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.1 Defrost Initiation And Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.2 Normal Defrost Operation (Ambient Air Temperature less than 80°F (26.7°C) . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.3 Normal Defrost Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.4 Normal Defrost Termination Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–9
4.9.5 High Ambient Defrost Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.9.6 High Ambient Defrost Termination Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.10 USER SELECTED OVERRIDE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.10.1 FreshProtectTM Supply Air Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.10.2 Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–10
4.10.3 ProductShield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–12
4.10.4 Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.11 PREPROGRAMMED SOFTWARE OVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.11.1 Cargo Protect Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.11.2 Engine Speed Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–14
4.11.3 Unloader Control Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–15
4.11.4 CSMV Control Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–16
62-11637
SECTION 4
ENGINE AND TEMPERATURE CONTROL
NOTES
1. If the unit is in an alarm condition, the control system alarm response may override the operation described
herein. If an alarm is displayed in the MessageCenter, refer to the specific alarm description in Section 9 for
“Unit Control” descriptions.
2. With the complex control interactions in use with the APX control system there are many user selected and
preprogrammed software overrides which may change the operation of the unit. Refer to Section 4.10 &
Section 4.11 for complete descriptions of these features.
4.1 INTRODUCTION To start the unit, SROS is placed in the START/RUN
position. Power flows from SROS through the J1
This section describes operation of the unit when in
jumper and high pressure switch (HPS) to the power
Start-Stop Operation and Continuous Operation.
enable relay (PER) coil. Confirmation of power circuits
For a description and flow diagram of the refrigerant are established from splice point SP−9 back to the
system component interaction while in cooling, refer to main microprocessor at 2MM−35 and SP−5 to
Section 2.12. For a description and flow diagram of the 3MM−16. If either of these circuits is broken, the appro-
refrigerant system component interaction while in heat- priate alarm will be activated.
ing, refer to Section 2.13.
If conditions are correct for operation, the main micro-
4.2 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION - ELECTRICAL processor will energize PER by providing ground
through PCM16 from 3MM18. Energizing PER closes
With the battery connected (see schematic diagram its normally open contacts to provide power:
Section 10), power is available from the battery
through fuse F7: • through fuse F10 to the main microprocessor at
3MM−34 & 3MM−23.
• and fuse F1 to the module logic circuit at main
microprocessor module (MM) terminal 1MM−6, • through fuse F12 for satellite communication
through the stepper valve module (from 1MM−8 (SATPWR).
to 1SMV−6) and to the display module (from • through fuse F11 for the light bar (LB) green LED’s.
1SVM−8 to DM−10),
• Potential power is also established through fuse
• and fuse F3, PCM−34 and SP−6 to SVM at F10 for the AFAR coil & FHR coil, and through
2SVM−22 (for operation of the valves), fuse F8 for the fuel level sensor (FLS).
• and through SP−6 to the engine control unit During operation the main microprocessor will com-
(ENCU) at ENCU−22. plete the potential circuits, by supplying ground, ener-
Potential power is also established for the starter sole- gizing or de−energize the required components.
noid contactor (SSC) normally open contacts, the Once the SROS is placed in the START/RUN position,
engine preheat transistor (EPHT), fuel heater relay the compressor suction modulating valve (CSMV) and
(FHR) normally open contacts, AutoFresh Air relay evaporator expansion valve (EVXV) will open to a pre-
(AFAR) normally open contacts, power enable relay determined position, to equalize system pressure, and
(PER) normally open contacts (through fuse F5), the then close (minimum allowed % open) before the unit
buzzer (B − through fuse F1) and the START/RUN − starts.
OFF switch (SROS).
NOTE
Once the module logic circuit is powered, the modules
The unit will not restart for at least 30 sec-
begin to communicate over the controlled area network
onds following a shutdown.
(CAN).
The “HI” CAN connectivity is established from the main 4.3 ENGINE CONTROL
microprocessor (1MM−2) through SP−1 to the stepper Engine control consists of engine start-up and speed
valve module (1SVM−5) and from the stepper valve control.
module (1SVM−2) to the display module (DM−2). The
connectivity also continues from SP−1 to the engine 4.3.1 Engine Start-Up Sequence
control unit (ENCU−23). On command to perform a Start-up the main micropro-
The “LO” CAN connectivity is established from the cessor will supply power from 3MM-10 to the fuel pump
main microprocessor (1MM−4) through SP−4 to the (FP) and from 3MM−9 to ENCU-44. This signals the
stepper valve module (1SVM−7) and from the stepper ENCU that engine operation is required. The control
valve module (1SVM−4) to the display module (DM−6). system will then enter the engine start sequence. During
The connectivity also continues from SP−4 to the the start sequence the engine is operated in low speed.
engine control unit (ENCU−24). Following start, the refrigeration system will then operate
in the mode(s) required for temperature control.
4–1 62-11637
The engine start sequence consists of periods of time the cranking period. The engine is considered to be
with the engine preheater (EPH − power from 3MM−14 running, and the start sequence will be stopped, when
through PCM −27 to EPHT) and starter (SM − power engine speed is greater than 1000 rpm and the engine
from 3MM−12 to SS, closing the SSC contacts) ener- oil pressure switch (ENOPS) is closed.
gized and de-energized for up to three start attempts During the second and third attempts, the control sys-
(see Figure 4.1), the pre-heat time varies in duration tem will monitor additional inputs.
based on engine coolant temperature (see Table 4–1).
• When engine speed reading is less that 1000 rpm,
Figure 4.1 Auto Start Sequence ambient temperature is above 32°F (0°C) and the
ENOPS is closed - the A00130 - “CHECK
ENGINE 0 - 180 ENGINE RPM SENSOR” alarm will be activated
RUNNING Seconds and the engine will be considered running.
following start
(preheat) • When engine speed reading is less that 1000
rpm, ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C),
3 to 10 CRANK
(with preheat) the ENOPS is closed and DC current is more
Seconds
than 2 amps - the A00130 - “CHECK ENGINE
SECOND RPM SENSOR” alarm will be activated and the
5 SEC. BUZZER AND engine will be considered running.
0 to 30 THIRD
Seconds PREHEAT ATTEMPTS Once the engine is considered running, the control sys-
(If required) tem will keep the preheater energized for an additional
0 to 180 seconds of Post Heat, depending on engine
coolant temperature (refer to Table 4–1).
15 Seconds
STOP During the start sequence the control system monitors
engine speed while cranking. If engine speed drops
ENGINE 0 - 180 below 50 rpm for three seconds the starter solenoid
RUNNING Seconds contactor will be de-energized and the A00035 -
(preheat) following start “CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT” alarm will be activated.
3 to 10 CRANK If the unit fails to start after three start attempts, the
Seconds (with preheat) A00031 - “FAILED TO START-AUTO“ alarm will be
activated.
5 SEC. BUZZER FIRST If the unit is equipped with a fuel heater, the control
0 to 30 ATTEMPT system will monitor ambient temperature. If ambient is
Seconds PREHEAT below 77°F (25°C) the fuel heater relay (FHR) will be
(If required) energized. Energizing FHR closes its normally open
contacts to supply power from fuse F14, through the
fuel heater temperature switch (FHTS) to the heater.
Refer to Section 2.7 for FHTS settings.
Table 4–1 Engine Preheat Time
4.3.2 Transition To High Speed
Engine Coolant Heat Time in Seconds
After a successful start, the control system may call for
Temperature Preheat Post Heat the engine to transition to high speed. When high speed
is required, the main microprocessor will provide a signal
Less than 33°F (1.0°C) 30 180
through the CAN system to the ENCU, calling for the
33°F to 51°F (1.0°C to speed change. Three factors control this transition.
20 120
11°C) • First: transition may be delayed if a time value is
51°F to 78°F (11°C to 26°C) 10 60 entered in the HIGH SPEED DELAY Configura-
tion. The delay may be set to 0 to 10 minutes. The
Greater than 78°F (26°C) 0 0 0 factory default setting is 1 minute.
If the A00129 - “CHECK ENGINE COOLANT SEN- • Second: if the engine is started when the coolant
SOR” alarm is active, the ambient temperature sensor temperature is 79°F (26°C) or below it will remain
will be used. If both the A00129 - “CHECK ENGINE in low speed until the coolant temperature reaches
COOLANT SENSOR” alarm and the A00121 - “CHECK 79°F (26°C) or it has operated for a minimum of 15
AMBIENT SENSOR” alarms are active the control sys- seconds. Once the coolant temperature reaches
79°F (26°C) the engine may transition to high
tem assumes a temperature of less than 32°F (0°C) for
speed.
the preheat timing.
• Third: transition will be based on the need for tem-
During the last five seconds of preheat OR for 5 sec-
perature control. Generally, the engine will operate
onds before a start attempt, if no preheat is required,
in high speed when the unit is in Pulldown or Pull-
the buzzer (B) is energized; then the starter solenoid
Up Mode (full capacity required) and in low speed
contactor (SSC) will be energized for a maximum of ten
when less than full capacity is required.
seconds while the engine condition is checked during
62-11637 4–2
4.4 MODES OF OPERATION 4.4.2 Cooling
Once the engine is started, the system will operate in In the Cool Mode, the control system will operate the
Start-Stop or Continuous Operation energizing and de- unit controls as follows:
energizing the following components: SV1 SV2 SV4 Engine
• SV1 - Energized (closed) through main micro- Speed
processor terminal 3MM-1.
Open Open Closed See Note 1
• SV2 - Energized (opened) through main micro- Clutch UL1 & UL2 CSMV EVXV
Output
• SV4 - Energized (opened) through main micro- Engage See Note 2 See Note 2 Se Note 3
• SPEED - Transition to high speed when main NOTE
microprocessor provides a signal through the 1. The selected temperature control sensor deter-
CAN system to the ENCU. mines if the unit is running high or low speed.
• CLUTCH - Energized (engaged) through main 2. The control system monitors the suction pres-
microprocessor terminal 3MM-11. sure & ambient temperature and calculates the
system load. If required, the system will unload
• UL1 - Energized (unloaded) through main micro-
cylinders and modulate the CSMV to keep the
load within required limits. Refer to Section
• UL2 - Energized (unloaded) through main micro- 4.11.3 and Section 4.11.4.
3. Modulated to control superheat.
• CSMV - Opened and closed by the Stepper
Valve Module (SVM) through module terminals 4.4.3 Heating
2SVM−2, 2SVM−3, 2SVM−4 & 2SM−5. When in Heat Mode, the control system will operate the
• EVXV - Opened and closed by the Stepper unit controls as follows:
Valve Module (SVM) through module terminals • SV4 - SV4 is open.
2SVM−6, 2SVM−7, 2SVM−8, 2SVM−9 & • CSMV/EVXV - CSMV & EVXV are 100% open.
2SVM−10.
• Clutch - The clutch is engaged.
4.4.1 Pull Down/Pull-Up • SV1 - SV1 is closed. If discharge pressure rises
When in Pulldown or Pull-up, the refrigeration system to 390psig (26.5 bar), the SV1 valve will open for
will operate with the compressor loaded (six cylinders) 1 second and continue to cycle as often as every
and in high speed. 30 seconds to reduce the pressure to less than
390psig (26.5 bar).
Pulldown/Pull-Up will be entered:
• Engine Speed - When in Start-Stop Operation
• following a Start-Up. the engine will remain in high speed to raise the
• following a setpoint change. control temperature as quickly as possible.
When in Continuous Operation the engine will
• following an operational change (Start-Stop be in high speed when control temperature is
Operation vs Continuous Operation). greater than 3.6°F (2°C) below set point and will
• following a defrost termination. remain in high speed until the control tempera-
ture is raised to 3.2°F (1.8°C) below setpoint.
• following a pretrip termination.
• Unloaders - When in Start-Stop Operation the
• when in a Start-Stop ON Cycle and all other compressor will remain fully loaded to raise the
Stop Parameters have been met except the control temperature as quickly as possible.
compartment temperature Stop Parameter. When in Continuous Operation the compressor
Pulldown/Pull-Up will end when one of the following will be fully loaded when control temperature is
occurs: greater than 2.7°F (1.5°C) below set point. UL1
& UL2 will unload when the control temperature
• when the control system is calling for low speed.
is raised to 2.3°F (1.3°C) below setpoint.
• when in Start-Stop Operation and the compart- • SV2 - SV2 is closed. When conditions allow,
ment temperature Stop Parameter has been sat- additional heating capacity is obtained by open-
isfied while one or more of the other Stop ing SV2 to allow additional refrigerant to be
Parameters has not. metered into the hot gas cycle (through the
• when in continuous operation and the control sys- evaporator expansion valve). This flow is estab-
tem has calculated pulldown or pull-up is to end. lished (even though SV1 is closed) by the hot
gas bypass line which functions to raise the
receiver pressure.
4–3 62-11637
As the system operates in the Heat Mode with SV2 Note: For CSMV/EVXV control, see following step d.
closed, discharge pressure tends to decrease. As the
system operates in the Heat Mode with SV2 open dis- c. Heat Pulsed Mode
charge pressure tends to increase. Control of the valve SV1 SV2 SV4 Engine
is dependent on discharge pressure and ambient tem- Speed
perature. The valve is opened (on a discharge pres-
sure fall) at 200 PSIG (13.6 bar), the valve is closed Closed Closed Open Low
(on a discharge pressure rise) at 300 PSIG (20.4 bar). Clutch CSMV/
UL1 & UL2
When the ambient temperature is below 50°F (10°C) Output EVXV
SV2 will be opened when discharge pressure Engage Unload See Note
decreases to the opening pressure and remain open
until discharge pressure rises to the close pressure. Note: For CSMV/EVXV control, see following step d.
When the ambient temperature is above 50°F (10°C) UltraFresh will modify the length of each mode in 10
SV2 will be pulsed, open for one second and then second cycles. That is, if the unit is in Cool Pulse
closed for 10 seconds. During the 10 second closed Mode, the unit may run in cool for up to nine seconds,
period the system pressures will be allowed to balance then null for one second, if the Control Temperature is
out due to the additional refrigerant in the hot gas away from setpoint. As the Control Temperature
cycle. The pulse will continue, one second open and comes closer to setpoint, the length of cool pulse time
ten seconds closed, until discharge pressure increases will decrease, and the amount of null time will increase.
to the close pressure. However, the combination of the two will always equal
10 seconds. The same is true for the Heat Pulse Mode.
4.4.4 UltraFresh Temperature Control
UltraFresh 3 is an advanced method of temperature d. UltraFresh 3 CSMV/EVXV control
control for both Perishable and Frozen ranges. It pro- The CSMV will automatically go to 30% when Ultra
duces a reduced capacity state by throttling the CSMV Fresh 3 is entered. The CSMV will usually control
and pulsing the refrigerant control solenoid valves. between 30% and 4% depending on the controlling
UltraFresh uses both the supply and return air sensors probe temperature and suction pressure. However, it
to control compartment temperature. can go above 30% for short periods of time. For exam-
ple, high ambients and low setpoints may cause the
The sensor selected in the TEMP CONTROL Func- CSMV to open higher than 30%. The EVXV will be
tional Parameter is the probe that will be used to deter- modulated to control superheat when in cooling and
mine when the temperature is at setpoint. 100% open in heating.
Reduced capacity is produced between heating and
4.4.5 UltraFreeze Temperature Control
cooling by a set of modes known as Cool Pulsed Mode,
Heat Pulsed Mode and Null Pulsed Mode. These For frozen setpoints, a modified temperature control
modes are not constant operating modes, they operate will be used to keep the unit from over cooling and driv-
for a few seconds at a time. During null, the heat and ing the box temperature far below setpoint. UltraFreeze
cool valves are opened simultaneously to reduce either operates similar to UltraFresh and acts to control the
the heating or cooling capacity. In these modes (Refer compartment temperature from exceeding 3° F (1.6° C)
to the following charts), the unit will pulse between cool below setpoint When UltraFreeze is active it is normal
and null, or heat and Null in 10 second increments. The to hear the refrigerant solenoid valves energize and de-
capacity is varied by adjusting the pulse rate. energize every few seconds. UltraFreeze is always
active in Continuous Operation, should the unit be
a. Cool Pulsed Mode required to continue to run after the box temperature is
SV1 SV2 SV4 Engine satisfied in Start-Stop Operation - due to either low bat-
Speed tery condition or low engine coolant temperature - the
UltraFreeze logic will control to the 3° F (1.6° C) below
Open Open Closed Low
setpoint offset until all conditions for an off cycle are
Clutch CSMV/ met and the unit cycles off.
UL1 & UL2
Output EVXV
Engage Unload See Note 4.4.6 Defrost
Refer to Section 4.9 for a description of defrost.
Note: For CSMV/EVXV control, see following step d.
b. Null Pulsed Mode 4.4.7 Overrides
SV1 SV2 SV4 Engine With the complex control interactions in use with the
Speed APX control system there are many user selected and
preprogrammed software overrides and Configuration
Open Open Open Low settings which may change the operation of the unit.
Clutch CSMV/ Refer to Section 4.10 & Section 4.11 for complete
UL1 & UL2
Output EVXV descriptions of these features.
Engage Unload See Note
62-11637 4–4
4.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL • When SEPARATE is chosen the control action
will be different, depending on whether the set-
4.5.1 Temperature Determination point is in the Perishable Range or in the Frozen
The control system monitors the temperature readings Range (refer to Section 4.5.2).
from the supply and return temperature sensors to • When TOGETHER is chosen, the same settings
determine the mode of operation required to maintain
apply to any setpoint.
compartment temperature in accordance with the set-
point. If TOGETHER is selected, then the following Func-
The sensor used for temperature control is dependent tional Parameter values will be available for use:
on the selection made in the TEMP CONTROL Func- • MINIMUM RUN TIME
tional Parameter.
• MINIMUM OFF TIME
• If the selection is RETURN AIR the return air
sensor (RAT) will be used, for any setpoint. • RESTART TEMPERATURE
• If the selection is SUPPLY AIR the control sys- • OVERRIDE TEMP

tem will switch to the supply air sensor (SAT) • MAXIMUM OFF TIME
when operating with a perishable setpoint (refer
to Section 4.5.2 for more information on frozen • FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET
and perishable setpoints) and the return air sen- If SEPARATE is selected, then the following Functional
sor will continue to be used for frozen setpoints. Parameter values will be available for use:
4.5.2 Perishable And Frozen Setpoint Ranges • PERISHABLE MINIMUM RUN TIME
There are two ranges defined for setpoint. • PERISHABLE MINIMUM OFF TIME
a. Perishable Range = setpoints above +10.4°F (- • PERISHABLE RESTART TEMPERATURE

12°C). • PERISHABLE OVERRIDE TEMP
b. Frozen Range = setpoints at or below +10.4°F (- • PERISHABLE MAXIMUM OFF TIME
12°C).
• FROZEN MINIMUM RUN TIME
4.6 START-STOP OPERATION • FROZEN MINIMUM OFF TIME
Start-Stop is provided to reduce fuel or power con- • FROZEN RESTART TEMPERATURE
sumption. This feature allows full automatic control of
the unit by monitoring compartment temperature, bat- • FROZEN OVERRIDE TEMP
tery condition and engine coolant temperature.
• FROZEN MAXIMUM OFF TIME
The main function of Start-Stop Operation is to shutdown
the engine after certain conditions are met (to provide an • FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET
efficient temperature control system) and to initiate a
restart sequence after certain conditions are met. The NOTE
Start-Stop/Continuous key is pressed to select between In the event that this Configuration was set
Continuous and Start-Stop Operation. The mode of oper- to SEPARATE and the eleven Functional
ation will be indicated in the status bar. Parameters for Perishable and Frozen have
been set and then the Configuration is
NOTE changed from SEPARATE to TOGETHER,
The control system may be locked so that the values from the Perishable settings will
the unit will always operate in Start-Stop be the ones that will be used.
whenever the setpoint is within a specific
range. Refer to Range Lock (Section 4.6.2 Stop Parameters
4.10.2) for additional information. Whenever the unit starts in Start-Stop Operation, it will
remain in the Start-Stop ON cycle until all five of the fol-
4.6.1 Start-Stop Configuration lowing criteria have been satisfied:
Start-Stop Operation is dependent on both Configura- 1. It has run for the selected Minimum Run Time
tion and Functional Parameter settings. The first set-
t i n g t o b e c o n s i d e r e d i s t h e S TA R T- S T O P The MINIMUM RUN TIME is selected in the control
PARAMETERS Configuration. This setting determines system Functional Parameters. The purpose of this is
control actions when in the Perishable Range or Fro- to force the unit to run long enough to completely circu-
zen Range. The available settings are TOGETHER late the air inside the compartment, and to ensure that
and SEPARATE. the product temperature is at setpoint. This value may
be set from 4 to 60 minutes in 1 minute intervals. The
factory default setting is 4 minutes.
4–5 62-11637
2. The engine coolant temperature has warmed If battery voltage is at or below the VOLTAGE FOR
Each time the unit is started it must continue to run until START-STOP RESTART Configuration value the
the coolant temperature rises to 95°F (35°C) to ensure engine will be started. The value may be set from 12.0
it has fully warmed up before shutdown is allowed. to 12.8 volts. The factory default setting is 12.2 volts.
3. The battery is fully charged - Voltage If this is the only reason operation is required, the unit
will operate as if it is in Continuous Operation until the
A good battery is defined as having 13.4 VDC at 77°F
requirement has been met.
(25°C). The control system will calculate the equivalent
voltage based on the ambient temperature and shut- 3. The Maximum Off Time has expired
down will be allowed when battery voltage is at or In some ambient conditions there are times when the
above the calculated value. unit may remain in a Start-Stop Off cycle for extended
4. The battery is fully charged - Amperage periods of time. To ensure that the entire load stays
within the normal restart temperature range, the MAXI-
The control system will calculate the average current
MUM OFF TIME Functional Parameter may be used to
draw over a 20 second period. Once this average
force the unit to restart to circulate air in the compart-
drops below the selected value, shutdown will be
ment. This will ensure there are no hot spots and the
allowed. The CURRENT FOR START-STOP SHUT-
temperature sensor reading accurately reflects product
OFF is selected in the control system Configurations.
temperature. The parameter value may be set to 0 min-
The value may be set from 1 to 10 amps in 0.5 amp
utes or from 10 to 225 minutes in 1 minute intervals.
intervals. The factory default setting is 7 amps.
If the MAXIMUM OFF TIME is 0 minutes, there is no
5. The compartment temperature requirement is
maximum off time for Start-Stop and the unit will
satisfied
remain off. The factory default setting is 0 minutes.
In Start-Stop Operation the refrigeration system will
operate in Pulldown or Pull-Up Mode in order to reach If this is the only reason operation is required, the unit
the shutdown condition as quickly as possible. will operate as if it is in Continuous Operation until the
requirement has been met.
Shutdown will be allowed when the compartment tem-
perature is within 0.5°F (0.3°C) of setpoint, for opera- 4. The Minimum Off Time has expired
tion in the Perishable Range. In the Frozen Range, The MINIMUM OFF TIME Functional Parameter set-
shutdown will be allowed when the compartment tem- ting allows the unit to remain off for extended periods of
perature is calculated to be within 0.5°F minus the time, maximizing fuel/power economy. The unit may
FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET (0.3°C minus the not be restarted until the MINIMUM OFF TIME has
FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET) of setpoint. expired and the compartment temperature is greater
The FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET Functional than the PERISHABLE RESTART TEMPERATURE
Parameter may be set from 0 to 3.6°F (0 to 2°C) in value selected in the Functional Parameters away from
0.5(C or F) increments. The factory default setting is setpoint. In the Frozen Range, restart is allowed when
0°F (0°C). the compartment temperature is calculated to be
greater than 0.5°F above setpoint. The MINIUMUM
4.6.3 Re-Start Parameters OFF TIME parameter value may be set from 10 to 90
minutes in 1 minute intervals. The factory default set-
While the unit is in a Start-Stop OFF Cycle, restart will
ting is 20 minutes. The RESTART TEMPERATURE
be initiated when one of the following conditions
value may be set from 0.5 to 18°F (0.28 to 10°C) in 0.5
occurs:
(F or C) increments. The factory default is 3.6°F (2°C).
NOTE If this is the only reason operation is required, the unit
In Start−Stop Operation when the setpoint is in will operate as if it is in Continuous Operation until the
the frozen range (below +10.4°F = -12°C), the unit requirement has been met.
will not restart when the temperature is below set-
point except as indicated in the following. 5. Compartment temperature has exceeded the
Override Functional Parameter value
1. Engine coolant temperature drops below During MINIMUM OFF TIME the control system continu-
selected Configuration value ally monitors the refrigerated compartment temperature
The control system will monitor coolant temperature. If and the override functional parameter value. During the
coolant temperature drops below the ENGINE TEM- Minimum Off Time, should the refrigerated compartment
PERATURE FOR RESTART Configuration value the temperature drift this far above or below setpoint in the
engine will be started. The Configuration value may be Perishable Range, or above setpoint in the Frozen
set from 10 to 32°F (-12.2 to 0°C) in 0.5(C or F) incre- Range, the unit will override the Minimum Off Time, and
ments. The factory default setting is 32°F (0°C). restart. The value may be set from 0.5 to 18°F (0.28 to
If this is the only reason operation is required, the unit 10°C) in 0.5° increments. The factory default setting is
will operate as if it is in Continuous Operation until the 5.5°F (3°C).
requirement has been met. Whenever the unit restarts, temperature control will be in
the Pulldown or Pull-Up Mode (refer to Section 4.4.1).
2. Battery voltage falls below selected Configura-
tion value
The control system will monitor battery voltage.
62-11637 4–6
Figure 4.2 Start-Stop Default Operating Sequence
FALLING
CSMV CONTROL
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH POINT Pull Down
+3.6 F (+2.0 C )
+0.5 F (+0.3 C )
Setpoint Start-Stop Setpoint

CSMV - 0%
Off Cycle
-0.5 F (+0.3 C )
-3.6 F (-2.0 C )
CSMV - 100%
Pull-Up
RISING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH POINT
Switch Point = Controlling Temperature - Setpoint

+ results are above setpoint, - results are below setpoint
*Switch points are the same for Perishable Range and Frozen Range
except in Frozen Range heating is not allowed.
4.6.4 Start-Stop Operating Sequence

NOTE
The operating sequence for Start-Stop Operation The control system may be locked so that
under the default Configuration and Functional Param- the unit will always operate in Start-Stop or
eter settings is provided in Figure 4.3. in Continuous whenever the setpoint is
within a specific range. Refer to Range Lock
4.7 CONTINUOUS OPERATION (Section 4.10.2) for additional information.
In Continuous Operation, the unit will not shutdown In Continuous Operation Pulldown or Pull-up will con-
except in response to a shutdown alarm. Temperature tinue until the control system has calculated it is to end.
control in the compartment will operate under Pull- The calculation determines the average temperature
down, Pull-Up, Cooling, Heating and Ultra Fresh. using the formula:
Continuous Operation is normally used for fresh pro- (SAT -RAT) / 2 = Calculated Average Temperature
duce and other sensitive product loads. The Start-Stop/
Continuous key is pressed to switch between Continu- When the Control Temperature is within the calculated
ous Operation and Start-Stop Operation. The mode of average temperature of set point, Pulldown or Pull-up
operation will be indicated in the status bar. ends. Once Pulldown or Pull-up ends the system will
operate in accordance with Table 4–2 & Figure 4.3.
The operating sequence for Continuous Operation
under the default Configuration and Functional Param-
eter settings is provided in Figure 4.3.
4–7 62-11637
Table 4–2 Continuous Operation Modes
SETPOINT ALLOWED OPERATION
32°F (0.0°C) and above UltraFresh with FreshProtect (if Configured*)
Below 32°F (0.0°C) & Above 10.4°F (-12°C) UltraFresh (FreshProtect Not Applicable)
Less than 10.4°F (-12°C) Cooling (only) with UltraFreeze
* Refer to Section 4.10.1 for information on FreshProtect.
Figure 4.3 Continuous Default Operating Sequence
FALLING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE Pull Down
SWITCH POINT
+3.6 F ( +2.0 C )
+3.2 F (+1.8 C )
Low Speed
CSMV CONTROL
6 Cylinder Cool +2.7 F (+1.5 C )

+2.3 F (+1.3 C )
Low Speed
2 Cylinder Cool
+1.5 F (+0.8 C )
Setpoint UltraFresh Setpoint
-1.5 F (-0.8 C)
-1.8 F (-1.0 C)
Low Speed
2 Cylinder Heat*
-2.3 F (-1.3 C )
CSMV -
-2.7 F (-1.5 C ) Low Speed

100%
6 Cylinder Heat* -3.2 F (-1.8 C )

-3.6 F (-2.0 C )
Pull-Up* RISING
REFRIGERATED
COMPARTMENT
TEMPERATURE
SWITCH POINT
Switch Point = Controlling Temperature - Setpoint
+ results are above setpoint, - results are below setpoint
*Switch points are the same for Perishable Range and Frozen Range
except in Frozen Range heating is not allowed.
4.8 AutoFresh AIR EXCHANGE Operation is dependent on two Configurations and one
AutoFresh Air Exchange is a factory installed option that or two Functional Parameters. When AutoFresh Air is
installed at the factory, the AUTO FRESH AIR Configu-
allows control of the atmospheric conditions within the
ration is set to INSTALLED. Control point at which it
refrigerated compartment. When air is being exchanged,
becomes active is set in the control system Configura-
two air ports open. The upper port allows fresh ambient
tions. The AUTO FRESH AIR DELAY Configuration may
air to enter while stale air exits through the lower port. be set to SETPOINT or a time value of 0 to 48 hours. If
Exchange is available with setpoints above 28°F (- set to SETPOINT, control will begin when the control
2.2°C). It is always closed when in defrost or in a Start- temperature is 1.5°F (0.8°C) away from setpoint. If a
Stop OFF cycle regardless of Configuration or Func- time value is entered, it will become active after the time
tional Parameter settings. has expired and the system is no longer in Pulldown or
Pull-up even if the control temperature has not reached
1.5°F (0.8°C) away from setpoint.
62-11637 4–8
The first parameter is the AUTOFRESH AIR Functional
NOTE
Parameter. It may be set to CLOSED, OPEN or CFM
CONTROL. When set to CLOSED, AutoFresh Air is not The unit will operate in high speed in the
operational. When set to OPEN, the ports will always Defrost Mode except during pump down in
be open with setpoints above 28°F (-2.2°C). high ambient defrost.
When set to CFM CONTROL the AUTOFRESH AIR 4.9.2 Normal Defrost Operation (Ambient Air
CONTROL Functional Parameter becomes available. Temperature less than 80°F (26.7°C)
The Parameter may be set form 5 to 50 CFM in 5 CFM
increments. Under CFM CONTROL, AutoFresh Air will
Engine
operate on a 20 minute cycle. During the cycle the ports SV1 SV2 SV4
Speed
will open until the required CFM has been exchanged
and then close for the remainder of the cycle. Note 3 Note 1 Open High
Clutch
4.9 DEFROST UL1 & UL2 CSMV
Output
Defrost is an independent cycle overriding cooling and Engage Note 2 Load 100% Open
heating functions in order to de-ice the evaporator.
When the unit enters defrost the MessageCenter will When the ambient air temperature is greater than 35°F
display DEFROST CYCLE STARTED for the first 10 (1.7°C) the compressor discharge pressure will be
seconds and then display the default message for the monitored during the defrost cycle.
remainder of the cycle. DEFROST is displayed in the
NOTES
Operator Message Panel, along with the setpoint while
the unit is in the cycle. Defrost is allowed when the DTT 1. When in defrost, control of SV2 is the same as
is less than 40.0°F (4.4°C) or the SAT is less than in Heat Mode. Refer to Section 4.4.3.
45.0°F (7.2°C), unless the alarms for both DTT and 2. When the Ambient Air Temperature is greater
SAT are activated, then defrost can be initiated when than 35°F (1.7°C) at the beginning of the defrost
the RAT is less than 45.0°F (7.2°C). cycle and the discharge pressure rises to 340
psig (23.1 bar), UL1 will unload for the remain-
4.9.1 Defrost Initiation And Start
der of the cycle.
Defrost can be initiated by pressing the MANUAL
DEFROST key or automatically by the control system. 3. If discharge pressure rises to 350psig (23.8
Control system initiation is based on coil condition or bar), the SV1 valve will open for 1 second and
expiration of the defrost timer. continue to cycle as often as every 30 seconds
to reduce the pressure to less than 350psig
a. Defrost based on coil condition
(23.8 bar).
Defrost based on coil condition will be initiated when
blockage is sufficient to cause an air pressure differen- 4.9.3 Normal Defrost Termination
tial across the coil great enough to close the contacts The Defrost Mode terminates when the defrost termi-
of the defrost air switch (DAS). nation temperature (DTT) and supply air temperature
(SAT) both rise higher than 55°F (12.8°C).
TIP
Ice is not the only thing that will cause the air 4.9.4 Normal Defrost Termination Sequence
differential to increase across the evaporator
The following sequence will be used to perform a Nor-
coil. Shrink wrap, paper, plastic bags, and mal Defrost Termination:
other such items when caught in the return
air stream and pulled up against the evapo- a. The control system will place the engine in low
rator coil or the return air grille can also speed and open SV1 & SV2.
cause the DAS contacts to close. b. The control system will return the CSMV to the
b. Defrost based on time same % it was prior to the initiation of defrost.
Time interval between defrosts is selected in the Func- c. After a 3 second delay, SV4 will be closed.
tional Parameters. The parameter value may be set to d. After a few seconds the Clutch will be engaged.
1.5, 3, 6, or 12 hours (factory default setting is 6 hours.) There will be a short delay before the engine
can return to High Speed.
NOTE
The defrost timer will not count when the unit e. At this point, the control system will return to
is in defrost, the unit is in a Start/Stop off cycle normal temperature control and the data
or the DTT is greater than 40.0°F (4.4°C). recorder will record a Defrost Termination
Event.
4–9 62-11637
4.9.5 High Ambient Defrost Operation • When suction pressure has risen 10 PSIG (0.7
High ambient defrost is used if the ambient air tem- bar) above start point or after 15 seconds, the
perature is greater than 80°F (26.7°C). The High Ambi- control system will place the unit in low speed,
ent Defrost Cycle has three separate actions: close SV4 and unload UL2.
a. Pump Down - The system pumps the low side of the • After 5 seconds, the clutch will be engaged.
refrigeration system down to a lower suction pressure, • After an additional 5 seconds, the control system
and reduces the engine load normally seen at the will return to normal temperature control and the
beginning of a Defrost Cycle. The controls will be as data recorder will record a Defrost Termination
follows: Event.
Engine 4.10 USER SELECTED OVERRIDE OPERATION

SV1 SV2 SV4
Speed
Four optional software override programs are available
Open Close Close Low to the user. These programs include: Temperature
Clutch Range Lock, ProductShield, FreshProtect and Air Flow.
UL1 & UL2 CSMV Information on how the unit operates under these pro-
Output
grams is provided in the following sub-paragraphs.
Engage Unload 100% Open
4.10.1 FreshProtectTM Supply Air Control
The unit will remain in pump down until the following
conditions are met: FreshProtect operates when:
• A minimum of 30 seconds, and the suction pres- • The FRESHPROTECT Functional Parameter is
sure is less than 10 PSIG (0.68 bar) OR not OFF and
• A maximum of 5 1/2 minutes, regardless of suc- • The setpoint is above 32°F (0°C) and
tion pressure. • The TEMPERATURE CONTROL Functional
Parameter is set for Return Air and
b. High Ambient Defrost - Following pump down, the
defrost cycle will begin. The controls will be as follows: • The unit is in Continuous Operation with the
return air temperature less than 10°F (5.6°C)
Engine above setpoint or the unit is in Start–Stop Oper-
SV1 SV2 SV4 ation, return air temperature is within 5°F (2.8°C)
Speed
of setpoint and criteria for shutdown other than
Note 3 Note 1 Open High compartment temperature has not been met.
Clutch The FRESHPROTECT Functional Parameter may be
UL1 & UL2 CSMV
Output set to:
Disengage Note 2 Load 100% Open Setting Supply Air Range
(Below Setpoint)
NOTES
OFF NO LIMIT
1. When in defrost, control of SV2 is the same as A 2 to 5°F (1.1 to 2.8°C)
in Heat Mode. Refer to Section 4.4.3.
B 4 to 7°F (2.2 to 3.9°C)
2. When the Ambient Air Temperature is greater C 6 to 9°F (3.3 to 5.0°C)
than 35°F (1.7°C) at the beginning of the defrost
D 8 to 11°F (4.4 to 6.1°C)
cycle and the discharge pressure rises to 340
psig (23.1 bar), UL1 will unload for the remain- E 10 to 13°F (5.6 to 7.2°C)
der of the cycle. FreshProtect places a flexible limit on how far below
3. If discharge pressure rises to 350 psig (23.8 setpoint the supply air temperature can drop while the
bar), the SV1 valve will open for 1 second and unit is running under the above listed conditions.
continue to cycle as often as every 30 seconds
4.10.2 Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2
to reduce the pressure to less than 350 psig
(23.8 bar). Range Lock is a group of Configurations which may be
set to lock the unit into Start-Stop or Continuous Oper-
4.9.6 High Ambient Defrost Termination ation for various setpoint ranges.
Sequence Two ranges are available for selection. Each Range
The following sequence will be used for high ambient can be independently set to lock it’s setpoint tempera-
defrost termination: tures into either Start-Stop or Continuous operation.
• The unit will remain in High Speed and the Each Range has it’s own selectable minimum and
CSMV will reset to the position it was in at the maximum temperature, which define the span of the
start of defrost. range. If some setpoint temperatures are contained in
both ranges due to range overlap, Range 1 will always
• The control system will open SV1, open SV2 have priority over Range 2.
and unload UL1.
62-11637 4–10
Figure 4.4 Range Lock Settings - Non Overlapping
Range Lock 1 & 2
Range 2 is set for Range 1 is set for

0 to -22 F 28 to 55 F
(-17.8 to -30 C) (-2.2 to +12.8 C)
Range 2 Range 1
F -22 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
C -30 -23.3 -17.8 -12.2 -6.7 -1.1 4.4 10.0 15.6 21.1 26.7
Figure 4.5 Range Lock Settings - Overlapping
Range 1 always has priority

when Range 1 & 2 overlap
Range 1 is set for 32 to 42 F Range 2 is set for -22 to

(0 to 5.6 C) 89.6 F (-30 to 32 C)
Set for Continuous Set for Start-Stop
Range 2
Range
1
F -22 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
C -30 -23.3 -17.8 -12.2 -6.7 -1.1 4.4 10.0 15.6 21.1 26.7
Typically, both Range 1 and Range 2 are used to con- Range 1 will be set for Continuous, with a Minimum
trol different setpoint ranges when IntelliSet is not Temperature of 28°F (-2.2°C) and a Maximum Tem-
active. For units with IntelliSet, because each IntelliSet perature of 55°F (-12.8°C). Should Continuous Opera-
is generally programmed for a specific product, only tion ALWAYS also be required with setpoints between -
Range Lock 1 is used to hold the unit in either the Start/ 22 and 0°F (-30 and -17.8°C), then Range 2 will be set
Stop or Continuous Operation, and Range Lock 2 is left for Continuous, with a Minimum Temperature of -22°F
OFF. (-30°C) and a Maximum Temperature of 0°F (-17.8°C).
For example (see Figure 4.4), if Continuous Operation Any setpoint outside of Range 1 or 2 will allow changes
is ALWAYS required whenever the setpoint is between between Start-Stop and Continuous.
62-11637 4−12 28°F and 55°F (-2.2°C and +12.8°C),
4–11 62-11637
The primary time that it is important to determine which
NOTE
range is to be Range 1 and which is to be Range 2 is
when the ranges overlap each other. In ProductShield Econo: Go to Start/Stop,
the delta-t must be lower than the value
In example 2 (see Figure 4.5), the ranges have been selected in order to enter Start/Stop.
set to lock all setpoints into Start-Stop, except for a
small range between +32° and +42°F (0° and 5.6°C) Once the control system detects that the above criteria
where the unit will always operate in Continuous. have been met, the unit will switch from Continuous
Range 1 Minimum Temperature has been set for Operation to a Start/Stop Off Cycle for the MINIMUM
+32°F (0°C), and Maximum Temperature of +42°F OFF TIME Functional Parameter setting. During the
(5.6°C). Range 2 has been set for a Minimum Tem- Minimum Off Time, the RESTART OVERRIDE TEM-
perature of -22°F (-30°C) and a Maximum Temperature PERATURE Functional Parameter setting can cause the
of +89.6°F (32°C). The unit will switch to Continuous unit to restart to protect the load. After the Minimum Off
when the temperature is between +32° and +42°F (0° Time has expired the unit will return to Continuous Oper-
and 5.6°C) because, when the ranges overlap each ation when the return air temperature is more than ±3.6°
F (± 2° C) away from setpoint in the perishable range, or
other the Range 1 settings will take priority.
+3.6°F (+2°C) above setpoint in the frozen range.
4.10.3 ProductShield When the unit restarts, it will return to Continuous
ProductShield is a group of Configurations that work Operation for a minimum of 15 minutes or the MINI-
together to allow improved operating efficiency while MUM RUN TIME Functional Parameter setting, which-
providing customized product protection. ever time is longer. The original activation conditions
must then be met in order for the unit to return to Prod-
Each ProductShield setting allows the user to select an uctShield Econo: Start/Stop.
ambient temperature range in which to operate. The
Minimum and Maximum range values can be set to When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is
OFF, or the allowed value range. set to OFF, and ProductShield Econo Minimum Tem-
perature is set to a temperature, the ambient air tem-
a. ProductShield: Econo perature will be considered to be “inside the range”
ProductShield Econo allows the control system to auto- whenever the ambient air temperature is higher than
matically switch from Start/Stop Operation to Continu- the Minimum Temperature setting, with no upper limit.
ous Operation or vice versa. This allows maximum When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is
product protection while providing for power savings set to a temperature, and ProductShield Econo Mini-
when ambient temperature is in the preset range. mum Temperature is set to OFF, the ambient air tem-
While running in ProductShield Econo the FRESHRO- perature will be considered to be “inside the range”
TECT Functional Parameter settings will be effective. whenever the ambient air temperature is lower than the
Maximum Temperature setting, with no lower limit.
ProductShield Econo - Go to Start-Stop Operation.
When ProductShield Econo Maximum Temperature is
When the unit is set to Continuous Operation, Product-
set to OFF, and ProductShield Econo Minimum Tem-
Shield Econo allows the unit to run in Start/Stop Opera-
perature is set to OFF, the ambient air temperature will
tion when:
be considered to be “inside the range” at any ambient
• The ProductShield Econo Configuration is set to air temperature.
GO TO S/S AND
ProductShield Econo: Go To Start/Stop Examples:
• The unit has run in Continuous Operation for a
The following examples apply in situations where all
minimum of either 15 minutes, or the Minimum other Start/Stop conditions have been met.
Run Time Functional Parameter setting (which-
ever time is longer) AND Example 1 If the Minimum is set to 30°F (-1.1°C) and
the Maximum is set to 40°F (4.4°C) and the ambient air
• The ambient temperature falls within the pre- temperature falls between these temperatures, the unit
programmed temperature range AND operation can change to Econo Start/Stop.
• The unit is not already running in ProductShield Example 2 If the Minimum is set to 30°F (-1.1°C) and
Winter. (Refer to Section c.) the Maximum is set to OFF and the ambient air tem-
perature is above 30°F (-1.1°C), the unit operation can
The operator can also pre-program a maximum evapo- change to Econo Start/Stop.
rator coil temperature differential (delta-t) between the
return air and supply air temperatures as an additional Example 3 If the Minimum is set to OFF and the Max-
criteria for switching to Start/Stop Operation. The unit imum is set to 40°F (4.4°C) and the ambient air tem-
must bring the delta-t below this setting before going to perature falls below 40°F (1.7°C), the unit operation
Start/Stop Operation if this option is chosen. can change to Econo Start/Stop.
Example 4 If both the Min and the Max are set to OFF,
unit operation can change to Econo Start/Stop at any
ambient temperature.
62-11637 4–12
ProductShield Econo - Go to Continuous Opera- Operation in High Air is controlled by four Configura-
tion. tions; PRODUCTSHIELD HIGH AIR, HIGH AIR MINI-
When the unit is set for Start/Stop, ProductShield M U M T E M P E R AT U R E , H I G H A I R M A X I M U M
Econo allows the unit to run in Continuous Operation TEMPERATURE and HIGH AIR DELTA-T.
when: • The PRODUCT SHIELD HIGH AIR Configura-
• ProductShield Econo configuration is set to GO tion may be set to OFF or ON. ProductShield
TO CONTINUOUS AND High Air is only active when the Configuration is
set to ON.
• The unit has run in Start/Stop Operation for a
minimum of 15 minutes OR the MINIMUM RUN • The High Air ambient air temperature range is
TIME Functional Parameter setting (whichever defined by the HIGH AIR MAXIMUM TEMPERA-
time is longer) AND TURE Configuration setting and the HIGH AIR
MINIMUM TEMPERATURE Configuration set-
• The ambient temperature falls outside the pre- ting. When a value is entered for both of these
programmed temperature range AND configurations, the unit will enter High Air when
• The unit is not already running in ProductShield ambient temperature is above the high setting or
Winter. (Refer to Section c.) below the low setting.
Once the control system detects that the above criteria • When the HIGH AIR MAXIMUM TEMPERA-
have been met, the unit will switch from Start/Stop to TURE Configuration is set for a value and High
Continuous Operation for a minimum of 30 minutes. Air Minimum Temperature Configuration is set to
After 30 minutes the unit will return to Start/Stop if the OFF, the control system will switch to high speed
ambient temperature enters the pre-programmed tem- operation when the ambient temperature is
perature range. While the unit is running, the FRESH- above the setting.
PROTECT Functional Parameter settings will be • When the HIGH AIR MINIMUM TEMPERATURE
effective. Configuration is set for a value and High Air
Maximum Temperature Configuration is set to
NOTE OFF, the control system will switch to high speed
Delta -t logic is not used or available when operation when the ambient temperature is
ProductShield Econo - Go To Continuous is below the setting.
active.
• When both the HIGH AIR MINIMUM TEMPERA-
ProductShield Econo: Go To Continuous Examples TURE Configuration and the HIGH AIR MAXI-
Example 1 If the Minimum is set to 0°F (-17.8°C) and MUM TEMPERATURE Configuration are set to
the Maximum is set to 90°F (32.2°C) and the ambient OFF, ProductShield High Air is not active.
air temperature falls outside these temperatures, the • If a value is entered in the HIGH AIR DELTA-T
unit operation can change to Econo Continuous Opera- Configuration, the delta-t must be above the
tion. value before the control system may switch to
Example 2 If the Minimum is set to 0°F (-17.8°C) and High Speed.
the Maximum is set to OFF and the ambient air tem-
Once the control system determines that the pre-pro-
perature falls below 0°F (-17.8°C), the unit operation
grammed criteria have been met, the unit will switch to
can change to Econo Continuous Operation.
High Air. The unit will continue to operate in High Air for
Example 3 If the Minimum is set to OFF and the Max- a minimum of 30 minutes. After 30 minutes the unit will
imum is set to 90°F (32.2°C) and the ambient air tem- return to normal operation if the ambient temperature
perature falls above 90°F (32.2°C), the unit operation falls inside the pre-programmed temperature range by
can change to Econo Continuous Operation. ±3.6°F ( ±2°C).
Example 4 If both the Minimum and Maximum are set If the unit shuts down in Auto Start/Stop during High
to OFF, ProductShield Econo: Go To Continuous can Air, it will not be in High Air when it restarts and will
not operate as there is no range for the ambient to fall return to normal operation for a minimum of 15 min-
outside of. utes. The original activation conditions must then be
b. ProductShield: High Air met in order for the unit to return to high air.
ProductShield High Air allows the control system to c. ProductShield: Winter
automatically switch the engine from low speed to high When the unit is set for Start/Stop operation, Product-
speed, and thereby provide high evaporator air flow. Shield Winter allows it to switch to Continuous Opera-
This allows maximum product protection when certain tion when the ambient temperature falls below the pre-
conditions are met while providing for power savings programmed temperature. This helps protect the unit
when High Air is not required. from the possibility of cold weather issues.
4–13 62-11637
Once the control system detects that the ambient tem- stant temperature. The engine will remain in high
perature has dropped below the pre-programmed tem- speed when HIGH is selected, unless a low speed
perature, the unit will switch into ProductShield Winter override (refer to Section 4.11.2) is active.
which will force the unit to operate in Continuous Oper-
ation. The unit will continue to operate in Continuous 4.11 PREPROGRAMMED SOFTWARE OVER-
Operation for a minimum of 30 minutes. After 30 min- RIDES
utes, the unit will return to auto Start/Stop if the ambi-
ent temperature has risen above the pre-programmed 4.11.1 Cargo Protect Mode
ProductShield Winter temperature. The control system will activate Cargo Protect Mode
d. ProductShield Fresh: when the A00122 - “CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR”
and A00123 - “CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR” alarms
When the unit is operating with the FreshProtect Func-
activate at the same time.
tional Parameter active, the ProductShield Fresh Con-
figuration may be used to override the FreshProtect • If the setpoint is in the perishable range (refer to
setting when the unit is operating under high ambient Section 4.5.2), the unit will shutdown.
conditions. • If the setpoint is in the Frozen Range the engine
Operation in ProductShield Fresh is controlled by three will go to low speed.
Configurations; PRODUCTSHIELD FRESH, PROD-
The MessageCenter will display “WARNING: NO TEM-
UCTSHIELD FRESH TEMPERATURE and PROD-
PERATURE CONTROL” when the unit is operating in
UCTSHIELD FRESH PROTECT.
Cargo Protect Mode.
The PRODUCTSHIELD FRESH Configuration may be
set to OFF or ON. With the Configuration set to ON, the 4.11.2 Engine Speed Overrides
override is allowed. This section lists the different factors that determine
The PRODUCT SHIELD FRESH TEMP Configuration engine speed (high or low) in addition to the speed
may be set from 70 to 90°F (21 to 48°C). The override controls used in temperature control.
will be allowed when ambient temperature is above the Speed Control Overrides in priority order are:
setting. The unit will return to the FreshProtect setting
when the ambient falls to 3.6°F (2°C) below the setting. 1. High Ambient.
The PRODUCT SHIELD FRESH PROTECT setting If ambient temperature is 120°F (48.9°C) or above
establishes the overriding limit on how far below set- during the engine starting sequence, the unit will run in
point the supply air temperature can drop. The settings low speed for the first 2 minutes of operation. This
displayed for selection will depend on the FreshProtect applies to Heat and Cool modes only - not Defrost.
Functional Parameter setting for this application. Only 2. Low Suction/High Discharge Pressure.
the values that allow less temperature drop will be If UL1 has unloaded and the suction pressure is less
available for selection. For example, if the FreshProtect than 3 PSIG (0.2 bar) for at least 20 seconds or the dis-
Functional Parameter is set to C, then the Product- charge pressure is greater than the calculated maxi-
Shield FreshProtect overrides displayed for selection mum for more than five seconds, the engine will be
will be A & B. forced to run in low speed for a minimum of five min-
utes. After five minutes, the engine can return to high
NOTE
speed if suction pressure is greater than 3 PSIG (0.2
All of the ProductShield settings may be bar) for 30 seconds or discharge pressure is less than
viewed in the Data List (Refer to Section the calculated maximum for 30 seconds.
3.13). For units with IntelliSets, the Data List
will reflect the ProductShield settings for the 3. Engine Coolant Warm-Up.
IntelliSet that is currently active. The engine will run in low speed until the coolant is
above 79°F (26°C).
4.10.4 Air Flow
4. Defrost.
AIR FLOW Functional Parameter may be set to place
The engine Is generally in high speed but will run in low
the unit in continuous high air flow when the setpoint is
speed during the high ambient pump down and at the
in the perishable range. The Parameter may be set to
end of the defrost cycle while the refrigerant control
NORMAL or HIGH. The factory default setting is NOR-
solenoids are realigned.
MAL.
Some products generate a considerable amount of 5. Door/Remote Switch Configuration.
heat (heat of respiration) during transportation. This If the DOOR/REMOTE SWITCH Configuration is set
frequently occurs with produce. The HIGH selection for low speed, the engine will run in low speed when
can be used for these loads, since continuous high air the door/remote switch is open/active.
flow may be required to keep the entire load at a con-
62-11637 4–14
6. RAT & SAT Alarms. 1. High Ambient.
When the A122 - “CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR” If the ambient temperature is above 120°F (48.9°C)
and A123 - “CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR” alarms when the engine starts UL1 and UL2 will both be
are both active at the same time the control system will unloaded for the first 2 minutes of unit operation.
enter Cargo Protect Mode. Refer to Section 4.11.1.
2. Discharge Pressure.
7. Frozen Setpoint Override. If discharge pressure is greater than 414.7 PSIG
If the setpoint is in the frozen range and the tempera- (22.22 bar) UL1 and UL2 will unload.
ture is below setpoint, the engine will operate in low
3. Engine Power Unloading.
speed.
If the actual engine RPM is less than the desired RPM,
8. Air Flow. this is defined as engine RPM droop. When the system
When operating with a perishable setpoint and the AIR is running in heating or cooling with the CSMV con-
FLOW Functional Parameter is set to HIGH, the engine trolling maximum operating pressure (refer to Section
will operate in high speed. 4.11.4) and the engine RPM droop is greater than 30
RPM, UL2 will unload for a minimum of two minutes. If,
9. Product Shield High Air.
the system is operating in cooling and, after 10 sec-
The engine is forced to high speed if the PRODUCT onds in 4 cylinder operation, the engine RPM drop is
SHIELD HIGH AIR Configuration is active, refer to still greater than 30 RPM, UL2 will unload for a mini-
Section 4.10.3 mum of two minutes.
10. High Speed Delay. 4. Throttle Position Delay.
Whenever the engine starts, the unit will remain in low If the unit is running in two or four cylinder operation
speed according to the Continuous or Start-Stop High due to engine power unloading, and the rack position
Speed Delay Functional Parameter setting. sensor is greater than 90%, loading of cylinders will be
11. Start-Stop Frozen Range. delayed until the rack position is less than 90% or for a
When in Start-Stop Operation with a setpoint in the fro- maximum of 80 seconds.
zen range after the minimum run time has expired, the 5. Low Suction Pressure/High Discharge Pressure.
engine will be forced to high speed if the refrigerated Unloading is used along with low speed to increase the
compartment temperature is not yet down to setpoint. suction pressure or decrease the discharge pressure.
12. High Speed Delay. These steps in capacity reduction are taken in the fol-
Whenever the engine is in low speed, transition to high lowing order: 6-cylinder high speed to 4-cylinder high
speed will be delayed for the HIGH SPEED DELAY speed to 4-cylinder low speed to 2-cylinder low speed.
Configuration setting. Unloading will take place if the following conditions
occur: discharge pressure is greater than 435 PSIG
13. Range Protect. (29.6 bar) for 5 seconds or suction pressure is less
When the unit is operating in Range Protect and the than 0 PSIG (0bar) for 30 seconds.
compartment temperature is inside the protected Therefore, if the engine is running in high speed 6 cyl-
range, while all other conditions to allow an off cycle inder operation and one of the conditions listed above
are not met the engine will operate in low speed. occurs, UL1 will be unloaded (6 to 4 cylinders) and the
engine will remain in high speed. If the discharge pres-
4.11.3 Unloader Control Overrides
sure does not drop to less than 410 PSIG or suction
This section lists the different factors that determine the pressure does not increase to above 5 PSIG, the
operation (de-energizing / loading and energizing / engine will transition to low speed and the compressor
unloading) of the unloaders in addition to the unloader will remain running on 4 cylinders. If the condition still
control used in temperature control. does not change, UL2 will unload and the compressor
There is a minimum delay of 10 seconds between will operate on 2 cylinders, still in low speed.
LOADING and UNLOADING cylinders under all operat- Once the engine transitions to low speed, or one or
ing conditions except when the engine is starting. both of the unloaders unload due to these conditions
the unit will remain in low speed, and the unloader(s)
NOTE will remain unloaded for a minimum of 5 minutes.
In all of the following instances UL1 refers to
the Front Unloader and UL2 refers to the 6. Defrost.
Rear Unloader. Refer to Section 4.9.
Unloader Overrides, in priority order, are as follows. If 7. Cargo Protect Mode.

an override only applies or takes effect for one Refer to Section 4.11.1.
unloader, continue down the priority list for the other
unloader:
4–15 62-11637
8. Start/Stop Override. 2. Engine RPM.
If the system is running in a Start/Stop run cycle, and When the engine throttle position has been more than
the minimum run time has expired and the compart- 90% for three seconds the control system will monitor
ment temperature is not at setpoint, both unloaders will actual engine RPM verses desired engine RPM (if the
be loaded to increase the unit capacity so that set point actual RPM is less than the desired RPM, this is
may be reached more quickly, and allow an Off Cycle. defined as engine RPM droop.) If the droop is above 30
RPM, the CSMV will move toward the closed position
9. Continuous Run Low Speed Null Mode.
as required to eliminate the droop by lowering the load
UL1 and UL2 will load and unload periodically as the on the engine.
control system makes adjustments in the system’s
capacity to maintain compartment temperature when it 3. Discharge Pressure Control.
is close to setpoint. The control system monitors the discharge pressure.
When the pressure is above the calculated maximum
10. Range Protect.
(absolute maximum is 435.3 PSIG = 29.62 bar), the
When the unit is operating in Range Protect IntelliSet CSMV will move toward the closed position as required
and the box temperature is inside the protected range, to bring the pressure below 400.0 = 27.22 bar).
and at least one other condition to allow an Off Cycle is
not met (i.e. Battery Volts, Battery Charging Amps, 4. High Suction Pressure Control.
Minimum Run Time, Engine Coolant Temperature) The control system monitors the suction pressure.
UL1 & UL2 will unload. When the pressure is above the calculated maximum
the CSMV will move toward the closed position as
4.11.4 CSMV Control Overrides required to lower the pressure.
1. Engine Rack (Throttle) Position Limit. 5. Low Suction Pressure Control.
The control system monitors the engine throttle posi- The control system monitors the suction pressure.
tion reading provided by the ENCU rack position sen- When both UL1 & UL2 are unloaded and the pressure
sor (RPS). If the position is greater than or equal to the is below the calculated minimum the CSMV will move
maximum position the CSMV will move toward the toward the open position as required to raise the pres-
closed position as required to lower the engine load, sure.
and thereby, the rack position.
62-11637 4–16
SECTION 5 - CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE
5.1 INTERFACE METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1

5.2 TECHNICIAN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–1
5.2.1 Technician Hour Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–2
5.2.2 Inactive Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–3
5.2.3 Configuration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–4
5.2.4 Component Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–6
5.2.5 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–7
5.3 USB MEMORY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.3.1 Data Transfer USB Memory Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–8
5.3.2 PC Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–9
5.3.3 Downloading Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–10
5.3.4 Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–11
5.3.5 Transferring Configuration Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–12
5.4 TRU-TECH & TRU-VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.1 TRU-Tech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.2 TRU–View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–13
5.4.3 Connecting Computer and Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.5 MAIN MICROPROCESSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–14
5.5.1 Pre-Replacement Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.2 Main Microprocessor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.3 Main Microprocessor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–15
5.5.4 Configurations Via Display Mounted Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.5 Functional Parameters Via Display Mounted Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.6 DataLink Data recorder Via TRU-Tech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–16
5.5.7 System Final Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5–17
62-11637
SECTION 5
CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE
5.1 INTERFACE METHODS
There are four methods for interfacing with the APX control system:
1. Driver/Advanced User Interface - Driver & Advanced User Interface activities such as start, stop, Pretrip,
reading alarms, reading data and changing Functional Parameters may all be performed using the display
mounted keys (refer to Section 3).
2. Technician Mode - code based access. Technician Mode includes: technician hour meters, inactive alarms,
configuration settings, Component Test Mode and Service Mode.
3. USB memory device - Activities using the USB memory device include, creation of the device, PC Mode,
downloading data files, installing software, and transferring configuration files.
4. TRU-Tech/TRU-View - Access using a computer and service cable.
5.2 TECHNICIAN MODE

The Technician Mode allows the technician to view inactive alarms, view additional hour meters, work with Config-
urations, test the unit components and/or service the refrigeration system. Instructions for entering the Technician
Mode are provided in Figure 5.1 while information on these operations is provided in the following sub-paragraphs.
Figure 5.1 Technician Mode
ALARM
START/STOP
START/STOP
START/STOP DIESEL
DIESEL COOL
COOL
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST Viewing
Menu Soft Key
Selections
Selections
Press
Press Menu Keyto
Menu Key toScroll
Scroll
MENU
INTELLISET
TECH PRETRIP HOUR UNIT 3
METERS DATA
MODE
the MENU key until TECH MODE is displayed. If TECH MODE does not display, place the system in
Advanced User Mode (refer to Section 3.12).
2. Press the TECH MODE key. Enter the master technician PIN code. The factory installed master technician
PIN code is 7435. Enter this code by pressing the 3&4 keys simultaneously, then pressing the 4 key, then
the 3 key, then the 1&4 keys simultaneously. Once the code is entered, press the “=” key to enter the Tech-
nicians Menu.
START/STOP DIESEL COOL TECHNICIANS MENU (1 OF 4)

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS
36.2
COMPONENT TEST MODE
ENTER CODE SERVICE MODE
BOX TEMPERATURE F
36
SETPOINT F
CANCEL TECHNICIAN MODE/PIN ACCESS
END OF LIST
STATUS OK BACK EXIT
5–1 62-11637
3. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list of menu items. Press the “=” key to enter the settings or test
modes.
NOTICE
Technician Mode should be canceled when work is complete. If Technician Mode is not can-
celed, Technician Mode will be available for 60 minutes after the last key press without requir-
ing a code, even after placing the SROS in the OFF and then back in the RUN/STOP position.
4. Once activity requiring use of Technician Mode is complete, Technician Mode should be manually canceled.
• To cancel from the TECHNICIANS MENU screen, highlight CANCEL TECHNICIAN MODE/PIN
ACCESS and then press the “=” key. This will return he system to the Advance User Mode.
• To cancel from any screen, press and then release the two outside soft keys simultaneously (note: the
system will not respond) and then press the “=” key. The system will return to Driver Mode.
5.2.1 Technician Hour Meters

Hour meters, other than the standard hour meters, are available for viewing when the control system is in the Tech-
nician Mode. Instructions for viewing these hour meters are provided in Figure 5.2.
Figure 5.2 Technician Hour Meters
ALARM
START/STOP

CONTINUOUS

Selections
MENU

METERS DATA
1
1. Enter the Technician Mode, as described in Figure 5.1. While in the TECHNICIANS MENU screen, press
the BACK or EXIT key and then press the MENU key until HOUR METERS is displayed.
2. Press the HOUR METER soft key to display the hour meter screen.
HOUR METERS (1 OF 4)
Standard Hour Meters
Other Meters & Counters
Maintenance Hour Meters Note: This line will only display if
Reset PM Hour Meters one or more meters has timed
END OF LIST out and is ready to be reset.
BACK EXIT
62-11637 5–2
3. The hour meter screen will display with a 15 second timeout. Press the Arrow keys to scroll through the
available selections. With the desired sub-menu highlighted, Press the “=” key to view the data.
STANDARD HOUR METERS OTHER METERS & COUNTERS

Engine Protect Hours
Engine Hours 1060 Hours
Switch On Hours 1400 Hours Meter/Counter List Switch On Protect Hours
Total Run Hours 1182 Hours Engine Sleep Hours
END OF LIST Switch On Sleep Hours
END OF LIST High Speed Hours
BACK EXIT BACK EXIT Clutch Cycles
Start Cycles
MAINTENANCE METERS Number of Hours RESET PM HOUR METERS (1 OF 2)

or Cycles.
Time Left to (Meter Name) ##### Time Left to Engine Hours 0
Time left to Switch On Hours 0
END OF LIST END OF LIST
High Speed Hours
Clutch Cycles RESET BACK EXIT
BACK EXIT Start Cycles
Switch On Hours
Engine Hours To reset an hour meter, highlight it and then press
As Configured the RESET soft key. In this example, the Switch On
meter would be reset.
4. The number of meters displayed depends on the settings for this unit. Press the BACK key to return to the
HOUR METERS screen or the EXIT key to return to the default screen. Once activity requiring use of Tech-
nician Mode is complete, Technician Mode should be manually canceled, refer to Figure 5.1.
5.2.2 Inactive Alarms

There are two sections in the Alarm list: an active alarm section and an inactive alarm section. The control system
can hold up to 16 alarms in the combined lists. The lists can be read via the display screen or using TRU-Tech.
Alarms in these sections are in the order in which the alarms activate and inactivate, respectively. On startup, all
alarms are moved to the inactive list. If an inactive alarm becomes active, the alarm is moved from the inactive list
to the active list.
Each alarm can only be present in either the active or inactive list at any given time. As conditions change, alarms
may be moved from the active list to the inactive list and back.
Alarms are also recorded in the DataLink data recorder. They are recorded at the time they occur (become active),
and the time they become inactive.
Instructions for reading and clearing the Inactive Alarms are provided in Figure 5.3. For a complete list of Alarms
and troubleshooting information Refer to Section 9.
NOTE
The Inactive Alarm List is also called the Technician’s List. Only qualified refrigeration technicians
should access the inactive list. It is not intended for the use of drivers or Advanced Users.
Figure 5.3 Inactive Alarms
1
ALARM ALARM
START/STOP START/STOP
ACTIVE
START/STOP ALARMS
ACTIVE (2 of 5) COOL
ALARMS
DIESEL INACTIVE
ACTIVE
START/STOP ALARMS
ACTIVE ALARMS
DIESEL(2 of 5) COOL
ALARMS
CONTINUOUS CONTINUOUS
DEFROST A00013 HighNo

Viewing Discharge
Active
Menu Pressure
SoftAlarms
Key DEFROST A00013
I00093 HighNo
Check
Viewing Discharge
Startïup
Active
Menu Pressure
Buzzer
SoftAlarms
Key
Selections
A00022 Low Suction Superheat P00170
A00022Check
Low LIV circuit
Selections
Suction Superheat
PressCheck
A00028 MenuRefrig
Key toSystem
Scroll Press
A00028
P00141 MenuStopped
Check
Pretrip Key toSystem
Refrig Scroll
By User
MENU MENU
INTELLISET
CLEAR
CLEAR PRETRIPINACTIVE
HOUR UNIT
BACK INTELLISET PRETRIPINACTIVE
CLEAR CLEAR
CLEAR
CLEAR HOUR
BACK UNIT
EXIT
BACK
ALARMS
ALARMS METERS DATA
ALARMS ALARMS ALL
INACTIVE
ALARMS METERS DATA
ALARMS
2 5 6
5–3 62-11637
1. Enter the Technician Mode, as described in Figure 5.1, then press the ALARM key.
2. Press the INACTIVE ALARMS soft key.
3. If there are inactive alarms, the alarm number will be displayed preceded by the letter “I” (inactive alarm) or
“P” (inactive Pretrip alarm). The last alarm that occurred will be the first alarm displayed and so on.
4. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the list of alarms.
5. To clear only the inactive alarms and leave the active alarms, press the CLEAR INACTIVE soft key. The
LCD Display will provide an “INACTIVE ALARMS CLEARED” message to confirm the alarms have cleared.
6. To clear both the active and inactive alarms, press the CLEAR ALL soft key. The operators message panel
will provide an “ALL ALARMS CLEARED” message to confirm the alarms have cleared.
7. If there are no inactive alarms, the operators message panel will provide a “NO INACTIVE ALARMS” mes-
sage and then return to the default display after 5 seconds.
NOTICE
8. Once activity requiring use of Technician Mode is complete, Technician Mode should be manually canceled,
refer to Figure 5.1.
5.2.3 Configuration Settings

Configuration settings match the control system to the unit and define control system action under various opera-
tional conditions. Instructions for working with Configurations are provided in Figure 5.4.
Figure 5.4 Setting Configurations
1. Enter the Technicians Menu, highlight CONFIGURATION SETTINGS and then press the “=” key as
described in Figure 5.1.
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (1 OF 11)

UNIT IDENTIFICATION
SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK
START-STOP SETTINGS
2&3 INTELLISET & PRODUCTSHIELD
BACK EXIT
2. Eleven Configuration sub-menus will be available. To scroll through the Configuration sub-menu list, press
the ▲ or ▼ key. The sub-menus will highlight as the list is scrolled. The available sub-menus include:
UNIT IDENTIFICATION HOUR METERS

SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK REMOTE SENSORS
START-STOP SETTINGS OTHER SETTINGS
2 INTELLISET & PRODUCT SHIELD RAIL SETTINGS
ENGINE SETTINGS AUTO FRESH AIR SETTINGS
ALARM SETTINGS END OF LIST
Refer to Table 5–1 for information on the settings in each sub-menu and resultant System actions.
3. With the desired sub-menu highlighted, press the “=” key. The individual Configurations within the sub-menu
will display. There are two types of Configuration screens, data entry screens and value selection screens.
62-11637 5–4
4. Data entry screens are displayed for the UNIT MODEL #, TRAILER ID #, UNIT SERIAL #, SET DATE &
TIME and SET NEW HOURS (in a replacement main microprocessor) Configurations. To change a data
entry screen press the “=” key with the configuration highlighted.
UNIT IDENTIFICATION (2 OF 4) SET # SET DATE AND TIME

UNIT MODEL #: NDK537N6LF0
TRAILER ID #: MY TRAILER #1 28 FEB 2011 09:42
UNIT SERIAL #: NAR91108766 INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTIONS
SET DATA & TIME: MAY 23 2013 08:27 Press UP/DOWN To Select Field Press UP/DOWN To Select Field
EQUAL to Modify Field EQUAL to Modify Field
BACK EXIT CANCEL SAVE CANCEL SAVE
a. A data entry screen will be displayed with the entry points in a horizontal row of “fields”. The first selection
“field” will be highlighted. Press the “=” key to enter the field then press the Arrow keys to scroll through the
available selections.
When setting a number, the numbers 1 to 9 and the letters A to Z will be displayed.
When entering the date & time the day, month, year, hour or minute will be displayed. The system uses
a 24 hour clock. Hours 00 to 11 are AM and hours 12 to 23 are PM.
With the desired selection in the field, press the “=” key to save the field entry.
b. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to move to the next field or to the desired field. Press the “=” key to enter the field then
press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the available selections. With the desired selection in the field, press
the “=” key to save the field entry.
c. Continue as above to enter additional field changes as required.
d. When all the fields are displayed as desired, press the SAVE soft key to save the setting into memory.
e. Continue as above to enter additional UNIT IDENTIFICATION changes as required.
5. To change a value selection screen, press the “=” key with the desired Configuration sub-menu highlighted
as in Sample Screen A. The individual Configurations within the sub-menu will display as in Sample Screen
B. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the individual Configurations. The individual Configurations will
highlight as the list is scrolled.
CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (5 OF 11) CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (1 OF 3) CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (1 OF 3)

ENGINE SETTINGS CONFIGURATION 1 SELECTION CONFIGURATION 1 SELECTION
ALARM SETTINGS CONFIGURATION 2 SELECTION CONFIGURATION 2 SELECTION
HOUR METERS CONFIGURATION 3 SELECTION CONFIGURATION 3 SELECTION
OTHER SAMPLE SCREEN A
SETTINGS SAMPLE SCREEN B SAMPLE SCREEN C
RAIL SETTINGS
END OF LIST
BACK EXIT BACK EXIT BACK EXIT
a. With the desired individual Configuration highlighted, press the “=” key. The highlight will move to the pres-
ent setting. As in Sample Screen C. Press the ▲ or ▼ key to scroll through the available settings. With the
desired setting highlighted, press the “=” key to select. Refer to Table 5–1 for information on the settings in
each sub-menu and resultant System actions.
b. Continue as above to enter additional sub-menus and set additional individual Configurations as required.
NOTICE
5–5 62-11637
5.2.4 Component Test Mode
Component Test Mode allows the technician to energize individual circuits for 5 minutes at a time. The engine is
not allowed to start when the System is in Component Test Mode. Instructions for entering the Component Test
Mode are provided in Figure 5.5.
Figure 5.5 Component Test Mode
1. Enter the Technicians Menu, highlight COMPONENT TEST MODE and then press the “=” key as describe
in Figure 5.1.
COMPONENT TEST MODE (1 OF 9)

UNLOADER 1
UNLOADER 2
2&3 SV1
SV2
BACK EXIT
2. Nine tests will be available. To scroll through the tests press the ▲ or ▼ key. The tests will highlight as the
list is scrolled. The available tests include:
2
UNLOADER 1 (MM output @ 3MM-6) Clutch Relay (MM output @ 3MM-11)
UNLOADER 2 (MM output @ 3MM-8) ENCU Power Circuit (Run Relay)
SV1 (MM output @ 3MM-1) MM output @ 3MM-9
SV2 (MM output @ 3MM-2) Engine Preheat (Glow Plug Relay)
SV4 (mm output @ 3MM-3) MM output @ 3MM-14
Buzzer (mm ground @ 3MM-15)
3. With the desired test highlighted, press the “=” key. For example, if UNLOADER 1 is selected, the unloader
will come on, and “UNLOADER 1 OFF IN 5 MINUTES” will display. The minutes will count down to 0 at
which time the circuit will be de-energized, and the operator message panel will return to the test selection
screen.
COMPONENT TEST MODE
UNLOADER 1 OFF IN 4 MIN

AMP DRAW: 2.0 AMPS
RESET CANCEL/
TIMER STOP
4 4
4. To extend the test time, press the RESET TIMER soft key. The time will reset to 5 minutes. To stop the test
press the CANCEL/STOP soft key.
5. Continue as above to test additional components as required.
NOTICE
62-11637 5–6
5.2.5 Service Mode
! CAUTION
Service Mode MUST be used whenever removing refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak checking
or evacuating.
NOTE
If the START/RUN - OFF switch is toggled to the OFF position, the System will exit Service Mode.
To enter Service Mode:
a. Enter the Technicians Menu, highlight SERVICEMODE and then press the “=” key as described in Figure
5.1.
b. “TRANSITION TO SERVICE MODE” and then “ENTERINGSERVICE MODE” will display in the operator
message panel. When entering Service Mode the control system brings the CSMV and EVXV to 100%open
and energizes SV2 & UL1.
c. Once the CSMV and EVXV are 100% open, “ RECOVER/ LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE” is displayed in the
operator message panel.
d. Refrigerant recovery, leak checking, or evacuation may be performed on the unit at this time. Refer to Ser-
vice Procedures in Section 8.
e. The unit should remain in the RECOVER / LEAK CHK/ EVAC MODE as refrigerant recovery or leak testing
procedures are performed.
f. If the message in the operator message panel changes to “CHARGE MODE - HOLD = TO EXIT” do not
continue refrigerant recovery, leak testing or evacuation procedures. Exit Service Mode and then re-enter,
ensuring that “RECOVER / LEAK CHK /EVAC MODE” is displayed in the operator message panel before
continuing refrigerant recovery or leak testing.
g. During evacuation, the control system will monitor the pressure transducer readings.
• The System will remain in “RECOVER / LEAKCHK / EVAC MODE” as evacuation is started.
• As the refrigeration system is evacuated, the system pressure will go into a deep vacuum. Once the CSP is
less than 20 inhg and the CDP is less than+5 psig the operator message panel will change to “EVAC/
CHARGE MODE”. The position of the CSMV, EVXV, SV2 & UL1 do not change in this mode.
• Following the evacuation, as the charging procedures are started the control system will bring the CSMV
and EVXV to 0% open and de–energize SV2& UL1 when both of the transducers rise above+5psig (0.34
bar).
• When the CSMV and EVXV are closed, “CHARGE MODE – HOLD = TO EXIT” is displayed in the operator
message panel. This action is taken to prevent refrigerant migration to the compressor during charging.
h. To exit Service Mode at any time, press the EXIT softkey. “EXITING SERVICE MODE” will then display in
the operator message panel. When Service Mode is exited, the control system brings the CSMV and EVXV
to 0% open and SV2 & UL–1 will be de–energized.
NOTICE
i. Once activity requiring use of Technician Mode is complete, Technician Mode should be manually canceled,
5–7 62-11637
5.3 USB MEMORY DEVICES
Instructions for using USB memory devices with the APX control system are provided in the following sub-para-
graphs.
5.3.1 Data Transfer USB Memory Device

A Data Transfer USB memory device may be created for use with the APX control system using a standard USB
device of 1 gigabyte capacity or greater.Instructions for creating a Data Transfer device are provided in Figure 5.6.
Once the Data Transfer USB memory device is created:
• The device may be used to enter PC Mode.
• Data files from the DataLink data recorder may be transferred from the control system to the “DATAEXT’
folder.
• Software files may be transferred to the “PROGRAM” folder and then transferred to the control system.
• IntelliSet/Configuration files may be transferred to the “CONFIG” folder and then transferred to the control
system.
Figure 5.6 Creating a Data Transfer USB Memory Device
1. Using a standard computer file creation program, create a folder on the device labeled CARRIER. The file
name must be in all uppercase letters.
2. Open the CARRIER folder and create three sub-folders labeled DATAEXT, CONFIG and PROGRAM. The
file names must be in uppercase letters.
3. The device is now ready to be used as a Data Transfer USB Memory Device.
62-11637 5–8
5.3.2 PC Mode
PC Mode allows the technician to access the control system without the engine running. When in PC Mode the
System is fully functional, all Operator Interfaces may be performed and the operation of the System may be
demonstrated, again, without the unit actually operating. Instruction for entering and using PC Mode are provided
in Figure 5.7.
! WARNING
Do not toggle the START/RUN - OFF switch out of the OFF position when in PC Mode or the
unit will start.
Figure 5.7 PC Mode
ALARM
START/STOP
CONTINUOUS
36.2
DEFROST
MENU
BOX TEMPERATURE F
36
SETPOINT F
PC MODE
1
I START/RUN
USB memory device activity

O LED - Typical
OFF
1. With the START/RUN - OFF switch in the OFF position, remove protective cover from the USB interface
port and insert a Data Transfer USB. NOTES: (1) A PC–USB service cable (Carrier Transicold part num-
ber22-04253–20) may also be used. (2) If configured to do so, the System will prompt for entry of the data
protect PIN code (refer to “PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
The USB activity LED will flash, the Carrier Transicold logo will display and then the MessageCenter will
display one or more USB soft key descriptions.
Press the “PC MODE’ soft key. DO NOT remove USB or cable at this time.
2. The MessageCenter will display “PC MODE”. The System is now in PC Mode. The purpose of PC Mode is
to allow demonstration of the System features and allow changes to the System while the engine is not
actually running. It is important to note that any changes saved to memory while in PC Mode will remain
after leaving PC Mode.
NOTICE
3. If Technician Mode is entered while in PC Mode, once the Technician Mode activity is complete, re-enter the
Technicians Menu, highlight “CANCEL TECHNICIAN MODE/PIN ACCESS” and then press the “=” key to
take the system out of Technician Mode before taking the System out of PC Mode.
4. When use of PC Mode is completed, remove the USB or cable. “SHUTTING DOWN − PLEASE WAIT” may
be displayed or after a few seconds, the display will go blank. Replace the cover on the USB port.
5–9 62-11637
5.3.3 Downloading Data Files
Instructions for downloading data from the DataLink data recorder to a Data Transfer USB memory device are pro-
vided in Figure 5.8.
Figure 5.8 Downloading Data Files
ALARM
START/STOP
CONTINUOUS
36.2
DEFROST
MENU
BOX TEMPERATURE F
36
SETPOINT F
READING USB
1
I START/RUN
O OFF
1. Data may be downloaded with the system powered up or turned off. Remove protective cover from the USB
interface port and Insert a Data Transfer USB memory device. The MessageCenter will display READIN-
GUSB. NOTE: If configured to do so, the System will prompt for entry of the data protect PIN code (refer to
“PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
2. The Message Center will then display the USB soft keys. (NOTE: The INSTALL SOFTWARE and INSTALL
SETTINGS soft keys will not display if the applicable files are not loaded on the Data transfer USB device.)
START/STOP DIESEL COOL DATA EXTRACTION (1 OF 4)

Extract: All Data
36.2
BOX TEMPERATURE F
36
SETPOINT F
3
Extract: Last 30 Days
Extract: Last 7 Days
Extract: Quick Download
END OF LIST
DOWNLOAD INSTALL INSTALL PC
DATA SOFTWARE SETTINGS MODE
BACK EXIT
2
3. Press the DOWNLOAD DATA soft key. Four extraction choices will be available as shown above. To scroll
through the choices press the ▲ or ▼ key. The choices will highlight as the list is scrolled. With the desired
choice highlighted, press the “=” key. The System will begin downloading data to the USB and the operator
message panel will display COPYING DATA - PLEASE WAIT ##%. The percent downloaded will display as
the data is copied and then the operator message panel will display COPY COMPLETE, PRESS ANY KEY.
Press any key to return to the USB soft keys.
4. The MessageCenter will return to the USB soft key display and the USB may be removed.
5. The downloaded data will now be in a folder, inside the Data Transfer USB memory device “DATAEXT”
folder. Each day data is extracted to the USB a folder will be created. The folder naming convention will
begin with the letters “DX” followed by the last two digits of the year, two digits representing the month and
two digits representing the day. For example a folder named DX130212 would contain data extracted Febru-
ary 12th, 2013.
6. Two files will be created inside the folder for each download. The file naming convention used is the last
8characters of the Trailer ID followed by .zdx for the first file and a secondary file with the same name fol-
lowed by .zax.
NOTE
If the same unit (with the same asset, trailer or car ID) is downloaded twice or more on the same day,
the earlier files will be overwritten. If the earlier files will be required for later review, ensure they are
transferred off the device before starting another download.
62-11637 5–10
5.3.4 Installing Software
Instructions for installing software into the control system from a Data Transfer USB memory device are provided in
Figure 5.9. If power is lost or USB removed this procedure should be repeated. The screen may be blank until the
USB is reinserted.
TIP
Whenever installing new software, it is always a good idea to start the unit and give it a quick check
over prior to performing the operation. All units should have the software upgraded to the latest ver-
sion, provided for Carrier Transicold dealers on the TransCentral web site.
Figure 5.9 Installing Software
ALARM

START/STOP
36.2
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST
36
MENU 36.2
BOX TEMPERATURE F
36
SETPOINT F
BOX TEMPERATURE F
DOWNLOAD
DATA
INSTALL
SOFTWARE
SETPOINT F
INSTALL
SETTINGS
READING USB
3
4
2
1. Ensure the desired software version folder is the only folder loaded in the “PROGRAM” folder on a Data
2. With the system powered or off, remove the protective cover from the USB port and Insert USB. The Mes-
sageCenter will display READING USB. NOTE: If configured to do so, the System will prompt for entry of
the data protect PIN code (refer to “PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
3. In less than two minutes time, the MessageCenter will display the USB soft keys. (NOTE: The INSTALL
SETTINGS soft key will not display if files are not loaded In the CONFIG folder and DOWNLOAD DATA
does not display if the DATAEXT folder is not present.)
4. Press the INSTALL SOFTWARE soft key. The System will enter the software install menu and display the
software version presently in the System, and the software version on the USB.
NOTE
Once a software version is installed, the same version cannot be installed but a newer or older version
can be.
SOFTWARE INSTALL MENU
CURRENT SOFTWARE VERSION: ##.##.01
SOFTWARE ON USB: ##.##.02
PRESS = TO LOAD, OTHER TO EXIT
5. Press the “=” key to start the installation. Press any other key to exit and return to the USB soft keys.
5–11 62-11637
6. Once the “=” key is pressed, the operator message panel will display “UNIT AND MICRO WILL STOP
NOW” and the unit will stop. The System will begin downloading software from the USB memory device and
the operator message panel will display “SOFTWARE INSTALL IN PROGRESS”. The percent downloaded
will display as the software is copied and then the operator message panel will display “SOFTWARE
INSTALL COMPLETE - MICRO WILL RESTART NOW - REMOVE USB.
SOFTWARE INSTALL MENU SOFTWARE INSTALL MENU
SOFTWARE INSTALL IN PROCESS

UNIT AND MICRO WILL STOP NOW
33%
DO NOT REMOVE USB DO NOT REMOVE USB
7. After install is complete, reinstall the USB, press the INSTALL SOFTWARE soft key and then the “=” key to
verify the software matches that on the USB.
5.3.5 Transferring Configuration Files

Instructions for installing configuration files into the control system from a Data Transfer USB memory device are
provided in Figure 5.10. Configuration” (*.set) files consist of one of the following types of files. A “Configuration”
file contains a complete set of Configuration, Functional Parameter and Data Recorder settings for the system. An
“IntelliSet” file contains multiple Configurations which are programmed using easily recognizable names that can
then be selected using the display mounted keys by the operator. A “Maintenance” file contains one or more indi-
vidual settings. For example: Remote Sensor Yes/No, Fuel Level Sensor: Yes/No. etc. Unit specific and time sen-
sitive data cannot be loaded to a configuration file. This data includes: model number, serial number, trailer ID hour
meter readings, date and time. These configurations must be set using the display mounted keys or TRU-Tech and
a service cable.
Figure 5.10 Transferring Configuration Files
ALARM

START/STOP
36.2
CONTINUOUS
DEFROST
36
MENU 36.2
BOX TEMPERATURE F
36
SETPOINT F
BOX TEMPERATURE F
DOWNLOAD
DATA
INSTALL
SOFTWARE
SETPOINT F
INSTALL
SETTINGS
READING USB
3
4
2
1. Ensure the desired setting file(s) are loaded to the “CONFIG” folder on a Data Transfer USB memory
device.
2. With the System powered or off, remove protective cover from the USB interface port and Insert the device.
The MessageCenter will display READING USB. NOTE: If configured to do so, the System will prompt for
entry of the data protect PIN code (refer to “PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”, Table 5–1).
3. The Message Center will then display the USB soft keys. (NOTE: The INSTALL SOFTWARE soft key will
not display if a file is not loaded In the PROGRAM folder.)
4. Press the INSTALL SETTINGS soft key. The System will enter the INSTALL SETTINGS menu.
5. If one or more configuration file(s) are loaded on the Data Transfer USB memory device a listing of available
files will be displayed. To scroll through the files press the ▲ or ▼ key. The files will highlight as the list is
scrolled.
NOTE
Earlier software versions may have a display maximum of 10 files. If the desired file does not display,
reduce the USB CONFIG directory content to 10 or less.
62-11637 5–12
INSTALL SETTINGS MENU (1 OF 3)
CTD IntelliSet_2008_0219
ACME TRUCKING
ACME EXPRESS
BACK EXIT
6. With the desired file highlighted, press the “=” key to start the installation. Press any other key to exit and
return to the USB soft keys.
INSTALL SETTINGS MENU INSTALL SETTINGS MENU
INSTALL SETTINGS IN PROCESS

INSTALL SETTINGS COMPLETE
33% SYSTEM WILL NOW RESET
DO NOT REMOVE USB DO NOT REMOVE USB
7. The unit will shutdown and the settings will be installed. If a single configuration is installed, the system will
reset and the unit will restart. If IntelliSets are installed, following the system reset, the user will be prompted
to select one of the new IntelliSets before the unit can be started.
5.4 TRU-TECH & TRU-VIEW ing the DataLink data recorder) or to a Data
The TRU-Tech & TRU-View program allows the user to
access and download data, using a computer, when • Write hour meter values to a replacement main
the unit is not running and without starting the eight- microprocessors (during the first 25 hours).
hour DataLink data recorder timer. Using the computer • Initiate Pretrip and Defrost operations.
will provide additional programming and configuring
capabilities that will not be available using the display • Support Download, Configuration and Program
mounted keys. The DataLink data recorder may also USB operations.
be configured using the TRU-Tech program. • Provide a security log on system controlled by a
For complete instructions on using TRU-Tech & TRU- System Administrator.
View, refer to the manual supplied with the TRU−Tech/
TRU−View software. 5.4.2 TRU–View
The TRU-View Program enables the user to do the fol-
NOTE lowing:
For diagnoses of problems with the control • Read download files from the System.
system, DataLink data recorder download-
• Create various customized text reports that
ing, file analysis using TRU−View or use of
include setpoint, sensors, and events.
USB memory devices, refer to Section 5.3.
• Create various customized graphical reports.
5.4.1 TRU-Tech • Print numerical, graphical, and event reports.
The TRU-Tech Program enables the user to do the fol- • View and print refrigeration system historical set-
lowing: tings and changes.
• Monitor in real-time via the USB interface port • Filter download data by date range and desired
the current status of the control system inputs, sensors and events.
outputs, refrigeration, electrical, engine and tem- • Search for a sensor or event of interest.
perature sensors and alarms.
• Synchronize multiple graphical and numerical win-
• Record sensor data to a file for diagnostic pur- dows to better understand historical operation.
poses.
• PC Setup enables the user to select how to dis-
• Display, edit and send unit model number, unit play various parameters for use in the graph and
serial number and trailer ID to the main micro- text window.
processor. • Easily adjust x and y axis and color scheme to
• Display, edit and send Functional Parameters accommodate various data.
and Configuration settings to the System (includ- • Export data to a user friendly format such as PDF
5–13 62-11637
5.4.3 Connecting Computer and Control System 5.5 MAIN MICROPROCESSOR REPLACEMENT
To connect the control system and computer:
1. Locate the USB interface port (item 18, Figure

NOTICE
2.2) and remove the protective cover to gain Under no circumstances should a techni-
access. cian electrically probe the modules at any
point, other than the connector terminals
2. Plug a PC–USB service cable into the port and
a USB port on the computer (see Figure 5.11).
ponents operate at different voltage levels
NOTE and at extremely low current levels.
Improper use of voltmeters, jumper wires,
If Configured to do so, the System will
continuity testers, etc. could permanently
prompt for entry of the data protect PIN code
damage the module.
(refer to “PROTECT DATA WITH PIN”,
Table 5–1). Some main microprocessor inputs operate at voltage
levels other than the conventional 12 VDC. These inputs
The System will power up, and display “PC include but are not limited to the pressure transducers
MODE”. and temperature sensors. Under no circumstances
should 12 VDC be applied at these connection points.
3. Start the TRU-Tech & TRU-View program by
double clicking on the icon on your computer
desktop and entering the required password.
Verify that the correct COM port is selected in
NOTICE
the PC Setup. For complete instructions on Electronic modules MUST be handled
using TRU-Tech & TRU-View, refer to the man- with care to prevent accidental damage
ual supplied with the TRU−Tech/TRU−View or degradation from electrical static dis-
software. charge (ESD), contamination or abuse.
Before touching a module, touch your
4. When work is complete, remove the interface body and/or conductive tool being used
cable and install the protective cover back onto to the frame to discharge ESD safely. All
the USB port. The control system will return to electronics should be handled carefully
normal operation. and only held by edges of any exposed
board. Care should be taken when insert-
Figure 5.11 TRU-Tech/TRU-View Connection ing/extracting connectors and compo-
nents to avoid exerting excessive stress
on the board which could fracture small
SOFTWARE INSTALL MENU
CURRENT SOFTWARE VERSION:

components nearby, resulting in future
##.##.01
SOFTWARE ON USB: ##.##.02 failure of circuit.
PRESS = TO LOAD, OTHER TO EXIT
When field diagnosis of a Carrier Transicold refrigeration

unit determines that an APX main microprocessor is not
performing properly and must be replaced the replace-
ment microprocessor must be setup for this unit and
customer by entering the required Configurations, Func-
tional Parameters and DataLink data recorder settings.
If the replacement microprocessor is not loaded with
the most recent software, it should be updated. If soft-
ware is loaded, it should be verified that it is the
approved revision for this model.
The preferred method for setup of the main micropro-
cessor is to use the display mounted keys or a Data
PC–USB Service Cable. Carrier Transicold
Transfer USB memory device. All required changes,
Part #: 22–04253–01 = 20 foot/6.1 meter long)
except unit specific and time sensitive data, may be
NOTE: Only this cable will communicate performed using the device. If a USB is not available
correctly. An “off the shelf” USB to USB cable the main microprocessor may be setup using TRU-
will not provide the required communication. Tech. TRU-Tech allows entry of all required data. If
neither a USB memory device or TRU-Tech and ser-
vice cable is available, the main microprocessor may
be setup for immediate use using the display mounted
keys. Changes to the default DataLink data recorder
settings may not be entered using the display mounted
62-11637 5–14
keys. If the main microprocessor is setup using the dis- 2. Release the tabs on and remove the two 35 pin
play mounted keys and this feature is needed, it may connectors and 8 pin connector from the front of
be loaded at a later date. the module.
5.5.1 Pre-Replacement Steps 3. Replace module. Tighten mounting hardware to

96 inch/lbs (10.8 Nm).
Before the unit can be started using the replacement
main microprocessor certain unit specific and time sen- 4. Reinstall connectors ensuring tabs are fully
sitive data must be known. locked in place.
TIP 5.5.3 Main Microprocessor Setup
Print this page and fill out the following for
use when entering the data. 1. Ensure that the replacement main microproces-
sor is in place, all wires connected and the neg-
That information includes: ative battery cable is reconnected.
• Unit Serial Number. ____________________ 2. Make sure the latest software has been loaded
• Unit Model Number. ____________________ to ensure all modules are compatible, refer to
Section 5.3.2
• Engine Protect Hours. ___________________
• Switch On Protect Hours. ________________
• Engine Sleep Hours. ____________________
NOTICE
When a module is replaced, software
• Switch On Sleep Hours. _________________ should be upgraded before switching the
• High Speed Hours. _____________________ unit on. This will ensure software com-
patibility of all modules.
• Clutch Cycles. _________________________
3. Power up the system by placing the START/
• Start Cycles. __________________________
RUN - OFF switch in the START/RUN position.
• Date and Time. ________________________ The display will immediately go into the Unit
Identification Configuration screen. The unit
• ID Number. ___________________________
model information must be entered before the
1. If possible, power the original system up by System can display the correct screens for this
entering PC Mode, or by placing the START/ unit.
RUN - OFF switch in the START/RUN position.
4. Select the correct model and then enter the cor-
2. Insert a Data Transfer USB memory device and rect model number by using the UP or DOWN
download all data from the DataLink data ARROW keys. Scroll through the list until the
recorder. If a Data Transfer USB memory device correct Model Number appears (verify by read-
is not available, data may also be downloaded ing the Model/Serial Plate on the unit). Press the
using TRU-Tech and a service cable. “=” key to enter the new model number.
3. Scroll through the data list and hour meter read- 5. Press the UP ARROW key again, and the Unit
ings and make note of the unit specific data Serial Number field will appear. Refer to Sec-
listed above. If the original main microprocessor tion 5.2.3 for instructions on entering the unit
will not power up, gather the unit specific data serial number.
from the model/serial number nameplate and
6. Press the UP ARROW key again, and the
estimate hour meter readings from the unit
Trailer ID field will appear. Refer to Section
maintenance records. If a Data Transfer USB
5.2.3 for instructions on entering the Trailer ID.
memory device will be used to setup the
replacement main microprocessor, write the
required data to the device. Also, if the current
configuration file is available for this customer
NOTICE
from the TransCentral web site, it should be Ensure that the clock you are using is
transferred to the device prior to beginning work. accurate. Also, some customers are
located in different time zones from the
5.5.2 Main Microprocessor Replacement repair location. If you know the owners
desired location time, enter that time. If
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
you don’t, enter the current time at your
disabling any two way communication, placing
location.
the STOP/RUN–OFF switch in the OFF position
and removing the negative battery cable.
5–15 62-11637
7. Now, press the DOWN ARROW key until “SET 2. After the unit specific and time sensitive configu-
DATE & TIME” appears. Refer to Section 5.2.3 ration settings are complete use the UP or
for instructions on entering the date and time. DOWN ARROW keys until “CONFIGS COM-
PLETE, = TO EXIT” is displayed in the Mes-
8. Press the UP ARROW key to go to “SET NEW sageCenter. Press the “=” key to save.
HOURS”. Press the “=” key then the Up Arrow
key to enter that menu. 3. If the Configurations, Functional Parameters
and DataLink data recorder setup will be set
9. The first hourmeter is Engine Protect Hours. using the display mounted keys and /or TRU-
Press the “=” key to select this meter. The cursor Tech, continue with following steps.
will be blinking on the ten-thousands place.
Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to select 5.5.4 Configurations Via Display Mounted Keys
the correct value, then press the “=” key. Refer to Table 5–1 for a list of available Configurations.
If the correct number in any of the locations is 0 Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions on how to
(zero), just press the “=” key to enter 0 as the access them.
value and move the cursor to the next place. For
example, if you are entering 567 hours, you will 5.5.5 Functional Parameters Via Display
press the “=” key twice to leave a 0 for the first Mounted Keys
two numbers, then use the UP and DOWN
ARROW key to scroll through the numbers to 1. Refer to Table 3–2 for a list of available Func-
enter the correct hours. When the correct hours tional Parameters and Section 3.16 for direc-
for Engine Protect Hours has been entered, tions on how to access them.
press the “=” key to advance to the next hour-
2. Leave the system powered up as you continue
meter. If an invalid number is entered, a warning
with the next section.
message will flash in the MessageCenter. For
example, you can not enter a higher number of 5.5.6 DataLink Data recorder Via TRU-Tech
hours for Engine Protect than the number of
Switch On Hours. NOTE
If the factory settings are used, this section
NOTE
can be skipped.
None of the “Total” hourmeters are listed.
When the hours for all the hourmeters are 1. Refer to Section 3.9 for list of DataLink data
entered, the system will add the correct recorder setups.
hours together and calculate the Total
Engine Hours and Total Switch On Hours. 2. Connect a computer to the USB interface port of
When the end of the list is reached “PRESS the unit and start the TRU-Tech program (refer
= TO SAVE HOURS” will be displayed. to Section 5.4).
Pressing the “=” key will save the hours, and 3. In TRU-Tech, click on the REEFER SETUP
return you to the configuration list. LIVE/ Data Recorder Tab.
If you do not press the “=” key, none of the 4. Select the Sensors to be recorded and whether
time hours or cycles you just entered will be you wish averaged or snapshot recordings
saved. (averaged is recommended for RAT, SAT, AAT &
Hour meters may be changed for 60 minutes the remote sensors; snapshot is recommended
following the initial hour entry. If an error has for all others).
been made, be certain to correct it within the
5. When the setup is correct, press the Send but-
60 minute time period. Following that time,
ton to send the new settings to the system.
the hourmeters will count the appropriate
hours because the unit switch is on and the 6. From the “Confirm Send Information” Pop Up,
unit is operating, and no further manual check the data that is to be sent and un-check
changes will be allowed. the data that is not to be sent. Click the OK but-
ton.
NOTES
7. Verify that the settings were sent by waiting for
1. If a Data Transfer USB memory device will be
the confirmation pop up message.
used to setup the remainder of the main micro-
processor settings, proceed to Section 5.5.7 NOTE
after the settings are entered.
If the DataLink data recorder date and time
were not set earlier, they can be set from
TRU-Tech
62-11637 5–16
5.5.7 System Final Checkout
1. Start the unit and allow it to run for a few minutes.
2. While the unit is running, scroll through the Data List. Verify that all the data is now accurately displayed.
3. Initiate a Pretrip test. Allow the unit to complete the Pretrip and check for any alarms. Make any necessary
repairs before returning the unit into service.
Table 5–1 Configuration Settings

Configuration Selections Description
PRESS UP/DOWN TO DISPLAY AVAILABLE CONFIGURATIONS

CONFIGURATION SETTINGS (1 OF 11)
UNIT IDENTIFICATION AVAILABLE CONFIGURATIONS INCLUDE
SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK UNIT IDENTIFICATION HOUR METERS
START-STOP SETTINGS SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK REMOTE SENSORS
INTELLISET & PRODUCTSHIELD START-STOP SETTINGS OTHER SETTINGS
INTELLISET & PRODUCT SHIELD RAIL SETTINGS
BACK EXIT ENGINE SETTINGS AUTO FRESH AIR SETTINGS
ALARM SETTINGS
UNIT IDENTIFICATION
UNIT MODEL NUMBER # A list of configurable model Indicates to the main microprocessor the model
numbers number of the unit. There are several model num-
bers provided in the list. Select the model number
printed on the Model/Serial Number nameplate.
NOTE
The unit model number selection may have an asterisk (*) in the place of the 7th character. If that is the
case, then that number may be selected as long as all of the other numbers and letters match exactly.
TRAILER ID # A customer assigned ID # may be entered. This may
be up to 10 characters long. Numbers, letters, and
spaces may be entered by scrolling through the
available list. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions
on entering the Trailer ID.
NOTE
The default display for this Configuration is “TRAILER ID #”. The display may be modified if the “UNIT
OPERATION’” Configuration in the Rail Settings group is set to “RAIL”. If this Configuration is set to
“RAIL” then “ASSET ID #” or “CAR ID #” may display rather than the “TRAILER ID #” default. Refer to
the UNIT OPERATION Configuration later in this table.
UNIT SERIAL NUMBER # The unit S/N may be entered. Numbers, Letters, and
a space are available by scrolling through the avail-
able list. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for instructions on
entering the unit serial number.
SET NEW HOURS This Configuration will display when a replacement main microprocessor is installed.
It allows entry of the hours (from the existing microprocessor) into the replacement
microprocessor. This Configuration will only display until one of the hour meters
reaches 25 hours. Changes to these values may be made for up to 60 minutes.
SET DATE AND TIME Indicates to the main microprocessor the current date and time. Refer to Section
5.2.3 for instructions on entering the date and time.
NOTE
Date and Time may also be configured under “Other Settings”.
5–17 62-11637
SETPOINT(S) & RANGE LOCK
DECIMAL DISPLAYED DISPLAYED = setpoint will be shown with a decimal
and temperatures may be selected to a tenth of a de-
gree.
NOT DISPLAYED NOT DISPLAYED = setpoint will not be shown with
a decimal. All other temperatures will still be dis-
played with a decimal.
MIN SETPOINT -22°F TO 90°F Indicates to the main microprocessor the desired
(-30C to 32°C) minimum allowable set point.
in 0.1°F or °C increments
MAX SETPOINT -22°F TO 90°F Indicates to the main microprocessor the desired
(-30C to 32°C) maximum allowable setpoint.
RANGE 1 LOCK OFF OFF = If both Range Locks are OFF, the unit will op-
OR START-STOP erate normally.
RANGE 2 LOCK CONTINUOUS If either Range 1 or Range 2 is not OFF, the unit will
operate as selected whenever the setpoint is within
that range
START-STOP = The unit will always operate in
Start-Stop whenever the setpoint is between the
minimum & maximum temperatures for that range
(refer to the following sub-configurations).
CONTINUOUS = The unit will always operate in
Continuous Run whenever the setpoint is between
the minimum & maximum temperatures for that
range (refer to the following sub-configurations).
• RANGE 1 (or 2) MINIMUM -22°F TO 90°F Select the lowest temperature desired for this range.
TEMPERATURE (-30C to 32°C)
• RANGE 1 (or 2) MAXI- -22°F TO 90°F Select the highest temperature desired for this range
MUM TEMPERATURE (-30C to 32°C)
START-STOP SETTINGS
CURRENT FOR S/S SHUT- 7.0A In Start-Stop Operation the charging current must
OFF 1A TO 10A (in 0.5A incre- drop below this value before the unit is allowed to
ments) shut down.
VOLTAGE FOR S/S RE- 12.2V The engine will restart from a Start-Stop Off cycle or
START 12.0 TO 12.8V a Sleep Mode Off cycle when the battery drops to
this value.
A lower selection may result in a longer off cycle
(based on battery voltage) and possibly overall
shorter battery life. A higher selection may result in a
shorter off cycle (based on battery voltage) and pos-
sibly overall longer battery life.
ENGINE TEMP FOR S/S 32°F (0°C) The engine will restart from a Start-Stop Off cycle or
RESTART 10°F to 32°F (-12.2°C to 0°C) a Sleep Mode Off cycle when the engine coolant
temperature drops to this value.
62-11637 5–18
S/S PARAMETERS TOGETHER TOGETHER = When the Minimum Run Time, Mini-
SEPARATE mum Off Time, Restart Temperature, Maximum Off
Time, and Override Temperatures are set in the
Functional Parameter List, the same values will be
used for both Frozen and Perishable setpoints.
SEPARATE = When the Minimum Run Time, Mini-
mum Off Time, Restart Temperature, Maximum Off
Time, and Override Temperatures are set in the
Functional Parameter List, different values may be
entered for Perishable and Frozen setpoints.
INTELLISET & PRODUCTSHIELD
ENABLE INTELLISET AT = NO YES = Allows access to the IntelliSet menu using the
KEY YES = key.
NO = Allows access to the IntelliSet menu using the
SELECT key.
PRODUCTSHIELD: OFF OFF = ProductShield Econo is OFF
ECONO GO TO S/S GO TO START/STOP = Allows unit to be set for and
GO TO CONT operate in Continuous Run until ambient tempera-
ture falls within a user-defined range when unit will
go to START/STOP. This allows energy savings
while offering Continuous Run operation protection
when ambient is outside range. Unit will return to
Continuous Run when ambient goes beyond range.
GO TO CONTINUOUS = Allows unit to be set for
and operate in START/STOP until ambient tempera-
ture falls outside a user-defined range when unit will
go to Continuous Run. This provides continuous air
flow and good product protection for extreme ambi-
ent temperatures. Unit will return to START/ STOP
when ambient comes back inside range.
• ECONO MIN. TEMP OFF or OFF = There is no lower limit for this parameter.
-20°F to +119.0°F Select the lowest ambient temperature desired to ac-
(-28.9°C to tivate ProductShield Econo.
+48.4°C )
(in 0.5° increments) If ProductShield Econo is Go To Continuous there is
Default: 119.0°F a minimum 10°F range. Therefore, this parameter’s
(48.4°C) upper limit is ProductShield Econo Maximum Tem-
perature minus 10°F (5.5°C).
• ECONO MAX. TEMP OFF or OFF = There is no upper limit for this parameter.
-20°F to +119.0°F Select the highest ambient temperature desired to
(-28.9°C to activate ProductShield Econo.
+48.4°C)
(in 0.5° increments) If ProductShield Econo Install is Go To Continuous
Default: 119.0°F there is a minimum 10°F range. Therefore, this pa-
(48.4°C) rameter’s lower limit is ProductShield Econo Min
Temp plus 10°F (5.5°C).
• ECONO DELTA-T OFF OFF = Delta-t is not used in determining when the
NOTE: This is available for +3.6°F to +27.0°F unit will go into Econo: Go To Start/Stop Mode.
“Go to S/S only. It is not (+2°C to 15°C) (in Select the desired delta-t value for activation of
available for “Go to Continu- 0.5° increments ProductShield Econo. When delta-t is below this set-
ous”. ting and within the minimum/maximum range go to
start/stop will be allowed
5–19 62-11637
PRODUCTSHIELD: HIGH OFF OFF = The unit will operate normally in high and low
AIR ON speeds.
ON = The unit will operate in high speed when the
ambient air temperature is outside a user defined
range. This provides increased air flow and good
product protection for extreme ambient tempera-
tures. Unit may return to low speed when ambient
comes back within the range.
• HIGH AIR MIN. TEMP OFF OFF = There is no lower limit for this parameter.
-19°F to +119°F Select the lower limit of the ambient range desired
(-28.3°C to +48.3°C) for this parameter. Refer to Section 4.10.3 for more
in 0.5°F or °C increments information on High Air Min. Temp.
• HIGH AIR MAX. TEMP OFF OFF = There is no upper limit for this parameter.
-19°F to +119°F Select the upper limit of the ambient range desired
(-28.3°C to +48.3°C) for this parameter. Refer to Section 4.10.3 for more
in 0.5°F or °C increments information on High Air Max. Temp.
• HIGH AIR DELTA-T OFF OFF = Delta-t is not used for determining the activa-
+3.6°F to +27°F tion/de-activation of High Air Delta-T
(+2°C to +15°C) Select the desired delta-t value for activation of
in 0.5°C or °F increments ProductShield High Air. Refer to Section 4.10.3 for
more information on High Air Delta-T.
PRODUCTSHIELD: WIN- OFF Select the desired ambient temperature below which
TER -20°F to +32°F ProductShield Winter will operate (forced Continu-
(-28.9°C to +0°C) ous Run operation).
in 0.5°C or °F increments
PRODUCTSHIELD FRESH NO OFF = ProductShield Fresh is turned off.
YES ON - The FreshProtect value in the system will be
overridden when operating under high ambient con-
ditions. Refer to Section 4.10.3 for more information
on FreshProtect.
• PRODUCTSHIELD OFF and A through F This Configuration is used to override the FreshPro-
FRESHPROTECT A = 2 to 5°F (1.1 to 2.8°C) tect Functional Parameter value already in the sys-
B = 4 to 7°F (2.2 to 3.9°C) tem. The values displayed will depend on the
C = 6 to 9°F (3.3 to 4.9°C) FreshProtect Functional Parameter setting for this
D = 8 to 10°F (4.4 to 6.1°C) application. Only the values that allow less tempera-
E = 10 to 13°F (5.6 to 7.2°C) ture drop will be displayed, available for selection.
For example, if the FreshProtect Functional Param-
eter is set to C, then the ProductShield FreshProtect
overrides displayed for selection will be A & B.
• PRODUCTSHIELD 70° F to 118°F (21°C to 48°C) Ambient temperature above which ProductShield
FRESH TEMP in 1° C or °F increments. Fresh will be active.
Default: 90°F (32°C)
62-11637 5–20
ENGINE SETTINGS
GLOW TIME SHORT Indicates to the main microprocessor which engine
LONG is in the system.
INTAKE HEATER LONG = Glow Plug equipped and longer glow times
are used (TV engines).
SHORT= Glow Plug equipped and shorter glow
times are used (DI engines).
INTAKE HEATER = Engine preheat equipped (Tier
4 engines).
NOTE: Refer to Table 4–1 for glow times.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL YES / NO Use of an oil level device is not recommended at this
SWITCH time.
USE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING ONLY, DO
NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT SETTING.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SHUT- YES / NO YES = When the A00002 - “LOW ENGINE OIL LEV-
DOWN EL” alarm is activated the alarm light will illuminate
and the unit will shut down.
NO = When the A00002 - “LOW ENGINE OIL LEV-
EL” alarm is activated the alarm light will illuminate
and the unit will continue to run.
HIGH ENGINE TEMP YES / NO YES = When the A00012 - “High Coolant Tempera-
SHUTDOWN ture“ alarm has been activated three times in the last
two hours of engine operation the A00021 - Techni-
cian Reset Required” alarm will be activated.
NO = When the A00012 - “High Coolant Tempera-
ture“ alarm has been activated three times in the last
two hours of engine operation the A00021 - Techni-
cian Reset Required” alarm will not be activated.
ENGINE OIL PRESS YES / NO YES = When the A00011 - “Low Engine Oil Pres-
SHUTDOWN sure“ alarm has been activated three times in the last
two hours of engine operation the A00021 − “Tech-
nician Reset Required“ alarm will be activated.
NO = When the A00011 - “Low Engine Oil Pressure“
alarm has been activated three times in the last two
hours of engine operation the A00021 − “Technician
Reset Required“ alarm will not be activated.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR YES / NO NO = There is no Fuel Level Sensor installed in the
fuel tank.
YES = A Low Fuel Level Sensor is installed in the
fuel tank.
• LOW FUEL ALARM UNIT SHUTDOWN UNIT SHUTDOWN = The unit will be shutdown and
ALARM ONLY alarm if level reaches 15%.
ALARM ONLY = An alarm will be generated if level
reaches 15% and the engine will continue to run.
FUEL HEATER NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = A Fuel Heater is not installed.
INSTALLED INSTALLED = A Fuel Heater is installed.
5–21 62-11637
MAX THROTTLE POSI- 80 - 125 IF THIS CONFIGURATION IS AVAILABLE, USE
TION 120 default FACTORY DEFAULT ONLY, DO NOT OPERATE
WITH A DIFFERENT SETTING.
ALARM SETTINGS
OUT OF RANGE SHUT- YES / NO YES = When the refrigerated compartment tempera-
DOWN ture has been out-of-range for 45 minutes, the alarm
light will come on, and the unit will shut down.
NO = When the refrigerated compartment tempera-
ture has been out-of-range for 30 minutes, the alarm
light will come on and the unit will continue to run.
Refer to Alarm A00053 - “BOX TEMPERATURE
OUT OF RANGE” (Section 9) for more information.
RPM ALARM SHUTDOWN YES / NO YES = When the A00039 - “CHECK ENGINE RPM”
alarm is activated the alarm light will illuminate and
the engine will shut down.
NO = When the A00039 - “CHECK ENGINE RPM”
alarm is activated the alarm light will illuminate and
the engine will continue to run.
LOW PRESSURE SHUT- YES / NO YES = When the A00018 - “LOW REFRIGERANT
DOWN PRESSURE” alarm is activated the alarm light will il-
luminate and the unit will shut down.
NO = When the A00018 - “LOW REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE” alarm is activated the alarm light will il-
luminate and the unit will continue to run.
• LP SHUTDOWN DELAY (0 - 255 seconds in 1 second If the Low Pressure Shutdown Configuration is set to
increments) YES, shutdown is to be delayed for this amount of
120 SECS time after the Low Pressure Shutdown signal is re-
ceived.
HIGH SUCT PRESS SHUT- YES / NO YES = When the A00027 - “HIGH SUCTION PRES-
DOWN SURE” alarm is activated the alarm light will illumi-
nate and the unit will shut down.
NO = When the A00027 - “HIGH SUCTION PRES-
SURE” alarm is activated the alarm light will illumi-
nate and the unit will continue to run.
REFRIGERATION SYS YES / NO YES = When the A00028 - “CHECK REFRIGERA-
SHUTDOWN TION SYSTEM” alarm is activated the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will shut down.
NO = When the A00028 - “CHECK REFRIGERA-
TION SYSTEM” alarm is activated the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will continue to run.
COMPRESSOR ALARM YES / NO If the “Compressor Alarm Shutdown” option has
SHUTDOWN been installed (refer to Unit Data), this setting will be
(This Configuration is an op- available.
tion, it will not display if the YES = The unit will shutdown and not restart when
option is not installed.) Alarm 13, 17, 18, 27, 28 or 56 occur 3 times within 2
hours of continuous engine operation.
NO = Normal shutdown rules for above alarms.
62-11637 5–22
ALTERNATOR CHECK YES / NO YES = When the A00051 - “ALTERNATOR NOT
SHUTDOWN CHARGING” alarm is activated the alarm light will il-
luminate and the unit will shut down.
NO = When the A00051 - “ALTERNATOR NOT
CHARGING” alarm is activated the alarm light will il-
luminate and the unit will continue to run.
CONFIGURE HOUR METERS
VIEWABLE STANDARD METERS
DISPLAY TOTAL ENGINE YES / NO YES = This hour meter will be displayed during the
HR startup messaging sequence and will be in hour me-
ter menu.
NO = This hour meter will not be displayed during the
startup messaging sequence. It will be displayed
with the “other meters and counters”.
DISPLAY TOTAL SWITCH YES / NO YES = This hour meter will be displayed during the
ON HR startup messaging sequence and will be in hour me-
ter menu.
NO = This hour meter will not be displayed during the
startup messaging sequence. It will be displayed
with the “other meters and counters”.
SET PM CONFIGURATIONS
PM (METER NUMBER) OFF OFF = This selection will turn this meter OFF (will not
CONFIGS HIGH SPEED HOURS display).
Meters available are PM−1 START CYCLES ENGINE HOURS = this meter will count the engine
thorough PM−5. hours until the next reset interval.
CLUTCH CYCLES
SWITCH ON HOURS = this meter will count the
SWITCH ON HOURS switch on hours until the next reset interval.
ENGINE HOURS START CYCLES = this meter will count how many
times the engine has started until the next reset in-
terval.
CLUTCH CYCLES = this meter will count how many
times the clutch is engaged until the next reset inter-
val.
HIGH SPEED HOURS = this meter will count the
number of hours the engine operated in high speed
until the next reset interval.
If a meter is configured, the following sub−configura-
tion will be available.
DIESEL RESET VALUE OFF When the engine maintenance hour meter is reset,
(Refer to Table 8–1 for oil/ 50 to 30,000 hours in 50 hour the value selected here will be added to the present
filter change intervals.) increments meter reading to indicate to the microprocessor
when the next service interval alarm will be activat-
ed. If the value entered is “0” the alarm feature is
turned off.
5–23 62-11637
SWITCH ON RESET VAL- OFF When the switch on maintenance hour meter is re-
UE 50 to 30,000 hours in 50 hour set, the value selected here will be added to the
increments present meter reading to indicate to the micropro-
cessor when the next service interval alarm will be
activated. If the value entered is “0” the alarm feature
is turned off.
• PM 1 − 5 RESET INTER- ENGINE HOURS The value to be entered here is the desired number
VAL 0 or 50 TO 30,000 hours in 50 of hours or cycles between PM Maintenance Alarms
Note: hour increments for this meter.
This Configuration will not SWITCH ONHOURS 0 or 50 When the meter is reset, the value selected here will
display for those meters that TO 30,000 hours in 50 hour in- be added to the to the present meter reading to indi-
are configured for zero crements cate to the main microprocessor when the next ser-
hours. vice interval alarm is to be activated.
START CYCLES 0 or 1,000
TO 90,000 CYCLES in 1,000
cycle increments
CLUTCH CYCLES 0 or 1,000
TO 90,000 CYCLES in 1,000
cycle increments
HIGH SPEED HOURS 0 or 50
TO 30,000 hours in 50 hour in-
crements
REMOTE SENSORS
REMOTE TEMP SENSOR ON / OFF ON = A remote sensor has been added to the unit,
1 (or 2) and connected into the wire harness.
OFF = There is no Remote Sensor (1or 2) in this unit.
NOTE
If an intake air sensor is installed in this unit, the sen-
sor will be wired into the REMS2 connections and be
activated by the REMS2 configuration.
DOOR SWITCH NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = There is no door switch.
OPEN SWITCH OPEN SWITCH CLOSED = A Door switch has been
OPEN installed. The switch contacts will be CLOSED
whenever the door is OPEN.
OPEN SWITCH
OPEN SWITCH OPEN = A Door switch has been in-
CLOSED stalled. The switch contacts will be OPEN whenever
the door is OPEN.
62-11637 5–24
• DOOR SWITCH ALARM ONLY ALARM ONLY = When Door switch indicates that
UNIT SHUTDOWN the door is open, a warning alarm will be displayed in
the MessageCenter.
LOW ENGINE SPEED
UNIT SHUTDOWN = When Door switch indicates
DATA RECORDER ONLY that the door is open, a warning alarm will be dis-
played in the MessageCenter, and the unit will shut-
down. If this setting is chosen the following sub-
setting will also be available.
LOW ENGINE SPEED = When Door switch indi-
cates that the door is open, the engine will be forced
to low speed. If this setting is chosen the following
sub-setting will also be available.
DATA RECORDER ONLY = The DataLink data re-
corder will record every time the door is opened or
closed. There will be no alarms or messages dis-
played in the MessageCenter.
• • UNIT SHUTDOWN BE- OFF If Door Switch = Unit Shutdown is selected:
LOW 120 to -20°F (49 to -29°C) OFF = the unit will shutdown at any ambient tem-
(ambient air temperature) perature.
Value = when ambient temperature is below the en-
tered value, shut down will be allowed. (When ambi-
ent temperature is above the entered value, the unit
will not shutdown.)
• • RUN LOW SPEED BE- OFF If Door Switch = Low Engine Speed is selected:
LOW 120 to -20°F (49 to -29°C) OFF = the unit will transition to low speed at any am-
(ambient air temperature) bient temperature.
Value = when ambient temperature is below the en-
tered value, transition to low speed will be allowed.
(When ambient temperature is above the entered
value, the unit will not transition to low speed.)
REMOTE SWITCH 1 NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = There is no remote switch.
ON CONTACTS CLOSED ON CONTACTS CLOSED = The remote switch will
ON CONTACTS OPEN be used as a remote control switch. The switch con-
tacts will be CLOSED whenever the switch is in the
OPEN SWITCH CLOSED ON position.
OPEN SWITCH OPEN ON CONTACTS OPEN = The remote switch will be
used as a remote control switch. The switch contacts
will be OPEN whenever the switch is in the ON posi-
tion.
OPEN SWITCH CLOSED = The remote switch will
be used as a door switch. The switch contacts will be
CLOSED whenever the door is OPEN.
OPEN SWITCH OPEN = The remote switch will be
used as a door switch. The switch contacts will be
OPEN whenever the door is OPEN.
5–25 62-11637
• REMOTE SWITCH 1 ALARM ONLY ALARM ONLY = When the switch is activated, a
UNIT SHUTDOWN warning alarm will be displayed in the Message-
Center.
LOW ENGINE SPEED
UNIT SHUTDOWN = When the switch is activated,
DATA RECORDER ONLY a warning alarm will be displayed in the Message-
Center, and the unit will shutdown.
LOW ENGINE SPEED = When the switch is activat-
ed, the engine will be forced to low speed.
DATA RECORDER ONLY = The DataLink data re-
corder will record every time the switch is activated.
There will be no alarms or messages displayed in
the MessageCenter.
OTHER SETTINGS
ENABLE ADVANCED YES / NO YES = Advanced User Mode is automatically en-
USER MODE: abled when the unit is powered on.
NO = Driver Mode is automatically enabled when the
unit is powered on and Advanced User Mode may be
enabled manually.
PROTECT DATA WITH PIN YES / NO
NOTE
master technician PIN code is described
in Section 5.2. Using the TRUtech pro-
gram, a data protect PIN code, which can
override the master technician PIN code,
may be entered into the control system.
YES = The data protect PIN code will override the

master technician PIN code and the data protect
code must be entered to use the USB Interface port
or data recorder print functions.
NO = The data protect PIN code, if entered, will not
override the master technician PIN code when using
the USB Interface port or data recorder print functions
PARAMETERS LOCKOUT YES / NO YES = All Functional Parameters are locked and
cannot be changed using the display mounted keys.
NO = Functional Parameters can be changed using
the display mounted keys, unless individually locked
out by TRU-Tech.
8 HOURS ADDITIONAL YES / NO YES = When the START/RUN−OFF switch is placed
DATA in the OFF position, the DataLink data recorder will
continue to record data for an additional 8 hours.
NO = When the START/RUN−OFF switch is placed
in the OFF position, the DataLink data recorder will
stop recording data.
HIGH SPEED DELAY 1 Minute Select the length of time unit remains in low speed
0 to 10 minutes in 0.5 minute before transitioning to high speed.
increments
LIGHT BAR NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = a remote light bar is not installed
2 LIGHT 2 light = a two light bar is installed.
62-11637 5–26
SET DATE AND TIME Indicates to the main microprocessor the current date and time. Refer to Section
5.2.3 for instructions on entering the date and time.
NOTE
Date and Time may also be configured under “Unit Identification”.
SATELLITE COMM OTHER OTHER = The microprocessor is set for communica-
(This Configuration is an op- QUALCOMM tion from Qualcomm T2 (Trailer Tracs 2) or any other
tion, it will not display if the supplier.
option is not installed.) QUALCOMM =- The microprocessor is set for com-
munication from Qualcomm Trailer Tracs.
RAIL SETTINGS
UNIT OPERATION STANDARD RAIL = The system is set to control Rail refrigeration
RAIL operation. When this Configuration is set to “RAIL”
the following “VEHICLE ID”, “RAIL SHUTDOWN
OVERRIDE” and “RAIL OVERRIDE RESTARTS”
Sub-Configurations will be available.
• VEHICLE ID ASSET This Configuration modifies the prefix wording used
TRAILER for display of the customer assigned ID number en-
tered in the “TRAILER ID” Configuration. For exam-
CAR ple, if the customer assigned ID number entered is
12345:
ASSET = will display “ASSET # 12345”
TRAILER = will display “TRAILER # 12345”
CAR = will display “CAR # 12345”
• RAIL SHUTDOWN OVER- NO NO = When the A00030 - “FAILED TO RUN MIN
RIDE YES TIME” or A00031 - “FAILED TO START - AUTO”
alarm is activated, the system will not override the
alarm(s) and the unit will not restart until the alarms
are cleared manually.
YES = When either an A00030 - “FAILED TO RUN
MIN TIME” or A00031 - “FAILED TO START - AUTO
alarm is activated, the unit will automatically override
and clear the alarm(s) and attempt a restart after 4
hours. When this Configuration is set to “YES” the
following “RAIL OVERRIDE RESTARTS” Sub-Con-
figurations will be available.
• RAIL OVERRIDE RE- 1-20 With the default setting the system is allowed to
STARTS 3 override and clear the A00030 - “FAILED TO RUN
MIN TIME” or A00031 - “FAILED TO START - AUTO
alarm(s) three consecutive times before the override
is locked out and no further restart attempts will be
allowed until the alarm(s) are cleared manually.
The number of restart attempts allowed before the
override is locked out may be changed by entering
the desired number in this Sub-Configuration. Set-
ting this number too high may result in a discharged
or damaged battery if the unit never actually starts or
fails to run long enough to charge the battery prior to
shutting down again.
5–27 62-11637
AUTO FRESH AIR SETTINGS
AUTOFRESH AIR NOT INSTALLED NOT INSTALLED = AutoFresh Air Exchange is not
STANDARD installed
STANDARD = AutoFresh Air Exchange is installed
• AUTOFRESH AIR DELAY SETPOINT SETPOINT - Once the compartment temperature
0-48 HOURS IN 1 HOUR IN- has reached setpoint 1.5°F (0.8°C), the Auto- Fresh
CREMENTS Air Exchange will start to operate based on the se-
lected Functional Parameters.
0 to 48 Hours - After this length of time, AutoFresh
Air Exchange will begin if the unit is no longer run-
ning in Pulldown, even though the compartment tem-
perature may not have reached setpoint.
SECTION 6 - MESSAGECENTER
6.1 MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES ................................................ 6–1
62-11637
SECTION 6
MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES
6.1 MESSAGECENTER MESSAGES
The following table lists all of the messages which do not appear in other lists in this manual and a description of
their meaning. Refer to Section 9 for a list of Alarm messages. Refer to Section 3.13 for a list of Unit Data mes-
sages. Refer to Section 3.16 for a list of Functional Parameter messages. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for a list of Con-
figuration messages.
Table 6–1 MessageCenter Messages

Message Description
ACTIVE This message will appear in the MessageCenter along with the current
IntelliSet indicating that the IntelliSet is active and none of its settings
have been modified.
ACTIVE ALARM LIST CLEARED The list of active alarms in the microprocessor has been erased. (This
does not remove alarms from the DataLink data recorder.)
ALL ALARMS CLEARED The list of active and inactive alarms in the microprocessor alarm lists
have been erased. (This does not remove alarms from the DataLink data
recorder.)
BUZZER OFF IN X MINS The Buzzer circuit has been energized in Component Test Mode. The
Buzzer circuit will continue to be energized for the number of minutes
shown.
CANNOT ENTER TRIP START Cannot enter Trip Start. A problem has been detected within the DataLink
data recorder.
CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE Due to current unit conditions, the defrost cycle cannot be started. Refer
to Defrost Section 3.10 and Section 8.9.13.
CANNOT START PRETRIP Due to current unit conditions a Pretrip test cannot be started. Re- fer to
Pretrip Section 3.5.
CHANGE INTELLISET TO EXIT The IntelliSleep IntelliSet is active. Alternates with “INTELLI− SLEEP
MODE” at 5 second interval whether unit is running or not.
CHARGE MODE−HOLD = TO EXIT Service Mode has the refrigeration system set so that it can be charged
with refrigerant through the liquid line service valve. Press the = key to
manually exit, or wait until the charging is complete.
CHECK AT NEXT SERVICE INTER- The unit needs to be checked at next service interval.
VAL There is currently an active non−shutdown alarm in the alarm list.
CHECK DOOR The door switch indicates that a refrigerated compartment door is not
closed.
CHECK FUEL LEVEL (Requires Op- The level in the fuel tank is very close to empty.
tional Sensor)
COMPONENT TEST MODE Pressing the = key while this message is highlighted will allow user ac-
cess to Component Test Mode.
CONTINUOUS LOCKED The current setpoint is within a range that has been locked into the Con-
tinuous Run Mode. Start−Stop can not be selected.
CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECT- The unit operating mode has been changed from Start-Stop to Continu-
ED ous Run.
DATA RECORDER FAILURE The microprocessor has stopped recording Unit Data.
DEFROST CYCLE STARTED The unit has gone into defrost.
6–1 62-11637
Message Description
DOOR OPEN A refrigerated compartment door is open.
DOOR OPEN − LOW SPEED A refrigerated compartment door is open forcing the unit to run in low
speed.
ENTERING SERVICE MODE The initial message for Service Mode.
ERROR: ENG HRS > SWITCH ON
HRS When setting up a replacement microprocessor, incorrect hours have
ERROR: HI SP HRS > TOTAL ENG been entered
HRS
EVAC / CHARGE MODE The unit is in Service Mode, and the refrigeration system is ready to be
evacuated then charged with refrigerant. Refer to Section 5.2.5
EXITING PRETRIP MODE Pretrip has been aborted either by user or by a pretrip alarm.
EXITING SERVICE MODE Service Mode has been turned off and unit is returning to normal opera-
tion.
INACTIVE ALARMS IN MEMORY There are inactive alarms in the microprocessor alarm list which have not
yet been cleared.
INTELLI−SLEEP MODE The IntelliSleep IntelliSet is active. This message alternates with
“CHANGE INTELLISET TO EXIT” at 5 second interval whether unit is
running or not.
KEYPAD (display mounted keys) Once the battery voltage goes below 7.0 Volts for 10 seconds, all of the
LOCKED−BATTERY TOO LOW keys on the display will be locked.
LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS There is a loss of communications between the display module or other
module(s). If a specific module is involved, the name of the module will
also be indicated.
MAX SETPOINT HAS BEEN Maximum setpoint allowed by configuration settings has been reached.
REACHED
MICRO WILL RESET & RESTART The microprocessor program software has just been changed, or a new
NOW configuration has been programmed into the microprocessor. The micro-
processor will turn itself off then on again (similar to a computer reboot)
in order for the changes to be effective.
MIN SETPOINT HAS BEEN REACHED Minimum setpoint allowed by configuration settings has been reached.
MODIFIED This message will appear in the MessageCenter along with the current
IntelliSet indicating that the IntelliSet is active and one or more of its set-
tings have been modified.
NO ACTIVE ALARMS There are no active alarms in the microprocessor Alarm List.
NO INACTIVE ALARMS There are no inactive alarms in the Alarm List
PC MODE The START/RUN−OFF switch is in the OFF position, the engine is not
running in order to enter PC Mode.
PM DUE Preventative Maintenance is now due on the unit. Information on what
meter(s) has timed out and the reset feature is provided under Technician
Hour Meters. Refer to Section 5.2.1.
PRETRIP FAIL & COMPLETED The Pretrip test is completed, and some of the Pretrip tests did not pass.
Check the Alarm List for Pretrip alarms.
PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST XX Some of the Pretrip tests did not pass and the Pretrip was not completed.
Check the Alarm List for Pretrip alarms.
62-11637 6–2
Message Description
PRETRIP PASS All of the Pretrip tests were ok.
PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER Pretrip has been stopped by user.
PRODUCTSHIELD: ECONO ON The unit is operating in ProductShield Econo which overrides normal unit
Start−Stop or Continuous Run operation. Refer to Section 4.10.3.
PRODUCTSHIELD: HIGH AIR ON The unit is operating in ProductShield High Air which overrides normal
unit speed operation. Refer to Section 4.10.3.
PRODUCTSHIELD: WINTER ON The unit is operating in ProductShield Winter which overrides normal unit
operation. Refer to Section 4.10.3.
RECORDING DATA − PLEASE WAIT This message will be displayed when the unit is starting and the main mi-
MICRO WILL RESTART WHEN COM- croprocessor is completing communicating with another module.
PLETE
RECOVER / LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE This message will be displayed when the unit is in Service Mode and the
system is ready for recovery and leak testing.
REMOTE SWITCH 1 OPEN Remote switch is open. May be connected to a refrigerated compartment
door or a remote control switch.
REMOTE SWITCH 1 OPEN − LOW Shows that the remote switch is open and that the unit is running in low
SPEED speed. Switch may be connected to a refrigerated compartment door or
a remote control switch.
SERVICE MODE Selection which is used when servicing the refrigeration system. Refer to
Section 5.2.5.
SETPOINT CHANGED The new setpoint has been entered (saved into microprocessor memo-
ry), the new setpoint will be used.
SETPOINT NOT CHANGED The new setpoint has NOT been entered (NOT saved into microproces-
sor memory), the old setpoint will be used.
SETTING SMV: XXX % The START/RUN−OFF switch has been toggled out of the OFF position
and the CSMV is opening.
SLEEP MODE, OFF / ON TO WAKE The unit is cycled off in Sleep Mode. Place the START/RUN−OFF switch
in the OFF position, then back to the START/RUN position to wake the
microprocessor up.
SLEEP WARNING: DOOR OPEN The unit is configured for Rail Mode and the unit is in Sleep Mode and a
refrigerated compartment door is open. The unit will start as needed for
Sleep Mode.
SLEEP WARNING: NO TEMP CON- The unit is running in Sleep Mode to charge the battery and (in Engine
TROL Operation) warm the engine coolant. It is not running to provide tempera-
ture control.
SLEEP WARNING: REMS1(2) OPEN The unit is configured for Rail Mode and the unit is in Sleep Mode and a
remote switch is open. The switch may be connected to a refrigerated
compartment door or to a remote control switch. The unit will start as
needed for Sleep Mode.
SMV CLOSING: WAIT XXX SECONDS Power Up and the CSMV is closing. XX indicates the number of seconds
remaining until valve is fully closed.
START STOP LOCKED The setpoint has been locked into Start−Stop Operation. Continuous Run
can not be selected.
START−STOP MODE SELECTED Start−Stop Operation has been selected.
STATUS OK The unit is operating correctly.
6–3 62-11637
Message Description
TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED AL00011 (Low Engine Oil Pressure) or AL00012 (High Coolant Tempera-
(AL00021) ture) has been activated three times in the last two hours and the unit has
been locked out. Refer to Section 7 for further information.
TIME SELECTION NOT CHANGED A time change was started but not entered (saved) in Configuration List.
TRIP START ENTERED The Trip Start marker has been placed in the DataLink data recorder.
UNIT BATTERY TOO LOW The unit battery has dropped below 7 volts for more than 10 seconds.
UNIT SHUTDOWN − DOOR OPEN The unit has shutdown because the refrigerated compartment door is
open.
UNIT SHUTDOWN − SEE ALARM An active shutdown alarm has shut the unit down.
LIST
UNIT SHUTDOWN − RMS1 The unit has shutdown because switch is open. May be connected to a
door or a remote control switch.
USE UP/DOWN KEY TO SCROLL USE Items available are being displayed or additional items are available for
= KEY TO SELECT ITEM TO CHANGE selection. Use the up or down arrow key to highlight or display and high-
light the desired selection and then use the “=” key to select it.
VIEWING MENU SOFTKEY SELEC- Additional soft key selections are available and the MENU key is to be
TIONS PRESS MENU KEY TO used to scroll and view them.
SCROLL
WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL The temperature sensors have failed and the unit has entered Cargo Pro-
tect Mode. Refer to Section 4.11.1.
62-11637 6–4
SECTION 7 - ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–1

7.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–2
7.3 ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–3
00011 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–4
00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–5
00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–7
00015 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
00016 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–8
00017 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–9
00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–10
00019 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
00020 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–11
00021 TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
00022 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–12
00027 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–13
00028 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–14
00029 CHECK HEAT CYCLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
00030 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–15
00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–16
00034 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–17
00035 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–18
00036 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
00037 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–19
00038 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–20
00039 CHECK ENGINE RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–21
00040 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–22
00041 ENGINE STALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–23
00051 ALTERNATOR NOT CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–25
00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–26
00054 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–28
00055 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–29
00056 CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–30
00057 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 1 (REMS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–31
00059 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) NOT RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
00060 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) TIME WRONG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–32
00061 DOOR OPEN (DS1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–33
00067 SENSOR 1 INPUT VOLTAGE LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–34
00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–35
00081 CHECK FHR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
00084 CHECK REMOTE ALARM LIGHT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–36
62-11637
00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–37
00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–38
00090 CHK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–39
00093 CHECK STARTUP BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–40
00097 CHECK SV2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–41
00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–42
00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–43
00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
00127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–44
00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–45
00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–46
00132 CHECK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–47
00133 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
00134 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–48
P00141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
P00143 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–49
P00151 CHECK GLOW CIRCUIT (This applies to the engine preheater = EPH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–50
P00152 CHECK FUEL SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–51
P00155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
P00157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–52
P00158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
P00160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
P00161 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–53
P00162 CHECK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–54
P00165 CANNOT PUMP DOWN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
P00174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–55
P00175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56
P00177 CHECK EXV (EVXV) SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–56
P00178 CHECK UL1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–57
P00180 CHECK SUCTION MOD VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–58
P00181 CHECK SV4 VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–59
P00182 CHECK SV1 VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–59
P00186 CHECK EVAP OUTLET TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–59
P00191 CHECK UL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–60
P00194 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–61
P00196 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–62
P00198 LOW DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–63
P00201 CHECK UL2 CYLINDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–64
P00202 HIGH SIDE LEAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65
P00203 CHK DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–65
P00204 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–66
P00205 CHK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67
00223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–67
00225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68
00226 SERVICE SOON-PM #1 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–68
00232 SETPOINT ERROR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71
00233 MODEL # ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–71
00237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–72
00238 CONFIGURATIONS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–73
00245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–74
00246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–74
00248 CONFIG MODE / HP2 ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
00250 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH ALL MODULES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
00251 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH INPUT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
00252 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH OUTPUT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–75
00253 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH SUCTION MODULATION VALVE MODULE (SVM) 7–75
00254 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH DISPLAY MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
00255 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
02000 UPDATE SOFTWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–76
03001 ENGINE LOAD CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–77
05016 CHECK REMOTE AMBER LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–80
05017 CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–81
20100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–82
21100 NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83
22100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO INPBD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–83
22101 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE LOW INP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–84
22102 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE HIGH INP1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–85
23100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO OUTPBD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–85
25100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO STP1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–86
26100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO ENCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7–87
62-11637
SECTION 7
ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING
cause of the problem will be obvious once a visual
! WARNING inspection is performed. For those cases where the
cause of the problem is not obvious, this troubleshoot-
APX control system equipped units may ing guide will be of assistance.
start automatically at any time the Troubleshooting should begin with the first alarm that
START/ RUN-OFF switch is in the START/ appears in the active alarm list. The first alarm that
RUN position. Also, the unit may be fitted appears is the last alarm that was recorded. Other
with two way communication equipment alarms in the list may have contributed to the occur-
that will allow starting of the unit from a rence of the first alarm.
remote location even though the switch
The check items in the troubleshooting guide are listed
is in the OFF position.
in order of their likeliness of occurrence and ease of test-
ing. We recommend that you follow the order in which
they are presented, however, there may be times when
! WARNING situations or experience lead to the use of a different
When performing service or maintenance order. For example, if the trailer is loaded, condensing
procedures: ensure any two way commu- section checks should be done first, even though some
nication is disabled in accordance with evaporator section checks may be listed before them.
the manufacturer’s instruction, ensure When the cause of the problem is corrected, it is not nec-
the START/RUN-OFF switch is in OFF essary to continue through the remainder of the steps.
position and, whenever practical, discon- Some active alarms will inactivate themselves automati-
nect the negative battery connection. cally once the cause has been corrected. Alarms that do
not inactivate themselves automatically must be cleared
7.1 INTRODUCTION manually. (Refer to Note 1 in Section 7.2)
This section provides guidance for troubleshooting When repairs are completed, run the unit through a
alarms. The alarm light will be illuminated when there is Pretrip cycle and verify that no further active alarms
at least one alarm stored in the system. Instructions for occur. Also, the inactive alarm list should be cleared so
reviewing the active alarm list are provided in Section that there are no inactive alarms in memory when the
3.14 while instructions for reviewing the inactive alarm unit leaves the repair facility.
list are provided in Section 5.2.2. When working on the refrigeration system, an accu-
When an alarm occurs, look through both active and rately calibrated manifold gauge set should always be
inactive alarm lists and make note of all alarms. Each installed, set up to read compressor suction and dis-
alarm begins with an A (active) or I (inactive) followed charge pressure. Compressor suction pressure is dis-
by an alarm number and description. Alarms are listed played under Unit Data when in the Driver Mode. If in
in this guide by alarm number in ascending order. the Advance User Mode, compressor discharge pres-
Alarms that are only activated during a Pretrip will sure and temperature will also be displayed.
begin with a capital “P”. In high or low ambient it may be necessary to cool or
Before beginning to actually troubleshoot an alarm, warm the refrigerated compartment temperature before
visually inspect the unit, in particular the area of the performing specific tests providing that the compart-
unit that is causing a problem. In many cases the ment is not loaded with temperature sensitive product.
7–1 62-11637
7.2 NOTES
NOTE
NOTE Note 3: Sensors may be tested by taking a
resistance measurement, at the sensor side
Note 1: The active alarm list may be cleared
of the harness connector, at the sensor loca-
when in the Driver Mode or Advanced User
tion. To do this, being careful not to damage
Mode by pressing the CLEAR ALARMS soft
the connector pins, disconnect the sensor
key. That is: the alarm is “cleared” from the
from the harness and measure resistance.
active alarm list and moved to the inactive
Refer to Section 8.10.7 for chart of resis-
alarm list for later review if the condition that
tances for different sensors.
caused the alarm has been corrected. When
Shutdown Alarms are cleared, the unit will
The interconnecting wiring may also be
attempt to restart. When non-Shutdown
tested by checking for continuity between
Alarms are cleared, there will be no notice-
the harness side of the connector at the sen-
able change in the unit’s operation.
sor location and the harness side of the con-
nector at the module.
The Inactive Alarm list may be cleared when
in the Technician Mode in the same way.
From the inactive alarm list the technician NOTE
has the option to “Clear Inactive” alarms only Note 4: The switches, (door/remote, high
or to “Clear All” alarms. Clearing the inactive pressure, engine oil pressure and defrost air)
alarm list removes the alarm from the sys- may be tested by checking continuity, at the
tem. However alarms that have been acti- switch side of the harness connector, at the
vated will remain in the data recorder. switch location. To do this, being careful not
to damage the connector pins, disconnect the
NOTE switch from the harness and check continuity
to determine if the switch is open or closed.
Note 2: The Virtual Tech system may provide
a “signal” voltage when a circuit is not ener-
The interconnecting wiring for the door/
gized (nominal 3 to 5 volts). This signal volt-
remote, engine oil pressure and defrost air
age is used by the control system to activate
switches may also be tested by checking for
an alarm message if there is a problem in the
continuity between the harness side of the
circuit but should not be used for component
connector at the switch location and the har-
testing.
ness side of the connector at the module.
When instructed to test for voltage, energize
The high pressure switch (HPS) interconnect-
the component using Component Test Mode
ing wiring may be tested by checking for con-
to ensure the correct voltage is being read.
tinuity between the harness side of the
Refer to Section 5.2.4. Also, testing may be
connector at the high pressure switch location
performed without the unit starting. To do
and the PCM or JP−1 harness connector.
this, place the unit in PC Mode before using
Component Test Mode. Refer to Section
5.3.2. NOTE
Note 5: Some tests can only be conducted
while the unit is operating. The unit may be
started automatically by placing the SROS in
the Start/Run position.
62-11637 7–2
7.3 ALARMS
00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING
NOTE
This is an optional alarm which will only occur when a fuel level sensor is present & configured “YES”.
• ACTIVATION: The ENCU circuit is energized (3MM−9) and fuel level is 15% or less for more than 30 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the ENCU circuit is energized (3MM−9) and fuel level is above 17%
for more than 30 seconds, or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the
unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active alarm
should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any ac-
tive alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For Low Fuel Level

Check fuel level in the fuel tank. Add fuel as needed to the fuel tank.
2. Check Fuel Level Sensor

Refer to procedure for alarm 00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be cor-
rected and the alarm cleared to continue.
7–3 62-11637
00011 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
NOTE
This alarm may be activated if too high a viscosity oil is used in cold ambient.
• ACTIVATION: The ENCU circuit is energized (3MM−9) and engine oil pressure is below 12 psig (0.82 bar)
for longer than 5 seconds while the engine is running.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turn-
ing the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the active
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Notes Section, page 7-2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any
active alarm occurs.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Engine Oil Level

Check engine oil dipstick. Add engine oil as needed to fill.
2. Check Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS) Power & Wiring
a. Inspect switch, connector pins & terminals. Verify that there is no physical damage to the switch.
Check the connections for damage and corrosion.
b. Using Component Test Mode, energize the ENCU Power Circuit. Check for power at the switch con-
nector. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check the connectors and wiring between terminals for
damage, moisture or corrosion.
c. Check for continuity from switch connector terminal A to ENCU−15. If good continuity is not present,
check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
d. Check for continuity from switch connector terminal B to ENCU−18. If good continuity is not present,
3. Check ENOPS Switch

Remove switch, connect to an external pressure source and test. Contacts close on a pressure rise at
15 psig (1.02 bar). Contacts open on a pressure fall at 12 psig (0.82 bar).
4. Check Engine Oil Pressure

Connect mechanical oil gauge. Oil pressure must be greater than 15 psig (1.02 bar.).
62-11637 7–4
00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• ACTIVATION:
Condition 1: Ambient temperature is below 120°F (48.9°C) and engine coolant temperature is above
230°F (110°C).
Condition 2: Ambient temperature is above 120°F (48.9°C) and, engine coolant temp is above 241°F
(116°C).
Condition 3: Ambient temperature is below 120°F (48.9°C) and the engine coolant temperature has
remained between 230 and 241°F (110 and 116°C) for more than 5 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes if the engine coolant temp falls below 212°F (100°C), or
alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off and back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Coolant Level
! WARNING
Do not remove the cap from a hot coolant system. If the cap must be removed, do so very
slowly in order to release the pressure without spray.
a. Check coolant level in overflow bottle. Level must be in the normal range.
b. Inspect connecting tube between overflow bottle and radiator. Connections must be airtight. No
leakage or holes in tube.
2. Check Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)

a. Refer to procedure for alarm 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR. Alarm condition must be
corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
3. Check Freeze Point Of Coolant

Use Coolant Tester to check concentration of anti-freeze mixture. Must be between 40% to 60% Eth-
ylene Glycol to water mixture.
4. Check Water Pump / Alternator Belt

Check belt condition. Verify no Glazing, no Cracking, no Slipping. Replace belt if required. Refer to
Section 8.5.15.
5. Check Airflow Through Radiator & Condenser Coil

a. Inspect condenser & radiator. Ninety percent or more of the coil surface must be undamaged. Con-
denser/Radiator coil must be clean.
b. Check airflow (with unit running). Verify even airflow through the entire coil and no “dead” spots.
c. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping. Replace
if required. Refer to Section 8.6.
7–5 62-11637
00012 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE - CONTINUED
6. Check Engine Cooling System
a. Compare actual engine temperature to the Unit Data reading. Temperature must be within ± 20°F (±
11.1°C).
b. Test operation of thermostat. Must operate correctly.
c. Check water pump operation. Verify no seepage at weep hole, bearings tight and quiet, and Impel-
ler firmly attached to shaft.
d. Check cooling system for scale, sludge, rust, etc. Coolant must be clean & clear with no foreign par-
ticles or substances in it. Flush & clean the coolant system as necessary.
e. Check water pump bypass hose to thermostat housing for internal blockage. Must be clear and
open.
62-11637 7–6
00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: Compressor discharge pressure switch (HPS) contacts are open. HPS contacts open when
the discharge pressure rises to 465 psig (32 bar).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes if the compressor discharge pressure falls below 350
psig (24 bar), or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. If Alarm Occurs During Pretrip Test 12, 13 or 14

Check that SV1 is opening. During Pretrip tests 12, 13 and 14, SV1 may be de-energized for 1 second
to reduce discharge pressure. If SV1 fails to actually open during the 1 second that it is de-energized
this alarm may occur. Repair SV1 as required.
2. Check System Pressures
Install manifold gauge set and check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with
those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison. If discharge pressure
is in normal range, proceed to step 5.
b. Check airflow (with unit running). Verify even airflow through the entire coil, and no “dead” spots.
c. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping. Replace
if required. Refer to Section 8.6.
4. Check Refrigerant Charge
Refer to Section 8.7.2. Charge must be correct.
5. Check HPS Power And Wiring
a. Inspect switch, connector pins & terminals. Verify that there is no physical damage to the switch.
Check the connections for damage and corrosion.
b. Disconnect switch connector and check for power at the A position (includes J1, SROS, and SP-9).
If a minimum of 11 VDC is not present, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage,
moisture or corrosion.
c. Check continuity from the switch connector B position to PCM-15 (includes SP-5). If good continuity
is not present, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
6. Check HPS Switch
a. With discharge pressure below the switch closing pressure (refer to Section 2.9). Disconnect switch
connector and check continuity across the switch. Switch closed.
b. Check switch operation. Test switch. Refer to Section 8.9.11 step b.
7. Perform Pretrip
Run Pretrip and check for alarms. Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared before proceed-
ing.
8. Refer to Refrigeration Troubleshooting

Refer to Section 9.3. Discharge must be in range for the current ambient and refrigerated compart-
ment conditions.
7–7 62-11637
00015 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH
• ACTIVATION: Voltage at the main microprocessor is greater than 17 VDC.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes when the voltage at the main microprocessor is between
11 and 14 VDC, or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Battery Voltage

a. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must be between 11-16 VDC.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit running. Must be between 12-16 VDC.
2. Check Alternator Voltage
a. Test voltage at PCM-T3 with unit off. Must be between 11-16 VDC.
b. Test voltage at PCM-T3 with unit running. Must be between 12-16 VDC.
3. Check Voltage At Main Microprocessor
a. Check voltage reading at 3MM-23 & 3MM-34. Must be between 11-16 VDC.
b. Check Unit Data voltage reading. Must be within 0.5 VDC of reading obtained at 3MM-23 & 3MM-34.
00016 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW

• ACTIVATION: Voltage at the main microprocessor is less than 10 VDC (except when the engine starter is
engaged).
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm. Alarm condition only if activated while starting unit.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes when the voltage at the main microprocessor is between
11 - 14 VDC, or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For Alarm 00051 (Alternator Not Charging)

a. Inspect battery cable ends and posts. Must be clean and tight.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must be above 11 VDC.
c. Test voltage at battery with unit running. Must be above unit off reading (alternator charging).
d. Perform load test on battery. Follow battery manufacturer’s procedure.
3. Check Connections to Main Microprocessor
a. Check connections at PCM-T1, T2 & T3. Verify that connections are not damaged or corroded.
b. Check voltage reading at 3MM-23 & 3MM-34. Must be above 11 VDC.
c. Check Unit Data voltage reading. Must be within 0.5 VDC of reading obtained at 3MM-23 & 3MM-34.
62-11637 7–8
00017 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP
• ACTIVATION: Discharge sensor alarm not active AND:
The ambient temperature is below 120°F (48.9°C) and discharge temperature is greater than 309°F
(154.4°C) for 3 minutes, or the ambient temperature is above 120°F (48.9°C) and discharge tempera-
ture is greater than 340°F (171.1°C) for 3 minutes, or the discharge temperature exceeded 350°F
(176.7°C).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes with the ambient temp below 120°F (48.9°C), when the
discharge temperature falls below 300°F (148.8°C); or auto reset after 15 minutes with the ambient temp
above 120°F (48.9°C) when the discharge temp falls below 330°F (165.4°C); or alarm may be manually
reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. If Alarm Occurs During Pretrip Test 14

Check compressor by performing a compressor test. Refer to Section 8.8.1 step c.
Refer to Section 8.7.2 for correct charge.
b. Check airflow (with unit running). Even airflow through the entire coil. No “dead” spots
c. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no Glazing, no cracking, and no slipping.
Refer to Section 8.6. Replace if required.
Install Manifold Gauge Set and check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with
those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
5. Check Compressor Discharge Sensor (CDT)
Refer to procedure for Alarm 00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR. Alarm condition must be cor-
6. If alarm occurred during Defrost, check DTT
a. Visually inspect the mounting of DTT. Must be mounted tightly to the tube sheet, with the center screw
properly torqued. Ensure sensing side is in contact with the tube sheet. Refer to Figure 2.3.
b. Using a service (test) thermometer check temperature of evaporator tube sheet at DTT location and
compare actual temperature to the Unit Data reading. Must be within ±2°F (1°C).
7. Perform Pretrip Check
Clear Active Alarm list, then run Pretrip & check for any new alarms. Any active alarms must be cor-
rected and cleared before proceeding.
8. Check Compressor Cylinder Valves & Gaskets
Remove compressor heads & inspect condition of cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge valves &
gaskets. Must be in good condition. Install new parts and gaskets as required.
9. Check System For Non-Condensables
Check refrigeration system for non-condensable gas(es). No Non-condensable gas(es) may be pres-
ent. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
7–9 62-11637
00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: The compressor is operating with the suction pressure less than -3 psig (-0.20 bar) for more
than the LP SHUTDOWN DELAY Configuration (up to 5 minutes) with RAT above -10°F (-23.3°C) or less
than -8 psig (-0.53 bar) with RAT at any temperature.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes if suction pressure is more than -2 psig (-0.13 bar) or
alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit OFF, then ON again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Airflow Through Evaporator Coil/Section
a. Inspect coil. Ninety percent or more of the coil surface must be undamaged. Coil must be clean.
b. Check airflow (with unit running). Even airflow through the entire coil. No “dead” spots.
c. Check return air bulkhead, air chute. Good air flow. Return air not restricted. Air chute in good condition.
d. Check fan clutch. Must be fully engaged.
e. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping. Refer to
Section 8.6. Replace if required.

Refer to Section 8.7.2 for correct charge.
Install manifold gauge set and check and compare compressor discharge, suction and evaporator out-
let pressure to the Unit Data readings. Suction pressure must be above −3 psig (−0.2 bar). Refer to
Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
4. Manually Defrost Unit

Defrost unit and terminate automatically. Typical defrost cycle time is 5-20 minutes. Visually verify that
all ice is cleared from evaporator coil.

6. Check Unloader Operation

Check Front (UL1) and Rear (UL2) Unloaders. Refer to Alarm 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT and
00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT.
7. Check Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)

Check compressor suction modulation valve. Refer to Section 8.9.8.
8. Check Expansion Valve (EVXV)

Check operation of the EVXV. Refer to Section 8.9.9.
9. Visually Inspect Unit

Visually inspect unit for damage to the liquid line causing a restriction or any signs of temperature drop
at the drier. Verify all tubing from the receiver to the evaporator section is in good condition. Verify
there is no temperature drop at the drier or anywhere on the liquid line.
62-11637 7–10
00019 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN
NOTE
This is an optional alarm. This alarm will not occur if the Fuel Level Sensor Configuration is NO.
• ACTIVATION: The fuel level is 10% or less for more than 30 seconds AND Alarm 000126 - “Check Fuel
Sensor Circuit” is not active.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when fuel level is above 25% for more than 1 minute, or alarm may be
manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Check level in the tank. Add fuel as needed.
2. Check Low Fuel Level Sensor
Refer to procedure for alarm 00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be cor-
00020 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS

• ACTIVATION: This option must be installed and alarm must be enabled by configuring the Compressor
Alarm Shutdown to YES. Alarms 00013, 00017, 00018, 00027, 00028, 00029 or 00056 individually occur 3
times within the last 2 hours.
• RESET CONDITION: Clear the alarm from inactive alarm list. This alarm and the alarm(s) that caused it
can not be reset by turning switch OFF and then ON again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Determine Which Alarm Activated This Alarm

a. Check active alarm list for Alarm 00013, 00017, 00018, 00027, 00028, 00029 or 00056. One or
more of these alarms will be present.
b. Follow the troubleshooting steps for the alarm(s) found, and correct the alarm condition. All alarm
conditions must be corrected.
2. Reset Alarm
Clear all inactive alarms. Refer to Section 5.2.2. All alarms must be cleared to start unit.
7–11 62-11637
00021 TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED
• ACTIVATION: The High Engine Temp Shutdown Configuration and/or Engine Oil Pressure Shutdown Con-
figuration is/are set to YES, and either Alarm 00011 - Low Engine Oil Pressure, or Alarm 00012 - High
Coolant Temperature has become active and shut the unit down three times within the past 2 hours.
• RESET CONDITION: Clear the alarm from inactive alarm list. This alarm and the alarm(s) that caused it
can not be reset by turning switch OFF and then ON again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Determine Which Alarm Activated This Alarm.

a. Check active alarm list for Alarm 00011 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE or 00012 HIGH COOLANT
TEMPERATURE. One of these alarms will be present.
b. Follow the troubleshooting steps for the alarm(s) found, and correct the alarm condition. All alarm
conditions must be corrected.
2. Reset Alarm
Clear all inactive alarms. Refer to Section 5.2.2. All alarms must be cleared to start unit.
00022 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT

• ACTIVATION: “Check Suction Temperature Sensor” and/or “Check Evaporator Temperature Sensor”
alarms are not active (refer to Alarm 000127 and/or 000131 first) and:
Compressor Suction Superheat (Compressor Suction Temperature (CST) minus saturated tempera-
ture for Compressor Suction Pressure (CSP) is less than 5°C (9°F) for more than 2 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes, or alarm may be manually reset using the display
mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Install manifold gage set and check and compare compressor discharge, suction and evaporator out-
let pressure to the Unit Data readings. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
2. Check Evaporator Section

Check evaporator section, return air bulkhead, air chute, and the evaporator coil (for cleanliness and
airflow). Refer to Section 9.3.12.


Check operation of EXVX. Refer to Section 8.9.9.
62-11637 7–12
00027 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: The refrigeration system is running and the suction pressure has been greater than 98 psig
(6.7 bar) for more than 10 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when suction pressure is less than 75 psig (5.1 bar) for 5 minutes and
configured for Alarm Only, or Auto Reset after 15 minutes if configured as a Shutdown Alarm or, alarm may
be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

those shown in Unit Data. Suction pressure must be above 3 psig (0.2 bar) and should be in the nor-
mal range for ambient & refrigerated compartment conditions. Refer to Section 8.9.12.
2. Check Compressor Drive Coupling

Verify that compressor coupling is intact and the compressor crankshaft is turning. Repair as required.


5. Check Compressor
a. Perform Pump-Down Test. Refer to Section 8.8.1. Must hold a vacuum and not equalize in a short
period of time.
b. Cover condenser and build-up discharge pressure. Must be able to raise pressure to 400 psig (27.2 bar).
c. Disassemble and inspect compressor valve plates, cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge valves
and pistons, etc. Must be intact, clean, and in good working order.

a. Visually inspect valve. Check coil is seated properly.
b. Check valve. Refer to Section 8.9.9.
7–13 62-11637
00028 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
• ACTIVATION:
Condition 1: When system has been operating in Pulldown for more than five minutes and the delta-t
(SAT - RAT) is between -3.0°F (-1.7°C) and +5°F (+2.8°C).
Condition 2: Discharge pressure is not at least 5 psig (0.34 bar) higher than suction pressure for more
than 10 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL:
Condition 1: If the DTT and/or SAT temperatures are cool enough to allow a defrost the unit will go into
defrost. Following the defrost, if activation criteria for Condition 1 reoccur within 45 minutes of the
defrost cycle, alarm or alarm and shutdown as Configured. If, following the defrost and the 45 minute
wait time the activation criteria for Condition 1 reoccur the unit will go into defrost again. If the DTT and
SAT temperatures are too warm to allow a defrost, alarm or alarm and shutdown as Configured.
Condition 2: Alarm or alarm and shutdown as Configured.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when discharge pressure is more than 20 psig (1.26 bar) above the suction
pressure for five minutes, or alarm has been active and unit has been shutdown more then 14 minutes or
alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Verify that compressor couping is intact and the compressor crankshaft is turning. Repair as required.
2. Check Sensors and/or Transducers

Using an accurate temperature measurement device or pressure measurement device, check SAT,
RAT, CDP EVOP and CSP readings. Readings must be the same on measurement device & Unit
Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on pressure reading comparison.

4. Check Compressor
period of time.
62-11637 7–14
00029 CHECK HEAT CYCLE
• ACTIVATION: The unit has been operating in the heat cycle for more than 5 minutes, and the SAT is more
than 5.5°F (3°C) colder than the RAT constantly for more than 60 seconds. (Unit is actually cooling the air
going through the evaporator).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes or alarm may be manually reset using the display
mounted keys or by turning the START/RUN-OFF switch OFF and then back On again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Run Pretrip & check for alarms. Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared before proceeding.
2. Refer to Section 9.3.6 - Refrigeration System Not Heating

Refer to Section 9.3.6.
00030 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME

• ACTIVATION: If Configured STANDARD: The unit has shutdown on an alarm 3 times without having run
for at least 15 minutes between each shutdown (not including door switch shutdowns). If Configured RAIL:
The unit has shutdown on an alarm and attempted to restart for the configured number of times without
having run for at least 15 minutes between each shutdown (not including door switch shutdowns).
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only or shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit
off, then back on again. If the Configuration is set to Rail Mode, this alarm will reset after 4 hours and a rail
alarm reset will be recorded in the data recorded.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Notes Section, page 7-2.). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For Alarms

Check for shutdown alarms. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm(s) cleared to continue.
7–15 62-11637
00031 FAILED TO START - AUTO MODE
• ACTIVATION: Engine has tried to start three times unsuccessfully.
off, then back on again. If the Configuration is set to Rail Mode, this alarm will reset after 4 hours. Rail
alarm reset will be recorded in the data recorder.
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 in Notes Section, page 7-2.) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check For Additional Alarms

a. If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00041, 00072, 00078, 00079, 00080,
00085 or 00086) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required. Clear alarms,
restart and check for repeat alarm(s).

Check fuel level in the fuel tank. Add fuel as needed to the fuel tank.
3. Check for Alarms

Check for Alarm 40 (Check Glow Plug) and Alarm 35 (Check Starter Circuit). Alarm conditions must be
4. Check Engine Control Unit (ENCU) and Fuel Speed Actuator (FSA)
a. Check voltage from fuse F3 through PCM−34 and SP−6 to ENCU−22. Verify correct fuse, see Fig-
ure 2.7. Must have minimum 11 VDC with the battery connected and SROS in the OFF position.
b. Check voltage from 3MM-9 to ENCU−44. Must have minimum 11 VDC with SROS in the START/
RUN position. If not, energize the run relay output using component test mode (refer to Section
5.2.4) and retest.
c. Check for ground at ENCU-19 and ENCUGND−A (at the battery negative cable connection). If ground
not good, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
d. Inspect fuel/speed actuator (FSA), engine speed sensor (ENSSN) and engine speed control unit
(ENCU) connector pins & terminals. Verify no physical damage to components, and no damage or
corrosion in connectors.
e. Check resistance & amp draw of FSA. Refer to Section 2.10 for specifications.
f. Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely. Refer to engine manual.
5. Check Engine Air-intake System

a. Check air cleaner indicator. Flag must not be visible.
b. Inspect air intake system. Verify hoses & tubes in good condition, with no kinks or restrictions.
6. Check For Correct Engine Oil

Check viscosity is correct for ambient conditions. Refer to Section 2.7.
7. Check Engine Exhaust System

Inspect the exhaust system. Must be clear and unobstructed.
8. Check Engine
Check engine compression. Refer to Engine Workshop manual.
62-11637 7–16
00034 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP
• ACTIVATION: Engine is turning more than 500 RPM for 20 seconds after unit shutdown or cycled off.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check to Ensure Engine is Running

Verify that engine is still running. Engine should not be running.
2. Check Start/Run-Off Switch & Circuit

a. Check SROS. It must be in the OFF position.
b. Check two way communication equipment. It must not be wired so unit can start with SROS in the
OFF position. Correct wiring as needed.
c. Check voltage to 2MM−35: 0 VDC at 2MM-35 (including SP-9) and 3MM−16.
3. Check For Alarm 00130 (Engine Speed Sensor)
Refer to procedure for Alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR.
4. Check Fuel Speed Actuator (FSA) & Circuit
a. Check voltage to ENCU−44. Must have 0 VDC between 3MM-9 and ENCU-44.
b. Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely. Refer to engine manual.
7–17 62-11637
00035 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: Engine speed fails to reach 50 rpm during 2 start attempts.
off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Starting Sequence
Check to see if engine starts, runs for a few seconds then shuts off. If not, continue with Step 2. If yes,
check engine speed sensor. Refer to procedure for alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR.
2. Check Fuse
Check Fuse F10. Replace fuse as required. Clear alarms, restart and check for repeat alarm(s).
3. Check Starter Solenoid Circuit
a. Place SROS in START/RUN position. After buzzer sounds, check for power at starter solenoid &
3MM-12. If there is not a minimum of 11 VDC, check connectors and wiring between terminals for
b. Inspect wiring to starter motor. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify there is no physical dam-
age to wiring or battery cable end, and no damage or corrosion in connections.
4. Check Starter
a. Inspect starter and wiring. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify there is no damage or corro-
sion. Wiring and battery cable must be clean and tight.
b. Check voltage to starter motor. Must be above 10 VDC while cranking.
c. Check resistance of starter motor. Refer to Section 2.10 for specifications.
d. Check amperage draw of starter. Refer to Section 2.10 for specifications.
a. Inspect cable ends and posts. Must be clean and tight, with no corrosion.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must have minimum 11 VDC.
c. Perform load test on battery. Follow battery manufacturer’s procedure.
b. Check voltage from 3MM-9 to ENCU−44. Must have minimum 11 VDC with SROS in START/ RUN. If
not, energize the run relay output using component test mode (refer to Section 5.2.4) and retest.
(ENCU) connector pins & terminals. Verify there is no physical damage to components, and no
damage or corrosion in connectors.
7. Check For Correct Engine Oil
Check viscosity is correct for ambient conditions. Refer to Section 2.7.
62-11637 7–18
00036 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• ACTIVATION: Coolant temperature is below 32°F (0°C) after the engine has been running for 5 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when coolant temperature is higher than 36°F (2.2°C) or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Coolant Temperature

Check temperature of coolant or upper radiator hose. Must be above 32°F (0°C).
2. Check Engine Coolant Sensor
Refer to the procedure for Alarm 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR.
00037 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM

• ACTIVATION: The control system is calling for low engine speed operation, and engine speed is less than
1200 rpm or greater than 1500 rpm for more than 60 seconds (120 seconds when the control system calls
for a change from high to low speed, or when unit first starts).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if control system is calling for low engine speed operation and signal is:
within 1220 and 1480 rpm for 60 seconds or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys
or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Force Low Speed Operation

Set the High Speed Delay Functional Parameter to 10 minutes and restart unit. (Reset following test-
ing.) System should run in low speed. (If not, check speed overrides, Section 4.11.2.) Ensure System
is calling for low speed when performing steps 3 & 4.
2. Check Engine Speed
a. Check actual engine speed using hand held tachometer. Speed must be within range shown above.
b. Compare actual speed with that shown in Unit Data. Readings must be within ± 50 rpm.
3. Check Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA)
Check FSA plunger. Must move in and out freely. Refer to engine manual.
4. Check Engine Air-Intake System
7–19 62-11637
00038 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM
• ACTIVATION: The control system is calling for high speed operation, and engine speed is less than 1650
rpm, or greater than 1950 rpm for more than 60 seconds (120 seconds when the control system calls for a
change from low to high speed, or when unit first starts).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if control system is calling for high speed operation and the speed is
within 1670 and 1930 rpm for 60 seconds or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys
or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Force High Speed Operation

Place unit in continuous run, adjust setpoint above 11°F (-12°C) and set the Air Flow Functional
Parameter to HIGH. (Reset following testing.) System should run in high speed. (If not, check speed
overrides, Section 4.11.2.) Ensure System is calling for high speed when performing steps 3 & 4.
2. Check Engine Speed

a. Check actual engine speed using hand held tachometer. Refer to Table 2–1. Speed must be within
range shown above.



62-11637 7–20
00039 CHECK ENGINE RPM
• ACTIVATION: Alarm 00130 (Check Engine Speed Sensor) is not active and engine speed is less than
1200 rpm or greater than 1950 rpm for 5 minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if engine speed is within the specified range for 5 minutes or alarm may
be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

3. Force Low Speed Operation

Set the High Speed Delay Functional Parameter to 10 minutes and restart unit. (Reset following test-
ing.) System should run in low speed. (If not, check speed overrides, Section 4.11.2.) Ensure System
is calling for low speed when performing step 4.
4. Check Low Speed Engine RPM
a. Check actual engine speed using hand held tachometer. Refer to Table 2–1. Speed must be within
range provided above.
5. Force High Speed Operation
Place unit in continuous run, adjust setpoint above 11°F (-12°C) and set the Air Flow Functional
Parameter to HIGH. (Reset following testing.) The System should run in High Speed. (If not, check
speed overrides, Section 4.11.2.) Ensure System is calling for high speed when performing step 6.
6. Check High Speed Engine RPM

a. Check actual engine speed using hand held tachometer. Refer to Table 2–1.
7–21 62-11637
00040 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: Engine preheater amperage is less than 70 Amps with heater activated.
NOTE
This alarm can only occur when the preheat time is greater than 14 seconds. Refer to Table 4–1 for
preheat times.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only

• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if amperage is greater than 70 amps for at least 14 seconds during the
preheat cycle, or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Alarm 05017 (CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY)

Check for Alarm 05017 CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the
alarm cleared to continue.
2. Check Engine Preheater Circuit

a. Using Component Test Mode, refer to Section 5.2.4, energize engine preheat circuit. Check dis-
played amp draw, must be greater than 70 amps.
NOTICE
DO NOT leave the air intake circuit energized for the full 5 minutes if full amperage is shown,
as the intake air heater element life will be greatly shortened.
b. Check for power at PCM-T4 and EPH +. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check connectors and
wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
c. Replace PCM with known good component.
3. Check Engine Preheater Circuit

Check resistance of EPH. Refer to Section 2.7 for specifications.
62-11637 7–22
00041 ENGINE STALLED
• ACTIVATION: The control system is calling for the engine to run, Engine speed sensor is good, and engine
speed is less than 10 rpm; or the A00130 (Check Engine Speed Sensor) alarm is ON, and the Oil Pressure
switch contacts are open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Restart after 15 minutes, or Alarm may be manually reset using the display
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Additional Alarms

a. If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00031, 00072, 00078, 00079, 00080,
00085 or 00086) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse as required. Clear alarms,
b. Check for alarm 00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR. When alarms 00130 and 00041 occur at
the same time, generally the engine has run out or is running out of fuel. This causes the engine
speed to surge and drop. Check fuel tank and add fuel as necessary. Check fuel lines between the
fuel tank and the fuel pump inlet for air leakage.
2. Check Start/Run-Off Switch & Circuit

a. Check SROS. Must be in the START/RUN position
b. Check two way communication equipment. Must be set to allow operation and calling for operation.
3. Check Fuel System

a. Check for Alarm 00001 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING. Fill tank as needed.
b. Check fuel flow. Unrestricted fuel flow through system. Pump screen(s) clean. Fuel not gelled.
c. Check fuel system prime. No air in fuel system.
b. Check voltage from 3MM-9 to ENCU−44. Must have minimum 11 VDC with SROS in the START/
RUN position. If not, energize the run relay output using component test mode (refer to Section
5.2.4) and retest.
(ENCU) connector pins & terminals. Verify no physical damage to components, and no damage or
7–23 62-11637
00041 ENGINE STALLED - CONTINUED
5. Check Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)
Inspect harness, connector pins & terminals. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify no physical
damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.


8. Check Engine
a. Check Injection pump timing. Timing must be correct.
b. Check engine valve adjustment. Rocker arm clearance must be correct.
c. Check engine compression. Compression must be above 400 psig (27.2 bar).
9. Check Refrigeration System

Check discharge & suction pressures. Must be within normal operating range for conditions.
62-11637 7–24
00051 ALTERNATOR NOT CHARGING
• ACTIVATION: Unit is running and the current flow is less than -1.0 amps (discharge) between the alterna-
tor and the battery for 3 continuous minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only, or if Alternator Check Shutdown Configuration is set to “YES” shutdown &
alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset (if not shutdown) when alternator is charging or alarm may be manually
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Water Pump/Alternator Belt

Check belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping. Refer to Section 8.5.15.
Replace if required.
2. Check Current Transformer (CT)

a. Check current value. Power up control system in PC Mode. (Refer to Section 5.3.2.) Check Unit
Data. Must be -2.0 to 1.5A with no load.
b. Check CT power from main microprocessor. Must have +5 VDC from terminal 2MM-29 to PCM-31.
c. Check CT ground to main microprocessor. Check wiring from terminal 2MM-23 to PCM-30.
d. Check CT signal to main microprocessor. Check wiring from terminal 2MM-12 to PCM-29.
3. Check Alternator Wiring & Output
a. Check output & ground wiring (unit OFF). Ground from alternator G terminal to PCM-T2. Positive from
alternator B+ terminal to PCM-T3.
b. Check output (unit running). When the unit is started, voltage at the battery will begin near 12.0 VDC,
and slowly rise toward 13.5 VDC as the battery charges.
4. Check for Add-on Equipment Drawing Too Much Current

Check amperage of added-on components & accessories. Total current draw including the actual unit
current draw and all add-on components & accessories must be less than alternator rating.

7–25 62-11637
00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE
• ACTIVATION:
Condition One: If the unit is running in Pulldown and the SAT is not greater than 1°F (0.56°C) below
the RAT or if the unit is running in Pull-Up and the SAT is not above the RAT, the configured action
(Alarm only after 30 minutes or Alarm and Shutdown after 45 minutes) will be activated.
NOTE: If the Out-Of-Range Alarm Functional Parameter is set to OFF, the following conditions will not
trigger an alarm or shutdown.
Condition Two: If the refrigerated compartment temperature has been within ± 2.7°F (± 1.5°C) for
perishable setpoints or + 2.7°F (± 1.5°C) for frozen of setpoint at least once since the unit was started
and is now further away from setpoint than the limit set in the Out-Of-Range Alarm Functional Param-
eter [4°, 5°, or 7°F (2°, 3°, or 4°C)], the configured action (Alarm only after 30 minutes or Alarm and
Shutdown after 45 minutes) will be activated.
Condition Three: If a shutdown alarm occurs and the RAT is further away from setpoint than the limit
set in the Out-Of-Range Alarm Functional Parameter [4°, 5°, or 7°F (2°, 3°, or 4°C)], the configured
action (Alarm only after 30 minutes or Alarm and Shutdown after 45 minutes) will be activated regard-
less if the refrigerated compartment temperature has been in-range or not.
• UNIT CONTROL: If the alarm is not Configured for shutdown, alarm only. If the alarm is Configured for
shutdown the unit will shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION:
Condition 1: Auto reset; If the unit is running in Pulldown and the SAT is greater than 1°F (0.56°C)
below the RAT or if the unit is running in Pull-Up and the SAT is greater than the RAT.
Condition 2 & 3: Auto reset when the temperature is within ±2.7°F (±1.5°C) for perishable setpoints or
+ 2.7°F (± 1.5°C) for frozen setpoint.
For Any Condition: alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys OR by turning the
NOTE: The 30 or 45 minute timer is reset and starts again whenever:
• The unit cycles off and restarts in Start-Stop.
• The unit goes into and comes out of Defrost.
NOTE: This alarm does not go into the Inactive Alarm List when it becomes inactive or is cleared.
NOTE: This alarm will not be activated in Sleep Mode.
NOTE: For Condition Two, the temperature criteria for this alarm is reset, and the refrigerated compartment tem-
perature must again go In Range before this alarm can be activated if any of the following occur:
• Pretrip is started.
• Setpoint is changed.
• A door switch or remote switch is installed and configured as a door switch, and the switch is opened indi-
cating that the compartment door has been opened.
62-11637 7–26
00053 BOX TEMP OUT-OF-RANGE - CONTINUED
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Compartment Doors

Inspect all compartment doors. Must be closed, and not allowing any air leakage.
2. Defrost Evaporator
Initiate manual defrost cycle. Must terminate automatically. Verify that all ice cleared from evaporator
coil.
3. Check for any Shutdown Alarm(s)

Check the Alarm List for any shutdown alarms. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
cleared to continue.
4. Check for Alarm 00018 (Low Refrigerant Pressure Alarm)

Check for Alarm 00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE. Alarm conditions must be corrected and
the alarm cleared to continue.


7. Check for Alarm 00056 (Low Evaporator Airflow)

Check for Alarm 00056 CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW. Alarm conditions must be corrected and

9. Check for Low Delta-T

Read delta-t from Unit Data. In Cool, the delta-t must be greater than (cooling more than) -1°F (-
0.56°C). In Heat the delta-t must be greater than 0 (SAT must be higher than RAT).
7–27 62-11637
00054 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE
• ACTIVATION: Defrost cycle did not terminate automatically. (DTT and SAT did not reach termination tem-
perature of 55°F/12.8°C within 45 minutes or the SAT rose to 120°F/48.9°C during the cycle.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. While this alarm is active, the defrost timer will be temporarily set to initiate a
defrost cycle 1.5 hours of unit running time after the alarm comes on.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when defrost cycle is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any
active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Evaporator Fan Clutch

Check fan clutch operation in defrost. Must completely disengage fan.
3. Check for Alarm 00018 (Low Refrigerant Pressure)
Check for Alarm 00018 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE. Alarm conditions must be corrected and
4. Check DTT
a. Using a service (test) thermometer check temperature of evaporator tube sheet at DTT location and
compare with Unit Data. Must be within 2°F (1°C)
b. Check DTT and RAT wiring. Verify that RAT temperature is being displayed as RAT in unit Unit Data
and that DTT is being displayed as DTT. Correct wiring if required.
c. Check DTT and SAT resistance. 10K Ohms @ 77°F (25°C). Refer to Section 8.10.7 for chart of resis-
tances for different sensors.
d. Inspect DTT Should be fastened securely in place. Flat area of DTT must be against metal surface.

6. Refer to Section 9.3.6 - Refrigeration System Not Heating

62-11637 7–28
00055 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH
• ACTIVATION: The defrost air switch has called for a defrost cycle within 8 minutes of a defrost termination
for 2 consecutive defrost cycles. (The air switch contacts were closed continuously for 15 seconds before
the defrost cycle was started.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only. While this alarm is active, the defrost air switch will NOT be used to initiate a
defrost cycle; however the Defrost Timer will initiate a defrost cycle 90 minutes after the alarm comes on,
and the manual defrost switch will remain operative.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when defrost cycle terminates correctly, and the air switch does not call
for a defrost cycle within the 8 minutes following defrost termination, or alarm may be manually reset using
the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Condition of Refrigerated Compartment & Load

a. Check condition of refrigerated compartment doors & seals. Doors must be closed, and door seals
must seal and prevent entrance of outside air.
b. Check condition of evaporator. Check for blockage sufficient to cause an air pressure differential
across the coil great enough to close the contacts of the defrost air switch. Coil must be free of ice
following defrost.
c. Check condition of product. If product is warm and moist, frequent defrost cycles can be expected.
2. Check DAS Power and Wiring

a. Inspect switch, connector pins & terminals. Verify no physical damage to switch. No damaged or
corrosion in connections.
b. If required, power switch by placing the unit in PC Mode. Check for power at switch connector. Must
have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, mois-
ture or corrosion.
c. Check for continuity from switch connector plus terminal to 3MM-19. If good continuity is not pres-
ent, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
d. Check for continuity from switch connector minus terminal to 3MM-29. If good continuity is not pres-
ent, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
3. Check Defrost Air Switch and Tubing

Check tubing and perform testing as required. Refer to Section 8.9.13.
7–29 62-11637
00056 CHECK EVAPORATOR AIR FLOW
• ACTIVATION: In the Heat Mode, the Suction pressure has been higher than 100 PSIG (6.8 bar) for more
than 60 seconds OR
In the Cool Mode, the SAT is 5°f (2.8°c) or more warmer than RAT for 3.5 minutes. After the first occur-
rence of this alarm, the MessageCenter will display “NO TEMP CONTROL - SEE ALARM LIST”.
NOTE
For this alarm the unit must be running. This alarm will not occur in either the Defrost or Pretrip cycles.
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm.

• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset in 15 minutes IF Alarm 00030 is not also active or, alarm may be manually
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
a. Inspect coil. Ninety percent or more of the coil surface must be undamaged. Coil must be clean.
c. Check return air bulkhead, air chute. Verify good air flow, and Return Air not restricted. Air chute in good
condition.
d. Check fan clutch. Must be fully engaged. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no
glazing, cracking, or slipping. Refer to Section 8.6. Replace if required.



5. Check SV4
Refer to SV4 Checkout Procedure, Section 8.9.6.
6. Refer to Refrigeration Troubleshooting

Check low cooling capacity causes. Refer to Section 9.3.2 & Section 9.3.4.
62-11637 7–30
00057 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 1 (REMS1)
• ACTIVATION: REMS1 is set to trigger an alarm if the switch is activated (opened or closed, depending on
switch type) for more than five seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: May be configured as alarm only, alarm and force low engine speed, or alarm and shut-
down.
Alarm Only: Auto reset after the switch has de-activated for more than five seconds.
Shutdown: Auto reset after three minutes (minimum off time for switch activated condition) and the switch
has de-activated for more than five seconds.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
IF A SWITCH IS INSTALLED:
1. Determine What REMS1 is Activated By

REMS1 may be connected to a compartment door or some other device. Locate the device used as
REMS1.
2. Check to See if REMS1 has Activated

Inspect device used to activate REMS1. For example, Compartment door must be closed, and switch
must be de-activated.
3. Check Configuration for REMS1

Verify that Configuration is set for the type of switch being used (i.e. when switch is activated, switch
contacts are closed; etc). Configuration must agree with switch type. Refer to Section 5.2.3.
4. Check Wiring
a. Visually inspect wiring to REMS1. Wiring must be connected.
b. Visually inspect condition of switch. Must not be damaged, wet, corroded, etc.
c. Check circuit. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) With the switch contacts closed, check for mini-
mum 11 VDC from 2SVM−15 through the wiring and switch back to 2SVM−26.
5. Temporary Solution Tip

In the event of a defective switch that can not be repaired or replaced, and the switch is forcing the unit
into a shutdown or low speed, this action may be temporarily overridden by setting the correct Func-
tional Parameter. Set the OVERRIDE REMS1 SHUTDOWN Functional Parameter to YES.
IF A SWITCH IS NOT INSTALLED:
1. Check Configurations
Any switch/sensor not present in the unit should not be Configured “ON”. Correct Configurations.
2. Check REM Connector

Locate and inspect 10 position connector for optional sensors and switches (see wiring schematic
Section 10). Connector must have cap on. Verify no corrosion or moisture inside connector. If there is
a problem with the connector and there are no remote sensors or switches in the unit, the connector
may be removed and each individual wire separated from the others, terminated and insulated with
heat shrink.
7–31 62-11637
00059 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) NOT RECORDING
• ACTIVATION: No data is being recorded by the DataLink data recorder.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Clear Alarm
a. Clear Active Alarm(s).
b. Check for Active Alarm re-occurrence. If Inactive, download all data & retain. If Active, go to next step.
2. Main Microprocessor Defective
a. Download previous data using a Data Transfer USB memory device, or TRU-Tech. Data retrieval OK.
b. Replace and setup main microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.5.
NOTE
Specific Configurations may be found on the TransCentral Website (Authorized Carrier Transicold
Dealers only).
00060 DATALOGGER (DataLink data recorder) TIME WRONG

• ACTIVATION: The real time clock in the DataLink data recorder does not contain a valid date.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the DataLink data recorder real time clock is reset, or alarm may be
manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1. Check Real Time Clock

Check Real Time Clock in the Unit Data, or using TRU-Tech. Must show correct date and time.
Change as needed. Refer to Section 5.2.3.
2. Reset Microprocessor
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position for 30 seconds and then return it to the START/RUN position.
Verify microprocessor powers up OK.
b. Check for valid real time clock reading in Unit Data. Alarm is cleared automatically.
c. Real Time Clock can not be changed. Proceed to step 3.
3. Main Microprocessor Defective

a. Download previous data using a Data Transfer USB memory device, or TRU-Tech. Verify data
retrieval OK.
b. Replace and setup main microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.5.
62-11637 7–32
00061 DOOR OPEN (DS1)
• ACTIVATION: DS1 is set to trigger an alarm if the switch is activated (opened or closed, depending on
switch type) for more than five seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: May be configured as alarm only, alarm and force low engine speed, or alarm and shut-
down.
Alarm Only: Auto reset after the switch has de-activated for more than five seconds.
Shutdown: Auto reset after three minutes (minimum off time for door open condition) and the switch has
de-activated for more than five seconds.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
IF A SWITCH IS INSTALLED
1. Determine What DS1 is Activated By

DS1 may be connected to a compartment door or some other device. Locate the device used as DS1.
2. Check to See if DS1 has Activated

Inspect device used to activate DS1. For example, compartment door must be closed, and switch
must be de-activated.
3. Check Configuration for DS1

Verify that Configuration is set for the type of switch being used (i.e. when switch is activated, switch
contacts are closed; etc). Configuration must agree with switch type. Refer to Section 5.2.3.
4. Check Wiring
a. Visually inspect wiring to DS1 to make sure it is connected.
b. Visually inspect condition of switch. It must not be damaged, wet, corroded, etc.
c. Check circuit. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) With the switch contacts closed, check for mini-
mum 11 VDC from 2SVM−14, through the wiring and switch back to 2SVM−25.
5. Temporary Solution Tip

In the event of a defective switch that can not be repaired or replaced, and the switch is forcing the unit
into a shutdown or low speed, this action may be temporarily overridden by setting the correct Func-
tional Parameter. Set the Override Door Switch Shutdown Functional Parameter to YES.
IF A SWITCH IS NOT INSTALLED
Any switch/sensor not present in the unit should not be Configured “ON”. Correct Configurations.
2. Check Connector
Locate and inspect the DS or REM 10 position connector for optional sensors and switches (see wiring
schematic Section 10). Connector must have cap on. No corrosion or moisture inside connector. If
there is a problem with the DS connector and no switch is installed, the connector may be removed
and both wires separated, terminated and insulated with heat shrink. If there is no DS connector, there
is a problem with the REM connector and there are no remote sensors or switches in the unit, the con-
nector may be removed and each individual wire separated from the others, terminated and insulated
with heat shrink.
7–33 62-11637
00067 SENSOR 1 INPUT VOLTAGE LOW
• This alarm may be activated with earlier software versions. Follow procedure for Alarm 22101 SENSOR
INPUT VOLTAGE LOW INP1.
00072 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT

• This alarm may be activated with earlier software revisions, follow procedure for alarm 05012 CHECK
ENCU POWER CIRCUIT.
00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT

• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the SV1 coil circuit. If this alarm is activated while the unit is
operating in heat or defrost, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated while the unit is operat-
ing in cool, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the control system calls for SV1 to energize (heat, defrost or pulse)
and the SV1 coil circuit is normal, or when the control system calls for SV1 to be de-energized (cooling) an
the circuit is not shorted or Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00031, 00072, 00079, 00080, 00085 or 000
86) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required, clear alarms, restart and
check for repeat alarm(s).
2. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to coil. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check resistance of coil. Refer to Section 2.10 for specifications.
c. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to test actual current draw of the circuit. Refer to
Section 2.10 for specifications. Verify the actual current is within the specifications.
3. Check Power and Wiring

a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at SV1 termi-
nal A and 3MM-1. Minimum 11 VDC. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no
b. Check for ground at SV1 terminal B (including SP-3) to GND RING1. Good ground. If not, check con-
nectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no damage, moisture or corrosion.
62-11637 7–34
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the SV4 coil circuit. If this alarm is activated while the unit is
operating in heat or defrost, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated while the unit is operat-
ing in cool, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the control system calls for SV1 to energize (heat, defrost or pulse)
and the SV1 coil circuit is normal, or when the control system calls for SV1 to be de-energized (cooling) an
the circuit is not shorted or Alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00031, 00041, 00072, 00078, 00080, 00085
or 00086) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required, clear alarms, restart and
2. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. No damage to coil. No damaged or corroded pins
Section 2.10 for specifications. Verify the actual current is within the specifications.
00080 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT

CLUTCH CIRCUIT.
7–35 62-11637
00081 CHECK FHR CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the fuel heater relay coil circuit. If this alarm occurs while
the fuel heater circuit is operating, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm occurs while the fuel heater
circuit is not operating, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the circuit is normal, or Alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
play mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Relay
a. Inspect relay socket and connection pins inside PCM. No damage to relay. No damaged or corroded
connections.
b. Check resistance of coil (terminals 85 & 86). Refer to Section 2.10 for specifications.
a. Check for power at fuse F10 terminal A inside PCM. Minimum 11 VDC. If not, check PER circuit and
fuse F5. (NOTE: FLS, SATPWR and LB will also be without power.)
b. Check fuses F5 & F10. Verify correct fuse, see Figure 2.7.
c. Check for power at FHR + terminal. Replace PCM.
d. If the ambient temperature is below 77°F (25°C) the fuel heater relay (FHR) will be grounded by the
main microprocessor at 3MM-17. Power up control system in PC Mode. (Refer to Section 5.3.2).
Check ground from 3MM-17 through PCM-17 to the FHR - connection. If ambient is above 77°F (25°C),
place the SROS in the OFF position and check continuity of the wiring from 3MM-17 through PCM-17
to the FHR - connection. Good ground. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify
no damage, moisture or corrosion.
e. Check resistance of heater element. Refer to Section 2.10 for specifications.
00082 CHECK STARTER SOLENOID CIRCUIT

STARTER SOLENOID CIRCUIT.
00084 CHECK REMOTE ALARM LIGHT

REMOTE AMBER LIGHT.
62-11637 7–36
00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the front unloader (UL1) coil circuit. If this alarm is activated
while the control system is calling for UL1 to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm
occurs at any other time, the circuit is detected open.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00031, 00041 00072, 00078, 00079, 00080
or 00086) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required, clear alarms, restart and
2. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to coil. Verify no damaged or corroded pins.
Section 2.10 for specifications. Verify that the actual current is within specifications.
a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at UL1 termi-
b. Check for ground at UL1 terminal B (including SP-2) to GND1RING2. Good ground. If not, check con-
7–37 62-11637
00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the front unloader (UL2) coil circuit. If this alarm is activated
while the control system is calling for UL2 to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

If this alarm is activated in conjunction with other alarms (00031, 00041 00071, 00072, 00078, 00079,
00080 or 00085) check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required, clear alarms,
2. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to coil. Verify no damaged or corroded
pins.
a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at UL2 termi-
b. Check for ground at UL2 terminal B (including SP-2) to GND1RING2. Good ground. If not, check con-
62-11637 7–38
00090 CHK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the AutoFresh Air Exchange relay coil circuit. If this alarm is
activated while the control system is calling for AFAR to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this
alarm occurs at any other time, the circuit is detected open.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only. \
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when circuit is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using the display
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Relay
a. Inspect relay socket and connection pins inside PCM. Verify there is no damage to relay, and no
damaged or corroded connections.
b. Check resistance of coil (terminals 1 & 2). Refer to Section 2.10 for specifications.
a. Check for power at fuse F10 terminal A inside PCM. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check
PCM circuit and fuse F5.
b. Check fuses F5 & F10. Verify correct fuse, see Figure 2.7.
c. Check for power at AFAR + terminal. Replace PCM.
d. Set the AutoFresh Air Functional Parameter to OPEN and ensure the set point is above 30°F
(−1.0°C). The AutoFresh air relay coil will be grounded by the main microprocessor at 3MM-13.
Check ground from 3MM-13 through PCM-26 to the AFAR - connection. Reset AutoFresh Air Func-
tional Parameter and setpoint as required following testing. If ground not good, check connectors
and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
7–39 62-11637
00093 CHECK STARTUP BUZZER
• ACTIVATION: The Buzzer (B) circuit is shorted or open. (The Buzzer output from the microprocessor
[PCM-23 to 3MM15] is negative, so the circuit will not be shorted to ground, but is shorted either within the
Buzzer itself, or to a positive wire.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when Buzzer amp draw is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using
the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Buzzer
a. Inspect Buzzer & wire connections. No damage to buzzer. No damage or corrosion.
b. Check resistance of buzzer. Cannot be opened (infinite ohms) or shorted (Zero Ohms).
c. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to test actual current draw of the circuit. Buzzer
provides audible signal. View current draw in Component Test Mode screen. Verify the actual cur-
rent is within the specifications.
2. Check Buzzer Wiring
Inspect PCM sub-harness connector pins & terminals. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify there
is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
3. Is the component functioning? Are there additional alarms?
a. If the component is functioning, and additional alarms are present (often within 3MM01 - 3MM12 or
3MM13 - 3MM18) check related fuses, wires, and connectors.
b. If the fuses/wires/connectors are OK, it indicates an internal problem with the MM or the PCM.
Download data and replace main microprocessor. For complete Main Microprocessor Module
replacement instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
c. If problem persists reinstall the old MM, and replace the PCM. Refer to Section 8.10.2.
62-11637 7–40
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the SV2 coil circuit . If this alarm is activated while the con-
trol system is calling for SV2 to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated at any
other time, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when unit calls for cooling and the SV2 coil circuit is normal, or Alarm may
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Coil
00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (ATA) is not within range of -53 to +158°F (-47° to +70° C).
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm and a value of 122°F (50°C) will be used for any calculations.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when sensor is in range or alarm may be manually reset using the display
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connector. Verify no damage to sensor. Verify no damage, moisture, or corrosion in
connector.
b. Check sensor resistance. (Refer to Note 3 in Notes Section, page 7-2.) 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F
(25°C). Refer to Section 8.10.7 for chart of resistances for different sensors.
2. Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor and connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section 10.)
Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
b. Place the system in PC Mode. Refer to Note 2 in Notes Section, page 7-2. Disconnect sensor from
harness. Check for 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC at harness plug between pins. Voltage should be 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC
volts at harness plug between pins. This verifies microprocessor output and wiring connections to
the sensor.
7–41 62-11637
00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to +70° C).
• UNIT CONTROL:
If Alarm 00123 is not active: Alarm and switch to supply air control.
If Alarm 00123 is active: Alarm and the System will enter Cargo Protect Mode. Refer to Section 4.11.1.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connectors. Verify there is no damage to sensor, and no damage, moisture, or cor-
rosion in connectors.

a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section 10.)
harness. Check for 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC at harness plug between pins. Voltage should be 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC
volts at harness plug between pins. This verifies microprocessor output and wiring connections to
the sensor.
00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) is not within range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to +70° C).
• UNIT CONTROL:
If Alarm 00122 is not active: Functional Parameter Temperature Control is set for Supply Air and the
setpoint is in the perishable range: Alarm and switch to return air control.
If Alarm 00122 is active: Alarm and the System will enter Cargo Protect Mode. Refer to 4.11.1.
play mounted keys or by turning the unit off and then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connectors. Verify there is no damage to sensor, and no damage, moisture, or cor-
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section 10.)
harness. Check for 3.0 ± 0.1 VDC volts at harness plug between pins. This verifies microprocessor
output and wiring connections to the sensor.
62-11637 7–42
00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CDT) is not within the range of -40° to +392°F
(-40° to +200°C).
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connector. Verify there is no damage to sensor, and no damage, moisture, or cor-
rosion in connector.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section 10.) Verify there is no
physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
00126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR CIRCUIT

• ACTIVATION: The fuel level sensor is configured “YES” and the reading (in the Unit Data) is less than 2%
for 30 seconds.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when fuel level is sensed above 4% for 30 seconds or, alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Check fuel level in tank. Add fuel as needed.
2. Check Sensor Fuse & Wiring
a. Perform sensor check procedure. Refer to Section 8.5.7.
NOTE
If new sensor is not available, the sensor may be configured OFF temporarily. Refer to Section 5.2.3
Configurations.
7–43 62-11637
00127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST) is not within the range of −53 to +158°F
(−47 to +70° C.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset or alarm may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by
turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
b. Check sensor resistance (Refer to Note 3 in Notes Section, page 7-2.) 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F
(25°C.) See Table 8–3 for complete table of temperatures and resistance values.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor and connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section
10.) Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in con-
nectors.
00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT) is not within the range of -58 to +266°F (-50 to
+130°C).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when sensor is in range or alarm may be manually reset using the display
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
(25°C). Refer to Section 8.10.7 for chart of sensor resistances.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at ENCU. (See Section 10.) Verify there is no physical damage
to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
output and wiring connections to sensor.
62-11637 7–44
00130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: If ambient temperature is above 32°F (0°C), and this is the second or third start attempt, and
the engine oil pressure switch is closed (oil pressure good), and engine speed is sensed at less than 1000;
OR, if ambient is below 32°F (0°C) and the DC amp draw is more than 2 amps, and this is the second or
third start attempt, and engine speed is sensed at less than 1000.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only and engine will be considered running.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when engine speed is greater than 1,000 rpm or alarm may be manually
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Alarm 00041 (Engine Stalled)

Check for Alarm 00041 ENGINE STALLED. When alarms 00041 and 00130 occur at the same time,
generally, the engine has run out or is running out of fuel. This causes the engine to surge. Check fuel
in tank and add fuel as necessary. Check fuel lines between the fuel tank and the fuel pump inlet to
ensure air is not being drawn in.
2. Check Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN)

a. Check actual engine speed using a hand held tachometer and compare with speed shown in unit
data. Must be ± 20 rpm. Must be a steady reading.
b. Inspect sensor, connector pins & terminals. Verify there is no physical damage to sensor, and no
damage or corrosion in connections.
c. Check power from ENCU. +5 VDC from terminal ENCU−43 to ENSSN−3.
d. Check ground to ENCU. Check wiring from terminal ENCU−20 to ENSSN−1.
e. Check signal to ENCU. Check wiring from terminal ENCU−2 to ENSSN−2.
3. Check Circuits with Test Sensor

Substitute known good sensor and check unit data reading (Refer to Section 3.13). Must be within ±
50 rpm of reading on tachometer.
7–45 62-11637
00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT) is not within the range of −53 to +158°F
(−47 to +70°C)
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only and superheat for EVXV will be calculated using SAT or DTT if alarm 00123
(Check Supply Air Sensor) is active.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when Evap Temp Sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset
using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
b. Check Evap Temp Sensor resistance. (Refer to Note 3 in Notes Section, page 7-2.) 10,000 Ohms
@ 77°F (25°C.) See Table 8–3 for complete table of temperatures and resistance values.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor and connector 2MM. (See wiring schematic Section
10.) Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in con-
nectors.
62-11637 7–46
00132 CHECK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR
NOTE
The APX control system uses one Defrost Termination Sensor (DTT) and that sensor will activate this
“CHECK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR” alarm.
• ACTIVATION: Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT) is not within the range of -58 to +266°F (-50
to +130°C).
• UNIT CONTROL: When this alarm is active, the System will use only the SAT for defrost initiation. If both
this alarm and the A00123 (Check Supply Air Sensor) are active the System will use the RAT for initiation. In
either case, defrost will be allowed when the sensor is below 45°F (7.2°C). When this alarm is active defrost
will terminate when the SAT reaches 55°F (12.8°C). If both this alarm and Alarm 00123 CHECK SUPPLY
AIR SENSOR are both active, defrost will terminate after ten minutes.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
a. Inspect sensor & connector. Verify there is no damage to sensor, and no damage, moisture, or corro-
sion in connector.
b. Check Evap Temp Sensor resistance. (Refer to Note 3 in Notes Section, page 7-2.) 10,000 Ohms @
77°F (25°C.) See Section 8.10.7 for complete table of temperatures and resistance values.
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor, EV2 connector and connector 2MM. (See wiring sche-
matic Section 10.) Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or cor-
7–47 62-11637
00133 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1
00134 CHECK REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 2
• ACTIVATION: Remote Temperature Sensor (REMSN1 or REMSN2) is not within the range of -53 to
+158°F (-47 to +70°C.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
IF A SENSOR IS INSTALLED
1. Check Sensor
b. Check sensor resistance (Refer to Note 3 in Notes Section, page 7-2.) 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F

a. Inspect connector pins & terminals at sensor, REM connector and 2CCB. (See wiring schematic
Section 10.) Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no damage, moisture, or corrosion
in connectors.
IF A SENSOR IS NOT INSTALLED
Any switch/sensor that is not present in the unit should not be Configured “ON”. Correct Configurations.
2. Check REM Connector

Locate and inspect 10 position connector for optional sensors and switches. (see wiring schematic Sec-
tion 10). Connector must have cap on, no corrosion or moisture inside connector. If there is a problem
with the connector and there are no remote sensors or switches in the unit, the connector may be
removed and each individual wire separated from the others, terminated and insulated with heat shrink.
62-11637 7–48
P00141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER
• ACTIVATION: Pretrip cycle was stopped by user before the Pretrip cycle ended automatically.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for any Pretrip Alarms

Scroll the alarm list for any Active Pretrip alarms. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
2. Rerun Pretrip Check (If Desired)

a. Clear Active Alarm List, then run Pretrip & check for any new alarms. Unit is in Pretrip. Check for
any new alarms.
b. Allow to terminate automatically. Pretrip cycle operates normally.
P00143 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT

• ACTIVATION: The circuit current draw is outside the normal range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail in test 2 and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or Alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Coil
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & terminals. Verify no damage to coil. Verify no damaged or corroded
pins.
a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at CLH termi-
b. Check for ground at CLH terminal B (including SP-3) to GND 1RING1. Good ground. If not, check con-
7–49 62-11637
P00144 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check UL1 Operation

Refer to procedure for alarm 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be corrected and the
P00148 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check SV1 Operation

Refer to procedure for alarm 00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be corrected and the

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check SV4 Operation

P00151 CHECK GLOW CIRCUIT (This applies to the engine preheater = EPH)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
play mounted keys or by turning the unit off then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Glow Plug Operation

Refer to procedure for alarm 00040 CHECK ENGINE PREHEAT CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be
62-11637 7–50
P00152 CHECK FUEL SOLENOID CIRCUIT
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check ENCU Operation

Refer to procedure for alarm 05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be cor-
P00153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to
+70°C).
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor Operation

Refer to procedure for alarm 00122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR. Alarm condition must be cor-
P00154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to
+70°C).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Refer to procedure for alarm 00123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR. Alarm condition must be cor-
7–51 62-11637
P00155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT) is not within the range of -58 to +266°F (-50 to
+130°C).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Refer to procedure for alarm 00129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR. Alarm condition must be cor-
P00157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT

• ACTIVATION: With all circuits off, current flow of more than +1.5 to -2.0 amps is detected in the 12 VDC
electrical circuits.
NOTE: If this alarm occurs, Pretrip Test #2 will be skipped and Pretrip Test #3 will start.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check DC Current Draw and Sensor

a. Observe current draw reading in unit data. Reading must be between +1.5 to -2.0 Amps.
b. Check power between 2MM-29 and 2MM-23 and between PCM-31 and PCM-30 5 VDC. If not,
c. Check for continuity from 2MM-12 to PCM-29. If good continuity not present, check connectors and
2. Check Individual Circuits

Isolate individual circuits and test amp draw. Must be in range. (Refer to Section 2.10 for correct elec-
trical values.)
3. Check for Parasitic Loads

Check for electrical loads that are drawing current with all circuits OFF. Check for non-factory installed
devices such as lift gates, inside lights, satellite systems, etc. These devices must be wired so as to
not draw current during Pretrip testing.
62-11637 7–52
P00158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR
• ACTIVATION: Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-47 to
+70°C).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Refer to procedure for alarm 00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR. Alarm condition must be cor-
P00160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMP SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor (CDT) is not within the range of -40 to +392°F
(-40 to +200°C.)
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Refer to procedure for alarm 00125 CHECK COMP DISCHARGE SENSOR. Alarm condition must be
P00161 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR

• ACTIVATION: Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST) is not within the range of -40 to +392°F (-
40 to +200°C.)
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Refer to procedure for alarm 00127 CHECK SUCTION TEMP SENSOR. Alarm condition must be cor-
7–53 62-11637
P00162 CHECK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: The (AFAR) circuit current draw is outside the normal range.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Relay Operation

Refer to procedure for alarm 00090 CHK AFA SOLENOID CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be cor-
P00164 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check UL2 Operation

Refer to procedure for 00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT. Alarm condition must be corrected and the alarm
62-11637 7–54
P00165 CANNOT PUMP DOWN
• ACTIVATION: With SV1, SV2, & SV4 in the closed position, the compressor is not able to pull the low side
of the refrigerant system down to 10 PSIG (0.68 bar).
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will abort and “PRETRIP FAILED IN TEST 12, 13 or 14” will be displayed in Mes-
sageCenter.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Verify that compressor coupling is intact and the compressor crankshaft is turning. Repair as required.
2. Check System Pressure

Check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with those shown in unit data. Refer
to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
3. Manually Check Refrigeration System

Perform a low side pump down, refer to Section 8.7.2 step d. Suction pressure must drop to at least 0
psig. If this check does not pass, continue to Check Compressor Pumpdown.
4. Manually Test Refrigeration System

See Refrigeration Troubleshooting, Section 9.3.3, for “System Will Not Pump Down”. Must pass all
tests.
P00174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM

• ACTIVATION:
in Test #7: With the CAN calling for low speed, engine speed is NOT between: 1200 and 1500 rpm.
in Test #9: 15 seconds after the high speed test, engine rpm has not dropped from the high speed test to
1200 to 1500 rpm.
• ACTIVATION
in Test #9: 15 seconds after the High Speed Pretrip Test #8, engine speed has NOT dropped back to the
low speed range (within 15 seconds) as shown above.
NOTE
This test will be skipped if the engine speed sensor alarm (A00130) is active.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Low Speed Operation

Refer to procedure for alarm 00037 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM. Alarm condition must be corrected
and the alarm cleared to continue.
7–55 62-11637
P00175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM
• ACTIVATION: In Test #8 with the CAN calling for high speed, engine speed is NOT between: 1650 and
1950 rpm.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check High Speed Operation.

Refer to procedure for alarm 00038 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM. Alarm condition must be corrected
P00177 CHECK EXV (EVXV) SUPERHEAT

• TRIGGER-ON: With the unit running in Test 11, after the control system closes the EVXV to 0%, evapora-
tor pressure fails to drop by 20 psig (1.36 bar) or fails to go below 0 psig / bar OR the EVXV appears not to
be opening to the full capacity position.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Refrigerant Level

Check refrigerant charge. Refer to Section 8.7.2.
those shown on the microprocessor display. Suction and Evaporator Outlet pressures must be above
3 psig (0.2 bar.) Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
3. Check EVXV
a. Visually inspect EVXV for damage. Check to see if coil is seated on valve properly.
b. Inspect EVXV coil and wire connections. Verify there is no physical damage to harness, and no
damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
c. Check EVXV operation. See Section 8.9.9.
d. Check basic refrigeration system. Pressures normal. Compressor operation normal.
e. Check the EVXV electrical system for good continuity in all circuits from microprocessor to EVXV.
f. Inspect component and wire connections. No physical damage to harness.
g. Inspect harness connector pins. (See wiring schematic Section 10.)Verify there is no damage,
moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
4. Check EVOT
Check the sensor. Refer to procedure for alarm 00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR.
62-11637 7–56
P00178 CHECK UL1
• ACTIVATION: The pressure differential between suction and discharge pressures did not change as
expected when the Front Unloader (UL1) was de-energized / loaded (discharge pressure should rise and
suction pressure should drop) or when it was energized / unloaded (discharge pressure should drop and suc-
tion pressure should rise.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Wiring to CDP & CSP
a. Verify that correct wires are connected to each transducer. Plugs to transducers are the same. The cor-
rect wire plug must be connected to the proper transducer. The CDP connector is identified with a red
tape band while the CSP connector is identified with a blue band.
b. Verify that correct transducer is being used in each position. Mechanical connections to transducers
are the same. The discharge transducer should have a RED marking dot on it. The suction transducer
should have a BLUE marking dot on it.
2. Check for Alarms

Check for alarm 00085 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT or P00144 CHECK UL1 CIRCUIT. Alarm conditions
must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
a. Install manifold gauge set and check and compare compressor discharge & suction pressures with
those shown in Unit Data. Suction and Evaporator Outlet pressures must be above 3 psig (0.2 bar).
Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
b. Check transducer operation. Refer to Section 8.9.12.
4. Check Front Unloader (UL1) Operation

Check operation of Front Unloader (UL1). See Section 8.8.6 Unloader must load and unload properly.
7–57 62-11637
P00180 CHECK SUCTION MOD VALVE
• ACTIVATION: With the unit running in Pretrip Test #10, after the microprocessor attempts to close CSMV,
the suction pressure fails to drop below 4in. Hg (-0.14 bar).
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST 10”.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
a. Verify that correct wires are connected to each transducer. Plugs to transducers are the same. The cor-
are the same. The Discharge Transducer should have a RED marking dot on it. The Suction Trans-
ducer should have a BLUE marking dot on it.
2. Check Compressor Operation

Check compressor operation. If compressor does not pass all tests, repair or replace compressor.
3. Check Suction Modulating Valve
a. Visually inspect CSMV. No damage to valve.
b. Inspect CSMV coil and wire connections. Refer to Section 8.9.8. Verify there is no damage to coil,
and no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
c. Check CSMV operation. Refer to Section 8.9.8. Must perform correctly.
d. Check wires from CSMV to microprocessor. Verify there is no visual damage to wires. Continuity
test verifies that each wire is good.
62-11637 7–58
P00181 CHECK SV4 VALVE
• ACTIVATION: Suction pressure did not rise within range & discharge pressure did not drop within range
when SV4 was energized (opened).
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Alarms
Check for alarm 00079 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT or P00150 CHECK SV4 CIRCUIT (Check SV4 Circuit).
Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue
3. Repair SV4. Refer to Section 8.9.6
P00182 CHECK SV1 VALVE

• ACTIVATION: Discharge pressure did not decrease when SV1 was de-energized (opened) as expected in
Heat Pretrip, or discharge pressure did not increase as expected when SV1 was energized (closed) in
Cool Pretrip.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check for Alarms
Check for alarm 00078 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT or P00148 CHECK SV1 CIRCUIT (Check SV1 Circuit).
Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
3. Check SV1. Refer to Section 8.9.5
Refer to SV1 Checkout Procedure in Section 8.9.5.
P00186 CHECK EVAP OUTLET TEMP

• ACTIVATION: Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT) is not within the range of -53 to +158°F (-47
to +70°C.)
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Sensor
Refer to procedure for alarm 00131 CHECK EVAP TEMP SENSOR.
7–59 62-11637
P00191 CHECK UL2
• ACTIVATION: The pressure differential between suction and discharge pressures did not change as
expected when the Rear Unloader (UL2) was de-energized / loaded (discharge pressure should rise and
suction pressure should drop) or when it was energized / unloaded (discharge pressure should drop and
suction pressure should rise.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
a. Verify that correct wires are connected to each transducer Plugs to transducers are the same. The cor-
2. Check Alarms
Check for alarm 00086 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT or P00164 CHECK UL2 CIRCUIT (Check UL2). Alarm
conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue

4. Check Rear Unloader (UL2) Operation

Check operation of Rear Unloader (UL2) See Section 8.8.6. Unloader must load and unload properly.

• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check SV2 Speed Operation
62-11637 7–60
P00194 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: This alarm is generated during Test 4 of Cool Pretrip. Suction pressure is higher than normal.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
2. Check Alarms
Check for alarm P00181 CHECK SV4 VALVE. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
b. Check transducer operation Refer to Section 8.9.12.
4. Check Low Side Operating Conditions

Refer to procedure for alarm 00027 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE. Alarm condition must be corrected
7–61 62-11637
P00196 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: This alarm is generated during Test 4 of Cool Pretrip. Discharge pressure is higher than nor-
mal. (“Normal” discharge pressure for systems operating in the Cool Mode can be estimated by taking the
temperature of the air entering the condenser coil (Ambient Air Temperature AAT) and adding 30 F (16.6
C) to it, then looking at a pressure temperature chart-see Table 8–5 for the corresponding pressure.)
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
b. Verify that correct transducer is installed in each position. Mechanical connections are the same. The
CDT should have a red dot on it while the CST has a blue dot.

3. Check High Side Operating Conditions

Refer to procedure for alarm 00013 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE. Alarm condition must be cor-
62-11637 7–62
P00198 LOW DISCHARGE PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: In Pretrip heat, the compressor discharge pressure did not rise to normal. (“Normal” dis-
charge pressure for systems operating in Pretrip heat can be estimated by adding 80 psig (5.5 bars) toe
the saturation temperature of the air entering the condenser (ATS reading).
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will abort and “PRETRIP FAILED IN TEST 4” will be displayed in MessageCenter.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
b. Verify that correct transducer is installed in each position. Mechanical connections are the same. The
CDT should have a red dot on it while the CST has a blue dot.
2. Check for Alarms
a. Check for alarm 00121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR or P00158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR.
Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm cleared to continue.
b. Check Ambient Sensor reading. Must be within ±10°F (±5.5°C) of actual temperature.
b. Check transducer operation. Refer to Section 8.9.12.

5. Check SV1
Refer to SV1 Checkout Procedure in Section 8.9.5.
6. Check Compressor
a. Check the operation of the high side of the compressor by covering the condenser inlet air. Discharge
pressure must rise a minimum of 50 to 100 psig (3.4 to 6.9 bars).
b. Remove compressor heads & inspect condition of cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge valves
and gaskets. Must be in good condition.
7–63 62-11637
P00200 CHECK UL1 CYLINDERS
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected inside the front cylinder head of the compressor with a cylin-
der suction valve, cylinder discharge valve, head gasket or valve plate gasket.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
3. Check Compressor Front Head Cylinder Valves & Gaskets

Remove compressor front head & inspect condition of cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge
valves & gaskets. Must be in good condition.
P00201 CHECK UL2 CYLINDERS

• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected inside the rear cylinder head of the compressor with a cylinder
suction valve, cylinder discharge valve, head gasket or valve plate gasket.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
2. Check Compressor Rear Head Cylinder Valves & Gaskets
Remove compressor front head & inspect condition of cylinder suction valves, cylinder discharge
valves & gaskets. Must be in good condition.
62-11637 7–64
P00202 HIGH SIDE LEAK
• ACTIVATION: Refrigerant pressure is leaking past one of the components in the high pressure side of the
refrigeration system into the low pressure side.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
2. Check Compressor
period of time.
P00203 CHK DISCHARGE CHECK VALVE

• ACTIVATION: Refrigerant is leaking backwards through the Discharge Check Valve.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Pump Down Low Side
Perform pump down and check valve for leakage. Refer to Section 8.9.10.
2. Disassemble and Check Condition
7–65 62-11637
P00204 LOW SUCTION PRESSURE
• ACTIVATION: Suction Pressure is less than -10inHg (-0.34 bar) for more than 30 continuous seconds, or
less than -16inHg (-0.54 bar) for more than 5 seconds at any time during Pretrip.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will abort and “PRETRIP FAILED IN TEST X” will be displayed in MessageCenter
indicating in which test the suction pressure was too low.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Fan Belts
Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no Glazing, no cracking, no slipping. Refer
to Section 8.6. Replace if required.
3. Manually Defrost Unit

Defrost unit and terminate automatically. Typical defrost cycle time is 5-20 minutes. Suction pressure
should rise gradually during cycle.

a. Inspect coil Ninety percent or more of the coil surface must be undamaged. Coil must be clean.
c. Check return air bulkhead, air chute. Good air flow. Return air not restricted. Air chute in good condition.
d. Check fan clutch. Must be fully engaged.
e. Check upper and lower fan belt tension & condition. Verify no glazing, cracking, or slipping. Refer to
Section 8.6. Replace if required.

a. Visually inspect valve. Check that coil is seated properly.

b. Check valve. Refer to Section 8.9.9.
7. Check CSMV
Check compressor suction modulation valve. Refer to Section 8.9.8.
62-11637 7–66
P00205 CHK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR
NOTE
The APX control system uses one Defrost Termination Sensor (DTT) and that sensor will trigger this
“CHK DEFROST TERM 2 SENSOR” alarm.
• ACTIVATION: Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor is not within the maximum range of -53°F to +158°F
(-47°C to +70°C).
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm and defrost cycle will terminate.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset if Pretrip is started again, or Alarm may be manually reset using the display
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor 2 (DTT)
a. Inspect Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor 2 & connector No damage to sensor No damage or
corrosion in connector 1MP plug is connected tightly to microprocessor. No wires are pushed back
through plug.
b. Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor 2 resistance. 10,000 Ohms @ 77°F (25°C). Refer to
Section 8.10.7 for chart of resistances for different sensors.
2. Check Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor 2 Wiring

Inspect harness & control box connector pins & terminals (See wiring schematic Section 10.) No physi-
cal damage to harness. No damaged or corroded pins.
00223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE

• ACTIVATION: The Engine Maintenance Hour Meter time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Unit Maintenance Records

Schedule unit into service facility for maintenance. Must be done soon!
2. Perform Maintenance
Perform appropriate engine & unit maintenance. Follow instructions on proper maintenance form.
3. Reset Engine Maintenance Hour Meter

a. Check that the Engine Maintenance Hour Meter interval is set for your requirements. Reset config-
ured Interval if required.
b. Reset Engine Maintenance Hour Meter for the next service interval. Hour Meter reset is a Func-
tional Parameter. Follow maintenance interval recommendations in Section 8.2.
7–67 62-11637
00225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE
• ACTIVATION: The General Maintenance Hour Meter time has expired.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

3. Reset General Maintenance Hour Meter

a. Check that the General Maintenance Hour Meter interval is set for your requirements. Reset config-
ured Interval if required.
b. Reset General Maintenance Hour Meter for the next service interval. Hour Meter reset is a Func-
tional Parameter. Follow maintenance interval recommendations.
00226 SERVICE SOON-PM #1 DUE

• ACTIVATION: The Maintenance Hour Meter #1 time has expired.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

3. Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #1

a. Check that the Maintenance Hour Meter #1 interval is set for your requirements. Reset configured
Interval if required.
b. Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #1 for the next service interval. Hour Meter reset is a Functional
Parameter. Follow maintenance interval recommendations in Section 8.2.
62-11637 7–68
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:



CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:


7–69 62-11637
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:



CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:


62-11637 7–70
00232 SETPOINT ERROR
• ACTIVATION: There is an error in the setpoint that is stored in the main microprocessor memory.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when a valid setpoint is entered, or alarm may be manually reset by turn-
ing the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Setpoint
a. Check setpoint setting. Must be between -22 and +90° F (-30° and +32°C)
b. Enter new setpoint.
a. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. Disconnect positive battery cable, remove the
F7 fuse or unplug 1MM connector, wait 20 seconds and reinstall. Then place the START/RUN-OFF
back in the START/RUN position. The microprocessor powers up OK and the latest setpoint appears
in the display.
b. Valid setpoint can not be entered and alarm 00232 remains active. Download data and replace the
main microprocessor module (MM). Refer to Section 5.5.
00233 MODEL # ERROR

• ACTIVATION: There is an error in the Model Number that is stored in the main microprocessor memory.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset only when a valid Model number is entered.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Model Number

a. Check Model Number in microprocessor.
b. Enter correct Model Number. Check Model Number on Nameplate. Select the correct model num-
ber in the “MODEL NUMBER” Configuration. If correct model number is not found, Install (or have
Carrier Transicold dealer install) latest software revision.
a. Place the START/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. Disconnect positive battery cable, remove
back in the START/RUN position. The microprocessor powers up OK and the latest setpoint
appears in the display.
b. Check for valid Model number in Unit Data. Valid number is present. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid model number can not be entered and alarm remains active. Download data and replace the
7–71 62-11637
00237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR
• ACTIVATION: There is an error in one or more of the Functional Parameters that are stored in the main
microprocessor memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Incorrect Functional Parameter(s) will be automatically set for default value.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when valid Functional Parameters are entered, or alarm may be manually
reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Functional Parameters

Check Functional Parameters. All must be set for selectable values.
2. Check Software Version

Check microprocessor Software version. Upgrade to the latest version of software. Newer versions
may contain functional parameters that were not present in older versions of microprocessor software.
b. Check for valid Functional Parameters in Functional Parameters List. Valid number is set for all
parameters. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid Functional Parameter(s) can not be entered and alarm remains active. Download data and
replace the main microprocessor module (MM). Refer to Section 5.5.
62-11637 7–72
00238 CONFIGURATIONS ERROR
• ACTIVATION: There is an error in the Configuration settings that are stored in the main microprocessor
memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Incorrect Configuration(s) will be automatically set for default value.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when valid Configuration(s) are entered, or alarm may be manually reset
by turning the unit off, then back on again
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
Check Configurations. All must be set for selectable values.
2. Check Software Version

Check microprocessor software version. Upgrade to the latest version of software. If changes were
made using a newer version of TRU−Tech, that version may contain Configurations that were not
present in older versions of control system software.
3. Reconfigure Microprocessor
Send settings to microprocessor. Using the latest version of TRU-Tech and a Data Transfer USB
Memory Device, write the desired Configuration file to the device, then load the file into the micropro-
cessor. Allow the microprocessor to reboot itself.
b. Check for valid Configuration settings in Configuration List. Values are set correctly for all parame-
ters. Alarm is cleared.
c. Disconnect positive battery cable from the battery, wait 30 seconds, then reconnect and place the
START/RUN-OFF switch in the START/RUN. The microprocessor powers up OK and the latest set-
point appears in the display.
d. Check for valid Configuration settings in Configuration List. Values are set correctly for all parame-
ters. Alarm is cleared.
e. Valid Configurations can not be entered and alarm remains active. Download data and replace the
7–73 62-11637
00245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING
• ACTIVATION: There is an error in sending and saving new settings in the main microprocessor memory.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Microprocessor Software Revision

Check microprocessor software Unit should have the software upgraded to the latest version, pro-
vided for Carrier Transicold dealers on the TransCentral site.
b. Check Active Alarm List. Alarm is cleared - microprocessor is OK.
c. Alarm 00245 remains active. Unit will operate, but changes to the settings will not be retained in the
microprocessor memory. Download data and replace the main microprocessor module (MM). Refer
to Section 5.5.
00246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE

• ACTIVATION: There is an error in the ability to write information to be stored in the main microprocessor
memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Microprocessor
a. Check setpoint setting. Must be between -22 and +90°F (-30 and +32°C).
b. Enter new setpoint. Must be between -22 and +90°F (-30 and +32°C).
b. Alarm 00246 remains active. Download data and replace the main microprocessor module (MM).
Refer to Section 5.5.
62-11637 7–74
00248 CONFIG MODE / HP2 ERROR
• ACTIVATION: EEPROM Configuration is out of range.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset only when valid info is entered.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Microprocessor
a. Check setpoint setting. Must be between -22 and +90°F (-30 and +32°C).
b. Check Functional Parameters. All settings must be valid.
2. Check Software Revision

a. Check microprocessor software revision. Upgrade to the latest revision of software. The latest revi-
sion may contain Configurations that were not present in older revisions.
b. Check Functional Parameters. All settings must be valid. Send desired settings to microprocessor
using the latest version of TRU−Tech a USB data transfer device. (Do NOT use the display mounted
keys.)
c. Check Configurations. All settings must be valid. Send desired settings to microprocessor using the
latest version of TRU−Tech a USB data transfer device. (Do NOT use the display mounted keys.)
00250 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH ALL MODULES

• This alarm may be activated with earlier software revisions, follow procedure for alarm 21100 NO COMM
FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO
00251 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH INPUT BOARD

FROM MICRO TO INPBD1
00252 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH OUTPUT BOARD

FROM MICRO TO OUTPBD1
00253 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH SUCTION MODULATION VALVE MODULE (SVM)

FROM MICRO TO STP1
7–75 62-11637
00254 LOSS OF COMMUNICATION WITH DISPLAY MODULE
FROM MICRO TO DISPLAY
00255 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR

• ACTIVATION: If alarm 21100 “NO COMM FROM MICRO TO DISPLAY“ is not active and main micropro-
cessor input and/or output board configuration is incorrect.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when board communications are valid, or alarm reset or Alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Software Revision

Check microprocessor software. Unit should have the software upgraded to the latest version, pro-
vided for Carrier Transicold dealers on the TransCentral site.
02000 UPDATE SOFTWARE

• ACTIVATION: The software version in one or more of the modules is not compatible with the remainder of
the control system.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when all module software versions are compatible. Or alarm may be man-
ually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Software
Reload software. Unit should have the software upgraded to the latest version, provided for Carrier
Transicold dealers on the TransCentral site.
62-11637 7–76
03001 ENGINE LOAD CALIBRATION
• ACTIVATION: Activate alarm if:
Condition 1 = At engine start if the engine throttle sensor (Rack Position Sensor) value is less than
90%.
Condition 2 = After start if the sensor value does not drop below 90% within 5 seconds.
Condition 3 = At engine shutoff if the sensor value does not drop below 10% within 5 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only. Control system will modulate CSMV and activate Economizer Control as
required.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Rack Position Sensor (RPS) Power And Wiring

a. Inspect sensor, connector pins & terminals. No physical damage to sensor. No damaged or corro-
sion in connections.
b. If required, power sensor by placing the unit in PC Mode, check for power. Voltage reading between
connector position 1 (positive) and position 2 (negative) should be 5 volts DC. Check connectors
and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
c. Check for continuity from connector terminal 3 to ENCU−7. If good continuity is not present, check
connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
2. Perform Engine Load Calibration

Perform Engine Load Calibration as referenced in Section 8.5.13.
3. Replace Rack Position Sensor (RPS)

Replace sensor with know good component. Calibrate sensor and ENCU. Refer to Section 8.5.13.
7–77 62-11637
05012 CHECK ENCU POWER CIRCUIT
NOTE
When operation of the engine is required the main microprocessor will provide a signal from terminal
3MM−9. This signal has been referred to as the “run relay”, based on pre−APX control systems that
had an actual relay in place. Whenever the term “run relay” is used in APX control system discussion,
it is referring to the engine run output from 3MM−9 to the ENCU at terminal ENCU−44.
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the ENCU−44 terminal circuit. If this alarm is activated while
the circuit is energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated at any other time, the circuit is
detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the circuit is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Wiring
a. Inspect main microprocessor 3MM & ENCU connectors. Verify there is no damage to module, and no
damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
b. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize the circuit. Must have minimum 11
VDC at 3MM−9. If no voltage at 3MM−9, download data and replace main microprocessor. Refer to
Section 5.5.
c. With circuit still in Component Test Mode check voltage at ENCU−44. Must have minimum 11 VDC at
ENCU−44. If no voltage at ENCU− 44, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage,
d. Place the SROS in the OFF position and check continuity of the wiring from ENCU−19 to the
“ENCUGND” connector extending from the battery negative cable connection. Check connectors and
2. Check ENCU
Replace ENCU with a known good component. Calibrate sensor and ENCU. Refer to Section 8.5.13.
62-11637 7–78
05013 CHECK CLUTCH CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the clutch coil (CLH) circuit. If this alarm is activated while
the control system is calling for CLH to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm occurs at
any other time, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the control system calls for CLH to energize and the coil circuit is
normal, or when the control system calls for CLH to be de-energized and the circuit is not shorted or Alarm
may be manually reset using the display mounted keys or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Fuses
Check F5 & F10. Fuses must be good. Replace fuse(s) as required, clear alarms, restart and check for
repeat alarms.
2. Check Coil
Section 2.10 for specifications. View current draw in Unit Data. Verify the actual current is within the
specifications.
a. Use Component Test Mode (Refer to Section 5.2.4) to energize circuit. Check for power at CLH termi-
b. Check for ground at CLH terminal B (including SP-3) to GND RING1. Good ground. If not, check con-
7–79 62-11637
05014 CHECK STARTER SOLENOID CIRCUIT
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the starter solenoid coil (SS) circuit. If this alarm is activated
while the control system is calling for SS to be energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the control system calls for SS to energize and the coil circuit is nor-
mal, or when the control system calls for SS to be de-energized and the circuit is not shorted or Alarm may
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Starter Solenoid Coil

a. Inspect coil & connector terminal. Verify there is no damage to coil. Special connector at starter is
tight and locked. Harness connector is not damaged or corroded.
b. Check resistance of coil. Verify coil not open or shorted.

a. Place Start/Run − Off switch in the OFF position and then back into the Start/Run position. Follow-
ing buzzer, check for power at SS terminal and 3MM-12. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check
connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
b. Check starter. Refer to engine workshop manual.
05016 CHECK REMOTE AMBER LIGHT

• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the alarm (amber) light circuit (LB). If this alarm is activated
while the circuit is energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated at any other time, the
circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the circuit is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using the dis-
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Light Bar Wiring

Inspect light bar & connector. No damage to light bar. No damage, moisture, or corrosion in connector.
Place the SROS in the OFF position and check: Fuses F5 & F11 in the PCM. Continuity of the wiring
from PCM-7 to LB-B. Continuity of the wiring from LB-G -including SP-2 to ground. Continuity of the
wiring from LB-H to 3MM-7. Verify correct fuse, see Figure 2-7. Check connectors and wiring between
terminals for damage, moisture or corrosion.
2. Check Light Bar

Check operation of 2-Light Bar. Refer to Section 8.10.6 for information on testing the light bar.
62-11637 7–80
05017 CHECK GLOW PLUG RELAY
• ACTIVATION: A problem has been detected in the engine preheat enable circuit (EPHT). If this alarm is
activated when the circuit is energized, the circuit is detected shorted. If this alarm is activated at any other
time, the circuit is detected open.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when circuit is normal, or alarm may be manually reset using the display
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check EPHT Wiring

Inspect 3MM and PCM connectors. Verify there is no damage to modules, and no damage, moisture,
or corrosion in connector.
2. Check Engine Preheat Enable Circuit

a. Using Component Test Mode, refer to Section 5.2.4, energize engine preheat circuit. Verify the cir-
cuit is energized and amp draw is displayed.
NOTICE
DO NOT leave the air intake circuit energized for the full 5 minutes if full amperage is shown,
as the intake air heater element life will be greatly shortened.
b. Check for power at 3MM-14 Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, download data and replace main
microprocessor. For complete Main Microprocessor Module replacement instructions refer to Sec-
tion 5.5.2.
c. Check for power at PCM−27. Must have minimum 11 VDC. If not, check wiring and connectors
between 3MM−14 and PCM−27. Good continuity, no damage, moisture, or corrosion in connectors.
d. Replace PCM. Refer to Section 8.10.2.
3. Is the component functioning? Are there additional alarms?

a. If the component is functioning, and additional alarms are present (often within 3MM01 - 3MM12 or
3MM13 - 3MM18) check related fuses, wires, and connectors.
b. If the fuses/wires/connectors are OK, it indicates an internal problem with the MM or the PCM.
Download data and replace main microprocessor. For complete Main Microprocessor Module
replacement instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
c. If problem persists reinstall the old MM, and replace the PCM. Refer to Section 8.10.2.
7–81 62-11637
20100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO DISPLAY
NOTE
This alarm will be available in the inactive alarm list and download only. It is an indication that an inter-
mittent failure is occurring, causing a break in the circuit sufficient to activate the alarm.
• ACTIVATION: If alarm 21100 “NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO“ is not active and main
microprocessor cannot communicate with the display module over the CAN bus.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only, unit will continue to run. Module may display “LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when CAN communication is restored, or alarm may be manually reset by
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check CAN bus

a. Inspect connector pins & terminals on 1MM, 1SVM, DM and ENCU. Verify no damage or corrosion in
connections.
b. Check display LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS message is displayed.
c. Check for CAN circuit continuity:
CAN Hi; Check entire circuit, 1MM−2 to DM−2. If circuit is open, check individual paths as follows:
1MM-2 through SP−1 to 1SVM-5 & ENCU−23 and 1SVM-2 & DM-2
CAN Lo; Check entire circuit, 1MM−4 to DM−6. If circuit is open, check individual paths as fol-
lows:1MM-4 through SP−4, to 1SVM-7 & ENCU−24, and 1SVM-4 & DM-6
Check for good continuity. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no damage,
62-11637 7–82
21100 NO COMM FROM ANY BOARD TO MAIN MICRO
NOTE
This alarm will be available in the inactive alarm list and download only. It is an indication that an inter-
mittent problem has occurred and a careful diagnosis is required.
• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate with any modules over the CAN bus.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm. Display module may display “LOSS OF COMMUNICATIONS”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when CAN communication is restored, or alarm reset or Alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check CAN Bus

a. Inspect connector pins & terminals on 1MM, 1SVM, DM and ENCU. Verify no damage or corrosion in
connections.
b. Check for CAN continuity:
CAN Hi; 1MM-2 through SP−1 to 1SVM-5 & ENCU−23 and 1SVM-2 & DM-2.
CAN Lo; 1MM-4 through SP−4, to 1SVM-7 & ENCU−24, and 1SVM-4 & DM-6.
Check for good continuity. If not, check connectors and wiring between terminals. Verify no damage,
2. Check for other CAN Bus Alarms

This alarm may accompany by other alarms, complete troubleshooting steps for alarms found. If repairs
have been made and the other alarms have cleared, further troubleshooting may not be required. If this
alarm reoccurs, check CAN bus as described in the proceeding step.
3. Perform and Analyze a Data Download
22100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO INPBD1

• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate internally.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown all modules except the display and alarm. (The alarm will only display if the dis-
play module is communicating.) Main microprocessor status LED will illuminate steady green (not pulsing).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when internal communication is restored, alarm reset, or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Replace Main Microprocessor

Download data and replace main microprocessor. For complete Main Microprocessor Module replace-
ment instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
7–83 62-11637
22101 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE LOW INP1
NOTE
This alarm is an indication that there is a short in the transducer or DC current transformer wiring and
the voltage supply in the main microprocessor is overloaded.
• ACTIVATION: Voltage from main microprocessor to the components is less than 4.5 VDC
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when voltage is correct, alarm reset or alarm may be manually reset by
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

Install manifold gauge set and check and compare compressor discharge, evaporator outlet & suction
pressures with those shown in Unit Data. Refer to Section 8.9.12 for instruction on comparison.
2. Check Wiring
If a transducer reading is not within a reasonable range of gauge reading, check wires to sensors for
short.
For CSP, check wiring from 2MM−20, 2MM−30 and 2MM−9.
For EVOP, check wiring from 2MM−25, SP−20 and 2MM−17.
For CDP, check wiring from 2MM−21, SP−20 and 2MM−10. For ECOP, check wiring from 2MM−28,
SP−20 and 2MM−14.
3. Check CT Wiring
Check wires to sensor for short. Check wiring from 2MM−29, 2MM−12 and 2MM−23 to PCM.
62-11637 7–84
22102 SENSOR INPUT VOLTAGE HIGH INP1
NOTE
This alarm is an indication that there is a short in the DC current transformer wiring from another (nom-
inal 12 VDC) circuit into the transducer or CT sensor circuit.
• ACTIVATION: Voltage from main microprocessor to the sensors is greater than 5.5 VDC
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when sensor voltage is correct, alarm reset or alarm may be manually reset
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Transducer Wiring

Check wires to sensors for short.
For CSP, check wiring from 2MM−20, 2MM−30 and 2MM−9.
For EVOP, check wiring from 2MM−28, SP−7 and 2MM−17.
For CDP, check wiring from 2MM−21, SP−7 and 2MM−10.
2. Check CT Wiring
Check wires to sensor for short from another circuit. Check wiring from 2MM−29, 2MM−12 and 2MM−23
to PCM.
23100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO OUTPBD1

• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate internally.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown all modules except the display and alarm. (The alarm will only display if the dis-
play module is communicating.) Main microprocessor status LED will illuminate steady green (not pulsing).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when internal communication is restored, alarm reset or alarm may be
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:

7–85 62-11637
25100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO STP1
• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate with stepper valve module over the CAN bus.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shut down and alarm. The stepper valve module status LED may be on steady green
(not pulsing) or red.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when CAN communication is restored, alarm reset or alarm may be man-
ually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Both Active and Inactive Alarms for other “NO COMM” Alarms
a. If more than one alarm, record all and proceed to step 2.
b. If this is the only “NO COMM” alarm, replace module.
2. Check CAN Bus
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals on 1MM and 1SVM. Verify no damage or corrosion in connec-
tions.
b. Check CAN circuits:
CAN Hi: 1MM-2 through SP−1 to 1SVM-5
CAN Lo: 1MM-4 through SP−4, to 1SVM-7
CAN (+ 12 VDC): 1MM−8 to 1SVM−6.
CAN 12 VDC: negative: 1MM−3 to 1SVM−1.
3. Check System
Clear active and inactive alarms. Start unit and monitor for additional “NO COMM” alarms.
62-11637 7–86
26100 NO COMM FROM MICRO TO ENCU
• ACTIVATION: Main microprocessor cannot communicate with the engine control unit over the CAN bus.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when CAN communication is restored, alarm reset or alarm may be man-
ually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
CORRECTIVE ACTIONS:
1. Check Both Active and Inactive Alarms for other “ NO COMM” Alarms
a. If more than one alarm, record all and proceed to step 2.
b. If this is the only alarm, check for continuity:
CAN Hi: 1MM-2 through SP−1 to ENCU−23.
CAN Lo: 1MM-4 through SP−4, to ENCU−24.
c. Replace ENCU.
2. Check CAN Bus
a. Inspect connector pins & terminals on 1MM and1SVM. No damaged or corrosion in connections.
b. Check for CAN continuity:
CAN Hi: 1MM-2 through SP−1 to ENCU−23.
CAN Lo: 1MM-4 through SP−4, to ENCU−24.
If good continuity is not present, check connectors and wiring between terminals for damage, moisture
or corrosion.
3. Check System
Clear active and inactive alarms. Start unit and monitor for additional “NO COMM” alarms.
7–87 62-11637
SECTION 8 - SERVICE
8.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1

8.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–1
8.3 PRE-TRIP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–2
8.4 EXTERNAL SURFACE SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–4
8.5 ENGINE AND ENGINE RELATED SYSTEMS SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–6
8.6 POWER TRAIN SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–15
8.7 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–21
8.8 COMPRESSOR AND UNLOADER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–28
8.9 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM COMPONENT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–34
8.10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–44
62-11637
SECTION 8
SERVICE
which unit is attached (trailer, container,
! WARNING rail car, metal building, etc).

start automatically at any time the NOTICE
START/ RUN-OFF switch is in the START/
RUN position. Also, the unit may be fitted Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of
with two way communication equipment inert gas brazing procedures is manda-
that will allow starting of the unit from a tory for all Carrier Transicold refrigera-
remote location even though the switch tion units; otherwise compressor failure
is in the OFF position. will occur. For more information Refer to
Technical Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert
Gas Brazing.
! WARNING 8.1 SECTION LAYOUT
When performing service or maintenance Service procedures are presented herein under the fol-
procedures: ensure any two way commu- lowing major sections:
nication is disabled in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instruction, ensure • Scheduled Maintenance - Section 8.2
the START/RUN-OFF switch is in OFF • Pre-trip Inspection - Section 8.3
position and, whenever practical, discon-
nect the negative battery connection. • External Surface Service (automatic fresh air
exchange, grille, surround, doors and display
module) - Section 8.4
! WARNING • Engine And Engine Related Systems Service -
Section 8.5
Beware of moving belt and belt driven
components. • Refrigerant System Service - Section 8.7
• Compressor and Unloader Service - Section 8.8
! WARNING • Refrigerant System Component Service - Sec-

tion 8.9
• Electrical System Component Service - Section
pinch points.
8.10
Refer to the Table of Contents to locate specific topics.
! WARNING
8.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Never use air or gases containing oxygen
for leak testing or operating refrigerant For the most reliable operation and for maximum life,
compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air your unit requires regular maintenance. This includes
or gases containing oxygen can lead to oil and filter changes, fuel and air cleaner replacement,
explosion. coolant replacement and pre-trip inspections. Mainte-
nance is to be performed in accordance with the proce-
dures provided in Table 8–1.
! CAUTION
Disconnect batteries before doing any
electrical welding on unit or chassis to
8–1 62-11637
8.3 PRE-TRIP INSPECTION
Pre-trip inspection should be performed before every trip and at regular maintenance intervals. Pre-trip procedures
are provided in the Trailer Refrigeration Pre-trip Inspection document 62-90483
Table 8–1 Maintenance Schedule

System Operation Reference Section
a. Pre-Trip Inspections
1. Pre-Trip Inspection - before starting Section 8.3
2. Pre-Trip Inspection - after starting Section 8.3
3. Run Microprocessor Pretrip - Before loading Section 3.5
4. Check Engine Hours Section 3.15

b. Every Service Interval or Yearly
Engine 1. Check engine oil and filter change interval (refer to Section d. Section d.
of this table)
2. Check low oil pressure switch Check
3. Clean crankcase breather Section 8.5.16

4. Check fuel injectors every 1,500 hours* Engine Manual
5. Check injection pump every 3,000 hours* Engine Manual
6. Check and adjust engine valves every 4,000 hours Engine Manual
Fuel System 1. Clean mechanical and electric (if equipped) fuel pump screens Section 8.5.3
& Section 8.5.4
2. Change fuel filter
Section 8.5.5
3. Check fuel heater (if equipped)
Section 8.5.8
Cooling System 1. Check coolant change interval (refer to Section e. of this Section 8.5.14
table). If replacement is not required, check antifreeze con-
centration using a refractometer (Carrier Transicold P/N 07-
00435-00)
Section 8.5.14
2. Clean condenser/radiator surfaces
Check
3. Check water pump
Check
4. Check water temperature sensor
Exhaust System 1. Check mounting hardware
Check
2. Check muffler and exhaust pipes
Air Intake System 1. Change air cleaner element
Section 8.5.10
2. Check and reset air cleaner indicator
Starting Circuit 1. Clean battery connections and cable ends Check/Replace
2. Check battery hold down clamps Check/Replace
3. Check battery condition Check
4. Check starter operation Check

Charging Circuit 1. Check alternator brushes, replace if needed
Section 8.10.5
2. Check alternator output
*Based upon EPA 40 CFR Part 89
62-11637 8–2
Table 8–1 Maintenance Schedule
System Operation Reference Section
Unit 1. Check unit mounting bolts Check
2. Check engine and compressor mounting bolts Check
3. Check door latches & hinges Section 8.4.4
4. Check all belt tensions, adjust as necessary Check
5. Check gearbox and fanshaft for oil leaks Check
6. Check fanshaft, idler and gearbox bearings Check
7. Check clutch air gap, adjust as required Section 8.6.4

Refrigeration 1. Check compressor drive coupling Section 8.6
System
2. Check defrost air switch and calibrate as necessary Section 8.9.13
3. Check & clean the evaporator coil and all defrost drain hoses Section 8.9.1
4. Install manifold gauge set and check refrigerant pressure Check
5. Run APX Control System Pretrip Section 3.5
6. Check manual defrost operation Section 3.10

Electrical 1. Check unit switches and electrical connections
System Check
2. Check condition of all modules
c. 5 year or 12,000 Hour Maintenance
Coolant 1. Drain and flush cooling system

Section 8.5.14
System 2. Refill with Extended Life Coolant
d. Oil Change Intervals
Oil Type Oil Change / ESI Filter Change Oil Type
Petroleum 3000 hours or 2 years (Maximum oil drain interval is 2 years.) Petroleum
Mobile Delvac 1* 4000 hours or 2 years (Maximum oil drain interval is 2 years.) Mobile Delvac 1*
* Mobil Delvac1 is the only approved synthetic oil
These maintenance schedules are based on the use of approved oils and regular Pre-trip inspections of the unit.
Failure to follow the recommended maintenance schedule may affect the life and reliability of the refrigeration unit.
8–3 62-11637
8.4 EXTERNAL SURFACE SERVICE b. Solenoid
Procedures for servicing or maintaining the automatic 1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis-
fresh air exchange, grille, surround, doors, door latches abling any two way communication and placing
and display module are provided in the following sub- the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
paragraphs. 2. Remove cover in accordance with preceding
step. Loosen innermost cover mounting nut to
8.4.1 AutoFresh Fresh Air Exchange unlock and remove remaining cover hardware.
Figure 8.1 Automatic Fresh Air Exchange 3. Disconnect the solenoid connector, remove
hardware (7) attaching old solenoid and bring
1 2 3 4 5 new solenoid in place. Torque mounting hard-
ware to 120 inch/ lbs (13.6 Nm), and reconnect
connector.
4. If housing (3) is replaced, Torque all mounting
hardware to 120 inch/lbs (13.6 Nm).
5. Reinstall and adjust cover in accordance with
preceding step.
Figure 8.2 Grille Insert Removal and Door Latch

Maintenance
GRILLE INSERT
6 GRILLE INSERT MOUNTING BOLTS
8 SURROUND
2
7
1. Cover 5. Inlet Connection

2. Gasket 6. Outlet Connection
3. Housing 7. Solenoid Hardware
4. Solenoid 8. Cover Hardware
To replace the cover and/or cover gaskets and sole-

noid, do the following.
a. Cover And/Or Cover Gaskets
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis-
abling any two way communication and placing
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
2. Loosen outermost cover mounting nut (8, Fig-
ure 8.1) to unlock hardware and remove hard-
ware holding cover (1) in place.
3. Slide cover off solenoid shaft (4), remove and
replace gaskets (2). Slide cover in place against LUBRICATE LATCHES AND PINS
inner hardware to ensure cover gasket is slightly
compressed to form a good seal. If required,
adjust inner hardware and re-lock in place. 8.4.2 Grille Insert Removal
4. Install outer hardware (two plain washers, a lock To remove the grille insert, do the following.
washer and two nuts). Torque nut against cover
lock washer to 120 inch/lbs (13.6 Nm) and then NOTE
re-lock outer nut. If difficulty is experienced when attempting
to remove the grille mounting bolts, the grille
5. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
may be removed with the surround attached
to allow access to the mounting clips. (Refer
to Section 8.4.3.)
disabling any two way communication and plac-
ing the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF posi-
tion.
62-11637 8–4
2. Remove the 3 grille insert mounting bolts on 8.4.4 Door Latch Maintenance and Replace-
each side of the grille insert, See Figure 8.2. ment
3. Remove the 2 grille insert mounting bolts on top a. Door Latch Maintenance
of the grille insert. Proper maintenance is important for smooth operation
of the latch assemblies and the latch pins that are
4. The grille is fitted with locating tabs along the mounted on the unit’s frame (See Figure 8.2). In order
bottom. To remove, swing insert down and lift to keep the movable parts clean and lubricated, CTD
out of locating slots. recommends the use of a de-greasing cleaner and LPS
5. Reverse above steps to install grille insert. 2 lubricant. This lubricant should be available at any
local automobile and truck parts suppliers.
8.4.3 Surround Removal b. Cable Replacement
NOTE 1. Remove circular clip that secures the cable to
It is not necessary to remove the grille the paddle assembly. See Figure 8.4.
before removing the surround.
2. Slide cable from paddle and rotate other end out
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by of latch assembly.
ing the STOP/RUN-OFF Switch in the OFF posi- NOTE
tion. The side door lower cable is inserted
through the upper cable eyelet. The lower
2. Open both side and front doors. cable is to be removed to gain access to the
upper cable.
3. Remove the bolts that secure the surround to
the unit, see Figure 8.3. 3. Reverse above steps to install new cable.
4. Reverse above steps to install surround.
Figure 8.4 Door Latch Cable Removal
Figure 8.3 Surround Removal
MOUNTING BOLTS 4
1
2
1. Paddle Assembly (Typical, Front & Side Doors)

2. Circular Clips (Typical, Front & Side Doors)
MOUNTING BOLTS 3. Lower Cable Upper Connection (Side Doors Only)
REMOVE DECAL PLATE TO 4. Upper Cable (Side Doors Only)
ACCESS UNIT MOUNTING STUD.
8.4.5 Display Module
Procedures for servicing the display module are pro-
vided in Section 8.10.4.
8–5 62-11637
8.5 ENGINE AND ENGINE RELATED SYSTEMS 8.5.1 Fuel System
SERVICE The fuel system consists of the fuel tank, mechanical
Procedures for servicing the engine, fuel system, fuel pump, fuel filter, fuel injection pump, the injectors
engine cooling system and air cleaner are provided in and interconnecting tubing. The fuel system may also
the following sub-paragraphs. be equipped with an optional electric pump and/or
optional electric fuel heater.
Two fuel system configurations are available, the stan-
dard extended life spin–on filter system and the extra
heavy–duty suction side filter system (see Figure 8.5).
Figure 8.5 Fuel System Diagram
SPIN–ON FILTER SYSTEM SUCTION SIDE FILTER SYSTEM

10
10
15 9
11
12 11
9
14
8 7
8
13
6
2
7
3 5
4
6 4 2
5 12
1
13
1
1. Fuel Tank 9. Injection Pump

2. Supply Line 10. Injector Nozzles
3. Electric Pump 11. Bleed Screw
4. Mechanical Pump 12. Return Line
5. Water Drain Valve 13. Level Sensor
6. Heater 14. Vent Cap
7. Filter 15. Fuel Head Assembly
8. Filter or Fuel Head Leak-Off Line
-----
62-11637 8–6
Figure 8.6 Fuel Bleed Components
NOTICE
3 Running the engine for an extended
period of time with the manual plunger up
2 can cause a priming pump failure
6. Depress and turn the top of the manual plunger

clockwise to lock in place.
7. When engine is running smoothly, turn bleed

valve clockwise until fully closed. If bleeding a
suction side filter system, loosen the vent on the
cover until fuel level lowers to the collar clamp
then hand tighten vent.
4
1 8.5.3 Mechanical Fuel Pump Screen
1. Mechanical Fuel 3. Bleed Valve The fuel screen (See Figure 8.7) may become plugged
Pump or restricted with foreign particles or wax as a result of
4. Injection Pump
using the wrong grade of fuel or untreated fuel in cold
2. Manual Plunger
weather. This will cause the engine to lose power. The
screen must be cleaned on a regular schedule such as
8.5.2 Priming the Fuel System unit pre-trip or when the oil and fuel filters are changed.
(Refer to Section 8.2).
The mechanical fuel pump (See Figure 8.6) is
mounted on the engine next to the injection pump. This Figure 8.7 Mechanical Fuel Pump
pump has a manual plunger for priming the fuel system
when the fuel tank has been run dry.
To prime the fuel system, use the following steps:
Screen
1. If bleeding a spin–on system, considerable effort
may be saved by changing the filter and filling
the new element with clean diesel fuel before
priming the remainder of the system. Refer to
Section 8.5.5. If bleeding a suction side filter
system remove the vent cap from the filter bowl Nut
and add fuel until level is about even with the Copper
top of the filter element, reinstall cap. Do not Rings
allow fuel level to fall below the visible level in Banjo
the bowl as the bleeding procedure is accom- Fitting Nut
plished, add more fuel if required.
2. Turn the bleed valve (red) counter-clockwise To check or replace Screen

until fully opened. 1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
3. Turn the top of the manual plunger counter- disabling any two way communication and plac-
clockwise to unlock it. S-L-O-W-L-Y (up/down ing the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF posi-
once per second) pump the manual plunger until tion.
positive pressure (resistance) is felt. This may 2. Turn nut (Figure 8.7) counter-clockwise to
take up to 200 strokes. This will indicate fuel loosen and remove it.
flow.
3. Remove banjo fitting and let it hang loose. Dis-
4. Continue to pump S-L-O-W-L-Y (up/down once card copper rings and replace with new ones.
per second) approximately 100 more strokes to
fill the filter and bleed the air out of the lines. 4. Turn screen counter-clockwise and remove.
Check and clean or replace as required.
5. Start engine. It may be necessary to continue to
pump until the engine starts. 5. To install reverse above steps.
6. Start unit and check for leaks.
8–7 62-11637
Figure 8.8 Electric Fuel Pump Figure 8.9 Suction Side Fuel Filter
Collar
Vent Cap
Vent Cap Seal

Screen
Gasket
Cover
Bowl
Cover Seal
Spring
8.5.4 Electric Fuel Pump Screen Filter Element

To check or replace screen:
ing the STOP/RUN-OFF Switch in the OFF posi-
tion. Check Valve
2. Remove bowl (See Figure 8.8).
3. Remove gasket and screen. Heater
(If Equipped)
! WARNING
Use the required protective eye wear and
clothing when working with solvents.
4. Wash screen in cleaning solvent and blow out Drain Valve

with air pressure. Clean bowl.
5. To Install reverse above steps. 8.5.6 Suction Side Fuel Filter Replacement
6. Start unit and check for leaks. To replace filter:
1. Ensure unit will not start automatically by dis-
8.5.5 Spin–On Fuel Filter Replacement
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
ing the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF posi- NOTE
tion. If required, use a lock collar wrench (Carrier
Transicold P/N 07–00423–00) to loosen the
2. Place a shallow pan under filter (item 7, Figure collar or vent cap. Do not use the wrench to
8.5) and open drain valve (5) to drain contents. install vent cap or collar, hand tighten only.
3. Remove water separator and O-ring or heater 2. Place a shallow pan under filter (Figure 8.9).
bowl and then remove element. Remove the vent cap and open the drain valve
4. Install water separator on new element using to drain the fuel below the collar level.
new O-ring or heater bowl on new element using 3. Remove the collar then remove the clear cover.
new gasket. 4. Remove filter element spring, cover seal and
5. Fill new element with clean diesel fuel, lubricate vent cap seal. Dispose of the filter element and
the seal and install. Tighten firmly by hand. seals properly.
6. Start unit and check for leaks. 5. Using a clean shop rag, clean the cover, collar
and threads on the filter body.
62-11637 8–8
6. Install new filter element, cover seal and vent To Check the Fuel Level Sensor, do the following:
cap seal. Install filter with spring at top and hand 1. Ensure unit will not start automatically by dis-
tighten collar. abling any two way communication and placing
7. Prime the system by removing the vent cap from the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
the filter bowl and add fuel until level is about 2. Verify that the in line fuse (FLS, item 10 Figure
even with the top of the filter element Reinstall 8.10) and PCM fuse (F8, item 18 Figure 2.7)
cap and hand tighten. are not open.
8. Start the engine and run for one minute. Slowly 3. Verify that the wiring is correct, cable shield is
open the vent cap and allow the fuel level to properly grounded and condition of connectors.
drop to about one inch above the collar. No damage to sensor; no damage, moisture or
9. Hand tighten the vent cap. 4. Energize sensor circuit, (MM calling for engine
operation). Check power (approximately 12
8.5.7 Fuel Level Sensor (FLS)
VDC) from PCM-22 (9, Figure 8.10) through to
An optional fuel level sensor (item1, Figure 8.10 sup- connector (13). Check ground from 2MM-24 (8)
plies an input signal to the control system as to the % of through connector (12). Check signal (greater
fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The control system will than 0.24 VDC and less than 5VDC) at 2MM-13.
activate alarm A00001 - “LOW FUEL LEVEL WARN-
5. If checks in the preceding step are OK, remove
ING” when the level reaches 15%, and (if configured to
the fuel level sensor, focus tube & gaskets. With
do so) shuts the engine down when the level reaches
the trailer level, verify that the fuel level sensor
10%. The fuel tank level is displayed in Unit Data.
flange is within one-half bubble of level using a
24 inch level. Adjust tank mounting as required.
Figure 8.10 Fuel Level Sensor
7 11 12 15
8 12 11 16
1
2
3 5
4 17 18
9 13
14 13
6 10
1. Fuel Level Sensor 10. Fuse (FLS = 3A)

2. Gasket 11. White Wire (Connection C)
3. Focus Tube 12. Black Wire (Connection B)
4. Sensor Flange 13. Red Wire (Connection A)
5. Fuel Level Sensor Flange 14. Ground (Shield)
6. Fuel Tank 15. Yellow Wire (Connection C)
7. Wire FLSC to 2MM-13 (Connection C) 16. Black Wire (Connection B)
8. Wire FLSB to 2MM-24 (Connection B) 17. Red Wire (Connection A)
9. Wire PCM-22 to FLSA (Connection A) 18. Wires From Sensor
-----
6. Using new gaskets, reinstall fuel level sensor
NOTICE components. The mounting holes are not sym-
metrical, there is an alignment hole in the sen-
Torque fuel level sensor mounting sor, alignment holes and index dimples in the
screws to 15 to 18 inch/lbs (1.7 to 2.0 gaskets and an alignment notch in the focus
Nm). DO NOT over tighten, as little as 20 tube flange to assist in aligning the components.
inch/pounds (2.3 Nm) will damage the Install mounting screws and washers in all
sensor. mounting holes and bring to finger tight. Tighten
in accordance with the instructions provided in
the preceding NOTICE.
8–9 62-11637
7. With the fuel tank empty the output reading 8.5.9 Engine Oil And Oil Filter
should be approximately 0.25 VDC. a. To Check The Engine Oil Level:
8. With the fuel tank full, the output reading should 1. Warm up the engine and then stop it by placing
be approximately 4.75 VDC. the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
9. Start unit and check for leaks. 2. Unscrew the cap/dipstick see Figure 8.11. Wipe
the dipstick clean and insert the cap into the oil
8.5.8 Fuel Heater fill tube without threading into tube.
The optional fuel heater (item 6, Figure 8.5) applies 3. Remove the dipstick again and check oil level.
heat to fuel in the fuel filter. Heating the fuel dissolves/ DO NOT add oil if the level is in the “safe” range.
prevents paraffin wax crystals (and ice) that form when If needed, add oil as indicated by markings on
diesel fuel is chilled thus enabling the water separator dipstick until level is in the “safe” range.
to work more efficiently and to prevent the filter from
plugging with wax and/or ice crystals. When the ambi- 4. After checking or adding oil as necessary,
ent air sensor is reading 77°F (25°C) or higher, the con- ensure cap is threaded back onto oil fill tube.
trol system will not enable this circuit. Also, the heater
is fitted with an internal temperature switch (FHTS - Figure 8.11 Engine Oil Level
see schematic diagrams, Section 10). The heater
used in spin on type filter systems closes, on a tem- Cap
perature fall, to energize the heater element at tem- Dipstick
peratures below 45°F (7.2°C) and opens, on a
temperature rise, to de-energize the heater element at
75°F (23.9°C). The heater used in suction side filter
systems closes at temperatures below 53 ± 7°F (11.7 ±
3.9°C).
To test the fuel heater, do the following:
QTS 1 2 SAFE
1. Using Unit Data (refer to Section 3.13), check to
ensure the Ambient Air Temperature reading is
below 77°F (25°C), if the reading is below this b. To Change Engine Oil
temperature the fuel heater relay (FHR) should 1. Warm up the engine and then stop it by placing
be energized. If the relay does not energize, the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
check for power from PCM fuse F10 to the relay Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
coil + terminal and ground from the coil negative disabling any two way communication.
connection through PCM-17 to 3MM-17.
2. If available, install oil drain tool (CTD P/N 68-
2. With the relay contacts closed, check for power 15763-01). See Figure 8.12. The Oil Drain Tool
from F7, through the relay contacts, fuse F14, not only directs the oil over the door latch pin
through PCM-14 & 3 through SP8 to the fuel bracket and bottom panel, on units so equipped,
heater connector at terminal A. Check also for but also holds a typical drain bucket in place
ground from the fuel heater connector terminal while the oil is draining from the engine.
B through SP−3 to GND1RING1. 3. Remove drain plug drain engine oil. Replace
plug and refill engine with oil. Continue with step
3. If the wiring is good and the fuel heater tempera-
c. and change oil filter.
ture is below the cut in temperature replace the
fuel heater. If the wiring is good but the fuel
Figure 8.12 Oil Drain Tool
heater temperature is above the cut out tem-
perature, the internal temperature switch may
be open. Retest at a temperature below the
switch close point as soon as conditions allow.
4. Start unit and check for leaks.
62-11637 8–10
c. To Change Engine Oil Filter: 7. Start unit and check for leaks. Reset air cleaner
service indicator.
1. If not continuing from preceding step b., warm
up the engine and then stop it by placing the 8.5.11 Engine Preheater
STOP/ RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
Ensure the unit will not start automatically by The current draw for the preheat circuit is checked
disabling any two way communication. during a Pretrip cycle. Refer to Section 2.10 for amper-
age and resistance values.
2. Remove oil filter. Ensure filter mounting is clean.
a. Troubleshooting The Engine Preheater (EPH)

! CAUTION abling any two way communication and placing
When changing oil filter, the new filter
should be primed (partially filled) with 2. Disconnect the lead.
clean oil if possible. If the filter is not
primed, the engine may operate for a 3. Measure the resistance between the + terminal
period with no oil supplied to the bear- and the heater body. Refer to Section 2.7 for
ings. correct resistance value.
3. Lightly oil gasket on new filter before installing. 4. If the resistance is infinite or zero, the engine
Tighten 3/4 to 1 turn after seal makes contact. preheat element is faulty and must be replaced.
4. Start unit and check for leaks. Figure 8.13 Engine Preheater
8.5.10 Air Cleaner
The air cleaner should be inspected regularly for leaks.
A damaged air cleaner or hose can seriously affect the + TERMINAL
performance and life of the engine. The air cleaner is
designed to effectively remove contaminants from the
air stream entering the engine. An excessive accumu-
lation of these contaminants in the air cleaner will HEATER BODY
impair its operation; therefore, a service schedule must
be set up and followed.
An air cleaner service indicator is connected to the
intake manifold. Its function is to indicate when the air
cleaner filter element requires replacement. During b. Replacing The Engine Preheater
operation: when a plugged filter element causes the
intake manifold pressure to drop to 20” (500 mm) WG, 1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis-
the indicator will move to the red line. The filter element abling any two way communication and placing
should then be replaced and the indicator reset by the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
pressing the reset button.
2. Remove the inlet hose.
disabling any two way communication and plac- 3. Disconnect the lead.
ing the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF posi- 4. Remove the flange, engine preheater and gas-
tion. kets.
2. Check all connections for mechanical tightness.
NOTE
Be sure filter outlet pipe is not fractured.
To avoid short-circuiting the heater, ensure
3. Release 2 clips on air cleaner housing and that the heater and the heater elements are
remove the cover. vertical when assembling to the intake mani-
4. Remove filter element, wipe inside of air cleaner fold. The plus terminal is to be mounted
housing clean inspect filter element and replace towards the front of the unit.
if required. 5. Clean gasket surfaces and reinstall engine pre-
5. Wipe inside of the cover and re-install. heater and flange using new gaskets. Torque
flange bolts to 15 to 20 ft/lbs (20.3 to 27.1 nm).
6. Re-secure 2 clips on air cleaner housing.
8–11 62-11637
Figure 8.14 Engine Control System Components 8.5.13 Rack Position Sensor (RPS) Calibration
1, 2 The Rack Position Sensor calibration procedure is a

3 4 software function that can only be initiated in Techni-
cian Mode. This calibration procedure should be per-
formed after replacing the Engine, the ECU, or the
Rack Position Sensor.
To Start the Rack Position Sensor Calibration Proce-
dure:
5
1. Put the system into Technician Mode, refer to
6 Section 5.2.
2. Select Component Calibration Mode Soft key.
3. Press “=” to start the Rack Position Sensor cali-
7 bration.
Change 06/14 - Addition
During the calibration process, the display will show the
Engine Load %, RPMs, current calibration offset (the
offset in the Engine ECU), and calibration status.
1. Engine Preheater (EPH)
The Rack Position Sensor is calibrated at an engine
2. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)
speed of 1700 - 1780 RPM. In order to reach the
(Behind Engine Preheater)
required engine speed, the system will incrementally
3. Rack Position Sensor (RPS)
increase engine load in the following order:
4. Fuel/Speed Actuator (FSA)
5. Engine Speed Sensor (ENSSN) Low Speed - Compressor Start - High Speed - Heater 1
On – Heater 2 On – (3 minutes) – Economized Mode.
6. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS)
7. Engine Control Unit (ENCU) If, after placing the system in Economized Mode for
----- 180 seconds, engine speed is not high enough to cali-
brate the sensor (1700 – 1780 RPM), the system will
8.5.12 Engine Control System indicate that the load is too low for calibration. In this
case you will have to manually increase the system
The engine is controlled by six components (see Fig-
load by blocking the condenser coil. Once the load is
ure 8.14): the engine control unit (ENCU), the fuel/
increased enough for the engine to reach calibration
speed actuator (FSA) the engine speed sensor
RPM, the calibration should complete successfully.
(ENSSN), the rack position sensor (RPS), the engine
oil pressure switch (ENOPS) and the Engine Coolant After the calibration process is finished, the system will
Temperature Sensor (ENCT). indicate that the calibration was successful, and the
engine will shut down.
The ENCU starts, stops and controls the speed of the
engine by varying the position of the FSA rod. It also 8.5.14 Cooling System
provides oil pressure, coolant temperature, engine load a. Cleaning and Flushing
and speed signals to the control system via the CAN.
Air flows through the condenser and then the radiator.
The FSA combines the fuel shutoff solenoid and speed The cooling surfaces must be clean and the interior of
control solenoid into one component. Opening and the radiator must be clean for adequate cooling.
closing the fuel rack (throttle) in accordance with sig-
nals from the ENCU.
The ENSSN provides the speed signal to the ENCU.
NOTICE
Use only ethylene glycol anti-freeze (with
The ENOPS is connected to the engine oil pump outlet.
inhibitors) in system as glycol by itself
It provides an open or closed signal to the ENCU.
will damage the cooling system. Always
The RPS provides the position of the rack to the add pre-mixed 50/50 anti-freeze and water
ENCU. to radiator / engine. Never exceed more
than a 60% concentration of anti-freeze.
The ENCT provides the engine coolant temperature
Use a low silicate anti-freeze meeting GM
signal to the ENCU.
specifications GM 6038M for standard life
If any of these components is not functioning correctly, coolant or use Texaco Havoline extended
the corresponding alarm will be activated. life coolant or any other extended life
coolant which is Dexcool approved and
has 5/150 (5 years / 150,000 miles) on the
label.
62-11637 8–12
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis- b. Radiator Replacement
abling any two way communication and placing 1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis-
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. abling any two way communication and placing
2. Remove all foreign material from the condenser the START/RUN−OFF switch in the OFF position.
& radiator by reversing the normal air flow. (Air 2. To facilitate the removal process, remove the
is pulled in through the front and discharges surround with grill attached, refer to Section
over the engine.) Compressed air or water may 8.4.3, and then remove the condenser fan sup-
be used as a cleaning agent. port bracket at the top of the frame.
3. Drain coolant into a suitable container by remov-
! WARNING ing coolant bottle cap and then the engine drain
plug 8, Figure 8.15.
Do not remove the cap from a hot coolant
system; if the cap must be removed, do 4. Remove condenser fan, refer to Section 8.6.3,
so very slowly in order to release the and then remove the lower fan shroud.
pressure without spray. 5. Remove the rear condenser frame mounting
bolts and slide the frame back.
NOTE
6. Remove the radiator inlet, outlet and coolant
Draining the coolant from the engine petcock
bottle hoses at the radiator fittings. Remove top
will leave approximately 1 quart (.9 liters) of
radiator mounting brackets.
coolant in the block.
7. Lift curb side of radiator and work coolant bottle
3. Drain coolant completely by removing radiator and outlet fitting between frames. Using a catch
cap and then the lower radiator hose or drain pan at the radiator inlet, lift radiator vertical.
plug located at the opposite end of the radiator. Work inlet fitting between frames at the curb
side, in the same manner as the outlet fitting,
and remove radiator through the top of the unit.
NOTICE 8. Re−assemble in reverse order of removal.
NEVER POUR COLD WATER INTO A HOT Torque frame and radiator mounting bolts 36 to
ENGINE, however hot water can always 60 inch/lbs (4.1 to 6.8 Nm) and condenser fan
be added to a cold engine. support bracket bolts 95 to 119 inch/lbs (10.7 to
13.4 Nm).
4. Install hose or drain plug and fill system with
9. Fill radiator with coolant. (Refer to Section
clean, untreated water.
8.5.14.)
NOTE 8.5.15 Water Pump/Alternator Belt
Only clean water should be used to flush the The water pump/alternator belt is driven by a sheave
cooling system. Do not use any radiator on the engine crankshaft. Frayed, cracked or worn
flush or detergents to clean the radiator. belts must be replaced. Adjustment is achieved by
altering the position of the alternator.
5. Start the engine and drain system while warm.
Rinse system three times after it has cooled
down. Refill system with water. ! WARNING
6. Run engine to operating temperature. Drain sys- Beware of moving belt and belt driven
tem again and fill with 50/50 water/anti-freeze components.
mixture. (refer to the Caution Note at the begin-
ning of this section.)
7. Start unit and check for leaks. ! WARNING
pinch points.
8–13 62-11637
When replacing a belt, avoid excessive force when Figure 8.16 Water Pump/Alternator Belt
applying tension to the belt to prevent damage to the 1
water pump bearings.
2
Figure 8.15 Radiator Assembly
1
2 3
3
4
5 4
6
5
6
7
1. Rain Shield 5. Water Pump

2. Pivot Bolt 6. Water Pump/Alterna-
3. Alternator tor Belt
4. Adjustment Bolt 7. Crankshaft Sheave
7 -----
2. Loosen pivot bolt and adjusting bolt, remove old

belt (see Figure 8.16). Place new belt on
8 sheaves and then loosely position alternator.
3. Check the center alignment of the engine drive,

alternator and water pump sheaves to ensure
proper alignment. Pulley misalignment will cre-
ate excess belt wear and shorten alternator
bearing life. The center line of all three sheaves
must be in line.
1. Front Condenser Frame and Condenser 4. Pivot alternator to place tension on belt using
2. Gasket (Typical) hand force only. Do not use pry bar or excessive
3. Radiator force as it may cause bearing failure. Check belt
4. Radiator Mounting Bracket tension, using belt tension tool Carrier Transi-
cold part number 07-00203-00 or 07-00253-00,
5. Radiator Mounting Bracket Bolts
in accordance with the following chart. Tighten
6. Rear Condenser Frame
pivot bolt 80 to 90 ft/lbs (108.5 to 122.0 Nm) and
7. Rear Condenser Frame Mounting Bolts adjustment bolt 14 to 19 ft/lbs (19.0 to 25.8 Nm).
8. Engine Drain Plug
-----
Replacement Belt Ten-
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by Replacement Belt Initial
sion After 15 Minutes of
disabling any two way communication, placing Tension
Running Time
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position
and removing the negative battery cable. Lbs Nm Lbs Nm
45 to 55 62 to 76 45 to 55 62 to 76
5. Reconnect negative battery cable, run unit 15

minutes. Remove battery negative cable,
recheck belt tension and then reconnect nega-
tive battery cable.
62-11637 8–14
8.5.16 Crankcase Breather 8.6 POWER TRAIN SERVICE
The engine uses a closed type breather with the
breather line attached to the cylinder head cover. (See
Figure 8.17). ! WARNING
The breather assembly should be cleaned once a year Beware of moving belt and belt driven
or at every oil change interval (whichever comes first). components.
See Table 8–1.
Figure 8.17 Engine Crankcase Breather ! WARNING

Breather Valve Breather Cover When working with belts, beware of
Screw pinch points.
The power train (see Figure 2.4) is a belt drive system

that transfers power from the engine to the condenser
and evaporator fans. The system consists an upper
and lower belt, gear box, fanshaft and clutch. Service
instructions for the power train system are provided in
Breather Tube the following sub paragraphs.
NOTE
Coverage of the water pump/alternator belt
is provided in Section 8.5.15 while coverage
of the alternator is provided in Section
8.10.5.
Figure 8.18 Lower Belt
Lower Belt Lower Idler Lower Belt Lower Idler

Drive Adapter
Pivot Bolt
Match Mark
Flywheel
Flywheel
Drive Adapter
Drive Adapter Attaching
Bolts & Washers
Figure A Figure B
8–15 62-11637
8.6.1 Lower Belt #262) to the bolts. Take up on all bolts evenly
To remove and reinstall the lower belt (Figure 8.18) do and then torque bolts 26 to 30 ft/lbs (35.3 to
the following: 40.7 Nm).
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by 7. Fit new belt in grooves and check the center
disabling any two way communication, placing alignment of the drive adapter, upper idler and
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position gearbox sheaves to ensure proper alignment.
and removing the negative battery cable. Pulley misalignment will create excess belt wear
and shorten alternator bearing life. The center
2. Match mark drive adapter to flywheel at position line of all three sheaves must be in line.
shown for ease of reassembly.
8. Pivot idler to place tension on belt and set belt
3. Loosen the lower idler pivot bolt and slide tension, using belt tension tool Carrier Transi-
adjustment bolt to release belt tension. cold part number 07-00203-00 or 07-00253-00,
in accordance with the following chart. Tighten
4. Remove six bolts, securing drive adapter to fly- idler pivot and adjustment slide bolts.
wheel.
5. Insert two of the six bolts into the threaded holes Replacement Belt Ten-
(jacking holes) provided on drive adapter. Jack Replacement Belt Initial
adapter from flywheel. Remove the two bolts Tension
Running Time
from adapter. Insert a pry bar between flywheel
and drive adapter and slide the adapter toward Lbs Nm Lbs Nm
the compressor enough to change the belt as 140 to 150 190 to 203 70 to 80 95 to 108
shown in Figure B. Remove belt.
6. Reinstall by prying the adapter back toward the 9. Reconnect negative battery cable, run unit 15
engine flywheel or use 5/16-18 x 2-1/2 lg bolts in minutes. Remove battery negative cable,
every other hole of adapter and take up evenly recheck belt tension and then reconnect nega-
on the bolts until the original 5/16-18 x 1 lg bolts tive battery cable.
engage flywheel. Apply thread sealer (Loctite
62-11637 8–16
Figure 8.19 Upper Power Train
1 7
2 3
14
4
5 7
6 9 11 13
12
8
10
26
27
15 16 24 25
22
17 18 19 20 21 23 3
1. Condenser Fan 15. Armature Retaining Bolts & Washers

2. Clutch 16. Key (Round End)
3. Fanshaft 17. Armature
4. Upper Belt 18. Rotor Retaining Nut
5. Upper Idler 19. Rotor
6. Gear Box 20. Rotor Spacer
7. Evaporator Fan 21. Coil
8. 1/2 Inch Drive Adjustment Position 22. Key (Square End)
9. Seal Ring 23. Fanshaft bolts and washers
10. Compression Ring 24. Shims
11. Clamp 25. Vent Fitting
12. Bushing 26. Vent Tube
13. Bushing Bolts & Washers 27. Fan/Clutch Bolts & Washers
14. Nozzle Cover
-----
8–17 62-11637
8.6.2 Upper Belt Replacement 9. Remove the belt.
To remove and reinstall the upper belt (Item 4, Figure 10. Reinstall by sliding belt into clutch groove, repo-
8.19) do the following: sition fan and secure with the three bolts.
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by Torque bolts 18 to 22 ft/lbs (24.4 to 29.8 Nm).
disabling any two way communication, placing 11. Fit belt in place in grooves and check the center
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position alignment of the clutch, upper idler and gearbox
and removing the negative battery cable. sheaves to ensure proper alignment. Pulley mis-
alignment will create excess belt wear and
2. Loosen the upper idler (5) pivot bolt and release
shorten alternator bearing life. The center line of
tension.
all three sheaves must be in line.
3. Open the front doors. 12. Pivot the idler to place tension on belt using
4. Remove the top five bolts that secure the sur- hand force only. Do not use pry bar or excessive
round to the unit. (See Figure 8.3). force as it may cause bearing failure. Using ½
inch drive ratchet in adjustment position (8) to
5. Remove the upper frame support. pivot idler, set belt tension. Use belt tension tool
6. Pull the unattached surround towards the front Carrier Transicold part number 07-00203-00 or
of the unit to gain access to the upper frame 07-00253-00, in accordance with the following
support. chart. Tighten upper idler pivot bolt.
Figure 8.20 Surround

Replacement Belt Ten-
Replacement Belt Initial
Tension
Running Time
Lbs Nm Lbs Nm
140 to 150 190 to 203 70 to 80 95 to 108
13. Reinstall upper fan shroud and upper frame

support.
14. Reinstall the five upper mounting bolts to secure
the surround. (See Figure 8.3).
15. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Run unit
15 minutes. Remove battery negative cable,
recheck belt tension and then reconnect nega-
tive battery cable.
7. Remove the upper fan shroud bolts, and remove 8.6.3 Condenser Fan
the shroud. To remove and reinstall the condenser fan (Item 1, Fig-
Figure 8.21 Upper Frame Support ure 8.19) do the following:
2. Remove the upper frame support an upper fan
shroud.
3. Remove the three bolts (27) that secure the con-
denser fan (1) to the clutch rotor (19) and
remove from unit.
4. Slide new fan in place and secure with three
bolts, torque 18 to 22 ft/lbs (24.4 to 29.8 Nm).
5. Reinstall shroud, torque all shroud bolts 36 to 70
inch/ lbs (4.1 to 6.8 Nm). Reinstall upper frame
support, torque bolts 96 to 120 inch/lbs (10.8 to
13.6 Nm).
8. Remove three bolts (27) that secure condenser
fan (1) to clutch rotor (19). Slide the fan away 6. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
from the clutch (2) sufficient to remove the belt.
62-11637 8–18
8.6.4 Clutch 11. If the gap is less than 0.015, remove enough
To remove and reinstall the clutch (Item 2, Figure shims to increase the gap to approximately
8.19) do the following: 0.020 inch (0.25 mm). Shims (Carrier Transicold
part number 50-00232-30) are 0.010 inch (0.25
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by mm) each. If the gap is more than 0.090 inch
disabling any two way communication, placing add enough shims to reduce the gap to approxi-
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position mately 0.020 inch.
12. Reinstall the condenser fan and upper belt.
2. Remove the upper belt and condenser fan. Refer to Section 8.6.2 & 8.6.3.
Refer to Section 8.6.2 & 8.6.3.
8.6.5 Evaporator Fan
NOTE To remove and reinstall the evaporator fan (Item 7,
When working with the clutch it is important Figure 8.22) do the following:
to note that the armature retaining bolt and
rotor retaining nut are both left hand thread. 1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
Turn clockwise to remove. disabling any two way communication, placing
3. Place the three pins of a spanner wrench (Car- and removing the negative battery cable.
rier Transicold part number 07-00396-01) into
the holes on the face of the armature (Item 17). 2. Remove the bulkhead and air chute (if
Place the tool handle between the fanshaft equipped) and then remove the evaporator back
frame support and pod (10 o’clock position) to panel.
prevent rotation, then loosen and remove the
3. Mark insertion depth on supply air sensor (SAT)
armature retaining bolt and washer (15). Ensure
to aid in reassembly and remove from the noz-
key (16) is not lost during disassembly. If
zle cover (14). Care should be taken to prevent
required, a standard 5/8 11 X 1 inch long right
cutting wires on the evaporator coil.
hand thread bolt can be threaded through the
center to jack the armature off the shaft. 4. Remove the two bolts (13) from the split taper
bushing (12), insert them into the threaded
4. Using a spanner socket (Carrier Transicold part
holes and tighten evenly to push fan away from
number 07-00303-02) remove the rotor retaining
the bushing. Ensure key (22) is not lost during
nut (18), rotor (19) and rotor spacer (20).
disassembly.
5. Disconnect the coil connector and remove coil
5. To reinstall the evaporator fan, ensure key is
(21). Note assembly sequence of shims (24) on
properly positioned. If force is required to install
fanshaft housing for re-assembly.
key, support the shaft while tapping key into
6. Procure kits (clutch, coil or mounting) for reas- groove. Slide the fan onto the fanshaft, and
sembly as required. install the bushing with screws finger tight.
7. Place shims (24) onto fanshaft (3). Slide coil in 6. Position so that fan just touches pod. This will
place with harness on the bottom, at the 6 set approximate gap between fan and pod as
o’clock position. bushing is tightened. Tighten bolts evenly and
then final tighten 11 to 14 ft/lbs (14.4 to 19.0
8. Using new spacer, install rotor and spacer onto Nm).
fanshaft. Thread rotor retaining nut onto fan-
shaft and, using spanner socket, tighten 80 to 7. Reinstall nozzle cover. Ensure there is even
85 ft/lbs (108 to 115 Nm). clearance between evaporator fan and pod and
between evaporator fan and nozzle cover
9. Ensuring key is properly positioned. If force is (approximately one/ quarter inch both sides).
required to install key, support the shaft while Nozzle cover center venturi lip should overlap
tapping key into groove. Install armature onto into evaporator fan inside diameter slightly.
fanshaft. With spanner wrench in position, Torque bolts to 66 to 80 inch/lbs (7.5 to 9.0 NM).
thread new armature bolt and washer into fan-
shaft and tighten 25 to 30 ft/lbs (33.9 to 40.7 8. Reinstall supply air temperature sensor and air
Nm). chute/ bulkhead as required.
10. Using air gap measuring tool (Carrier Transicold 9. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
part number 07-00432-00) check gap. (Refer to
Technical Instruction 98-50180 for air gap tool
usage instructions.) The gap should be between
0.015 and 0.095 inch (0.38 and 2.3 mm).
8–19 62-11637
8.6.6 Fanshaft 8.6.7 Gearbox
To remove and reinstall the fanshaft (Item 3, Figure To remove and reinstall the gearbox (right angle drive)
8.19) do the following: (Item 6, Figure 8.19) do the following:
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by 1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
disabling any two way communication, placing disabling any two way communication, placing
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position
and removing the negative battery cable. and removing the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the upper belt, condenser fan, clutch 2. Remove the lower and upper belts. Refer to
and evaporator fan. Refer to Section 8.6.2 Section 8.6.1 and 8.6.2.
through 8.6.5.
3. Note location of sheaves, the input sheave is
3. Remove the seal ring clamp (11), compression the larger diameter while the fan drive sheave is
ring (10) and carefully peel seal ring (9) from the smaller. To remove a sheave, remove the
pod (use a putty knife if required). two bolts from the split taper bushing, insert
them into the threaded holes and tighten evenly
4. Remove vent hose and 1 / 8 inch barbed fitting to push sheave away from the bushing. Ensure
from fanshaft front hub. Install a plug to prevent key is not lost during disassembly.
oil from spilling out during removal.
4. Remove vent hose and 1 / 8 inch barbed fitting
5. Remove the four bolts and washers (23) secur- from gearbox. Install a plug to prevent oil from
ing the fanshaft in place and remove shaft. spilling out during removal.
6. Check oil level in fanshaft. With the vent con- 5. Remove gearbox and drive mounting plate and
nection at the top, oil is to be at the level of the then remove mounting plate if required.
oil level plug located in the housing. Add oil as
required , apply thread sealer and re-install level 6. Check oil level in gearbox. With the vent con-
plug. Reinstall plug in vent to prevent oil from nection at the top, oil is to be at the level of the
spilling out during installation. Refer to Section oil level plug located in the side of the housing.
2.9 for fanshaft oil specification and capacity. Add oil as required , apply thread sealer and re-
install level plug. Reinstall plug in vent to pre-
7. To aid in fanshaft alignment, install two 3 / 8 -16 vent oil from spilling out during installation.
x 1-1 / 2 inch studs (bolts with heads cut off) in Refer to Section 2.9 for gearbox oil specifica-
place of the mounting bolts (23). Reinstall with tion and capacity.
the vent opening at the top and secure with two
bolts and washers, remove studs and install 7. Re-install by reversing preceding steps. Torque
remaining two bolts and washers. Torque bolts mounting plate to gearbox bolts 16 to 18 ft/lbs
21 to 23 ft/lbs (28.5 to 31.2 Nm). (21.7 to 24.4 Nm), mounting plate to frame bolts
30 to 32 ft/lbs (40.7 to 43.4 Nm), bushing bolts
8. Apply thread sealer and re-install 1 / 8 inch 10 to 11 ft/lbs (13.6 to 14.9 Nm), and fitting 22 to
barbed fitting and vent hose in front hub. Torque 31 ft/lbs (29.8 to 42 Nm).
to 120 inch/lbs (13.6 Nm)
9. Reinstall and reseal seal ring, compression ring
and clamp. Torque compression ring/seal ring
bolts 45 to 50 inch/lbs (5.1 to 5.7 Nm). Sug-
gested torque for the clamp is 38 inch/lbs (4.3
Nm), maximum torque is 50 inch/lbs (5.7 Nm).
10. Reinstall the upper belt, condenser fan, clutch

and evaporator fan. Refer to Section 8.6.2
through 8.6.5.
62-11637 8–20
8.7 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE 8.7.2 Servicing the Refrigerant Charge
of refrigerant system equipment, servicing the refriger- Servicing of the refrigerant charge includes: checking
ant charge, leak checking and evacuation. Procedures the charge level, checking for noncondensibles, remov-
for refrigerant system service are provided in the fol- ing the charge, pumping down the low side, pumping
lowing sub paragraphs. down the compressor, adjusting the charge level and
adding a complete charge. Procedures for charge ser-
Figure 8.22 Refrigerant System Service Equipment vice are provided in the following sub paragraphs.
13 a. Checking Charge Level
14 12 Check the refrigerant charge before adding any refrig-
11 erant to the system. Only add refrigerant if charge is
15 10 low. If charge is low, leak checking must be performed
(Refer to Section 8.7.3) and all leaks repaired before
adding refrigerant.
9 1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of
discharge pressure. See Figure 8.22.
16
2. Start unit in Continuous Operation. Adjust set-
8
point so that unit is running in high speed, fully
7
loaded and operating in cooling. Run approxi-
17 6
5 mately ten minutes - until the refrigeration system
4 is warmed up and the refrigerated compartment
temperature is approaching setpoint.
3
1 3. Partially block off air flow to condenser coil so
discharge pressure rises to 230 psig (15.7 bar).
2
4. Check the receiver sight glasses to determine
1. Vacuum Pump 10. Evaporator Expan- charge. The system is correctly charged when
sion Valve the lower sight glass is not empty and the upper
2. Vacuum Indicator
11. Compressor Suction sight glass is not full.
3. Refrigerant Cylinder
4. Refrigerant Recov- Modulation Va l v e 5. If the system appears to be overcharged or
ery Unit (CSMV) under charged, adjust charge. Refer to following
5. Valve 12. Subcooler step f.
6. Manifold Gauge Set 13. Condenser
14. Receiver b. Checking For Noncondensibles
7. Suction Service
Valve 15. Liquid Line Service To check for noncondensibles, proceed as follows:
8. Heat Exchanger Valve
1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of
9. Evaporator 16. Discharge Service suction and discharge pressure. See Figure
Valve 8.22.
17. Compressor
2. Stabilize system to equalize pressure between
the suction and discharge side of the system.
8.7.1 Refrigerant System Service Connections The refrigerant system needs to be off for sev-
To service the refrigerant system, service equipment is eral hours.
connected at the compressor discharge service valve, 3. Measure temperature at the copper tubing leav-
compressor suction service valve and/or the liquid line ing the condenser (not the subcooler).
service valve.
When connecting to a valve, backseat the valve (turn 4. Record compressor discharge pressure.
counterclockwise) to close off gauge connection and 5. Determine saturation pressure as it corresponds
attach service line to the valve. Open valve 1/4 to 1/2 to the condenser temperature using the tem-
turn (clockwise) and then purge the service line. See perature pressure chart, Table 8–5.
Figure 8.22 for an example of a full service connection
setup. 6. If gauge reading is not close to the calculated
saturation pressure in step 5, noncondensibles
NOTE or mixed refrigerants are present.
To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use
a refrigerant recovery system whenever remov- 7. Remove refrigerant. Refer to following step c.
ing refrigerant from a refrigeration system. 8. Leak check, evacuate and recharge the system.
When working with refrigerants you must com-
ply with all local government environmental
laws, U.S.A. EPA section 608.
8–21 62-11637
c. Removing Charge d. Pumping Down The Low Side
To remove the refrigerant charge, proceed as follows: Components on the low side of the refrigeration system
(the filter drier, EVXV, evaporator coil, CSMV, heat
1. If the system is in operating condition, it will be exchanger, suction line etc.) may be serviced or
quicker to remove the charge by continuing with replaced without having to completely remove the
step 2. If the system is not in operating condi- refrigerant charge from the system by pumping down
tion, skip steps 2 through 5 and continue with the low side, and temporarily storing the refrigerant in
step 6. the condenser and receiver.
2. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of 1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of
suction and discharge pressure. See Figure suction and discharge pressure. See Figure
8.22. 8.22.
2. Start the unit.

! CAUTION
3. Frontseat the liquid line service valve.
Only a refrigerant cylinder that has previ-
ously been used with R404A should be 4. Shutdown the unit when the suction pressure
connected to this refrigeration unit. drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar). There should be very
little refrigerant remaining in the low side of the
3. Connect a clean, evacuated refrigerant cylinder system at this point.
to the liquid line service valve connection. Place
the cylinder on a weight scale so the refrigerant 5. Monitor the gauges. The suction pressure
going into the cylinder can be monitored. should not rise rapidly. If the suction pressure
continues to rise, the liquid line service valve or
4. Start the unit and run in high speed cool. Cover bypass check valve may not be closing properly.
the condenser to raise the discharge pressure to In this case, the low side cannot be pumped
as high as 375 psig (25.5 bar). Do not let the dis- down and the entire refrigerant charge must be
charge pressure exceed 400 psig (27.2 bar). removed from the system. (Refer to preceding
Open the refrigerant cylinder valve, and allow the step c.)
refrigerant to flow into the cylinder. The amount of
refrigerant going into the cylinder can be moni- 6. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis-
tored by watching the weight of the cylinder. abling any two way communication and placing
5. Shutdown the unit when the suction pressure
drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar). There should be very 7. Frontseat (close by turning clockwise) the dis-
little refrigerant remaining in the system at this charge service valve and the refrigerant will be
point. trapped between the compressor discharge ser-
vice valve and the liquid line service valve.
6. Place the unit in Service Mode (Refer to Sec-
tion 5.2.5). Ensure that the operator message 8. Before opening up any part of the low side of the
panel displays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC system, a slight positive pressure should be
MODE” during the refrigerant removal proce- indicated on the pressure gauge. If the pressure
dures. If the control system switches to charge is below 0 psig/ bar slowly open the liquid line
mode during the process, switch it back to the service valve slightly and then frontseat the
“RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”. valve again. Repeat as necessary in order to
raise the pressure above zero.
7. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a
clean refrigerant recovery cylinder (or continue 9. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a
to use the same cylinder used in step 3) as clean refrigerant recovery cylinder to the suction
shown in Figure 8.22 and remove any remain- and discharge service valves and remove any
ing refrigerant from the system. remaining refrigerant from the low side. DO
NOT bring the low side pressure below 0 psig/
8. Refer to instructions provided by the manufac- bar.
turer of the refrigerant recovery unit.
10. After making necessary repairs, leak check and
9. After making necessary repairs, leak check, evacuate the low side of the refrigeration sys-
evacuate and recharge the system. tem. (Refer to Section 8.7.3 and 8.7.4.)
62-11637 8–22
e. Pumping Down The Compressor 3. If charge is to be added: place cylinder of refrig-
erant on a scale and connect a charging line
The compressor or any of the components attached to and gauge from cylinder to liquid line service
it (unloaders, high pressure switch, discharge and suc- valve. Start unit in Continuous Operation with a
tion pressure transducers, discharge temperature sen- setpoint lower than refrigerated compartment
sor, compressor heads and oil, etc.) may be serviced temperature. Wait until unit switches to high
or replaced by pumping the compressor down, and iso- speed operation. Run approximately ten min-
lating the compressor from the rest of the system. utes.
1. Install a manifold gauge set to allow reading of 4. Note weight of cylinder and refrigerant.
suction and discharge pressure. See Figure
8.22. 5. Frontseat the liquid line service valve (turn
clockwise) and watch the pressure on the mani-
2. If the compressor is operational, start the unit fold gauge. When the pressure falls below the
and slowly frontseat the suction service valve. pressure in the refrigerant cylinder [or to 50 psig
shutdown the unit when the suction pressure (3.4 bar)], open the cylinder valve and monitor
drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar). Ensure the unit will not the liquid refrigerant to flow into the unit.
start automatically by disabling any two way
communication and placing the STOP/RUN- 6. When approximately 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) have been
OFF switch in the OFF position. Frontseat the added, close the cylinder valve, and backseat
discharge service valve to isolate compressor. the liquid line service valve.
There should be very little refrigerant remaining
in the compressor at this point. 7. Recheck for the correct refrigerant charge.
(Refer to preceding step a.) Repeat preceding
3. If the compressor is not operational, ensure the steps as required. When charge level adjust-
unit will not start automatically by disabling any ment is complete, remove refrigerant service
two way communication and placing the STOP/ equipment.
RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. Frontseat
both the discharge and suction service valve to g. Adding a Complete Charge
isolate the compressor. 1. Evacuate unit and leave in deep vacuum. (Refer
4. Connect a refrigerant recovery device and a to Section 8.7.4.)
clean refrigerant recovery cylinder to the suction 2. Determine charge required for this unit (refer to
and discharge service valves and remove any the model/serial number nameplate or Table 2–
remaining refrigerant from the compressor. DO 1) and procure a refrigerant cylinder with suffi-
NOT bring the compressor pressure below 0 cient weight of refrigerant. Place cylinder on
psig/bar. scale and connect charging line from cylinder to
5. After making necessary repairs, leak check and liquid line service valve.
evacuate the compressor. (Refer to Section 3. Note weight of cylinder and refrigerant.
8.7.3 and 8.7.4.)
4. Open liquid valve on cylinder. Midseat liquid line
f. Adjusting The Charge Level service valve and allow the liquid refrigerant to
Adjustment of the charge level may be required when flow into the unit until the correct weight of refrig-
there has been a leak or the system was not correctly erant has been added.
charged during a previous service.
NOTE
1. Check charge level by performing the proce- It is possible that all the required liquid may
dures of the preceding step a. not be pulled into the receiver, as outlined in
2. If charge removal is required: connect a clean step 4. In this case, add the additional refrig-
evacuated refrigerant recovery cylinder to the erant in accordance with the charge adjust-
liquid line service valve. Open liquid valve on ment procedures, refer to preceding step f.
cylinder. Midseat liquid line service valve and 5. When scale indicates that the correct charge
monitor the liquid refrigerant flow into the cylin- has been added, close liquid valve on cylinder
der. If the unit is operating, close the cylinder and backseat the liquid line service valve.
valve and backseat the liquid line service valve Remove charging hose.
when the ball in the upper sight glass drops to
the bottom of the glass. It the unit is not operat- 6. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
ing, when approximately 5 lbs. (2.3 kg) have
been removed close the cylinder valve and
backseat the liquid line service valve. Proceed
to step 7.
8–23 62-11637
8.7.3 Leak Checking
! WARNING
! WARNING Only a refrigerant cylinder containing
Never use air or gases containing oxygen R404A should be connected to this refrig-
for leak testing or operating refrigerant eration unit in order to pressurize the
compressors. Pressurized mixtures of air system. However, dry nitrogen may be
or gases containing oxygen can lead to used to increase pressure. Any other gas
explosion. or vapor will contaminate the system and
The condition that the system may be in when leak tion.
checking is required include; when the system is
charged, when the system is without charge, when the
low side has been pumped down and when only the
compressor is to be leak checked. Procedures for each NOTICE
condition are provided in the following subsections. Do not vapor charge R404A. Only liquid
a. Leak Checking a Charged System charging through the liquid line service
valve is acceptable.
abling any two way communication and placing 3. Ensure that the operator message panel dis-
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. plays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”
during the pressurizing and leak checking pro-
NOTE cedures. (Refer to Section 5.2.5.) If the control
Service Mode is not required for this proce- system switches to Charge Mode during the
dure. process, switch it back to the “RECOVER/LEAK
CHK/EVAC MODE”.
2. Verify that the suspected leak area (high or low
side) has sufficient pressure (minimum 20 psig = 4. Pressurize the system 5 to 10 psig (0.3 to 0.7 bar)
1.4 bar) to detect the leak. The larger the leak with refrigerant at the liquid line service valve.
the less pressure is required. The smaller the
leak, the greater the pressure required.
! WARNING
3. The recommended procedure for finding leaks
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
from a system is with an electronic leak detector.
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is
Checking joints with soapsuds is satisfactory
approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do
only for locating large leaks, or pinpointing small
not use oxygen in or near a refrigerant
leaks once a general area has been located.
system as an explosion may occur. (See
4. Some leaks may be repaired by simply tighten- Figure 8.39).
ing a connection. Others may require removal of
5. Connect a cylinder of dry nitrogen. Use the dry
the charge, refer to Section 8.7.2.
nitrogen to increase the pressure as necessary
5. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation. 20 to 150 psig (1.4 to 10.2 bar) to detect the
leak. The larger the leak the less pressure is
b. Leak Checking a System Without Charge required. The smaller the leak, the greater pres-
sure is required.
The refrigeration system must be leak checked once it
is closed and all repairs complete. 6. The recommended procedure for finding leaks
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis- Checking joints with soapsuds is satisfactory
abling any two way communication and placing only for locating large leaks, or pinpointing small
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. leaks once a general area has been located.
2. Connect refrigerant system equipment if not 7. Once leak checking is complete, remove the
already connected. Refer to Figure 8.22. refrigerant/ nitrogen vapor out of the system.
8. If no leaks are found the system is ready for
evacuation. (Skip to Step 11)
9. If any leaks are found they must be repaired
before proceeding.
10. Repeat steps 4 thru 9 as necessary.
11. Evacuate the system after all leaks are repaired.
62-11637 8–24
c. Leak Checking With Low Side Pumped Down 6. The recommended procedure for finding leaks
The low side of the system must be leak checked once Checking joints with soapsuds is satisfactory
it is closed and all repairs complete. only for locating large leaks, or pinpointing small
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis- leaks once a general area has been located.
abling any two way communication and placing 7. Once leak checking is complete, remove the
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. refrigerant/ nitrogen vapor from the low side of
the system.
! WARNING 8. If no leaks are found the low side of the system
is ready for evacuation. (Skip to Step 11)
Only a refrigerant cylinder containing
R404A should be connected to this refrig- 9. If any leaks are found they must be repaired
eration unit in order to pressurize the before proceeding.
system. However, dry nitrogen may be
used to increase pressure. Any other gas 10. Repeat steps 4 - 9 as necessary.
or vapor will contaminate the system and
11. Disconnect the nitrogen cylinder. Evacuate the
low side of the system after all leaks are
tion.
repaired. (Refer to Section 8.7.4.)
2. Connect refrigerant system equipment if not
d. Leak Checking Compressor
already connected. Refer to Figure 8.22.
The compressor and its associated switches, transduc-
ers, etc. must be leak checked once the compressor is
NOTICE closed and all repairs complete.
CAUTION Do not vapor charge R404A. 1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis-
Only liquid charging through the liquid abling any two way communication and placing
line service valve is acceptable. the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
3. Ensure that the operator message panel dis- 2. Connect refrigerant system service equipment
plays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” to the suction and discharge service valves, if
during the pressurizing and leak checking pro- not already connected. Refer to Figure 8.22.
cedures. (Refer to Section 5.2.5.) If the control
system switches to Charge Mode during the
process, switch it back to the “RECOVER/LEAK ! WARNING
CHK/EVAC MODE”.
Only a refrigerant cylinder containing
4. Pressurize the low side of the system 5 to 10 R404A should be connected to this refrig-
psig (0.3 to 0.7 bar) with refrigerant from the eration unit in order to pressurize the
high side by turning the liquid line service valve system. However, dry nitrogen may be
off frontseat for a few seconds and then return- used to increase pressure. Any other gas
ing to frontseat. or vapor will contaminate the system and
tion.
! WARNING
WARNING Do not use a nitrogen cylinder
without a pressure regulator. Cylinder
NOTICE
pressure is approximately 2350 psig Do not vapor charge R404A. Only liquid
(159.9 bar). Do not use oxygen in or near charging through the liquid line service
a refrigerant system as an explosion may valve is acceptable.
occur. (See Figure 8.39)
3. Pressurize the compressor 5 to 10 psig (0.3 to
5. Connect a cylinder of dry nitrogen. Use the nitro- 0.7 bar) by opening the suction service valve for
gen to increase the low side pressure 20 to 150 a few seconds, then closing (frontseating) it
psig (1.4 to 10.2 bar) to detect the leak. The again.
larger the leak the less pressure is required. The
smaller the leak, the greater the pressure
required.
8–25 62-11637
• Standard service hoses are not recommended
! WARNING for evacuation purposes. Evacuation hoses are
recommended for this procedure.
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a a. Evacuation of the Complete System
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is
approximately 2350 psig (159.9 bar). Do 1. Evacuate only after leak check. (Refer to Sec-
not use oxygen in or near a refrigerant tion 8.7.3.)
Figure 8.39.) 2. If possible keep the temperature of the major
components (condenser, evaporator, compres-
4. Connect a cylinder of dry nitrogen. Use the nitro- sor and receiver) above 60°F (15.6°C) to speed
gen to increase the compressor pressure 20 to evaporation of moisture. If the temperature is
150 psig (1.4 to 10.2 bar) to detect the leak. The lower than 60°F (15.6°C), ice might form before
larger the leak the less pressure is required. The moisture removal is complete. Heat lamps, heat
smaller the leak, the greater pressure required guns or alternate sources of heat may be used
to raise system temperature.
5. The recommended procedure for finding leaks
from a compressor is with an electronic leak 3. The recommended method to evacuate the sys-
detector. Checking joints with soapsuds is satis- tem is to connect three evacuation hoses with
factory only for locating large leaks, or pinpoint- vacuum pump and vacuum indicator (see Fig-
ing small leaks once a general area has been ure 8.22).
located.
4. Ensure that the operator message panel dis-
6. Once leak checking is complete, remove the plays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”
refrigerant/ nitrogen vapor from the compressor. during the evacuation and dehydration proce-
dures. (Refer to Section 5.2.5.) If the control
7. If no leaks are found the compressor is ready for system switches to Charge Mode during the
evacuation. (Skip to Step 10) process, switch it back to the “RECOVER/LEAK
8. If any leaks are found they must be repaired CHK/EVAC MODE”.
before proceeding. 5. Backseat (turn counter-clockwise) the liquid line
9. Repeat steps 4 thru 9 as necessary. service valve, suction service and discharge
service valves.
10. Disconnect the nitrogen cylinder. Evacuate the
compressor after all leaks are repaired. (Refer 6. With the unit service valves closed (back seated)
to Section 8.7.4. and the vacuum pump and vacuum indicator
valves open, start the pump and draw a deep
8.7.4 Evacuation and Dehydration vacuum. Shut off the pump and check to see if
the vacuum holds. This operation is to test the
Moisture is detrimental to refrigerant systems. The
evacuation setup for leaks. Repair if necessary.
presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can
have many undesirable effects such as: copper plating, 7. Midseat the refrigerant system service valves.
acid sludge formation, “freeze-up” of the expansion Ensure that the operator message panel dis-
valve, and formation of acids, resulting in metal corro- plays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”.
sion. Proper evacuation of the system will remove any
moisture from inside the system. 8. Start the vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the
vacuum indicator indicates 2000 microns. Close
NOTES the vacuum pump valve and shut off the pump.
• Essential tools to properly evacuate any system Wait a few minutes to ensure the vacuum holds.
include a good vacuum pump (5 cfm/8mH vol- 9. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen through the
ume displacement, Carrier Transicold part num- discharge service valve. Raise system pressure
ber 07-00176-11) and a good vacuum indicator to approximately 2 psig (0.1 bar). Ensure that
such as a thermocouple vacuum gauge the control system does not switch to the
(micrometer). (Carrier Transicold part number Charge Mode. If this occurs, switch it back to the
07-00414-00) “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/ EVAC MODE” (Refer
• The use of a compound gauge is not recom- to Section 5.2.5)
mended for use in determining when the evacu-
10. Purge nitrogen from system at the suction ser-
ation process is completed because of its
vice valve.
inherent inaccuracy.
62-11637 8–26
11. Open the vacuum pump valve and start the Charge Mode. If this occurs, switch it back to the
pump. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” (Refer to
vacuum pump valve and shut off the pump. Wait Section 5.2.5.
a few minutes to be sure the vacuum holds
below 2000 microns. 8. Purge nitrogen from the low side of the system
at the suction service valve.
12. If vacuum holds below 2000 microns continue to
step 14. If vacuum rises above 2000 microns 9. Open the vacuum pump valve and start the
continue to step 13. pump. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close the
vacuum pump valve and shut off the pump. Wait
13. Repeat steps 8 through 11 until the vacuum a few minutes to be sure the vacuum holds
stays below 2000 microns. below 2000 microns.
14. Once the system holds a good vacuum, it is 10. If vacuum holds below 2000 microns continue to
ready to be charged with refrigerant. Refer to step 12. If vacuum rises above 2000 microns
Section 8.7.2. continue to step 11.
b. Evacuation of the Low Side 11. Repeat steps 6 through 9 until the vacuum stays
below 2000 microns.
1. Evacuate only after a low side leak check.
(Refer to Section 8.7.3) 12. Once the system holds a good vacuum, open
the compressor discharge service valve and the
2. If possible keep the temperature of the major liquid line service valve.
components (condenser, evaporator, compres-
sor and receiver) above 60°F (15.6°C) to speed 13. Start unit and check the refrigerant charge.
evaporation of moisture. If the temperature is Refer to Section 8.7.2.
lower than 60°F (15.6°C), ice might form before
moisture removal is complete. Heat lamps, heat c. Evacuation of the Compressor
guns or alternate sources of heat may be used 1. Evacuate only after a compressor leak check.
to raise system temperature. Refer to Section 8.7.3.
3. The recommended method to evacuate the sys- 2. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis-
tem is to connect three evacuation hoses with abling any two way communication and placing
vacuum pump and vacuum indicator (see Fig- the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
ure 8.22).
3. If possible keep the temperature of the com-
4. Ensure that the operator message panel dis- pressor above 60°F (15.6°C) to speed evapora-
plays “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” tion of moisture. If the temperature is lower than
during the evacuation and dehydration proce- 60°F (15.6°C), ice might form before moisture
dures. (Refer to Section 5.2.5.) If the control removal is complete. Heat lamps, heat guns or
system switches to Charge Mode during the alternate sources of heat may be used to raise
process, switch it back to the “RECOVER/LEAK compressor temperature.
CHK/EVAC MODE”.
4. Connect evacuation equipment to the compres-
5. Leave the liquid line service valve and the dis- sor suction and discharge service valves. See
charge service valve frontseated and then mid- Figure 8.22.
seat the suction service valve.
5. Start the vacuum pump. Evacuate compressor
6. Start the vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the to 500 microns. Close the vacuum pump valve
electronic vacuum gauge indicates 2000 and shut off the pump. Wait a few minutes to be
microns. Close the vacuum pump valve and sure the vacuum holds. This checks for residual
shut off the pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure moisture and/or leaks.
the vacuum holds.
6. Once the compressor holds a good vacuum,
7. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen through the open the compressor suction and discharge ser-
liquid line service valve. Raise system pressure vice valve to allow refrigerant to enter the com-
to approximately 2 psig (0.1 bar). Ensure that pressor.
the control system does not switch to the
7. Start unit and check the refrigerant charge.
8–27 62-11637
8.8 COMPRESSOR AND UNLOADER SERVICE 5. Loosen the suction and discharge service valve
mounting bolts. Tap the valve bodies to break
8.8.1 Repair or Replacement Determination the seal and then remove bolts.
Certain operating conditions or refrigeration system 6. Disconnect all low voltage connectors (UL1,
components may be misdiagnosed and subsequently UL2, CDT, CDP & HPS).
lead to the determination that the compressor requires
replacement. These conditions or components should 7. Loosen lower belt idler and remove belt from
be checked prior to replacing a compressor and after a gearbox, Belt may be removed with, and rein-
replacement compressor is installed to prevent replace- stalled with, the compressor.
ment compressor damage. To determine if compressor 8. Block up the engine and remove compressor
replacement or repair is required, do the following:
shockmount bolts.
1. If the compressor is operational, check the 9. Remove the 12 end flange bolts and lock wash-
refrigerant charge, refer to Section 8.7.2. ers. Attach a sling or other device to compressor
2. If the compressor is operational, check opera- (refer to Section 2.8 for weight of compressor).
tion of the unloaders, refer to Section 8.8.6. Slide compressor sufficient to disengage com-
pressor drive gear from nylon drive gear.
3. If the compressor is operational, check the sys- Remove compressor.
tem components as follows:
10. Inspect nylon drive gear for wear or sharp
a. Install gauges to allow reading of receiver, suc- edges. Replace if required.
tion and discharge pressure. See Figure 8.22.
11. Remove oil from compressor for shipping. Test
b. Start the unit in cooling so that compressor for acidity If acid is present a system cleanup
operates. may be necessary.
c. Frontseat liquid line service valve. shutdown unit
when suction pressure drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar).
d. Monitor the gauges. If receiver pressure drops ! WARNING
rapidly and the suction and discharge pressures Do not unscrew replacement compressor
rise rapidly the liquid line service valve or lifting eyelet/blankoff plate mounting cap-
bypass check valve require replacement before screws all the way before breaking seal.
the compressor can be further tested. Entrapped pressure could result in injury.
e. Backseat the liquid line service valve and restart 12. Loosen the suction and discharge lifting eyelet/
the unit. Slowly frontseat the suction service blankoff plate mounting bolts. Tap the center of
valve. shutdown the unit when the suction pres- the blankoff plates to break the seal and then
sure drops to 2 psig (0.2 bar). remove bolts, plates and gaskets.
f. Monitor the gauges. If the suction and discharge 13. If required add oil to the replacement compres-
pressures do not equalize rapidly, the compressor. Add only 5.0 pints (2.4 liters) of oil when first
sor is not at fault. adding oil to the compressor. This procedure is
4. Check condition of and repair cylinder heads designed to compensate for excess oil that may
and valve plates. Refer to Section 8.8.3. have migrated with refrigerant to other parts of
the system during unit operation.
8.8.2 Removal and Replacement of Compressor 14. Exchange all external compressor components
1. Pumpdown the compressor or remove charge, such as: the unloader coils; discharge and suc-
refer to Section 8.7.2. tion strainers; switches, transducers, tempera-
ture sensors, fittings and compressor drive gear.
2. Ensure unit will not start automatically by dis-
abling any two way communication and placing 15. Install blankoff plates and plugs in original com-
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position. pressor for shipment.
3. Disconnect negative battery connection. 16. Remove any remaining old gasket material from
Remove battery if required. the discharge and suction service valve sealing
surfaces.
4. Remove any interfering equipment attached to
the end flange (see Figure 8.23). 17. Ensure belt is in end plate opening and around
drive gear. Ensure correct alignment of com-
pressor drive gear & nylon gear as compressor
! WARNING is installed in unit. Use new lock nuts when
replacing compressor shockmounts. See Figure
Do not unscrew service valve mounting
8.23 for mounting bolt torque information.
capscrews all the way before breaking seal.
Entrapped pressure could result in injury. 18. Reconnect all wiring per wiring schematic.
62-11637 8–28
Figure 8.23 Compressor
4 ï Refer to Section 8.8.6 for reassembly.
7 ï Torque 26 to 30 ft/lbs
(35.3 to 40.7 Nm)
6
8 9
10 Torque 30 ft/lbs (40.7 Nm) then, bend

11 locking tabs against flat of bolt head
12 Torque 26 to 30 ft/lbs (35.3 to 40.7 Nm)
13 ï Torque 90 to 120 ft/lbs (122 to 163 Nm)
1. Compressor 7. End Flange Bolt & Lock Washer

2. Discharge Service Valve and Strainer/Flange 8. End Flange
3. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor 9. Nylon Drive Gear
(CDT) 10. Compressor Drive Gear, Key, Special Washer
4. Unloader Coils (UL1 & UL2) and Bolt.
5. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer 11. Suction Service Valve and Strainer/Flange
(CDP) & High Pressure Switch (HPS) 12. Oil Fill Port
6. Lower Belt 13. Shockmount (Location)
-----
19. Clean or replace strainers as required and, 2. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
using new gaskets, install service valves. disabling any two way communication and plac-
Torque discharge service valve mounting bolts ing the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF posi-
20 to 30 ft lbs (27 to 40.7 Nm). Torque suction tion.
service valve mounting bolts 55 to 80 ft lbs (74
to 108 Nm).
! WARNING
20. Reinstall and tension lower belt, refer to Section
8.6.1. Do not unscrew cylinder head mounting
capscrews all the way before breaking
21. Reinstall all components and clamps removed seal. Entrapped pressure could result in
from end plate, battery and battery connec- injury.
tion(s). 3. Loosen cylinder head capscrews. Tap the head
lightly with a wooden or lead mallet to break the
22. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge seal and relieve any remaining pressure. Be
system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2, careful not to drop the head or damage the gas-
8.7.3 & 8.7.4. ket sealing surface. Remove cylinder head cap-
screws and gasket. (See Figure 8.24)
8.8.3 Cylinder Head and Valve Plate Service 4. If removing the center head, remove the dis-
charge valve mounting hardware.
1. Pumpdown the compressor. (Refer to Section
8.7.2.)
8–29 62-11637
Figure 8.24 Cylinder Head & Valve Plate
12 11 9 8 4 3 2
10 6 1
7
5
4
5 6
Typical Arrangement - Center Head Shown
7
10 8
11 12
1. Capscrew 7. Discharge Valve

2. Cylinder Head 8. Valve Plate
3. Cylinder Head Gasket 9. Valve Plate Gasket
4. Capscrew 10. Suction Valve
5. Lockwasher 11. Suction Valve Spring
6. Discharge Valve Backer 12. Dowel Pin
-----
5. If required, free the valve plates from the cylin- i. Inspect cylinder bores for excessive wear.
der deck by using the discharge valve cap- Excessive wear for cylinder bores is defined as
screws, without washers, as jackscrews through heavy and uneven scratches, gouges, or chip-
the outermost tapped holes in the valve plate ping of the internal wall of the cylinder, with a
after the valve stops and valves have been depth greater than 0.025 inch, which are
removed. Remove the valve plate gasket. caused by foreign objects, other than a normal
reciprocating movement of the pistons and pis-
6. Inspect the parts of the cylinder head and/or the ton rings. If cylinder(s) are damaged, compres-
valve plate: sor replacement is required.
a. Inspect cylinder head gaskets for proper align- 7. Discard valves and gaskets. Use only new
ment and center web blow-out. valves and gaskets when assembling cylinder
b. Inspect the discharge valves for loose or dam- head and valve plate assemblies.
aged valve stops, or any debris that may affect
the proper operation of the valves. 8. If required, install the discharge valves and dis-
charge valve stops with capscrews and lock
c. Inspect for broken, cracked, or chipped dis- washers onto the valve plates. Torque the cap-
charge valves. screws to 12 to 16 ft/ lbs (16.3 to 21.7 Nm).
d. Inspect the side valve plate discharge check
valves to ensure the pistons move and contact 9. Turn the valve plate over.
the plates. 10. Install the suction valve spring on the dowel pins
e. Inspect for broken, cracked, or chipped suction with the spring ends bearing away from the cyl-
valves. inder head. (See Figure 8.24)
f. Inspect the valve plate and the cylinder head 11. Place suction valve on dowel pins.
for cracks.
g. Inspect valve plate gaskets for damage and 12. Place the valve plate and new valve plate gas-
wear. ket (with flat side toward cylinder deck) on cylin-
der deck, ensuring that the valve plate is
h. Remove any oil on top of the pistons. Inspect properly positioned on the four dowel pins.
the top of the piston for damage. Check for
debris, burned and carbonized oil sludge, or 13. Using a small screwdriver, operate the suction
mechanical failure. valves to ensure that the valve tips are not being
held by the valve plate gasket. (See Figure
8.25)
62-11637 8–30
Figure 8.25 Checking Suction Valve Figure 8.26 Oil Pump & Bearing Head Assembly
3
2 4
1. Oil Pump & Bearing 3. Oil Pickup Tube

14. Install capscrews, cylinder head and new cylin- Head 4. Oil Inlet Port
der head gasket (with flat side toward valve 2. Thrust Washer
plate), ensuring that the gasket and cylinder
-----
head are properly positioned on the valve plate.
Torque the capscrews, in a diagonal pattern, 42
Figure 8.27 Oil Pump
to 55 ft/lbs (57 to 74 Nm).
11 12
15. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge
system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2,
8.7.3 & 8.7.4. 6
5
8.8.4 Oil Pump and Bearing Head 4
3
1 2 10
1. Pumpdown the compressor. (Refer to Section
8.7.2.)
9
2. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by 8
7
tion.
1. Capscrews 7.
O-Ring
3. Loosen the eight capscrews, tap the pump to 2. Cover 8.
Oil Pump & Bearing
relieve any remaining pressure and then remove 3. Eccentric Ring 9.
Dowel Pin
the oil pump bearing head assembly, gasket and 4. Rotor 10.
Relief Valve Assem-
thrust washer. (See Figure 8.26) 5. Idler bly
6. Shaft (Drive) 11. Pins (2)
4. If it is determined that the oil pump is not operat-
ing properly, the entire oil pump and bearing 12. Thrust Washer
head assembly must be replaced. Replacement -----
parts for the pump are not available except for
the cover plate O-ring. However, in the event the
pump requires inspection or cleaning, refer to NOTICE
Figure 8.27 for disassembly and reassembly. Ensure that thrust washer does not fall
Clean all parts; coat all moving parts with com- off dowel pins while installing oil pump.
pressor oil before proceeding with reassembly.
6. Install the bearing head assembly with a new
5. Install the pump end thrust washer on the two gasket on the compressor crankshaft. Carefully
dowel pins located on the bearing head. (See push oil pump on by hand ensuring that the
Figure 8.26.) thrust washer remains on the dowel pins, the
tang on the end of the drive engages the slot in
the crankshaft, and the oil inlet port on the pump
is aligned with the oil pickup tube in the crank-
case. The oil pump should mount flush with the
crankcase with the word “TOP” stamp on the
pump oriented straight up.
8–31 62-11637
7. Align the gasket and the eight capscrews in the b. Adding Oil With Compressor In System
mounting flange. Torque capscrews, in a diago-
nal pattern, 30 to 50 ft/lbs (40.7 to 67.8 Nm).
! CAUTION
system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2, Use only Carrier Transicold approved
8.7.3 & 8.7.4. Polyol Ester Oil (POE). Buy quantities of
one gallon or less. When using this
8.8.5 Compressor Oil Level hygroscopic oil, immediately reseal. Do
not leave container of oil open or contam-
a. Checking Compressor Oil Level
ination will occur.
Two methods for adding oil are the oil pump method
NOTICE and closed system method.
An overcharge of oil will reduce system Oil Pump Method
capacity and possibly cause internal
One compressor oil pump that may be purchased is a
compressor damage. Robinair, part no. 14388. This oil pump adapts to a one
For this reason, Carrier Transicold re−manufactured U.S. gallon (3.785 liters) metal refrigeration oil con-
compressors now contain a reduced oil charge to com- tainer and pumps 2-1/2 ounces (0.0725 liters) per
pensate for oil remaining in the system. A level slightly stroke when connected to the oil fill (Item 12, Figure
8.20). There is no need to remove pump from can after
below the minimum mark is acceptable until the oil
each use.
level can be checked using the following procedure:
When the compressor is in operation, the pump check
1. Operate the unit in high speed, fully loaded cool valve prevents the loss of refrigerant, while allowing the
for at least 15 minutes. Unplug wires to the technician to develop sufficient pressure to overcome
unloaders if necessary to ensure six cylinder the operating suction pressure to add oil as necessary.
operation. Backseat suction service valve and connect oil
charging hose to oil fill. Purge the oil hose at oil pump.
NOTE
Add oil as necessary.
Check the oil sight glass on the compressor
to ensure that no foaming of the oil is pres- Closed System Method
ent after 15 minutes of operation. If the oil is
foaming check the refrigerant system for
flood-back of liquid refrigerant. Correct this
NOTICE
situation before performing step 2. Extreme care must be taken to ensure the
hose is immersed in the oil at all times.
2. After 15 minutes, initiate a defrost cycle. This
Otherwise air and moisture will be drawn
will allow any residual oil to be returned to the
into the compressor.
compressor.
In an emergency where an oil pump is not available, oil
NOTE may be drawn into the compressor through the suction
Operate the unit in defrost for only 3-5 min- service valve.
utes. Do not allow the unit to terminate
defrost automatically. The sudden reduction 1. Pump down the compressor. Refer to Section
of crankcase pressure at defrost termination 8.7.2.
could cause a temporary increase in oil circu- 2. With both manifold gauge set valves front-
lation and gave a false oil level reading. seated, leave the suction connection connected
to the compressor suction service valve port and
3. After 3-5 minutes of defrost operation, turn the
connect the common connection to a vacuum
unit off and wait 5-15 seconds. Observe the
pump. Remove the discharge hose from the
compressor oil level in the sight glass. (See Fig-
manifold gauge set; connect to the compressor
ure 8.28). Oil level should be between the Mini- oil fill port (Item 12, Figure 8.23), and immerse
mum and Maximum marks. the other end in a container of refrigeration oil.
Start the vacuum pump throttle the manifold
Figure 8.28 Oil Level in Sight Glass gauge set suction valve and pull a vacuum on
the compressor while watching the oil level in
the glass. Fill to minimum mark on crankcase.
- Maximum Shutdown pump and remove oil fill line from the
oil fill port.
- Minimum
62-11637 8–32
3. Break any remaining vacuum (raise to 0 psig/ b. Unloader Coil Replacement
bar) with refrigerant remaining in the system
(crack open the suction service valve), or from a NOTE
fresh cylinder of refrigerant. Evacuate the com- The coil may be removed while the compres-
pressor crankcase to 500 microns. Remove ser- sor is under pressure.
vice equipment, backseat suction and discharge
service valves and recheck oil level. 1. Disconnect leads and lift coil (see Figure 8.29)
off enclosing tube.
c. Removing Oil From The Compressor
2. Verify replacement coil is the correct type, volt-
1. Check compressor oil level, refer to preceding
age and frequency.
step a. If the oil level is above the maximum
mark on the crankcase, oil must be removed 3. Place new coil over enclosing tube. With wiring
from the compressor. facing in the desired direction, ensure roll pin is
fitted in one of the detents in the bottom of the
2. Pump down the compressor. Refer to Section
coil mounting. Coll is to snap into place with bot-
8.7.2.
tom in contact with the enclosing tube nut. Con-
3. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis- nect wiring.
4. Check operation, refer to preceding step a.
4. Loosen the oil drain plug (item 10, Figure 8.23) Figure 8.29 Unloader Coil
and allow oil to seep out and bring the level to 1/
8 glass. Tighten the plug securely back into the 1
compressor.
13
5. Leak check the oil drain plug, refer to Section
8.7.3. Start compressor and recheck oil level. 2
3
8.8.6 Unloaders 12
4
a. Unloader Checkout Procedure 11
5
1. Install a manifold gauge set on the compressor 10
suction and discharge service valves and start 6
unit in cooling with compartment temperature at 9
least 5°F (2.8°C) above setpoint. The compres-
sor will be fully loaded (both unloader coils de-
energized). Note suction pressure. 7
8
2. Unplug both unloader coils.
3. Using a 12 VDC source, energize the front

unloader (UL1). Note discharge and suction 1. Coil Assembly 8. Gasket
pressures. A rise of approximately 3 psig (0.2 2. Pin, Roll 9. Valve Body
bar) will be noted on the suction pressure 3. Enclosing Tube Nut 10. “O” Ring
gauge. Discharge pressure should drop approxi- 4. Enclosing Tube 11. Plunger
mately 5 to 15 psig (0.4 to 1.0 bar). 5. Bolts, Valve Body (3) 12. Plunger Spring
6. Washers (3) 13. Installation/Removal
4. De−energize UL1 and note pressures. Suction Tool
7. Piston
pressure should drop and discharge pressure
-----
should rise by same amount as in step 3 above.
5. Repeat steps 3 & 4 for the rear unloader (UL2). c. Replacing Unloader Valve Internal Parts
At the end of the test, reconnect both unloaders. 1. Pump down the compressor. Refer to Section
NOTE 8.7.2.
If pressures do not change as indicated, 2. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by dis-
check the unloader coil resistance (refer to abling any two way communication and placing
Section 2.10). Replace if coil is open or the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position.
shorted. If either unloader coil energizes and
the suction and discharge pressures do not 3. Disconnect and remove coil.
change, the unloader assembly must be
checked.
8–33 62-11637
6. One valve body mounting hole is offset to assist
! WARNING in correctly aligning the valve body and gasket.
Insert mounting bolts, align with gasket holes
Do not unscrew enclosing tube nut all the and mounting holes in head. Start bolts by hand
way before breaking seal. Entrapped and then toque mounting bolts 12 to16 ft-lbs
pressure could result in injury. (1.3 to 1.8 Nm).
4. Loosen the enclosing tube nut (see Figure 8.29) 7. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge
using installation/removal tool supplied with system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2,
repair kit. Ensure tube is loose and seal is bro- 8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
ken then remove tool, enclosing tube nut,
8. Check operation, refer to preceding step a.
enclosing tube, plunger with plunger spring and
o-ring.
8.9 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM COMPONENT SER-
5. Check plunger for restriction due to: (a) cor- VICE
roded or worn parts; (b) foreign material lodged
in valve; (c) bent or dented enclosing tube. 8.9.1 Evaporator Coil
The use of recycled cardboard cartons is increasing
6. Install new parts. Do not over tighten enclosing across the country. The recycled cardboard cartons
tube assembly. Torque to 100 inch/lbs (11.3 create much more fiber dust during transport than
Nm). “new” cartons. The fiber dust and particles are drawn
7. Remove tool and install coil, refer to preceding into the evaporator where they lodge between the coil
step b. fins. If the coil is not cleaned on a regular basis, some-
times as often as after each trip, the accumulation can
8. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge be great enough to restrict air flow, cause coil icing,
system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2, repetitive defrosts and loss of unit capacity. Due to the
8.7.3 & 8.7.4. “washing” action of normal defrost the fiber dust and
particles may not be visible on the face of the coil but
9. Check operation, refer to preceding step a. may accumulate deep within.
d. Unloader Valve Replacement Clean the evaporator coil on a regular basis, not only to
1. Pump down the compressor. Refer to Section remove cardboard dust, but to remove any grease or
8.7.2. oil film which sometimes coats the fins and prevents
water from draining into the drain pan.
2. Disconnect and remove coil. Cardboard fiber particles after being wetted and dried
several times can be very hard to remove. Therefore,
! WARNING several washings may be necessary.

Do not unscrew unloader valve body
mounting bolts all the way before break-
ing seal. Entrapped pressure could result
tion.
in injury.
2. Remove rubber check valves (Kazoo) from drain
3. Loosen the valve body mounting bolts. Tap the
lines of the evaporator to be cleaned.
valve body to break the seal and then remove
bolts and gasket. 3. Spray coil with a mild detergent solution such as
Oakite 164 or 202) or any good commercial
4. Remove small screen from inside the compres-
grade automatic dish washer detergent such as
sor head and ensure it is not obstructed. Clean
Electrosol or Cascade and let the solution stand
or replace as required.
for a few minutes and reverse flush (opposite
5. Place a new gasket onto the replacement normal air flow) with clean water at mild pres-
unloader valve body (with flat side toward the sure. A garden hose with spray nozzle is usually
head) and, using unloader ring pliers, (Carrier sufficient. Make sure drain lines are clean.
Transicold P/N 07-00223-00) compress the
4. Re-install check valves and run unit until Defrost
unloader ring while inserting the unloader into
Mode can be initiated to check for proper drain-
the compressor head.
ing from drain pan.
62-11637 8–34
8.9.2 Condenser Coil 6. Disconnect the hail and bug screen sufficient to
a. Cleaning reach the ambient sensor (2, Figure 8.30) and
wiring. Remove sensor and wiring from Front
NOTE Condenser Frame (3).
Only Clean Water Should Be Used To Wash 7. Remove the captive washer screws (11) secur-
The Condenser. Do Not Use Any Detergents ing the condenser/radiator assembly to the unit.
To Clean.
8. Remove the condenser/radiator assembly from
Remove all foreign material from the coil by reversing the unit.
the normal air flow. (Air is pulled in through the front
and discharges over the engine.) Compressed air or 9. Remove the eight bolts (10) securing the rear
water may be used as a cleaning agent. Take care so condenser frame to the front condenser frame
that the fins aren’t bent during this procedure. (2) and set rear frame aside.
b. Condenser Replacement 10. Separate the radiator (8) from the condenser/
NOTE radiator assembly by removing the top radiator
mounting brackets (5) and removing grommets
If the condenser coil (Item 6, Figure 8.33)
in the bottom brackets. Set radiator aside.
requires replacement, the entire condenser/
radiator assembly (1) must be removed from 11. .Remove condenser coil by removing the con-
the unit and disassembled/reassembled on denser coil mounting brackets (7).
the bench.
12. Reassemble condenser/radiator assembly in
1. Remove the refrigerant charge. Refer to Sec- reverse order using new coil and new gaskets
tion 8.7.2. as required. Torque all condenser/radiator
bracket and frame mounting bolts 36 to 60 inch/
2. Drain coolant into a suitable container by remov-
lbs (4.1 to 6.8 Nm).
ing coolant bottle cap and then the engine drain
plug 8, Figure 8.15.
3. Remove the surround with the grille attached. ! CAUTION

Refer to Section 8.4.3. Do not bend the copper tubing on the
4. Remove remaining hoses from radiator connec- condenser coil when installing the new
tions. condenser. Bend the unit tubing if tubes
do not align correctly.
! CAUTION 13. Reassemble condenser/radiator assembly into

unit using new gaskets as required. Note the
Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of three upper and lower curb side mounting holes
inert gas brazing procedures is manda- are slotted for ease of alignment. Torque con-
tory for all Carrier Transicold refrigera- denser/radiator assembly mounting bolts (11) 95
tion units; otherwise compressor failure to 119 inch/lbs (10.7 to 13.4 Nm). Braze con-
will occur. For more information Refer to denser coil refrigerant connections.
Gas Brazing.
5. Unbraze refrigerant lines from condenser coil. 8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
15. Refill engine coolant. Refer to Section 8.5.14.
8–35 62-11637
Figure 8.30 Condenser/Radiator Assembly
2
3
11 4
5 6 7
5
9
10
1. Condenser/Radiator Assembly 7. Condenser Coil Mounting Brackets

2. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (ATT) 8. Radiator
3. Front Condenser Frame 9. Rear Condenser Frame
4. Gasket (Typical) 10. Rear Condenser Frame Mounting Bolts
5. Radiator Mounting Brackets 11. Condenser/Radiator Assembly Mounting
6. Condenser Coil Bolts
-----
8.9.3 Filter-Drier 4. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge
a. Check Filter-Drier system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2,
8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
The unit must be running in cool for this test. Check for
a restricted or plugged filter-drier by feeling the liquid 8.9.4 Replacing Receiver Sight Glass Or Fus-
line inlet and outlet connections of the drier cartridge. if ible Plug
the outlet side feels cooler than the inlet side, then the
filter-drier should be replaced. 1. Remove the refrigerant charge. Refer to Sec-
tion 8.7.2.
b. Replace Filter-Drier
1. Pump down the low side. Refer to Section 2. Loosen the sight glass or fusible plug to relieve
8.7.2. any remaining pressure. Remove and discard
glass or plug.
2. Remove bracket, loosen the inlet connection to
relieve any remaining pressure then remove 3. Using new o-ring, install component. Torque the
drier. sight glass to 15 to 25 ft/lbs (20.3 to 33.9 Nm).
Torque the fusible plug to 48 to 96 inch/lbs (5.4
3. Procure new O-rings. Lubricate the O-rings,
back side of sleeves and coupling nuts. Using a to 10.8 Nm).
backup wrench at each connection torque 30 to 4. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge
38 ft/lbs (40.7 to 51.5 Nm). system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2,
8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
62-11637 8–36
8.9.5 Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid 2. Connect a discharge pressure gauge at the dis-
Valve (SV1) charge service valve and connect a gauge to
the liquid line service valve.
Figure 8.31 Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid
3. With the refrigerated compartment temperature
Valve (SV1)
at 35°F (1.7°C) or lower, operate the unit in high
speed cool and disconnect the coil.
Lock Nut
4. With a separate 12 VDC source, energize the
Spacer Cup
coil with the unit in high speed cooling and
Nameplate observe the discharge and receiver pressures. If
the valve is closing properly, compressor dis-
charge pressure will begin to rise and the
Coil receiver pressure will remain the same or begin
to drop slowly. If the valve is not seating prop-
erly, both discharge and receiver pressure will
Spacer
rise slowly or remain the same.
Enclosing Tube 5. Operate the unit until discharge pressure
Locknut reaches 200 PSIG (13.61 Bars) and disconnect
the coil. Discharge and receiver pressure should
Enclosing Tube be within 5 to 15PSIG (0.34 to 1.02 Bars) of
each other.
Plunger b. Replacing The Coil
Gasket
NOTE
Closing Spring The coil may be replaced without removing
the refrigerant or pumping the unit down.
Seat Disc
Body the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position
2. Remove top lock nut (Figure 8.31), spacer cup
and nameplate.
a. Checkout Procedure
To obtain proper heating and defrost, the normally 3. Disconnect wiring and remove coil. Ensure
open SV1 must energize and close tightly during the spacer is in place.
heat and defrost cycles. If the valve does not close 4. Replace coil by reversing the preceding steps.
tightly due to physical damage, foreign material or Torque coil lock nut 46 to 50 inch/lbs (5.2 to 5.7
wear, refrigerant leakage through the valve can reduce Nm).
heating capacity.
• During normal heat or defrost cycles the fol- 5. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
lowing conditions will be observed when the c. Replacing Internal Components
valve is operating properly:
1. Receiver refrigerant level will drop quickly at the
initiation of heating or Defrost Mode.
! CAUTION
Service Mode MUST be used whenever
2. Suction pressure will rise slowly to 90-100 PSIG removing refrigerant charge, refrigerant
(6.12 to 6.80 Bar). leak checking or evacuating.
3. Discharge pressure will drop quickly, but will 1. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to Sec-
begin to rise to a minimum of 250 PSIG (17.0 tion 8.7.2.)
Bars) within 15 to 20 minutes.
• If suction and discharge pressures remain 2. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
low and the receiver level does not drop, the disabling any two way communication, placing
valve may be inoperative and can be checked the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position
by the following method. and removing the negative battery cable.
1. Verify the solenoid coil has proper voltage and is 3. Remove top lock nut (Figure 8.31), spacer cup,
energized in heating and defrosting. nameplate, coil and spacer.
8–37 62-11637
4. Using a 12 point, 1-3/8 inch box wrench, loosen a. Replacing the Coil
the enclosing tube locknut and bleed off any
remaining pressure. NOTE
The coil may be replaced without removing
5. Remove enclosing tube lock nut, enclosing tube the refrigerant or pumping the unit down.
with plunger, gasket, and closing spring.
6. Remove seat disc from inside of body and check disabling any two way communication, placing
for obstructions and foreign material. the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position
7. Procure kits (rebuild kit or metal gasket kit) for
reassembly as required. 2. Remove the retainer (Figure 8.32).
8. Place the seat disc into the valve body with the 3. Disconnect wiring and remove coil.
smaller diameter end facing up.
4. Replace coil by reversing the preceding steps.
9. Install the closing spring, gasket, enclosing tube
with plunger and the enclosing tube lock nut. b. Replacing Internal Components
Torque enclosing tube locknut 30 to 40 ft-lb
(40.7 to 54.2 Nm). If valve body has been
replaced, torque mounting screws 30 to 34 inch/
! CAUTION
lbs (3.4 to 3.9 Nm). Service Mode MUST be used whenever
removing refrigerant charge, refrigerant
10. Install coil, refer to preceding step b. leak checking or evacuating.
11. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge 1. To service the liquid line solenoid valve, pump
system as required. Refer to Section 8.7.2, the unit down. (Refer to Section 8.7.2, step d.).
8.7.3 & 8.7.4. To service the hot gas solenoid valve, remove
the refrigerant charge. (Refer to Section 8.7.2.)
8.9.6 Liquid Line (SV2)/Hot Gas (SV4) Solenoid disabling any two way communication, placing
Valves the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position
Figure 8.32 SV-2 and SV-4
3. Remove the retainer (Figure 8.32), disconnect
wiring and remove coil.
Retainer
4. Loosen the enclosing tube and bleed off any
Coil remaining pressure.
5. Remove enclosing tube, plunger spring, plunger
and gasket.
Enclosing
Tube 6. Remove piston from inside of body and check
for obstructions and foreign material.
Plunger 7. Procure kits (rebuild kit or gasket kit) for reas-
Spring sembly as required. Gasket kit may contain
more than one type gasket, replace with same
color gasket as originally installed in valve.
Plunger
8. Place the piston into the valve body.
Gasket
9. Install piston, gasket, plunger, plunger spring
Piston and enclosing tube. Torque enclosing tube 19 to
23 ft-lb (25.4 to 31.1 Nm).
Body
10. Install coil and retainer
8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
12. .Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
62-11637 8–38
8.9.7 Stepper Test Harness control system monitors suction pressure. If there is a
A stepper test harness (Carrier Transicold part number problem with the valve internal motor/piston assembly
(07−00515) is available for testing the compressor suc- or control system wiring to the valve the test will fail.
tion modulation valve (CSMV) and evaporator expan- a. Diagnostics - Control System or Wiring
sion valve (EVXV).
1. Disconnect the CSVM connector.
Figure 8.33 Stepper Test Harness 2. Place the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the
START/ RUN position, DO NOT ALLOW THE
UNIT TO START. When the MessageCenter
displays “SMV CLOSING”, measure the AC volt-
A1 A2 age on the harness side of the connector
between pins A & B and then between C & D. A
B1 B2
voltage (10 to 16 VAC) should be read by the
digital voltmeter for each pair of wires. If the
C2 reading is present on all of the wire pairs there is
C1
a good signal coming from the control system.
3. If the reading is not present on one or more of
The test harness is installed by disconnecting the the wire pairs, check the wiring between the
2SVM connector at the SVM module and plugging the control system and the CSMV connector, or
C1 connector (see Figure 8.33) into the module and check the control system for proper model num-
C2 connector into the unit harness. With the test har- ber Configuration.
ness in place, the A1/A2 test harness connectors may b. Diagnostics - Stepper Motor
be used to perform the following EVXV testing while The valve stepper motor may be tested using a stepper
the B1/B2 connectors may be used to perform the motor drive tester or ohmmeter.
CSMV testing.
1. To test with a stepper motor drive tester (Carrier
8.9.8 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve Transicold part number 07-00375-00), connect
(CSMV) the 4 pin test cable supplied with the tester to
The purpose of the CSMV (see Figure 8.34) is to main- the valve connector, refer to Figure 8.35, and
tain the compressor within its operating envelope and the cable wires to the tester in accordance with
maximize unit capacity and fuel economy. wire and terminal color.
2. Set the step rate to 200 steps per second and
Figure 8.34 Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) either open or close the valve. Each red LED
should light sequentially until all four are illumi-
nated. Any LED failing to illuminate indicates an
Body Screws open on that leg and a need to replace the pis-
ton and drive motor assembly.
3. To test with an ohmmeter, check the winding
resistance between connector pin A & B and
then between C & D, see Figure 8.35. In normal
ambient, the resistance between the pins should
be 72 to 84 ohms. Also check each terminal to
the coil casing (ground). If an out of tolerance or
From Coil To Compressor zero reading is observed, the piston and drive
[ motor assembly is to be replaced.
If it is suspected that the CSMV is malfunctioning, the
most efficient method of diagnosing the valve is to run Figure 8.35 CSMV Coil
a Pretrip (refer to Section 3.5). The Pretrip steps will
check the remainder of the system and the CSMV spe- 1
A (BLACK) (WHITE) B
cific test will check the valve. During the CSMV specific
test the valve will be brought to a preset position, the
unit started and then the valve will be opened while the
D (GREEN) (RED) C
2
8–39 62-11637
c. Diagnostics Valve 6. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge
NOTE 8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
If the valve failed pretest and passed the
preceding diagnostic testing, this is an indi- 7. Start the unit.
cation that the valve mechanism is damaged 8. Adjust the suction service valve so that the
and the internal motor/piston assembly is to approximate temperature is maintained. For
be replaced. perishable loads, it is recommended that the
adjustment be made so that the available
1. To test the valve internal mechanism, install a
capacity is slightly larger than the load, the unit
manifold gauge set on the suction service valve
will cycle OFF and ON.
and a stepper motor drive tester.
9. Once repair parts become available, repair as
2. Start the unit, set the step rate to 200 steps per
required.
second and close the valve while watching the
suction pressure. Within one minute the suction 8.9.9 Evaporator Expansion Valve
pressure should begin to fall. Place the STOP/
RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position before the The evaporator expansion valve (EVXV − see Figure
reading enters a vacuum. 8.36) is a microprocessor driven device which meters
the flow of refrigerant into the coil. The flow control pro-
3. If the suction pressure does not change, this is vides: (a) response to match the evaporator load and
an indication the valve is stuck and the internal (b) prevention of liquid refrigerant return to the com-
motor/piston assembly is to be replaced. pressor. Unless the valve is defective, it seldom
d. Replacing The Internal Motor/Piston Assembly requires any maintenance.
1. Pump down the low side. Refer to Section NOTE

8.7.2. As a preliminary check, ensure the EVXV
coil is snapped down fully, and the internal
2. Remove internal motor/piston assembly and coil retention tab is properly seated in one of
replace with a new assembly and gasket. The the valve body dimples.
motor/piston assembly should be set to 100%
open when received from the warehouse. This Figure 8.36 Evaporator Expansion Valve
is to ensure the Teflon valve seal is not dam-
aged when it is installed. Ensure the valve is
fully open by using the stepper motor tester to Coil
manually open the valve to 100% before it is Evaporator Expansion Valve
installed. Torque the body screws 80 to 97 inch/
lbs (9 to 11 Nm).
8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
e. Emergency Repair Procedures
Body Dimples
In the event that the CSMV system has a failure, and
replacement components are not readily available in
Five Pin
an emergency, a LIMP-HOME procedure can be done
as follows: Connector
FLOW
DIRECTION
1. Install a manifold gauge set.
2. Pump down the low side. Refer to Section
8.7.2.
3. Remove the internal motor/piston assembly. a. Diagnostics - Microprocessor or Wiring
4. Loosening the Allen screw and remove the pis- 1. Disconnect the 2SVM connector and locate the
ton and screw. wires, on the engine harness side labeled
5. Install the motor/piston assembly (without pis- EXVA, EXVB, EXVC, EXVD and EXVE. These
ton). Torque the nut 35 to 40 ft/lb (47.5 to 54.2 will correlate to the connector pins labeled A, B,
Nm) or body screws 80 to 97 inch/lbs (9 to 11 C, D and E. Refer to Table 8–2.
Nm) as applicable.
62-11637 8–40
3. To test with an ohmmeter, check the winding
Table 8–2 EVXV Connections resistance between connector pin A & E, B & E,
C & E and then between D & E. In normal ambi-
Connector Pin Wire Color Winding
ent, the resistance between the pins should be
A ORANGE A 46 ohms. If an infinite or zero reading is
observed, the piston and drive motor assembly
B RED B is to be replaced.
C YELLOW A c. Diagnostics − Valve
D BLACK B NOTE
E GREY COM (+12V) If the valve failed Pretrip and passed the pre-
ceding diagnostic testing, this is an indica-
2. Set the voltmeter to the DCV scale. Place the tion that the valve internal mechanism is
START/RUN−OFF switch in the OFF position damaged and the piston and motor assem-
and disconnect the starter motor wire at the bly is to be replaced.
weather tight connector. Place the START/ Figure 8.37 Evaporator Expansion Valve
RUN−OFF switch back in the START/RUN posi-
tion. After three start attempts the MessageCen- PIN A (ORANGE) PIN B (RED)
ter will display the 00031 FAILED TO START -
AUTO MODE alarm.
3. Perform the following test on the wiring coming
from the microprocessor: Place the positive (+)
voltmeter lead on pin E, the negative (−) voltme-
A B
COMMON
ter lead on pin A and observe the meter for sev- (+12VDC)
eral seconds. The voltage reading will be
approximately 7.3 or 12.5 VDC depending on
valve position.
4. Leave the positive (+) voltmeter lead on pin E
and repeat for pins B, C and D.
A B
5. If there is no voltage reading or if the voltage
never rises to the 7.3 or 12.5 voltage level, there PIN D (BLACK)
PIN C (YELLOW)
is a problem in the wiring or the microprocessor.
Place the START/RUN−OFF switch in the OFF PIN E (GRAY)
position and reconnect the starter wire. Test all
wiring from the EVXV connector to the micropro- 1. To test the valve internal mechanism, install a
cessor and verify good continuity before replac- manifold gauge set on the suction service valve
ing the microprocessor. and a stepper motor drive tester. Refer to Sec-
tion 8.7.1.
b. Diagnostics − Stepper Motor
2. Start the unit, set the step rate to 200 steps per
The valve stepper motor may be tested using a stepper second (refer to the preceding step b.) and
motor drive tester or ohmmeter. close the valve while watching the suction pres-
sure. Within one minute the suction pressure
1. To test with a stepper motor drive tester (Carrier
should begin to fall.
Transicold part number 07−00375−00SV), con-
nect the 5 pin test cable to the valve connector 3. If the suction pressure does not change, this is
(see Figure 8.37), and the cable wires to the an indication the valve is stuck and the piston
tester in accordance with wire and terminal and drive motor assembly is to be replaced.
color. (if a 5 pin tester cable is required, order
Carrier Transicold part number 07−00375−11.) d. Replacing Expansion Valve & Screen
2. Set the step rate to 50 steps per second and 1. Pump down the low side. (Refer to Section
8.7.2).
either open or close the valve. Each red LED
should light sequentially until all four are illumi- 2. Remove coil and unbraze valve. Clean all tube
nated. Any LED failing to illuminate indicates an stubs so new valve fits on easily.
open on that leg and a need to replace the drive.
3. Use a wet rag to keep the replacement valve
cool and braze in place.
4. Leak check and evacuate the low side. Refer to
Section 8.7.3 and 8.7.4.
8–41 62-11637
Figure 8.38 Check Valves 5. Braze valve in place and cool connections with
wet rag.
Discharge Check Valve
8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
8.9.11 High Pressure Switch

a. Replacing High Pressure Switch
1. Pump down the compressor. Refer to Section

8.7.2.
Hot Gas Check Valve 2. Disconnect wiring from switch, and remove
switch.
3. Install switch after verifying switch settings.

(Refer to following step b.)
8.9.10 Replacing Check Valve 4. Leak check, evacuate & dehydrate, and charge
A check valve (see Figure 8.38) allows flow in one
8.7.3 & 8.7.4.
direction only.
b. Checking High Pressure Switch
The function of the discharge check valve is to prevent
liquid refrigerant from migrating back the compressor
during the unit off cycle.
! WARNING
The function of the hot gas bypass check valve is to
raise the receiver pressure (when the ambient tem- Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
perature is low) so that refrigerant can flow from the pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is
receiver to the evaporator when the unit is in heating or approximately 2350 PSIG (160 bar). Do
defrost. not use oxygen in or near a refrigerant
NOTE Figure 8.39.)
These check valves are not serviceable and
must be removed and replaced as an Figure 8.39 Typical Setup for Testing Pressure
assembly. Switch
1. Remove the refrigerant charge. Refer to Sec- 1

tion 8.7.2. 4
5
NOTICE 2
Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of

inert gas brazing procedures is manda-
tory for all Carrier Transicold refrigera- 3 6
tion units; otherwise compressor failure
will occur. For more information Refer to
Gas Brazing.
2. Using a pipe cutter, cut the valve stub-outs and

unbraze the remaining stub-out from the con- 1. Cylinder Valve and Gauge
necting copper. 2. Pressure Regulator
3. Nitrogen Cylinder
3. Clean tube stubs so new valve fits easily. Posi-
4. Pressure Gauge 0 to 400 PSIG (0 to 27.2
tion new valve.
bar)
4. Wrap valve with wet rags to keep cool when 5. Bleed-Off Valve
brazing. 6. Switch
-----
62-11637 8–42
1. Remove switch as outlined in preceding section
NOTE
2. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across The CDP connector is identified with a red
switch terminals. Ohmmeter will indicate resis- tape band while the CSP connector is identi-
tance and continuity light will be illuminated if fied with a blue band.
switch closed after relieving pressure.
2. If required, power the transducer circuit by plac-
3. Connect switch to a cylinder of dry nitrogen. ing the unit in PC Mode, refer to Section 5.3.2.
(See Figure 8.39) Check Voltage to transducer connector. Voltage
reading between connector position 2 (positive)
4. Set nitrogen pressure regulator higher than and position 1 (negative) should be 5.0 VDC.
open setting for switch being tested. For pres-
sure switch settings refer to Section 2.9. 3. To check the signal wiring, check continuity
between the transducer connector position 3
5. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve. and the following connector: CDP = 2MM−10,
6. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve CSP = 2MM−9, EVOP = 2MM−17
and increase pressure until the switch opens. If 4. If voltage and signal wire are good, replace the
light is used, light will go out and if an ohmmeter transducer. The transducer may be removed by
is used, the meter will indicate open. Close cylin- disconnecting the connector and quickly back-
der valve. Slowly open bleed-off valve (to ing it off the Schrader valve fitting. Torque
decrease pressure) until switch closes (light will replacement transducer 13 to 15 ft/lb (17.6 to
illuminate or ohmmeter will indicate open). 20.3 Nm).
8.9.12 Pressure Transducers 8.9.13 Defrost Air Switch
The compressor discharge pressure transducer (CDP)
has a range of 0 to 500 PSIG (0 to 34.0 bar) while the Figure 8.40 Defrost Air Switch Test Setup
compressor suction pressure transducer (CSP) and
evaporator outlet pressure transducer (EVOP) have a
range of -14.7 to 100 PSIG (-1 to 6.8 bar). When com- 2
paring the transducer reading in Unit Data to the read-
ing on a manifold gauge, keep in mind the following:
1. The compressor discharge pressure reading in

Unit Data will never read less than 0 bar/psig, 5
even if it is exposed to a vacuum (such as when 6 3
4
evacuating the system). 1
2. If the compressor discharge pressure trans-
ducer has lost power or the signal is not return-
ing to the module the reading in Unit Data will 1. Ohmmeter or Continuity Device
default to 305 to 315 psig (20.75 to 21.43 bar). 2. Adjustment Screw (0.050” socket head size)
Comparisons in this pressure range are not con- 3. Low Side Connection
clusive. 4. Pressure Line or Aspirator Bulb (Carrier Transi-
cold part number 07-00177-01)
3. The compressor suction pressure and evapora-
5. Magnehelic Gauge (Carrier Transicold part
tor pressure transducers will never read higher number 07-00177-00)
than 100 psig, even if actual pressure is higher.
6. High Side Connection
4. If the compressor suction pressure or evapora- -----
tor pressure transducer has lost power or the
signal is not returning to the module the reading NOTE
in Unit Data will default to 55 to 60 psig (3.74 to If the DTT temperature is above 40°F
4.08 bar). Comparisons in this pressure range (4.4°C) defrost cannot be initiated and the
are not conclusive. Message- Center will display “CANNOT
START DEFROST CYCLE”.
To test the transducer wiring, do the following:
1. Check air switch tubing. Red tube is to be con-
1. Verify that the wiring to the transducer is correct.
nected to the high connection and routed below
the coil. Clear tube is to be connected to the low
connection and routed above coil. Check condi-
tion and mounting of air sensing fittings on the
coil end of both tubes. See Figure 2.3
8–43 62-11637
2. To check the defrost air switch, run unit in cool- 8.10 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENTS
ing and jumper across the air switch terminals.
Procedures for servicing or maintaining the electrical
This will start the defrost cycle as it simulates
system components are provided in the following sub-
the action of the defrost air switch. Bypassing
paragraphs.
the switch in this manner operates all compo-
nents involved in defrost. 8.10.1 Main Microprocessor Module (MM)
3. Unit should remain in defrost until the DTT and For complete Main Microprocessor Module replace-
SAT both reach 55°F (12.8°C). At this point the ment instructions refer to Section 5.5.2.
defrost cycle will terminate, and the unit will
resume automatic operation. 8.10.2 Power Control Module (PCM)
4. If the above test indicates satisfactory operation, Figure 8.41 Power Control Module
test DAS settings using a Magnehelic gauge
(Carrier Transicold part number 07-00177) or 1
similar instrument as follows.
5. Ensure magnehelic gauge is in proper calibra-

tion.
NOTE
The magnehelic gauge may be used in any 2
position, but must be re-zeroed if position of
gauge is changed from vertical to horizontal
or vice versa. USE ONLY IN POSITION 3
FOR WHICH IT IS ZEROED.
6. With air switch in vertical position, connect high

pressure side of magnehelic gauge, a tee and
aspirator to high side connection of air switch.
Tee is to be placed approximately half-way
between gauge and air switch or an improper
4
reading may result. (See Figure 8.40)
7. Attach an ohmmeter to the air switch electrical

contacts to check switch action. 8
7 6 5
NOTE 4
Use a hand aspirator (Carrier Transicold P/N
07-00177-01), since blowing into tube by 1. Mounting Fasteners
mouth may cause an incorrect reading. 2. 35 Pin Connector
3. Engine Preheat Terminal (EPH)
8. With the gauge reading at zero, apply air pres- 4. Plastic Bushings
sure very slowly to the air switch. An ohmmeter
5. Alternator Positive Terminal (ALT +)
will indicate continuity when switch actuates.
6. Battery Negative Terminal (BAT-)
The switch contacts should close and the ohm-
meter needle move rapidly to 0. Any hesitation 7. Battery Positive Terminal (BAT +)
in the ohmmeter indicates a possible problem 8. Door Mounted Legend Sticker
with the switch, and it should be replaced. -----
9. Refer to Section 2.9 for switch setting. If switch 1. Disconnect main power leads at battery.
fails to actuate at correct gauge reading, adjust
2. Open Power Control module door. Loosen &
switch by turning adjusting screw clockwise to
remove stud-post terminal nuts (brass) at termi-
increase setting or counterclockwise to
nals BAT+ (7, Figure 8.41); BAT– (6); ALT+ (5)
decrease setting.
& EPH (3).
10. Repeat checkout procedure until switch actu-
3. Remove nuts holding plastic bushings (4) &
ates at correct gauge reading.
leave hanging on wire.
11. After switch is adjusted, place a small amount of
4. Lift the 4 cable terminals up & off stud-posts.
paint or fingernail polish on the adjusting screw
Remove loose nuts, slide plastic bushings &
so that vibration will not change switch setting.
cables/terminals out of mounting hole in box.
62-11637 8–44
5. Unlock tab on 35pin connector (2) & remove 5. Make sure the latest software has been loaded
connector. to ensure all modules are compatible, refer to
Section 5.3.4
6. Remove the four fasteners (1) mounting Power
Control module to unit frame & remove module
from unit NOTICE
7. Follow steps above in reverse order to install When a module is replaced, software
new Power Control Module. Torque: should be upgraded before switching the
• fasteners mounting module to frame (1) to 38 to unit on. This will ensure software com-
58 inch/lbs (4.3 to 6.6 Nm). patibility of all modules.
• M6 terminal nuts (3 & 7) to 30 to 40 inch/lbs (3.4 6. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
to 4.5 Nm).
8.10.4 Display Module (DM)
• M8 terminal nuts (5 & 6) to 60 to 80 inch/lbs (6.8
to 9.0 Nm). To service the Display Module do the following:
8. Note a component legend sticker is to be 1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by
located inside the PCM door. Install the correct disabling any two way communication, placing
sticker (packaged with the replacement PCM) the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position
for this unit inside the replacement PCM. The and removing the negative battery cable.
replacement PCM is populated at the factory 2. Unlock the tabs on, and then remove the 14 pin
with the standard fuses and relays. Additional connector from the back of the module.
fuses and relays may be required for this appli-
cation (refer to Figure 2.7) transfer the required 3. Remove hardware at rear of module. Replace
fuses and relays from the original PCM to the module. Tighten mounting hardware to 84 to
replacement PCM as required. 120 inch/lbs (9.5 to 13.6 Nm).
9. Make sure the latest software has been loaded 4. Reinstall connector ensuring tabs are fully
to ensure all modules are compatible, refer to locked in place.
Section 5.3.4
5. Make sure the latest software has been loaded
to ensure all modules are compatible, refer to
NOTICE Section 5.3.4
When a module is replaced, software

should be upgraded before switching the NOTICE
unit on. This will ensure software com-
patibility of all modules. When a module is replaced, software
should be upgraded before switching the
10. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation. unit on. This will ensure software com-
patibility of all modules.
8.10.3 Stepper Valve Module (SVM)
disabling any two way communication, placing 8.10.5 Alternator
! CAUTION
2. Unlock the tabs on and remove the two 35 pin
connectors and 8 pin connector from the front of Observe proper polarity when installing
the module. battery. Negative battery terminal must
be grounded. Reverse polarity will
3. Replace module. Tighten mounting hardware to destroy the rectifier diodes in alternator.
96 inch/lbs (10.8 Nm). As a precautionary measure, disconnect
the negative and then the positive battery
4. Reinstall connectors ensuring tabs are fully
terminal when charging battery in unit.
locked in place.
8–45 62-11637
Figure 8.42 Alternator 4. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
c. Alternator Replacement
2 In the event the alternator is replaced, install the pulley
on the alternator shaft with the “shoulder” side toward
3 the alternator. Torque left hand thread pulley nut 50 to
60 ft/lbs (68 to 88 Nm) while holding shaft using a six
point Torx T50 wrench. For instruction on tightening
1 alternator mounting hardware and checking belt, refer
4 to Section 8.5.15.
Figure 8.43 Light Bar Connections
H A A H
/
' G B B G
%‐ F C F
E D D E
LIGHT BAR CONTROL BOX

SIDE SIDE
%
8.10.6 Light Bar
The light bar may be tested using a 12 VDC source. To
test the light bar:
1. Positive Output Terminal (B+)
2. L (D+) Terminal 1. Connect the ground (-) from the power source to
3. Ground Terminal (B-) pin G on the light bar side of the connector.
4. Regulator/Brush Assembly 2. The green LED’s will illuminate when the 12
----- VDC side (+) of the power source is connected
a. Inspection to pin B.
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by 3. With the connection as in the preceding steps (+
disabling any two way communication, placing on pin B, and - on pin G), the amber LED’s will
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position illuminate when the power (+) from the power
and removing the negative battery cable. source is also connected to pin H.
2. Verify condition and tightness of connections 4. Start unit and run Pretrip to check operation.
(see Figure 8.42). Torque B+ terminal 62 to 80
inch/lbs (7 to 9 Nm) and B- terminal 38 to 52 8.10.7 Sensor Checkout
inch/lbs (4.3 to 5.9 Nm). Check condition of belt, An accurate ohmmeter must be used to check resis-
refer to Section 8.5.15. tance values shown in Table 8–3 or Table 8–4.
b. Brush Replacement Due to variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters, ther-
mometers or other test equipment, a reading within 2%
1. Ensure the unit will not start automatically by of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a
disabling any two way communication, placing sensor is bad, the resistance reading will usually be
the STOP/RUN-OFF switch in the OFF position much higher or lower than the resistance values given
and removing the negative battery cable. in the tables.
2. Remove the screws holding the regulator/brush Two preferred methods of determining the actual test
assembly. temperature at the sensor, is an ice bath at 32°F (0°C)
or a calibrated temperature tester.
3. Replace with new regulator/brush assembly.
Torque mounting screws 35 to 40 inch/lbs (4 to
4.5 Nm).
62-11637 8–46
Table 8–3 Sensor Resistance
Sensors AAT, RAT, SAT, ENCT, DTT, CST, EVTO, REMSN 1, 2
°F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms °F °C Ohms

-40 -40 336,500 18 -7.8 49,060 76 24.4 10,250 134 56.7 2,809
-38 -38.9 312,600 20 -6.7 46,230 78 25.6 9,760 136 57.8 2,697
-36 -37.8 290,600 22 -5.6 43,580 80 26.7 9,299 138 58.9 2,590
-34 -36.7 270,300 24 -4.4 41,100 82 27.8 8,862 140 60.0 2,488
-32 -35.6 251,500 26 -3.3 38,780 84 28.9 8,449 142 61.1 2,390
-30 -34.4 234,200 28 -2.2 36,600 86 30.0 8,057 144 62.2 2,297
-28 -33.3 218,200 30 -1.1 34,560 88 31.1 7,686 146 63.3 2,208
-26 -32.2 203,400 32 0 32,650 90 32.2 7,334 148 64.4 2,124
-24 -31.1 189,700 34 1.1 30,850 92 33.3 7,000 150 65.6 2,042
-22 -30 177,000 36 2.2 29,170 94 34.4 6,684 155 68.3 1,855
-20 -28.9 165,200 38 3.3 27,590 96 35.6 6,384 160 71.1 1,687
-18 -27.8 154,300 40 4.4 26,100 98 36.7 6,099 165 73.9 1,537
-16 -26.7 144,200 42 5.5 24,700 100 37.8 5,828 170 76.7 1,402
-14 -25.6 134,800 44 6.6 23,390 102 38.9 5,571 175 79.4 1,281
-12 -24.4 126,100 46 7.7 22,160 104 40.0 5,327 180 82.2 1,171
-10 -23.3 118,100 48 8.9 20,990 106 41.1 5,095 185 85.0 1,072
-8 -22.2 110,500 50 10 19,900 108 42.2 4,874 190 87.8 983
-6 -21.1 103,600 52 11.1 18,870 110 43.3 4,665 195 90.6 902
-4 -20 97,070 54 12.2 17,900 112 44.4 4,465 200 93.3 829
-2 -18.9 91,030 56 13.3 16,980 114 45.5 4,275 205 96.1 762
0 -17.8 85,400 58 14.4 16,120 116 46.7 4,095 210 98.9 702
2 -16.7 80,160 60 15.5 15,310 118 47.8 3,923 215 101.7 647
4 -15.6 75,270 62 16.6 14,540 120 48.9 3,759 220 104.4 598
6 -14.4 70,720 64 17.7 13,820 122 50.0 3,603 225 107.2 553
8 -13.3 66,460 66 18.9 13,130 124 51.1 3,454 230 110.0 511
10 -12.2 62,500 68 20.0 12,490 126 52.2 3,313 235 112.8 473
12 -11.1 58,790 70 21.1 11,880 128 53.3 3,177 240 115.6 438
14 -10.0 55,330 72 22.2 11,310 130 54.4 3,049 245 118.3 406
16 -8.9 52,090 74 23.3 10,760 132 55.6 2,926 250 121.1 378
8–47 62-11637
Table 8–4 Sensor Resistance (CDT)
°C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms

-40 -40 3,360,000 0 32 325,860 40.0 104 53,330 101.7 215 6,510
-38.9 -38 3,121,020 1,1 34 307,970 41.1 106 51,010 104.4 220 6,000
-37.8 -36 2,900,710 2.2 36 291,180 42.2 108 48,800 107.2 225 5,540
-36.7 -34 2,697,500 3.3 38 275,410 43.3 110 46,710 110.0 230 5,130
-35.6 -32 2,509,940 4.4 40 260,590 44.4 112 44,710 112.8 235 4,760
-34.4 -30 2,336,720 5.5 42 246,670 45.5 114 42,820 115.6 240 4,410
-33.3 -28 2,186,670 6.6 44 233,570 46.7 116 41,010 118.3 245 4,090
-32.2 -26 2,028,680 7.7 46 221,260 47.8 118 39,290 121.1 250 3,800
-31.1 -24 1,891,780 8.9 48 209,670 48.9 120 37,660 126.7 260 3,290
-30 -22 1,765,060 10 50 198,760 50.0 122 36,100 132.2 270 2,850
-28.9 -20 1,647,700 11.1 52 188,490 51.1 124 34,610 137.8 280 2,490
-27.8 -18 1,538,950 12.2 54 178,820 52.2 126 33,200 143.3 290 2,170
-26.7 -16 1,538,950 13.3 56 169,700 53.3 128 31,850 148.9 300 1,910
-25.6 -14 1,344,580 14.4 58 161,100 54.4 130 30,560 154.4 310 1,680
-24.4 -12 1,257,770 15.5 60 152,990 55.6 132 29,330 160.0 320 1,480
-23.3 -10 1,177,150 16.6 62 145,340 56.7 134 28,160 165.5 330 1,310
-22.2 -8 1,102,240 17.7 64 138,120 57.8 136 27,040 171.1 340 1,160
-21.1 -6 1,032,600 18.9 66 131,310 58.9 138 25,970 176.7 350 1,040
-20 -4 967,830 20.0 68 124,870 60.0 140 24,960 182.2 360 920
-18.9 -2 907,560 21.1 70 118,790 61.1 142 23,980 187.8 370 830
-17.8 0 851,450 22.2 72 113,040 62.2 144 23,050 193.3 380 740
-16.7 2 799,180 23.3 74 107,600 63.3 146 22,160 198.9 390 670
-15.6 4 750,470 24.4 76 102,460 64.4 148 21,310 204.4 400 600
-14.4 6 705,060 25.6 78 97,600 65.6 150 20,500 210.0 410 540
-13.3 8 662,690 26.7 80 92,990 68.3 155 18,980 215.6 420 490
-12.2 10 623,150 27.8 82 88,630 71.1 160 16,940 221.1 430 450
-11.1 12 586,230 28.9 84 84,510 73.9 165 15,450 226.7 440 410
-10.0 14 551,740 30.0 86 80,600 76.7 170 14,070 232.2 450 370
-8.9 16 519,500 31.1 88 76,890 79.4 175 12,870 237.8 460 340
-7.8 18 489,690 32.2 90 73,380 82.2 180 11,750 243.3 470 310
-6.7 20 461,170 33.3 92 70,040 85.0 185 10,750 248.9 480 280
-5.6 22 434,790 34.4 94 66,880 87.8 190 9,870 254.4 490 260
-4.4 24 410,080 35.6 96 63,880 90.6 195 9,050 260.0 500 240
-3.3 26 386,940 36.7 98 61,040 93.3 200 8,320
-2.2 28 365,260 37.8 100 58,330 96.1 205 7,650
-1.1 30 344,930 38.9 102 55,770 98.9 210 7,050
62-11637 8–48
Table 8–5 Temperature Pressure Chart
Temperature Pressure Temperature Pressure
°C °F BAR PSIG °C °F BAR PSIG

-40 -40 0.3 4.5 0 32 5.0 72.5
-37 -35 0.5 7.1 1 34 5.2 75.6
-34 -30 0.7 9.9 2 36 5.4 78.8
-32 -25 0.9 12.9 3 38 5.7 82.1
-29 -20 1.1 16.3 4 40 5.9 85.5
-28 -18 1.2 17.7 6 42 6.1 89.0
-27 -16 1.3 19.2 7 44 6.4 92.5
-26 -14 1.4 20.7 8 46 6.6 96.2
-24 -12 1.5 22.3 9 48 6.9 99.9
-23 -10 1.7 23.9 10 50 7.2 103.7
-22 -8 1.8 25.6 13 55 8.0 115.4
-21 -6 1.88 27.3 16 60 8.7 126.1
-20 -4 2.0 29.1 18 65 9.5 137.4
-19 -2 2.1 30.9 21 70 10.3 149.4
-18 0 2.3 32.8 24 75 11.2 162.1
-17 2 2.4 34.8 27 80 12.1 175.5
-16 4 2.5 36.8 29 85 13.1 189.6
-14 6 2.7 38.9 32 90 14.1 204.5
-13 8 2.8 41.1 35 95 15.2 220.2
-12 10 3.0 43.3 38 100 16.3 236.8
-11 12 3.1 45.6 41 105 17.5 254.2
-10 14 3.3 48.0 43 110 18.8 272.4
-9 16 3.5 50.4 46 115 20.1 291.6
-8 18 3.7 52.9 49 120 21.5 311.8
-7 20 3.8 55.5 52 125 23.0 332.9
-6 22 4.0 58.1 54 130 24.5 355.0
-4 24 4.2 60.9 57 135 26.1 378.1
-3 26 4.4 63.7 60 140 27.7 402.3
-2 28 4.6 66.5 63 145 29.5 427.6
-1 30 4.8 69.5 66 150 31.3 454.0
8–49 62-11637
SECTION 9 - UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING
9.1 ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1

9.1.1 Engine Will Not Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–1
9.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.5 Malfunction in the Engine Starting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–2
9.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–3
9.2 ALTERNATOR ............................................................... 9–3
9.3 REFRIGERATION / TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.1 Unit Will Not Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.2 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.3 System Will Not Pump Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.4 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–4
9.3.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.6 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.7 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.8 Defrost Cycle Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–5
9.3.9 Abnormal Pressure Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
9.3.10 Abnormal Pressure - Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–6
9.3.11 Abnormal Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.12 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.13 Expansion Valve (EVXV) Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.14 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
9.3.15 Solenoid Valve Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9–7
62-11637
SECTION 9
UNIT TROUBLESHOOTING
NOTICE
Should a problem develop with these components, contact your nearest Carrier Transicold
dealer for replacement.
NOTE
Run a Pretrip and check all active alarms before continuing with troubleshooting.
9.1 ENGINE
Indication/Trouble Possible Causes Action / Reference

9.1.1 Engine Will Not Start
Battery insufficiently charged 9.2
Battery cable connections loose or corroded Check
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at starter Check/Repair
Starter motor malfunction 9.1.4
Starter motor will not crank or low
Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
cranking speed
Open starting circuit 9.1.5
Incorrect grade of lubricating oil 2.7
Compressor not unloaded 8.8.6
High suction pressure 8.9.8
No fuel in tank Check
Air in fuel system 8.5.2
Water in fuel system Drain Sump & 8.5.5
Plugged fuel filter 8.5.5
Starter motor cranks but engine
Plugged inlet screen to mechanical pump. 8.5.3
fails to start
Plugged inlet screen to electric pump. 8.5.4
Plugged fuel lines to injector(s) Check
ENCU defective Replace
Engine preheat defective 8.5.11
Starter cranks, engages, but dies
Voltage drop in battery cable(s) Check
after a few seconds
9–1 62-11637
9.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops
Fuel supply restricted Check
No fuel in tank Check
Leak in fuel system Check
Faulty fuel control operation Engine Manual
Plugged fuel filter 8.5.5
Plugged inlet screen to mechanical pump 8.5.3
Engine stops after several rota- Plugged inlet screen to electric pump 8.5.4
tions Injector nozzle(s) defective Engine Manual
Injection pump defective Engine Manual
Air cleaner or hose restricted 8.5.10
Electric fuel pump malfunction 8.5.4
Mechanical fuel pump malfunction Engine Manual
Oil pressure switch defective Replace
9.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off
Engine will not shut off ENCU operation defective Replace
9.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction
Battery insufficiently charged 9.2
Battery cable connections loose or corroded Check
Starter motor will not crank or Battery cables defective Replace

turns slowly Excessively worn, open or defective starter brushes Engine Manual
Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
Pinion or ring gear obstructed or worn Clean both,
Starter motor turns but pinion
remove burrs,
does not engage
or replace
Starter motor does not disengage Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
after engine starts Defective starter Engine Manual
9.1.5 Malfunction in the Engine Starting Circuit
Battery condition Load Test
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at starter Check/Repair
No power to starter solenoid (SS)
No power from 3MM-12 to Starter Solenoid connector Check/Repair
62-11637 9–2
9.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting
Air in fuel system 8.5.2
Air vent restricted in fuel tank cap Clean
Restricted fuel lines Engine Manual
Loss of power Defective fuel injection pump Engine Manual
Defective injector(s) or incorrect type Engine Manual
Incorrect fuel injection pump timing Engine Manual
Incorrect valve timing Engine Manual
Poor compression Engine Manual
Engine shockmounts defective Replace
Vibration
Poor compression Engine Manual
Exhaust pipe restriction Remove
Restriction in water jacket Engine Manual
Restriction in radiator 8.5.14
Overheating
Coolant level too low 8.5.14
Loose water pump Engine Manual
Defective thermostat Engine Manual
Alternator/Water pump belt loose/broken 8.5.16
Excessive crankcase pressure Plugged crankcase breather 8.5.16
9.2 ALTERNATOR

Limited charging system operating time Check
Battery condition Load Test
Alternator belt loose/broken 8.5.15
Alternator fails to charge Damaged or corroded electrical connections Check./Repair
Excessively worn, open or defective brushes 8.10.5
Regulator faulty 8.10.5
Open rotor field coil Check/Replace
Alternator belt loose/broken 8.5.15
Damaged or corroded electrical connections Check/Repair
Excessively worn, sticky or defective brushes 8.10.5
Low or unsteady charging rate
Regulator faulty 8.10.5
Grounded or shorted turns in rotor Check/Replace
Open rotor field coil Check/Replace
9–3 62-11637
Excessive charging rate (evi- Regulator faulty 8.10.5
denced by need for frequent filling
or constant high charging amper-
age)
Alternator belt loose/broken/misaligned 8.5.15
Alternator noisy Loose pulley 8.10.5
Worn bearings 8.10.5
9.3 REFRIGERATION / TEMPERATURE CONTROL

9.3.1 Unit Will Not Cool
Compressor drive defective 8.6.1
Compressor malfunction
Compressor defective 8.8.1
A defrost cycle did not terminate. Check DTT 8.10.7
Abnormal pressure 9.3.9
Refrigeration system
Solenoid valve malfunction 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Clutch failure 8.6.4
9.3.2 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
Compressor internal damage 8.8.1
Compressor
Unloader malfunction 8.8.6
Unloader malfunction 8.8.6
Expansion valve malfunction 9.3.13
Refrigeration system No or restricted evaporator airflow 9.3.12
Suction Modulation Valve malfunction 8.9.8
Check system for noncondensibles 8.7.2
9.3.3 System Will Not Pump Down
SV2 or SV4 not closing 8.9.6
Valve malfunction Check valve not closing 8.9.10
Liquid line service valve defective Replace
Compressor Compressor internal damage 8.8.1
9.3.4 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling
Hot Load Allow time to pull
down
Refrigerated Compartment
Defective or insufficient refrigerated compartment insula- Correct
tion or air leak
Refrigeration system Temperature sensor malfunction 8.10.7
62-11637 9–4
9.3.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling
Temperature sensor malfunction 8.10.7
Unit fails to stop cooling Incorrect temperature scale, check whether microproces- Check
sor is set for °C or °F
9.3.6 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating
Main microprocessor malfunction 5.5.2
Refrigeration system Solenoid valve malfunction 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Bypass check valve malfunction 8.9.10
9.3.7 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating
Temperature sensor malfunction 8.10.7
Unit fails to stop heating Incorrect temperature scale, check whether microproces- Check
sor is set for °C or °F
9.3.8 Defrost Cycle Malfunction
Defrost timer has not expired Check/Reset
Will not initiate defrost automati- Defrost air switch (DAS) malfunction 8.9.13
cally DTT is above 40°F (4.4°C) Cool Down
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at DTT Check/Repair
Display key defective 8.10.4
Will not initiate defrost manually DTT is above 40°F (4.4°C) Cool Down
Unit has been running less than 15 seconds Try again
Low refrigerant charge 8.7.2
Initiates but does not defrost Solenoid valve malfunction 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Defrost air switch (DAS) out of adjustment 8.9.13
Frequent defrost
Wet load Normal
Does not terminate or Defrost air switch (DAS) out of adjustment 8.9.13
cycles on defrost DTT malfunction 8.10.7
Hot Load Allow time to pull
down
Refrigerated Compartment
Defective or insufficient refrigerated compartment insula- Correct
tion or air leak
9–5 62-11637
9.3.9 Abnormal Pressure Cooling
Condenser coil dirty 8.9.2
Condenser fan/upper belt defective 8.6.3
High discharge pressure Discharge check valve restricted 8.9.10
Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles 8.7.2
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
SV4 leaking 8.9.6
Compressor valve(s) worn or broken 8.8.1
Low discharge pressure
Suction modulation valve malfunction 8.9.8
Filter-drier partially plugged 8.9.3
Expansion valve malfunction 9.3.13
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 9.3.12
Low suction pressure Excessive frost on evaporator coil 9.3.8
SV2 defective 8.9.6
Suction modulation valve malfunction 8.9.8
Liquid or suction line service valve partially closed Open
SV4 leaking 8.9.6
High suction pressure Compressor valves(s) worn or broken 8.8.1
Compressor gasket(s) defective 8.8.1
Suction and discharge pressures Compressor valves defective 8.8.1
tend to equalize when unit is oper-
Compressor gasket(s) defective 8.8.1
ating
9.3.10 Abnormal Pressure Heating
Solenoid valve malfunction 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
High discharge pressure Condenser fan/upper belt defective 8.6.3
Compressor valves defective 8.8.1
Low discharge pressure SV1 leaking 8.9.5
Low suction pressure
SV1 leaking 8.9.5
62-11637 9–6
9.3.11 Abnormal Noise
Loose mounting bolts Tighten
Worn bearings 8.8.1
Compressor Worn or broken valves 8.8.1
Liquid slugging 9.3.13
Insufficient oil 8.8.5
Condenser fan 8.6.3
Condenser or evaporator fan Evaporator fan 8.6.5
Fan shaft 8.6.6
Alternator/Water pump belt Alternator belt loose/broken 8.5.15
9.3.12 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow
Frost on coil 8.9.13
Evaporator coil blocked
Dirty coil 8.9.1
Upper belt loose or broken 8.6.2
No or partial evaporator air flow Evaporator fan loose or defective 8.6.5
Evaporator air flow blocked Check
9.3.13 Expansion Valve (EVXV) Malfunction
EVOT defective 8.10.7
Coil not seated properly on valve 8.9.12
EVXV not controlling correctly EVOP defective Check
EVXV inlet screen plugged Check/Replace
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at valve or Check/Repair
SVM
9.3.14 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) Malfunction
Coil not seated properly Check
Coil defective 8.9.8
CSP defective 8.9.12
CSMV not controlling correctly
CST defective 8.10.7
Damaged or corroded electrical connections at valve or Check/Repair
SVM
9.3.15 Solenoid Valve Malfunction
No power to valve Check alarms
Damaged or corroded electrical connections Check/Repair
Valve does not function properly Coil defective or improperly assembled 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Valve improperly assembled 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Foreign material in valve or valve worn 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
Valve closes but refrigerant con- Foreign material in valve or valve worn 8.9.5 / 8.9.6
tinues to flow
9–7 62-11637
SECTION 10 - WIRING
10.1 HARNESS CONNECTOR WIRING .............................................. 10–1

10.2 SPLICE POINTS ............................................................ 10–5
10.3 WIRING SCHEMATIC ........................................................ 10–5
62-11637
SECTION 10
WIRING
10.1 HARNESS CONNECTOR WIRING
NOTE
All illustrations provided in this Section are looking at the connector connection end (with the wires in
the back).
PCM ï WHITE 1MM ï BLACK
12 1 3 1
35 24 8 6
Component Terminal
PCMï19 1
Component Terminal
SPï1 2
SPï8 3 (14)
1SVMï1 3
SATPWRïB 6
SPï4 4
LBïB 7
PCMï32 6
3MMï34 8
1SVMï6 8
3MMï23 9
Unused terminals: 5 & 7
PCMï35 13 (35)
SPï8 14 (3)
SPï5 15
3MMï18 16
3MMï17 17
2SVMï11 18
1MMï1 19
FLSïA 22
3MMï15 23
AFASïA (F6ïA) 24
3MMï13 26
3MMï14 27
3MMï28 28
2MMï12 29
2MMï23 30
2MMï29 31
1MMï6 32
SPï6 34
PCMï13 35 (13)
Unused terminals: 1, 2,4,5,10,11,12,20,21,25
10–1 62-11637
2MM ï BLACK 3MM ï GRAY
12 1 12 1
35 24 35 24
Component Terminal Component Terminal

AATïA 1 SV1ïA (+) 1
AATïB 2 SV2ïA (+) 2
RATïA 3 SV4ïA (+) 3
RATïB 4 UL1ïA (+) 6
SATïA 5 LBïH 7
SATïB 6 UL2ïA (+) 8
EVOTïA 7 ENCUï44 9
CDTïA 8 FPï+ 10
CSPï3 9 CLHïA (+) 11
CDPï3 10 SSïA 12
DTTïB 11 PCMï26 13
PCMï29 12 PCMï27 14
FLSïC 13 PCMï23 15
REMïE 14 SPï5 16
IATïA (If equipped) PCMï17 17
15
REMïH (If Not) PCMï16 18
CSTïA 16 DASï+ 19
EVOPï3 17 PCMï9 23
EVOTïB 18 PCMï28 28
CDTïB 19 DAS (negative) 29
CSPï1 20 PCMï8 34
CDPï1 21 Unused terminals:
DTTïA 22 4,5,20,21,22,24,25,26,27,30,31,32,33 & 35
PCMï30 23
FLSïB 24
REMïF 25
IATïB (If equipped)
26
REMïG (If Not)
CSTïB 27
EVOPï1 28
PCMï31 29
SPï7 30
SPï9 35
Unused terminals: 31, 32, 33 & 34
62-11637 10–2
1SVM ï BLACK 2SVM ï BLUE
3 1 12 1
8 6 35 24
Component Terminal
Component Terminal
CSMVïA 2
1MMï3 1
CSMVïB 3
DMï2 2
CSMVïC 4
DMï1 3
CSMVïD 5
DMï6 4
EVXVïE 6
SPï1 5
EVXVïA 7
1MMï8 6
EVXVïB 8
SPï4 7
EVXVïC 9
DMï10 8
EVXVïD 10
Unused terminals: None
PCMï18 11
Units With DS Connector = DSïA
14
Units Without DS Connector = REMïA
Units With DS Connector = REMïA
15
Units Without DS Connector = REMïC
SPï6 22
Units With DS Connector = DSïB
25
Units Without DS Connector = REBïB
Units With DS Connector = REMïB
26
Units Without DS Connector = REMïD
Unused terminals: 1,12,13,16 to 21,23,24
& 27 to 35 Units With DS Connector; 14 & 25
10–3 62-11637
DM ï BLACK ENCU
1 23
5 1
14 10
Component Terminal
1SVMï3 1
1SVMï2 2
SATCOMïB 3
1SVMï4 6 22 44
J1ïA 7
SATCOMïC 8
1SVMï8 10
SATCOMïA 12
Unused terminals: 4,5,9,11,13,14 Component Terminal
ENCTïB 1
ENSSNï2 2
ENCTïA 6
RPSï3 7
ENOPSïA 15
ENOPSïB 18
ENCU GND A 19
ENSSNï1 20
SM 21
SPï6 22
SPï1 23
SPï4 24
SPï27 (If equipped with MAP)
27
RPSï2 (If not)
MAPï3 (If equipped with
MAP) 28
SPï28 (If equipped with MAP)
29
RPSï1 (If not)
FSAï1 36
FSAï2 41
ENSSNï3 43
3MMï9 44
Unused Terminals:
3ï5,8ï14,16,17,25,26,30ï35,37ï40,42
62-11637 10–4
10.2 SPLICE POINTS
REM Splice Point No. Component

1MMï2
SPï1
K F (CAN high)
1SVMï5
ENCUï23
SATPWRïA
UL1ï(negative)
SPï2 UL2ï(negative)
(Ground) FPï(negative)
GND1ïRING1*
LBïG
A E AFASïB (negative)
Harness Connector Shown CLHï B (negative)
GND1ïRING1*
UNITS WITH DS CONNECTOR SPï3 SV1ïB (negative)
From Terminal To (Ground) SV2ïB (negative)
(Component)
SV4ïB (negative)
2SVMï15 A REMS1
FH1ïB (FH to FHTS to FH1ïA)
2SVMï26 B REMS1
FH2ïB (FH to FHTS to FH2ïA)
2MMï14 E REMSN1
1MMï4
2MMï25 F REMSN1 SPï4 1SVMï7
2MMï15 H REMSN2 (CAN low)
2MMï26 G REMSN2 ENCUï24
Unused Terminals: C,D,J, K 3MM16
SPï5 HPSïB
UNITS WITHOUT DS CONNECTOR (Power to K1)
PCM15
From Terminal To
(Component) 2SVMï22
SPï6
2SVMï14 A DS (Power from ENCUï22
“RR”) PCMï34
2SVMï25 B DS
2SVMï15 C REMS1 CDPï2
2SVMï26 D REMS1 SPï7 EVOPï2
2MMï14 E REMSN1 (+ 5V power) CSPï2
2MMï25 F REMSN1 2MMï30
Unused Terminals: G,H,J, K FH1ïA (FHTS to FH to FH1ïB)
SPï8 FH2ïA (FHTS to FH to FH2ïB)
(Power from
FHR) PCMï3
PCMï14
2MMï35
SPï9
(Power from HPSïA
SROS) J1ïB
ENCUï27
SPï27** MAPï1
(Sensor ground)
RPSï2
ENCUï29
SPï28** MAPï2
(Sensor power)
RPSï1
* This wire runs from the splice point to the bat-

tery ground wire.
** If equipped with MAP sensor only.
10.3 WIRING SCHEMATIC

The wiring schematic is provided on the following page.
10–5 62-11637
INDEX
A Display 3–1
Display Module 8–5
Advanced User 3–15
Display Module (DM) 8–45
Air Cleaner 8–11
Display Module Keys 2–13
Air Flow 4–14
Display Screens 3–2
Alternator 2–6, 8–45
Door Latch Maintenance and Replacement 8–5
Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) 2–9
Downloading Data Files 5–10
AutoFresh Air Exchange 2–9, 4–8
AutoFresh Fresh Air Exchange 8–4
E
C Electric Fuel Pump 2–14
Electric Fuel Pump Screen 8–8
Cargo Protect Mode 4–14
Electrical System Components 8–44
Caution Statements 1–2
Engine 2–5
Changing Setpoint 3–8
Engine Air System 2–5
Clutch 8–19
Engine and Engine Related Systems Service 8–6
Component Test Mode 5–6
Engine and Temp Control, Introduction 4–1
Compressor 2–6
Engine Control 4–1
Compressor and Unloader Service 8–28
Engine Control System 8–12
Compressor Oil Level 8–32
Engine Controls 2–5
Compressor Suction Mod Valve (CSMV) 2–10, 8–39
Engine Oil And Oil Filter 8–10
Compressor Switches, Transducers and Sensors 2–8
Engine Preheater 8–11
Condenser Coil 2–9, 8–35
Engine Speed Overrides 4–14
Condenser Fan 8–18
Engine Start-Up Sequence 4–1
Condenser Pressure Control Solenoid Valve (SV1) 8–37
Evacuation and Dehydration 8–26
Condensing Section 2–5
Evaporator Coil 2–9, 8–34
Configuration Settings 5–4
Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV) 2–9, 8–40
Connecting Computer and Control System 5–14
Evaporator Fan 8–19
Continuous Operation 3–10, 4–7
Evaporator Section 2–9
Control System Information 3–11
Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sensors 2–10
Cooling 4–3
External Surface Service 8–4
Cooling System 8–12
Crankcase Breather 8–15
F
CSMV Control Overrides 4–16
Cylinder Head and Valve Plate Service 8–29 Fanshaft 8–20
Filter-Drier 2–9, 8–36
D Fuel Heater 2–14, 8–10
Fuel Level Sensor 2–14
Data Downloading 3–11
Fuel Level Sensor (FLS) 8–9
Data Recording 3–11
Fuel System 8–6
Data Transfer USB Memory Device 5–8
Functional Parameters 3–19
Data, Component Resistance & Current Draw 2–16
Functional Parameters Via Display Mounted Keys 5–16
Data, Compressor 2–15
Data, Electrical 2–16
G
Data, Engine 2–15
Data, Refrigeration System 2–16 Gearbox 8–20
DataLink Data Recorder Power-Up 3–11 General Equipment Description 2–1
DataLink Data recorder Via TRU-Tech 5–16 Grille Insert Removal 8–4
Defrost 4–4, 4–9
Defrost Air Switch 8–43
Defrost Initiation And Start 4–9
Index–1 62-11637
H Power Train Service 8–15
Preprogrammed Software Overrides 4–14
Heat Exchanger 2–9
Pre-Replacement Steps 5–15
Heating 4–3
Pressure Transducers 8–43
High Ambient Defrost Operation 4–10
Pre-Trip Inspection 8–2
High Ambient Defrost Termination Sequence 4–10
Priming the Fuel System 8–7
High Pressure Switch 8–42
ProductShield 4–12
Pull Down/Pull-Up 4–3
I
Inactive Alarms 5–3 R
Installing Software 5–11
Rack Position Sensor (RPS) Calibration 8–12
Interface Methods 5–1
Receiver 2–9
Introduction 2–1
Refrigerant System Component Service 8–34
Refrigerant System Service 8–21
L Refrigerant System Service Connections 8–21
Language Selection 3–14 Refrigeration Circuit During Cooling 2–17
Leak Checking 8–24 Remote Panel 2–14, 3–26
Light Bar 2–13, 8–46 Remote Switches 2–13
Liquid Line (SV2)/Hot Gas (SV4) Solenoid Valves 8–38 Remote Temperature Sensor 2–15
Lower Belt 8–16 Remote Temperature Sensors 2–14
Removal and Replacement of Compressor 8–28
M Repair or Replacement Determination 8–28
Replacing Check Valve 8–42
Main Microprocessor Module (MM) 8–44
Replacing Receiver Sight Glass Or Fusible Plug 8–36
Main Microprocessor Module Replacement 5–15
Re-Start Parameters 4–6
Main Microprocessor Replacement & Setup 5–14
Main Microprocessor Setup 5–15
Manual Defrost 3–13
S
Mechanical Fuel Pump Screen 8–7 Safety Decals 1–6
MessageCenter Messages 6–1 Safety Devices 2–16
Modes of Operation 4–3 Safety Precautions 1–1
Scheduled Maintenance 8–1
N Sensor Checkout 8–46
Sequence of Operation - Electrical 4–1
Normal Defrost Termination 4–9
Service Mode 5–7
Normal Defrost Termination Sequence 4–9
Servicing the Refrigerant Charge 8–21
Notice Statements 1–2
Sleep Mode 3–23
Solenoid Valves 2–9
O
Specific Warning, Caution, and Notice Statements 1–2
Oil Pump and Bearing Head 8–31 Spin-On Fuel Filter Replacement 8–8
OPTION - DataTrak 3–25 Starting 3–3
Options 2–13 Start-Stop Configuration 4–5
Options, Light Bar 2–13 Start-Stop Operating Sequence 4–7
Options, Remote Switches 2–13 Start-Stop Operation 3–9
Options, Remote Temperature Sensor 2–15 Stepper Test Harness 8–39
Overrides 4–4 Stepper Valve Module (SVM) 8–45
Stop Parameters 4–5
P Stopping Unit 3–25
PC Mode 5–9 Suction Side Fuel Filter Replacement 8–8
Perishable and Frozen Setpoint Ranges 4–5 Surround Removal 8–5
Power Train 2–6 System Final Checkout 5–17
62-11637 Index–2
T Troubleshooting, Unit Runs But Insufficient Cooling 9–4
Troubleshooting, Unit Will Not Cool 9–4
Technician Hour Meters 5–2
Troubleshooting, Unit Will Not Heat 9–5
Technician Mode 5–1
Troubleshooting, Unit Will Not Stop Heating 9–5
Temperature Control 4–5
Troubleshooting, Unit Will Not Terminate Cooling 9–5
Temperature Determination 4–5
TRU-Tech 5–13
Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2 4–10
TRU-Tech & TRU-View 5–13
Transferring Configuration Files 5–12
TRU–View 5–13
Transition To High Speed 4–2
Troubleshooting, Abnormal Noise 9–7
U
Troubleshooting, Abnormal Pressure Cooling 9–6
Troubleshooting, Abnormal Pressure Heating 9–6 UltraFreeze Temperature Control 4–4
Troubleshooting, Alternator 9–3 UltraFresh Temperature Control 4–4
Troubleshooting, Compressor Suction Modulation Valve Unit Data 3–16
(CSMV) Malfunction 9–7 Unloader Control Overrides 4–15
Troubleshooting, Defrost Cycle Malfunction 9–5 Unloaders 2–6, 8–33
Troubleshooting, Engine 9–1 Upper Belt Replacement 8–18
Troubleshooting, Engine Starts Then Stops 9–2 USB Memory Devices 5–8
Troubleshooting, Engine Will Not Shut Off 9–2 User Selected Override Operation 4–10
Troubleshooting, Engine Will Not Start 9–1
Troubleshooting, Exp Valve (EVXV) Malfunction 9–7 V
Troubleshooting, Malfunction Engine Starting Circuit 9–2
View Active Alarms 3–18
Troubleshooting, Misc Engine Troubleshooting 9–3
View Hour Meters 3–19
Troubleshooting, Refrig / Temp Control 9–4
Troubleshooting, Restricted Evaporator Air Flow 9–7
W
Troubleshooting, Solenoid Valve Malfunction 9–7
Troubleshooting, Starter Motor Malfunction 9–2 Warning Statements 1–2
Troubleshooting, System Will Not Pump Down 9–4 Water Pump/Alternator Belt 8–13
Troubleshooting, Unit Operates Too Long In Cooling 9–4
Index–3 62-11637
North America Central America
Carrier Transicold and Mexico
700 Olympic Drive Ejercito Nacional 253−A Piso 5700
Athens, GA 30601 USA Colonia Anahuac
Tel: 1-706-357-7223 11320 Mexico, D.F.
Fax: 1-706-355-5435 Tel: 55315010
Fax: 55315010 ext. 1005
Carrier Transicold Division,

A member of the United Technologies Corporation. Carrier Corporation
Stock symbol UTX. P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, NY 13221 USA
www.carrier.transicold.com

Operation & Service Manual: Trailer & Rail Refrigeration

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation & Service Manual: Trailer & Rail Refrigeration

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operation & Service Manual: Trailer & Rail Refrigeration

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Trailer & Rail Refrigeration

OPERATION & SERVICE MANUAL

X4 7300 & X4 7500

X4 7300 & X4 7500

© Carrier Corporation, 2014 Printed in U. S. A. September 2014

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1–1

Figure 2.1 Front View - Refrigeration System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–2

Table 2–1 Model Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...................................................... 1–1

The following statements are specifically applicable to

Electronic modules MUST be handled

2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2–1

Table 2–2 Additional Support Manuals

1. Coolant Bottle 19. Engine Oil Fill & Dipstick

MOUNT DTT AS SHOWN

1. Evaporator Air Nozzle 9. Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV)

! CAUTION Figure 2.4 Power Train

The alternator converts mechanical and magnetic Upper Belt

b. Voltage Regulator Operation Unidrive

The Integral regulator is an all-electronic, transistorized

Solenoid Valve Stem

Cylinder Suction Valve

Cylinder Suction Valve

c. Loaded Operation b. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP)

2.5 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND COM-

USB Interface Port Soft Keys MessageCenter START/RUN-OFF Switch

e. Engine Control Unit (ENCU) Message Center

2.8 COMPRESSOR DATA

2.10 COMPONENT RESISTANCE & CURRENT DRAW

Component Ohms Amps

2.11 SAFETY DEVICES

Unsafe Conditions Safety Device Device Setting

N/C CSP CST DRAIN PAN

Figure 2.11 Refrigeration Circuit - Heat and Defrost

CSMV EVOT EVOP

N/C CSP CST DRAIN PAN

3.1 DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3–1

USB Interface Port Soft Keys MessageCenter START/RUN-OFF Switch

LCD DISPLAY SCREENS

5 Viewing Menu Soft Key

TYPICAL MENU SCREEN

5. Operator Message Panel

6. Soft Key Descriptions

7. Highlight - White letters on black background

8. BACK key - Used to return to previous screen

9. EXIT key - Used to return to the default screen

START/STOP DIESEL COOL

BOX TEMPERATURE F SETPOINT F

5. Press the EXIT soft key to return to the default display.

DEFROST Viewing Menu Soft Key

Test 1 - Display Test:

3.9 DATA RECORDER

d. User Area Data

3.9.3 Data Downloading

3.9.4 DataLink Data Recorder Power-Up

EXIT Time & Date EXIT

DEFROST Viewing Menu Soft Key

2. Press the LANGUAGE soft key to display the language screen.